- 

A.HA TEUR AUUS EMEMtS 

BY PS.OF2SSOB LOKEZSTTO. 

XXC-UD2CQ ALMOST EVEEY EIND OP FLAY AND SPOET SUITABLE 

EOS PAETIES AND PAELOE EECEEATIONS, GIVING FUEL 

DIEECTIONS HOW TO GET UP 

SHADOW PANTOMIMES, GALLANTY SHOWS, 
SJIOJIT COMIC PLAYS, 

Which aee ael Fully Illusteated with Capital Pictuees ; also 
Showing how to do all einds of 

CONJUROR'S* AND MAGICIANS TEICKS, 

WITH ILLUSTEATIVE ENGEAVINGS. 

HUNDREDS OF CONUNDRUMS, PUZZLES, EIDDLES, 
AND INGENIOUS PROBLEMS. 

The Chineese "Wizaed's way of woeeing Wondeeful Feats, 
Magic and Puzzles, 

To which is added a full description of the elegant and 
fashionable entertainment of 

r | * ACTING CHARADES, 

S rf» AND A CHOICE SELECTION OF 



TABLEAU VIVANTS, oe LIVING Pit 



New Yoee : 
HURST & CO., PUBLISHERS 

122 Nassau Steeet. 




Copyright, 1373, by Hussx & Co. 



PREFACE 



:HE LOVE of amusement is innate in human nature; 
and the part of wisdom is to provide the kinds of 
amusement that will entertain without injuring both the body 
and mind of the young. We have in this book fully carried out 
this idea. We give only such amusements as will interest the 
-heads of families as well as the young scions. Amusements 
that will produce the heartiest laughter, the greatest wonder, 
-and at the same time are blended with no little instruction. 
•Any smart young person. who sees a. theatrical or magical per- 
formance feels as if h6 or she would like to do it themselves. 
They try it, and find with proper directions they can do as 
well — or nearly as well — as the persons who make a living by 
such arts and shows. They apply themselves to that particular 
branch for which they show a natural aptitude. They practieo 
or play — not for money, but for the love of it; and hence ara 
denominated Amateurs. — It is for these -folks that this book is 
compiled. Whether it shows you how to enact these strange 
weird pictures called Shadow Pantomimes • the pleasing and 
ingenious Acting Charades; the wonderful feats of sleight-of- 
hand and Magic, or gives you innumerable Conundrums, 



IV. PBEFACE. 

Riddles, Puzzles, and Paradoses to give out and solve; the 
editor bears in mind that you are Amateurs and not Profes. 
sionals. Consequently everything is made as plain as A. B. C. 
You are taught not only what to do, but exactly how to go about 
doing it. You are taught to arrange drapery and dresses; to fix 
simple scenery, and to adjust all the little machinery meant to 
produce illusions of different kinds. When acting as a 
Conjuror or Magician you are taught -what to do with your 
tongue to keep people's attention while you mystify them by 
your rapid passes and transformations. In fact, a lot of Ama- 
teurs -will find this book more conducive to real amusement, 
affording them all greater chance to show off their special gifts 
or acquirements than any similar book ever published. It in- 
cludes all the best things in nearly all Amusement books, and 
omits all dull, -weak, old-fashioned tnings. It is adapted pre- 
cisely to the requirements of the fashionable young folks of 
the present day. 




CONTENTS. 



Shadow Pantomimes « 7 

Ghosts, and How to Raise them 32 

The Gallanty Show 40 

Parlor Theatricals 46 

Charades in Action 73 

Tableaux Yivants 92 

Eiddles and Conundrums 121 

Charades , 133 

Enigmas „ 141 

Puzzles, Acrostics and Rebuses 153 

Anagrams and Transpositions 158 

Problems 160 

Answers to Riddles , 166 

Answers to Charades, 172 

Answers to Enigmas , 173 

Answer* to Pussies ........ * ', .. * j a < i . i, i ...;.. i .... .174 



Answers to Anagrams and Transpositions 175 

Magic and Conjuring..... 177 

Palmistry and Passes 180 

Tricks with and without Collusion 189 

Practice .". .J .". . . ."".'. ::.;..."...* 197 

Tricks by Magnetism, Galvanism and Electricity 205 

On the Continuity of Tricks 214 

Friendly Suggestions 222 

Experimental Magic 231 

Art of making Fireworks 282 

Tricks and Diversions with Cards 289 

Ventriloquism 360 

Magic Whistle. .375 




SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 



GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 

THE place best .adapted for these performances is where two 
apartments are connected by folding doors, for when the 
doors are thrown back the screen has simply to be fitted to 
the opening; however, as this advantage is not always avail- 
able, a little management is required to prevent the light from 
showing over, and at the sides of the screen. This can be eas- 
ily done by stretching a line across the room, close to the ceil- 
ing, and hanging thereon carpets, or any other pieces of opaque 
drapery. 

The screen is a square of muslin or calico, strained on a com- 
mon wooden frame by means of tacks. The cloth must be 
drawn perfectly tight and smooth, as the least wrinkle or bag- 
ging will quite spoil the effect of the representation. To get it 
straight the best way is to begin by fastening the corners, and 
then putting a tack in the centre of each of the four sides; if it 
is done in any other manner it will be certain to drag. The 
material for the screen may either be a sheet, which having 
been immersed in water, is wrung out and tacked on the frame, 
or a few yards of the cheapest calico got for the purpose. The 
former is open to many objections. Ladies in general object to 
have their house-linen torn and ironmoulded by nails. Besides 
which there is the trouble and delay caused by pxitting it on 
the frame to which it could not be properly attached before the 
sheet would dry. On the other hand, by having the screen en 
permanence these drawbacks are obviated, and the calico would cost 
considerable less than the sheet. In preparing a permanent 
screen, after it has been strained, the following method will be 
found to answer best. To coat the calico with linseed oil. laid 
on with a painting brush until it is semi-transparent; or should 



SHADOW PANTOMIMES, 



it be desired to be very white, virgin wax dissolved in spirits 
of turpentine may be used. 




The preceding diigram will give .1 very clear idea of the 
screen as it stands dividing the two apartments. 

The Light: —This is managed by having a small tin cup made 
about the size of a breakfast cup, in the bottom of the insiile of 
which a piece of twisted wire should be soldered, to hold some 
cotton to serve as a wide; round this there is to he put some 
tallow, that cut from cnndles is best, my other hind of waste 
fat is often impregnated with salt, which causes the wick to spit 
and splutter. The fat should be pressed down close all rouri 1 
leaving about a quarter of an inch orsaof the cotton sticking 
up. On lighting this it will burn on, melting the tallow, un- 
til it becomes a sea of almost boiling grease. The cup should 
be placed in an earthenware pan or bowl, which latter ought to 



GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 



be filled to the top with sand, on or in which the cup should 
be placed (see fig. 2). This is a very necessary precaution, as 
should the lamp by any chance be overturned, the hot grease 




would be absorbed by the sand, and thereby save the carpet 
and the floor, besides obviating the risk of even more serious 
results. 

The Performance: — Having arranged all these preliminaries, 
viz., the screen tightly strained and fitted to its place, and the 
lamp prepared and lighted, the pantomime may commence. 
The light being laid on the floor about four or five feet from the 
centre of the screen, the auditorium is of course left in com* 
plete darkness, as otherwise the shadows thrown by the actors 
on the screen would not be evident. 

Should any lady or gentleman be so obliging as to play a 
few lively airs on the piano, as an overture, it will add greatly 
to the effect. If this be the case, the director will tap twice on 
the floor, as a signal for the mxsic to begin, and when the per- 
formance is about to commence he should ring a hand-bell. Of 
course if there be no music he will merely do the latter. 

All those not actually engaged in the performance, but are 
behind the screen waiting to come on, must be particular to 
keep to the back of the light; or the shadow will be apparent 
when its presence would be undesirable. In coming on, each 
performer should jump sideways over the light. This in front 
will have the appearance of his having dropped from the ceiling, 
and when he has finished his part and wishes to make his exit 
he does so backward, when it will appear to the audience as if he 
had gone up through the ceiling. Care must be taken to invar- 



10 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

iably jump over the light sideways, steadily and neatly, without 
hurry or heedlessness, and without knocking against the light. 
In going through the business of the pantomime the actors must 
remember that it is essential to do it in profile, as their shadows 
should have the effect in front of silhouettes, or figures cut out 
in black paper. 

In using chairs or tables they should be placed as close as 
possible to the screen, without causing the person sitting on or 
working in front of them to touch the screen. 

When ladies take part in a pantomime, the stage manager 
should be particular in making all come on from the sides. 
There must be no jumping over the light for ladies young or old, 
so that no accident from a dress catching fire can possibly take 
place. 

Actors must remember that the nearer they stand to the light 
and the further from the screen, the larger they will appear to 
those in front. 



shadow buff; or, who's who? 

THE comic extravaganza of -'Shadow Buff, or, Who's Who ?" 
is one in which all little ladies and gentlemen, from 
four to fourteen, can take a part, to the great delight of their 
friends, and to their own satisfaction. The game is played as 
follows : 

There are cut into slips as many pieces of paper as there are 
players engaged (say ten), and on one of them is written the 
word "guesser." The papers are then put into a hat or bag, 
and shaken up. Each person draws one, and the drawer of the 
" guesser " must take his or her place on the audience side of 
the screen, while the others go behind, and as each of their 
shadows come in view, either by jumping over the light or 
coming on from the side, the "guesser" is to endeavor to guess 
their names, they remaining a sufficient time to allow him to 
make three guesses. Should he fail to guess correctly, the sha- 
dow disappears, and is succeeded by another. If the ladies put 
on different hats or bonnets from those they are in the habit 
of wearing, or exchange with one another; or, if the gentlemen 
exchange hats or coats, etc., or ruffle up their hair, or put some- 
thing under their coats at the back, or do anything their ingen- 
uity may suggest to alter their appearance, the poor " guesser " 
will be in a pitiable state of mystification. Should he, however, 
succeed in discovering them through the incognito, the person 
so detected becomes " guesser " and his predecessor goes behind 
to make one of the shadows, and so on, as in the game of Blind- 
a»aa's B.aS. „ . -• .,,..-,_ „ • 



BHADOTv PAKTOM1MES, • 11 

THE DENTIST OR TOOTH-DRAWING 
EXTRAORDINARY. 

Dkamatis Pekson.e, 
Doctor, Patient. 

John. | Pobtek. 

THE properties required for this laughable sketch are of the 
very easiest to procure. The lancet (fig. 1) and the forceps 
(fig. 2) can be made of two pieces of lath, or of stiff pasteboard; 
the tooth (fig. 3)can be cut out of a card. All three should be of 
exaggerated dimensions. This piece is more properly an ex- 
travaganza than a pantomime, but at the same time it partakes 
of the specialties of both, and is played as follows: — 

The patient jumps over the light, and expresses in pantomime, 
that is by putting his hands to his jaws, stamping on the floor, 
and making other gestures indicative of pain, that he is suffer- 
ing from a dreadful toothache. After a minute or so he calls out, 
"Doctor! oh, for mercy's sake, doctor! " The doctor appears, by 
jumping over the light, and, taking the sufferer by the chin and 
nose, wrenches open his mouth and looks into it. He shakes 
his head, ties up the patient's jaw with a handkerchief, and makes 
an attempt to give him some smart taps on the top of the head. 

After that the doctor jumps back over the light, leaving the 
patient to moan, groan, and to contort himself, into the most ri- 
diculous attitudes, until the doctor again jumps over the light, 
this time with a chair. He takes hold of the patient and bangs 
him down into the chair; he then unties the handkerchief with 
which he had bound up the patient's jaw, and goes through any 
kind of rough comic examination that tact and fun may suggest, 
always bearing in mind to have "method in his madness." As 
he examines the patient's mouth he says, "Oh! ah! a dreadful 
case, my son, an awful bad tooth ; one of your grinders, a regu- 
lar double-barrelled, doubled-pronged molar; no cure for it, 



Fig. 1, 
none whatever, unless it might be twenty bottles, ah! jes, twen- 
ty bottles of my wonderful and extraordinary, I may say my as- 
tounding, jjay, marvellous remedy, ".Dioppo-retijum . Bezff-vardi- 



12 



SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 



cum,' or my most astonishing 'cure all.' Yes, that will do it. 
But it must come out, there's no mistake about it; so here* 
John, fetch my lancet number one." Here John, the assistant, 
a tall, thin person, ff there should be one in the company, junipa 
over the light, and presents the doctor with the lancet ( see tig. 
1). The doctor then says, "Now, John, lay hold of his head 
while I lance his gums previous to the drawing." John accord- 
ingly does so in as comic a manner as he can. The doctor then 
takes off his coat, and rolling up his shirt sleeves, gives the lan- 
cet two or three turns like a scimitar. He then feels the e J; 




shakes his head, and wets it on the palm of his hand, making 
grotesque gestures all the time. Then, with the assistance of 
John, who holds back the patient's head, he opens the mouth 
of the latter and inserts the lancet therein, appearing to cut and 
lance the gums. The patient wriggles and moves his legs in 
apparent pain, but the sturdy John holds his head as if it were 
in a vise. The doctor next calls for his forceps, or the new at- 
mospheric extractors. John says "Yes sir," jumps over the light, 
and returns with a gigantic pair of forceps (see fig. 2); they may 
be about three feet long. The doctor takes them, and when in- 



Fig. 2. 
serting them into the patient's mouth he stands off at arm's 
length. John, having concealed under his dress a large tOoth, 
manages, during the fun and struggle while the tooth is sup- 
posed to be in course of extraction, and while he is holding the 



BHADOW PANTOMIMES. 13 

head, to fasten by a loop ll-c tooth to (he rdpe of the pinorrp. 
After a good deal of twisting about the tooth appears to come 




out with a jerlc. The patient howls, jumps up. waves the hand- 
kerchief over his head, knocks the doctor down, and jumps back 
over the light. The doctor seizes John by the noso with his 
forceps. The noso, of course, is a false one, what is called at 
fairs " a jolly nose." The doctor is frightened at what he has 
done, and, jumping over the lamp, makes his exit. John picks 
up his nose, rubs it, seizes the chair, and jumps over the light. 

AMPUTATION LIKE WINKING; OK, 
THE MARVELLOUS REVIVER. 

As performed by Dr. Drench and his Men in the Moor. 

Dramatis Pep.sox.ze 

The Doctor. The Patient. 

John. I The Porter. 

THIS piece also pnrtakes of the burlesque and the pantomime. 
In its representation a few simple properties are required, viz., 
a light wooden table, a profile arm, the latter in two pieces, with 




a peg at the junction of the joints, so that the arm can oe made 
to move at the elbow, a profile saw, a knife, a bottle, a gallon 
pot, and a tobacco jar. All these, with the exception of the 
table, can be cut out of stiff pasteboard. 



14 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

In this entertainment the frame of the screen should have a 
piece of stiff brown paper fastened at each corner at the back, 
so as to give the screen the appearance of a circle or moon. 

In enacting this scene, the actor who personates the patient 
must have one of his arms (the right will be the best) bandaged 
to his side, so that no involuntary movement may betray it. 

Then to his shoulder will be attached a pasteboard arm. When 
he jumps over the light lie should pace once or twice backward 
and forward, across and across, close to the screen, being very 
careful not to touch it, and give in pantomime action evidences 
of great pain ; the expression of which should be indicated in 
broad caricature. Then the doctor's man, John, jumps over 
the light with a chair, and by force seats the patient in it, to 
whom he says, "Patience, my dear sir; my master the great doe- 
tor Drench, will be here directly." The doctor now jumps over 
the light, and examines the patient very roughly, and says, 
"Dear me, John, what's all this ? a fracture, a flaw. Ah ! a bro- 
ken, arm, as I live. "Dear! dear! dear! poor fellow, his right arm 
too." He examines it, taking hold of the false arm, and moving 
it up and down, shakes it; he then exclaims, "Worse and worse, 
a compound fracture; I plainly see I must use the saw. Now 
John, look sharp, quick; the table; and fetch the porter to help 
you to hold down the patient." John says, "Yes, sir," and 
jumps over the light, returning instantly with the porter, then 
carrying the table between them. The table should be placed 
as near as possible to the light at the back, and John and the 
porter lay hold each at one end and jump regularly and togeth- 
er over the light, to give the proper effect. The table should be 
a veiy small light one. When the table has been carried over, 
the doctor still pvoceeds with his orders and directions, inter- 
mingled with observations and questions to the patient such as 
"Dear me, my man, hew do you feel now ? " Here the patient 
groans, and throws up his legs as if in agony. Then the doctor 
takes him by the leg and says, "Ah! oh! my good fellow, you 
have had some money left you lately." Hereupon the patient 
shakes his head, and says " No such luck!" Then the doctor 
holding up the patient's leg says "What do you mean 
by no such luck? when here a good leg-I-see," He turns round 
to John and says, "Not bo bad that, John, eh? But to business. 
Now John, bring me the saw, my favorite hackemoffquick, and 
my large knife, the two-foot ham carver; and you, porter, go 
for the chlorol'orum-noseiti'erum-painstopperum," John and 
the porter jump over the light, and as quickly return, one with 
a profile boUle, and the other with a saw and knife; the doctor 
meanwhile keeping up the attention of the audience by his bye- 
play, and the patient assisting in the delusion by groaning, 
• moaning, and kicking up his heels. The saw, the knife, and 
the battle are placed ©n the-table, whieh latter is 'pushed o ge*4 



AMPtrf atio'n like winking. 15 

deal to one side, and the patient is brought as much as possible 
to the centre. Then the doctor commences opei'ations by taking 
the knite and putting it between his teeth to hold it. He takes 
off his coat, and tucks up his shirt sleeves. John and the por- 
ter likewise tuck up their shirt sleeves and take their places, 
one behind the patient to hold his head, the other at his side to 
hold his arm. There is then a good deal of by-play on the 
part of the doctor; he moves the patient's arm up and down, 
then he examines the edge of the saw by passing his fingers 
along the teeth; next he kneels on the right knee and strops 
the knife on his left boot: rises, and calls for a napkin, which 
the porter takes from a table and hands to him. Then he calls 
for the chloroforum-nosesnifferum-painstopperum. This the por- 
ter also hands to him, and he appears to pour some of its con- 
tents on the napkin, which he passes backwards and forwards 
under the patient's nose. The latter seems to doze off quietly 
to sleep, and his head falls back, when the final operation of 
taking off the arm takes place. This is done by the assistant 
holding up the profile arm, and the doctor cuts round it with 
the knife, then taking the saw, he saws through the bone. 
While this is being done, the doctor, or any one else behind the 
screen that can do it, makes a noise with his mouth like the 
sawing of wood. If there should not be anyone who can im- 
itate that sound, there may be a person placed behind the light 
■with a real saw and a piece of wood. The doctor next takes off 
the arm and holds it up in triumph, exclaiming, " Behold and 
see the arm is off; this is the triumph of learning, of science, 
and of skill. Now, John, go down even into my sanctum sancto- 
rum for a pot of my reviverumlikewinkin, my instantaneous 




life restored." John jumps over the light. The doctor still 
continues talking. "This instantaneous composition is the great- 
est invention of the age; it is made from the real Egyptian 
mummy dust, and was invented by a mummer, who, having be- 
come a mummy, cast about in his mind how he might be en- 
abled to return to his original calling; and t after studying for 
fcriteett'thwusaiiii' yesnche ■■•at tefigtb eu««8«ded", and RickarcUbtf- 



16 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

came himself again. It is astonishing what it will do, and 
more wonderful still what it will not do. I will tell yon a story 
of it in connection with a pig's tail. Now don't move or 
yon will miss this tale of a pig. Farmer Oakstraws had a 
pig he called Porkibns, now Poridbus was called Porkibns 
because his name was Porkibns, and because he had not 
any other name. You see the geography of it? Well, Poridbus 
had a curly tail, as I said before. Oli ! I didn't say it before, 
didn't I ? Of course nol ; well even though I didn't, what then I 
The tail is always behind, isn't it? Well, then, when Porkibus 
was very young he was frightened by a cantankerous little dog, 
and he became curly tailed ever after. Now this curly tail was 
the cause of a sad accident. One day, jumping out of his sty 
and saying, in the pride of his heart, 'That's the style,' meaning, 
of course, that he was doing the thing stylishly, his tail caught 
on a hook just as he was in the act of hooking it, and off came his 
much valued curly appendage. Now, three applications of my 
invaluable reviver not only caused the tail to grow, literally to 
crop up, but every morning half an ounce of the best pig-tail 
was found growing to the end of it. There ! Now John, whero 
is the w-onderful ointment? And now for the patient's arm to 
practise my wonderful cure on it." A piece of rag is taken by 
the doctor, with which he makes believe to anoint the top of the 
arm and shoulder. The fastening at the side of the patient is 
loosened by the assistant, and he gradually works the arm out 
and waves it. aloft in triumph. The patient, doctor, assistant, 
and porter then perform a grotesque dance and exit over the 
light, the patient, with the chair, the saw, knife, bottle, pot and 
tobacco jar; and the two assistants each taking hold of one end 
of the table, in the same way in which they brought it on. 



JOCKO ; OR, THE MISCHIEVOUS 
MONKEY. 

DbAMATIS PEBSON2B 

The Monkey. I Nttrse. 

Feedebick Spaekle j Rose Doebs, (Old Dobbs' 



Old Dobbs daughter.) 

Sambo (a nigger.) , Jenny (a maid of all 

Fbank (Sparkle's servant.) | work.) 

THE properties required for this .piece include nothing 
that cannot be had readily enough in most houses. They 
are a cradle, a low rocking chair, and a basin of sawdust. A 
large spoon, ah eye-glass for Sparkle, with a whip and valise or 
carpet bag for Frank. A morning-gown, split up the back in 
two halves, and sevm loosely together, so that it will Dull apart 



THE MISCHIEVOUS MONKEY. 17 

readily, a chair a table, ( books on the latter), and a bell ; writ- 
ing paper, inkstand with two -quills in it, and a basket contain- 
ing a tablecloth; a decanter half-full of water (supposed to be 
wine) a plate, with some sawdust or sand (to pass for gruel), 
end another plats with a slice of bread on it. A table knife, a 
large earthenware bowl, along stick, some short sticks, brooms 
poker, shovel, etc. In addition to these there will be required a 
monkey mask, and a doll, to represent a baby of about three 
months old. . 

This comic piece is commenced by the monkey jumping over 
the light (the monkey of co.-.rse is played by a boy) and perform- 
ing several antics, such as rolling over, ami walking en all-fours 
after the manner of monkeys. As nurse enters at the side, with 
the baby in her arms, he jumps back over the light. Then the 
nurse stamps on the floor and calls, when Sambo enters from 
the s'dc with the cradle and a low rocking-chair, and places 
them for her use on one side near the screen, and goes off as ho 
entered. He re-enters the same way, fetching in a bowl of saw- 
dust and a large spoon, and gives them to nurse, when he goes 
out. The monkey jumps over the light, and perches on the 
back of the nurse's chair, from which point of observation ho 
watches her feeding the baby with a spoon from the bowl. 
When she has given the child two or threo spoonfuls she indi- 
cates by her gestures that it is asleep, and carefully puts it into 
the cradle, rocks it to sleep, and exit at the side. The monkey 
hides himself when she gets up, and when she has gone ho 
comes out, rocks the cradle, and tastes the sawdust, but does 
not like it. He then takes the baby out of the cradle and sits 
in the chair with it. The latter is supposed to wake up and cry 
loudly. (Here porno ons behind the light imitates the crying of 
a baby.) The monkey feeds it with the spoon from the bowl of 
sawdust. The baby roars and the monkey inverts the bowl on 
its head, hammering it on fasi with the spoon. Ho next takes 
the bowl off and throws that and the spoon away; he hugs the 
baby tightly and rocks himself energetically in the chair; he 
p 'ts' up in a minute or so, and throws the chair, cradle, and 
baby with violence off at the side. The baby scre»nis, on which 
he picks it up, and rolling it on the floor, makes a somersault 
back and forward over it. Should the actor not be able to per- 
form the last feat he should jump over it. He again takes it up 
and plays battledore and shuttlecock with it, the baby roaring 
all the time. Finally he throws it over the light and jumps 
after if, 

Nnr.se now enters and looks round in search of the baby, and 
n >t seeing it throws up her arms and screams. N<>xt putting her 
h-.n Is over her, face she runs off at the si.le. Then Sambo enters 
iin I seeing the confusion, everything being knocked about ho 
laughs loudly, and jumps over the light. Then tho monkey 
jumps forward over it, performs several comic antics and jumps 



18 .-.-SHADOW PANTOMIMES. - 

over the light back again. Sparkle now jumps over -the- light,' 
looks around with his eyeglass, and then claps his hands as if 
calling, when Frank jumps over the light with a whip and val- 
ise, and follows close behind his master, who walks across near 
to the screen. He turns rather suddenly, and tumbles against 
Frank, to whom he gives a smart box on the ear, and then tells 
him to go and see if there is aDy one about. Frank calls "House 
ho ! are you all asleep ?" As there is no response he begins 
thumping with a stick against a supposed door sill. As he 
gives the third knock Old Dobbs enters and receives a whack 
on the head. Frank runs back, when his master seizes him 
by the ears, shakes him, and then throws him from him. Old 
Dobbs and Sparkle go to embrace, but Frank going between 
them, they both by mischance embrace him, whereupon they 
take him up between them and throw him over the light. Both 
Sparkle and Old Dobbs, laugh heartily at this, and Sparkle in- 
timates by showing a ring that he has come to marry the old 
man's daughter. The latter rubs his hands as if pleased, but 
pauses and by giving the motions of a person counting out mon- 
ey from one hand into another, seems to inquire whether his 
daughter's suitor has any money, nodding his head interrogativ- 
ely. Sparkle answers affirmatively by nodding and holding up 
a large purse. Old Dobbs nods approval, goes near to the etlge 
of the screen, bvit still in sight of the audience, and beckons, 
on which Hose enters from the side; Old Dobbs takes her by 
the hand, and making a polite motion with his other hand 
appears to introduce her to Sparkle; the latter bows very low, 
and almost sweeps the floor with his hat, the young lady 
curtseying to the ground. The old man taking the purse 
from Sparkle's hand, shows it to his daughter, and hands it 
back to that gentleman. Old Dobbs then places his daughter's 
hand in that of Sparkle, and while doing so the monkey jumps 
over the light and tripping up Sparkle, puts him in a sitting 
posture on the floor, and then jumps back over the light. 
Old Dobbs helps him to rise, an d by bowing, and by a motion 
towards the side with his hand, seems to invite the gentleman 
to partake of refreshment. Sparkle leads the lady off, and the 
old man is about to follow when, Frank jumps over the light 
appearing to the old gentleman and indicates by gestures how 
he had been flung up into the sky and had only just come 
down. He turns his head for a moment from the old man when 
the monkey jumps over the light bites him in the calf of the 
leg and jumps back over the light without having been seen, 
Frank roars, and seeing no one except old Dobbs, imagines 
that he must have done it; he accordingly hits him a blow in 
the face, on which Old Dobbs staggers back, and then runs off 
at the side. Frank is very proud of this, and shaking his head 
stands with his legs wide apart. The monkey, seeing this, 
jampsQV.er, tiie li^aaAjuas through bank's, leg* .upsetting 



THE ■ MISCHrETOTTS -MONKEY. 



w 



him; the latter falling on his back and throwing his legs np 
in the air. The monkey, when he has clone it jumps back over 
the light before he is seen. Frank lumbers up, rubbing him- 
self all over, and looking about everywhere to see what it was 
that passed between his legs; he stands with his arms fold- 
ed, seeming to try and remember or think what it could have 




been, when the monkey jumps over the light, steals up behind 
him and knocks him down, Frank falling foremost on his hands 
and knees. He gets up into a sitting posture on the floor iind 
folds his arms, shakes his head and seems to intimate his deter-, 
mination not to rise again and give somebody else an opportun- 
ity of knocking him down. His master enters, and seeing him 
sitting on the floor, looks at him and seems to inquire what he' 
is doing there. Frank, in astonishment, gets up and shaking 
his fist in his master's face, appears to accuse him of having, 
knocked him down. Sparkle shakes his head in denial and 
by putting his hand to his mouth, as if in the act of drink- 
ing, and by tapping his forehead intimates that the servant is 
drunk; he then points to the side, as if ordering him out and 
as he is about to go the monkey jumps over the light and pulls 
him back violently against his master who has his head turned 
away; the latter turning round gives him a kick, the monkey 
meanwhile, having jumped over the light. 

Sparkle then orders Frank by gestures to go and fetch his 
dressing gown. The servant limps off at the side, making be- 
lieve to be in great pain; Sparkle again indicates by his gestures 
that the servant had been drinking. He next claps his hands 
to call him, he enters slowly with the dressing-gown, his leg has 
a handkerchief tied round it just below the knee, as if to stop 
the blood. Sparkle takes off his coat and Frank helps him on 
with the dressing-gown. He gets one arm into the sleeve, .and 
is about to do the same with the other, when the monkey jumps 
over the light and pulls Frank by the coat tails, when the latter 
comes down in a sitting posture on the floor, about the centre, 
*ttd,as,he was holdiag ob tQ; the rdTepfrjag-gown, and paly. one- 



20 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

half is on his master s snoulders, and he is feeling for the other 
sleeve, Frank gets up and begins his work again, but to his an- 
noyance he finds that in his fall the coat has split up the back. 
This Sparkle is not -aware of, so Frank pins up the back. 
The master walks away unconscious, and when his back 
is turned Frank shakes with laughter.. The master turns, 
looks at him, and shakes hisj fist. Frank looks quite 
innocent, rubbing one hand over the other, and seems to 
ask if his master wants anything. The latter motions him to go 
for his writing desk (this he dots by imitating the action of writ- 
ing with his right hand on the left). Frank jumps over the 
light, and re-enters by the side with a table and chair. He exits 
and enters the same way with a writing desk which he puts on 
the table, and then holding the chair by the back, and bowing, 
seems to invite his master to sit down. Sparkle is about to do 
so when the monkey jumping over the light draws the chair 
back and the former comes sprawling backwards on the floor, 
the monkey immediately disappearing over the light. Sparkle 
quickly arises, and in a rage slaps the servant's face (in doing so 
the toiler will clap his hands smartly together to give the sound of a slap) 
he then picks up the chair, and sits down to write; as he leans 
over to do so the monkey jumps over the light and gets behind 
him, and pushes his head forward violently, so that it seems to 
come witli a bang against the desk. The unfortunate Sparkle 
raises his heal and rubs his forehead. -The monkey when 
he has done the mischief disappearing over the lamp. 

The irate gentleman more convinced than ever of the inebriety 
of the servant, seems to hit him a box on the ear. Frank ap- 
pears to say in action, " "Why did you hit me?" The master 
points to his head and to the desk; Frank makes -energetic mo- 
tions of denial, but the master shakes his head 'incredulously. 
These accusations and denials are repeated two or three times or 
even oftener. It finishes by Frank putting one hand on his 
heart, and raising the other in the air, and moving his month as 
if he was asseverating the truth. Sparlde sits down angrily to 
the table and writes, folds a letter puts into an envelope, and in- 
dicates by the action of putting a letter into a letter-box that he 
is to post it. Frank takes it nnd goes out at the side. Sparlde 
then tikes off his dressing-gown, puts it on a chair., find goes 
out at the opposise side to that at which Frank made his exit. 
The monkey Jumps over the light, then on to the table and from 
thence into the chair; puts on the dressing-gown, and rings the 
hand-bell which stands hesMe the desk. 

This summons brings in Frank, who may be supposed to have 
returned. He enters from the side, rnd bows to intimate that 
he is waiting for orders. He goes over to the monkey who gives 
him some sheets of paper; he looks at them and seems in his 
turn to think it his master who has been taking an extra glass, 
he laughs and is going off with them, when the monkey ogaia 



THE MISCHIEVOUS MONKEY. 21 

rings the bell, when the servant returns and the monkey gives 
him a pile of books an! an inkstand; he is going, -when the 
motikey again rings, but as the servant returns the monkey 
turns and chatters, ringing the bell in his fane. Frank looks 
at him, ant is astonished; he throws the books and inkstand at 
him. but the monkey ducks and avoids them. Frank then gets 
a whip an 1 tries to lash the monkey but the latter chatters, 
eludes hi n, an 1 j amps over the lamp, over which he jumps 
ng lin and on to Frank's shoulders, vho flourishes about the 
whip, cutting, slashing, and vainly trying to hit his enemy. 
The latter then springs off, and jumps over the light, over which 
Frank follows him. Jenny then comes in, gathers up the looks 
an 1 inkstand, puts them into a basket, and takes therefrom a 
table-cloth and spreads it on the table; she then puts on a decant- 
er of wine, an e irthenwara bowl, a plate with some flour and 
water mix3d like paste, a plate with a slice of bread on it. and a 
table-knife. Just as she lias completed her task Frank jumps 
over the light with the whip in his hand; he throws down the 
whip, and shakes his head to intimate that he didn't succeed 
in catching the monkey. Jenny, who knows nothing of the 
monkey, goes out at the side without noticing Frank, who is 
stamping about, but is soon brought to his senses, by the 
monkey, who jumping over the light, catches up the whip and 
gives the poor victim thvee or four sharp cuts with it across the 
backs of his legs, again jumping over the light. Jenny re-enter- 
ingjust at that instant, lie turns and sees her; he keeps nibbing 
his legs, and by his gestures seems as if he was in great pain. 
He accuses Jenny of having done it; but she shakes her head 
in token of denial. He nods, and indicates that she did. She 
gives hei head another negative shake. He puts his head on 
one side and screws up his face to a comic profile, and asks her 
by gesture for a kiss. She plainly intimates by her gestures 
that she will do nothing of the kind. He intimates that he will 
not be refused. She draws back as much as to say " If you can 
catch me you may kiss me." He shakes his head as though he 
would say, '"All right, my beauty." Then ensues a chase round 
the room, behind the table and everywhere, but at length she 
runs off at the side. Just as she does so the monkey jumps 
over the light, and into Frank's arms, smothering him with kis- 
ses. Frank struggles to free himself from the embrace of the 
monkey, who, pushing him off, throws him on his face on the 
floor, and jumps over the light. Frank scrambles to his feet; 
takes up the whip and threatens his now invisible tormentor. 
He strides up and down intimating by gesture that the monkey 
hns climbed up a tree. In the middle of it all he sees the eat- 
ables on the table, he is astonished and pleased; he throws the 
whip away, and sits down, he drinks out of the decanters in- 
stead of pouring the wine into a glass, and dips his fingers into 
the bowl as if he was taking out lumps of sugar. __ Then with a 



22 SHADOW PANTOMTMEJ, 

knife he dips into the paste, and shows it, as it hangs from the 
end of the knife. He laughs and chuckles with delight. Then 
he spreads it on his Dread, and intimates by gestures, nibbing 
his stomach, etc., how much he is enjoying bis repast. 

While everytbing wears so smiling an aspect the monkey jumps/ 
over tbe light and plays on him every prank that the circum-f 
stances of tbe case suggest — pulling Lis Lair, tickling Lis face, 
and finally seizing the bread be rubs tbe tLick paste off it on Lis 
face; be then runs off and jumps back over tbe light. As tbe 
monkey decamps, Old Dobbs enters from tbe side, and Frank 
makes sure tLat he was tbe delinquent. In his rage he flings 
the pasted bread at bis face, but misses it, and Sparkle, who 
was bebind Old Dobbs catches it between tLe eyes. Both tbe 
latter and the old man are furious, and Frank so frightened 
tbat be jumps over the light. The two angry men run aLout 
looking for him, but catch each other by mistake, and a mutual 
pnmmeling takes place, each thinking tbat be is beating Frank. 
They discover their error, and both apologize, shaking hands 
on it, They go in search of Frank, Sparkle jumping over the 
light, and Old Dobbs goes off at the side. As soon as they are 
gone the monkey jumps over the light, drinks out of tbe decant- 
er, and licks out the bowl. Then catching hold of the table- 
cloth, he, by a quick jerk, whips it off tbe table, but dexterous- 
ly leaving everything on the latter undisturbed. {This trick ui'd 
require to he practised.) The monkey then putting the cloth on 
the floor rolls himself up in it, then stands up when it Langs 
like a cloak over his shoulders, he walks about in it admiring 
himself. Suddenly he throws it off, and jumping on the table 
be throws the plates about; be next takes the bowl, and appears 
to swallow its contents. Then he takes up the decanter and 
finding it empty flings it on to the floor. Next be puts the 
bowl on Lis head like a hat, btit leaning bis head back the bowl 
falls off and breaks. He turns round to ascertain the (Jamage 
he has done, when Frank enters from the side witli a large stick 
•and strikes at tbe monkey as he sits perched on the table, but 
the monkey jumps off and eludes him, dodging tbe blows from 
the stick several times, and finaiy seizes it, and wrenches it from 
Frank, whom he beats unmercifully, until the latter runs off at 
the side. The monkey pushes the chair, table, and other things 
aside to give himself a clear field, and waves the stick in 
triumph. When his back is turned, Frank enters from the side 
with a short stick, followed by the entire dramatis perscmcR. They 
advance on the monkey to beat him, when be turns round sud- 
denly and belabours them right and left, as they run round to 
avoid the blows, which he rains on them. Some jump back- 
wards and forwards over the light, (which has a good effect), 
and others fall and get up again. In the middle of tbe tveke, 
wlun the laughter is at the loudest, if the light at the back is 
taken away, and the light in the auditorium suddenly turned 



REGULAR HASH. 523 

tip, (if them should be gas, or if not, candles suddenly 
brought in), it will give the effect of the sudden falling of the 
curtain on a very laughable tableau. 

The long stick mentioned can be made of five or six canes 
or rattans, tied together, and about six feet long. This, if 
skilfully used, will make a great noise without hurting. The 
personator of the monkey will wear a tight-fitting dress, and 
a monkey mask with a movable jaw. 



KEGTJLAK HASH; OK, THE BOARD- 
ING HOUSE CONSPIRACY. 



Dramatis Peksonje, 



Skinflint. 
Smith. 
Brown. 
Jones. 



Robinson. 
Roger. 

Doctor Bolus. 
Mrs. Stintem. 



THE properties used in this comic piece, are a table, a chair, 
a table-cloth, two plates, knives and forks, and a zinc 
pail, witb some pudding in it to represent hash (it must be 
something nice to eat), a large iron ladle or spoon to be in the 
zinc pail, and to be used in putting the pudding on the plates, 
three or four brooms, a live cat, a cane for the doctor etc. 

The burlesque opens by Brown, Jones, Smith, Robinson, and 
Roger entering from the sides ; when the following conversation 
takes place : 

Brown. This is the place of meeting. 

Jones. We are here, but where is our worthy president ? 

Skinflint jumps over the light and says, in a hollow voice, "I 
am here, brothers in distress, I greet you; you have chosen me 
as yonr president and spokesman, and by my order we have 
convened here to requite our wrongs; for that we are wronged 
greivously you can all testify." 

Omnes. We can, we can. 

Skinflint. Of course you can. Here we are, all sojourners 
in the boarding house of Mrs. Stintem, paying the ridiculous 
sum of five mortal dollars weekly for board, lodging gas ni\d 
fire. Ah ! and do we get it ? What says Echo ! (speaking in a 
very hollow and impressive voice) . she answers 'No !' What 
say you to that, my brethren in suffering ? 
• Omnes. .. No, no. 

Skinflint. No, the promised comfort of the domicile of 
Stintem are a sham, a snare and a delusion. .. She turns off the 
gas so early that we cannot find the head of our beds. We have 



24 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

not sufficient light to take off our boots, and wnen wo sleep m 
them she insinuates that we — hem— that we have been liquor- 
ing. 

O.MKE3. Shame, shame. 

Skinflint. I say again, will you stand it. 

Osines. No; no." 

Skinflint (tapping his nose). I have a plan. What was 
served to us yesterday as a rabbit was a tom-cat; as we could 
not manage to eat it then it will be given to us to-dny in the 
guise of a hash (Groans, and cries of ".-1 has hash."] Now we 
will make Mrs. Stintem eat it all herself. You all agree ? 

Omnes. All, all. 

They go out at one side except Skinflint, who jumps over 
the light, and as lie does so Mrs. Stintem enters at the opposite 
side to that at which the others made their exit. 

Mrs. Stintem carries in one hand a basket containing plates, 
etc., and in the other a zinc pail containing pudding which is 
supposed to be hash. She spreads a cloth on the table, r.nd 
then lays the knives, forks, spoons, etc., a large ladle remains 
in the pail, she stands the latter in the centre of the table. 
When all is ready, she says "Well, if ever there was a poor 
lone widow that's pestered to death it is me. Here I have had 
seven servant girls within the last three weeks and every one 
of them walked off because I wouldn't agree to give out the 
washing and have in a woman to rlo the rough work, and the 
saucy jades want to see their cousins too — I wonder how it is 
that fill their cousins happen to be either policemen or soldiers, 
Then there are the boarders, Ah! they are a cantankerous lot ; I 
do believe they expect venison, game, spring chickens and 
lamb, with pastry to correspond, for their shabby five dollars a 
week. Ha ! ha ! Well I give them good substantial hash for 
dinner every day, and if they don't like it why they can leave it. 
May be it's dainties they want. They say they don't know what 
it is made of. Oh! they don't don't they? I'd like to know 
what business it is of theirs how it's made; all they've got to do 
is to eat it and be thankful. I've got to make money, that's all 
and as I am an honest woman I don't run up a score at the 
butchers. Ha! ha! Well here's their dinner all ready and get- 
ting cold and none of them come yet (a knock outside) ah! here 
comes Mr. Skinflint, the worst of the lot, a regular blow coal, 
that he is." 

Mr. Skinflint (enters from the side). Well, Mrs. Stintem, 
what's for dinner to-day? 

Mes. Stintem (rubbing one hand over the other and curtsey- 
ing low). Some nice hash. 

Skinflint (throwing up his hands in horror). Hash! (he 
jumps over the light.) 

Mes. Stintem. Did I ever. 



REGULAR HASH. 25 

Enter Brown (from the side). Good day Mrs. Stintem, 
What's for dinner to day. 

Mrs. Stintem. Some very nice hash. 

Bbown (throwing up his arms). Hash, by Jove ! (jumps 
over the light. ) 

Enter Jones (from the side). How do you do, Mrs. Stintem? 
Have you got anything nice for dinner to-day? 

Mes. Stintem. Oh, yes, some beautiful hash. 

Jones (throwing up his arms in horror). Avaunt hash! 
(jumps over the light.) 

Enter Smith. Well Mrs. Stintem, I hope you have a nice 
dinner to-day, I am precious hungry. 

Mes. Stintem. I have indeed, oh ! such nice rabbit 
hash. 

Smith (whistles). Pussy hash, you mean! Well we all re- 
member the policeman that eat the rabbit pie under the railway 
arch, and what came of it. Mew ! mew! (he jumps over the 
light.) 

Enter Roger. Ah! Mrs. Stintem, I see the dinner is ready; 
What have you got that is very good to-day? 

Mes. Stintem (very sharply). Hash. 

Roger (rubbing his hands and then his stomach). Prime 
stuff, ha! (He sits down, and she ladles him out some of the 
pudding from the pail and puts it on his plate. [He eats rav- 
enously, then stretches himself and gets up satisfied]. Well 
I have enjoyed my dinner very much. The other fellows thought 
to frighten me, but it was no go. They said that the tom- 
cat was missing, but I did not believe them. 

Mbs Stintem. Well then, as they don't want any dinner I 
shall remove it, it will keep for supper. [She goes out at the 
6ide.] 

Kogee [putting his hand to his stomach]. Oh! oh dear! Oh — 
h-h-h dear! I feel as if ten thousand cats were clawing at 
my vitals! He makes a number of grotesque gestures indicat- 
ive of pain, then rolls on his back on the floor and kicks his 
heels up in the air roaring all the time. At length he calls 
out "Help ! help !" and rolls over on his face then on his back 
again. Brown and Jones jump over the light, and ask him 
what is the matter. He can only say "Oh ! the hash !" and he 
rubs his stomach. They help him up and put him sitting in a 
chair, where they try to hold him down; he jumping up and 
crying out "Oh dear! oh dear!" Brown tells Jones to run for 
a doctor, Jones jumps over the light and returns the same way 
with Doctor Bolus. The doctor, with pomposity looks at 
Roger's tongue, feels his pulse, tells the others to hold him 
tight, "Very tight if you please." He takes off his coat, and 
seizing Eoger by the hair makes believe, by putting his hand 
at the off side of his head, so that he will appear from the 
front to have put his hand down his throat. He draws it hack 



23 



SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 



holding a large cat by the back of the neck. He looks aston- 
ished at what he has caught; he holds it up, when Brown and 
Jones raise their hands and express horror. Then he lets the 
cat run away ; the doctor next asks for his fee, but the three 
boarders shake their heads and say " We've got no money." He 
becomes angry and says "You're nothing but a set of swind- 
lers." They iaugh and spin him round, he shaking his cane all 
the time and trying to get at them. At length one of them 
gives him a kick, and he jumping at the same time, they seem 
to have kicked him over the light; the boarders in roars of 
laughter all the time, holding their sides and making grotesque 
gestures of merriment. Next Skinflint and Smith and Eobinson 
come running in at the side and Skinflint says, *• Our jury finds 
Mrs. Stintem guilty of treason to our stomachs, and each and all 
bind ourselves to cany out the sentence of the court. Ah! here 




she comes— away!." They all jump over the light. Mrs. Stintem 
enters from the side and says " Well 111 just take a 'bus, and 
go to the bank. I shall not require to go to market this even- 
ing for the rabbit hash will do nicely for supper, and if they 
don't like it they shall have it for dinner to-morrow, ha! ha! ha! 
I've made up my mind for that." She is about to go out when 
Jill the boarders jump over the light and dance a war dance 
lound her, flourishing hearth brooms aloft. She tries to run 
j. way, but is met each time by one of her tormentors. At length 
they make her sit in a chair, and tucking a handkerchief like a 
napkin under her chin, Skinflint says, "Listen, Mrs. Stintem, 
< >ur council has condemned you to eat all the hash that was left 
>tt dinner. Fortunately for you, Eoger has consumed a good 
part of it [a voice, " Just like Eoger"]. We want to give you a 
lesson, and hope it will lead to a change in our diet, at least 
twice a week." She struggles, but two of them hold her arms, 
one at each side while a third presses from the back of her 
chair on her shoulders to keep her down, a fourth brings the 
pail of hash, and Skinflint feeds her she spluttering and re- 



THE MADCAP BABBEB 27 

sisting all the time; she refuses to swallow it, but the boarder 
■who has brought the pail being at liberty holds her nose, so as 
she has to open her mouth to breathe, Skinflint pops in spoon- 
ful after spoonful, she keeps on abusing and choking all the 
time; when she has finished it they let her go, but as she is 
running off they "bonnet" her with the pail; she then runs out 
and they after her, laughing all the time. 



THE MADCAP BAEBEE; OE, THE UN- 
FOETUNATE VICTIM. 

"INTERMEDE COMIQUE" 

Dbamatis Peeson^:. 

Feizzle (a barber). Hunchback. 

Bibchem (a pedant). A Lady. 

ACCESSORIES: A barber's pole, cut out of stiff pasteboard, 
a sign with the words Frizzle, Barber, pierced through so 
that they will show when placed between the screen and 
the light, a newspaper, a large bell, some carpeting, a few car- 
petbags [or imitations of them], coats, shawls, and bundles, a 
satchel containing broken crockery, a chair, a cloth such as bar- 
bers use when cutting hair, a large basin, a wooden razor about 
two feet long, and a razor strop about the same length with a 
strong cord loop at one end, to go over a man's head. 

The circle is made by putting brown paper at the. corners of 
the frame, as described in " Amputation Extraordinary," with 
the pole fastened at one side and the sign at the other. 

Frizzle wears his shirt sleeves, an apron, and a wig with the 
hair standing up very straight. Birchem wears a straight cut 
coat, knee-breeches, and stockings; his head is bald but he 
wears a wig, the bald head can be imitated by the performer 
wearing a skull cap. Over the wig he wears a small three-cor- 
nered hat; this may be a piece of paper, pinched into that 
shape. 

The piece is commenced by Frizzle jumping over the light, 
and exclaiming, "Well, here I am, the great barber in ordinary 
to the man in the moon. I've shaved his high mightiness for 
the fortieth time to day, and now have nothing to do, and I am 
so anxious for another job to try my new patent double-edged 
double-barreled, breech-loading razor, that cleans off the most 
bristly beard that ever grew on human face, before the lather 
has been quite laid on the patient's face. I only wish that some 
verdant visitor would arrive here that I might test the 



28 SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

powers of my invention. It is astonishing, I may say truly sur- 
prising, that we have so few tourists coming this way, and that 
in these days of submarine telegraphs and underground rail- 
ways, nobody builds a railway to the moon. So many people 
have built castles in the air, there could be stations had for the 
asking. As everyone knows that the moon is inhabited, it 
seems strange that some speculative limited liability company 
does not come here and start a speculation of some sort. By 
the by, in the last sublunary Times that I captured off the tail 
of a boy's kite, as it flew up near the moon, I am informed 
that an aerial railway to the moon was to be finished by the 
fourth of July, 1974. That is this very year and this very day. 
I'll read the paper and see if I'm correct. " He goes and gets the 
paper. " Oh, here it is. Ah! I knew I was right. Hark! what's 
that?" He listens: here some one or two behind the light will 
ring a bell, and imitate the snorting of a locomotive and the 
shriek of a railway whistle; also the shouts and bustle conse- 
quent on the arrival of a train at a station. Passengers cross 
and recross from side to side, and Frizzle touts eagerly for cus- 
tom, pointing to his shop, and even trying half by force and 
half by persuasion to get them into it. Birchem enters as 
Frizzle almost despairs of getting a job. As he is walking up 
and down, meditating on his ill luck, he and Birchem knock 
their heads together. The latter exclaims angrily, "Confound 
your stupid head ; is this the first salute I get when I have taken 
the trouble of coming to your outlandish country ? Is it fight- 
ing you mean ? for although I am a learned dominie, I'll knock 
you down before you have time to say 'by your leave. ' Frizzle 
bows low, puts his hand to his heart, and in action apologizes. 
Birchem says, "Well, as you apologize of course you can do 
nothing more, so here's my hand." They shake hands. "Well 
my friend," says Birchem, "and this is the moon, about which 
so many learned men disagree; and is there really a man in it?" 
Frizzle answers, "Yes, sir, a mighty prince, that carries a 
sceptre in the form of a bush." "Ah," Birchem says, "and lots 
of litte boys and girls? I am a professor of all the sciences, and 
am sent by the school board to induct all you lunatics into all the 
mysteries, arts, sciences, including dancing, and every other 
kind of music;" he whistles, does the double shuffle, and changes 
to heel and toe. "And now, my ancient, who may you be?" 
Frizzle draws himself up to his full height and answers, "I am 
the great Frizzle, seventh son of a seventh son, and barber in 
ordinary to his high mightiness the Man in the Moon, whose 
august beard I shave forty times a day, and then, like the great 
Alexander, I sigh for more beards to mow. I am moreover the 
sole inventor, patentee, and proprietor of the hair rejuvenator, 
and the wonderful two-edged, double-barreled, breech-loading 
self-acting razor, which will shave both sides of the face at the 



THE MADCAP BAEBEB. 29 

same time taking away wrinkles and all, combs the hair and 
whiskers, brushing them as well, and finishes all by drawing 
the teeth during the other operations. I shall be pleased and 
happy, I may say delighted, to show you my new invention, 
and to put it to a practical test, on your good-looking face." 
Birchem looks at him, and shaking his head slowly says, "My 
good friend Frizzle, if your double action razor comes anyway 
near your forty horse power tongue I should like to see it and 
to give you a job as well; I like to encourage native talent in 
every way. Here take my valise ; handle it carefully as its con- 
tents are valuable." Frizzle takes it and throws it off at one side, 
when there is atremenduous crash of broken crockery. "Hollo!" 
shouts Birchem, "what the deuce are you at? Confound it! 
you've smashed a magnificent set of China ornaments I bought 
as a present for Mary Anne. Ah, I may well say now 'Poor Mary 
Ann.'" Frizzle motions "all right," and jumps over the light. 
Birchem looks up after him and says, "Well, I'm blest if this is 
not the strangest country I ever set foot in ; I wonder where the 
fellow can have got to? Can he have gone up to another moon 
above this one? Madame Luna may have little moons of her 
own— moons outside of moons as one may say." Then he looks 
up and calls out, "Frizzle, ahoy!" Frizzle from the back of the 
light answers, "All right sir, in one minute." Birchem looks be- 
wildered, and Frizzle jumps over the light in front of him; he 
is astonished at his sudden appearance. Frizzle bows and mo- 
tions Birchem to sit down on a chair. The latter is about to do 
so when Frizzle picks up a band-box and puts it on the seat; 
Birchem goes plump into the box, his heels going high into the 
air. He then jumps up, and holding out the box to Frizzle, 
says, "Look here stupid; there's a three dollar hat gone, by 
Jove I can't stand this." Frizzle says, "Well, sit down again," 
and seizing him pushes him into the chair. Then taking the 
band-box he throws it over the light jumping over after it. 
Birchem starts up in bewildered amazement, with his mouth 
open, and recovering himself says, "Well, they say when you are 
in Kome you mast do as the Romans do; but this is Romanizing 
with a vengeance." He shrugs his shoulders, shakes his head, 
and resigns himself to his fate. Frizzle jumps over the light 
with a long cloth, which he shakes in Birchem's face, who 
waves his hand to keep it from his eyes, and calls out, "Look 
here you barber, I can stand a good deal, but not that way of 
yours." Frizzle then takes the cloth, and puts it carefully in 
front of his victim, fastening the ends at the back of his neck 
very tight. Birchem struggles with hands and feet, tries to get 
off the chair, and calls out in a choking voice, "You infernal 
scoundrel, you're strangling me!" Frizzle laughs and forces 
him to remain in the chair, he then jumps over the light. 
Birchem looks after him, his astonishment increasing every mo- 
ment. Frizzle Jumps over the light, this time with a very large 



3U SHADOW PANTOMIMES. 

basin of lather, and a large whitewash brush, with an immense 
wooden razor, and a strop about a yard long, with a loop at one 
end. These items he lays on the floor, and Birchem looks at 
them, wondering what the other is going to do with them, when 
Frizzle says, "Ah, now, illustrious stranger, I'll show you how 
we manipulate our customers when performing the grand and 
sublime art tonsorial." Birchem says, "I want none of your lun- 
atic capers, I simply want to be shaved." Frizzle answers, "All 
right, my worthy sir, I will just whet my wonderful razor and 
you shall see what you shall see. Your face clean shaved, 
wrinkles all gone, your hair nicely shampooed, and your teeth 
drawn in the winking of an elephant's right eye; there — just 
put this over your head." He puts the loop of the strop over 




his head and says, "This, you see, is my new invention — the 
flexible razor strop. You will be enchanted when you see its ac- 
tion; and this is my miraculous razor:" He shows him the razor. 
Birchem starts up when he sees it opened, and exclaims, "Hollo! 
I won't be shaved with that murderous weapon; why if your 
hand should slip I wouldn't give a cent for my head. I tell you 
again I don't want to be shaved ; I want to go. " Frizzle presses 
him down on the chair, and seizing one end of the strop he 
then rubs the side of the razor backwards and forwards across 
and across Birchem's face, and finally hits him over the head 
with it. The unlucky philomath falls back, bringing the chair 
down with him. "Oh, I'm murdered! Oh! oh! oh! help! murder! 
murder! murder!" Frizzle drops the razor, and seizing Birchem 
under the arms lifts him into the chair again; he then takes the 
bowl of lather, stirs it about, and shows the large brush. Birch- 
em looks on in terror and surprise, with his mouth wide open. 
Frizzle takes advantage of this last circumstance to dab the brush 
into his mouth, on which he splutters and coughs and spits out. 
Just then a lady enters, and tapping Frizzle on the shoulder 
asks him a question, when the latter turns, and dabs the brush 
into her face; she screams and runs off. Frizzle laughs and 



THE MADCAP BARBErv 31 

mimics her scream; Birchem also laughs very heartily, and as 
lie does so Frizzle dabs the brush into his mouth again, and 
lathers his face and head all over. A lame man now comes in 
with a huge hum]). He asks to be shaved, and as Frizzle turn i 
to answer him he gives the hunchback a dab in the face, and a ; 
he turns to go he dabs him again and again, until he runs off at. 
the side. This makes the barber laugh immensely, he then fin- 
ishes lathering Birchem, and when he has done so, he puts the 
brush and basin down and commences to shave him. He scrapes 
the lather off his face and wipes the razor on the knees of the 
sufferer's breeches, who cries out "What the deuce do you mean? 
you've ruined my best Sunday breeches." Frizzle laughs, and 
looks about for something whereon to strop his razor, when see- 
ing Birchem's leg stretched out he seizes him by the ankle and 
pulling him right out of his chair, he lands him on his back on 
the floor, and begins to strop his razor vigorously on his 
boot. Suddenly Birchem utters an exclamation of pain, and 
bounds to his feet, holding up his leg with both hands and in- 
timates by grotesque gestures that he has been cut. Frizz! j 
looks terrified, throws down the razor, and falls on his knees be- 
fore his victim, holding up his hands as if to implore mercy. 
Birchem spurns him with his foot, and Frizzle roll.i 
over and over on the floor, kicking violently all the time. 
He regains his feet, and recovering his razor, walks up boldly 
to Birchem assuming a threatening and defiant bearing, 
brandishing his weapon in dangerous proximity to the 
dominie's head. He speaks rapidly saying, " You mer-i 
sublunary, you dare to insult the majesty of his high 
mightiness's barber ! Die, miscreant that mine honor may 
wipe out the stain!" He prepares to proceed to extremities — 
having seized Birchem by the collar, when the lame man 
enters, and slipping his hump from beneath his coat, he 
throws it at him, hitting him on the head, thereby staggering 
him. Before he has time to steady himself, the lady enters from 
the side, and taking the cloth from the back of the chair, she 
throws it over his head and belabors him with her parasol; he 
spinning round and round all the time like a teetotum and 
making the most ridiculous efforts to free himself. The lady is 
at length out of breath, and while she pauses Birchem recogniz- 
es her, and starting back, he exclaims, "Angels and ministers 
of grace! my Mary Ann — ah !" The lady gasps, "Oh !" and they 
rush frantically into each other's arms. Frizzle, who has suc- 
ceeded in getting free from the cloth, pants and seems broken- 
winded; but seeing the lovers embrace, he is overpowered by 
his feelings of sympathy, and rushing forward he embraces both. 
Here the railway bell is rung, and the whistle is heard, when 
Frizzle and the lame man, who has thrown away his stick, jump 
over the light, while Birchem and Mary Ann exit at the side. 
The lamp is then removed from the back, and the gas turned up 
in the auditorium, to intimate that the piece has concluded. 



GHOSTS ! 

AND HOW TO RAISE THEM. 



ONE EVENING when a number of lads had met together, in- 
tending to spend a few hours in some pastime, at once 
harmless and instructive, the subject of Ghosts came upon the 
carpet. One of their number whom they had christened the 
Professor, on account of the felicity with which he gave expres- 
sion to the ideas upon almost every subject with which tbey 
were more or less conversant, was appointed lecturer. 

Assuming an air of almost ministerial gravity he began his in- 
teresting lecture on Ghosts, and how to raise them. 

He spoke in substance as follows: His ghosts were real; but, 
though real, they were not ethereal. Tbey were radiant and 
yet impalpable. They were of different orders, yet they had a 
kind of relationship. Some had no visible being, otbers were 
tangible, but all were astonishing. Yet tbey were only taken 
from the arcana of nature ; tbey did not belong to the occult 
art, nor were evolved out of the regions of the supernatural, 
there were some which could be seen by day, whilst others re- 
quired darkness to develope them. First, we were intro- 
duced to 

The Spectres In The Eoom. 

The professor produced a small portfolio containing some 
dozen sheets of cardboard or thick paper. Tbese, he said, were 
the most astonisbing, really of all the spectres produced by 
man. On each of the boards there was a single figure belonging 
to the order of those shown on the next page. Altogether he 
had about a dozen varieties in as many different colors. Some 
were flowers and others were birds. 

Some were self-colored, and others shown with a colored mar- 
gin. Each boy received a cardboard, and was told to close r,n<; 
eye, to look at it intently for some time, and then to gaze at the 
ceiling or on the walls and to relate what he saw; and, with the 



GHOSTS, AND HOW TO BAISE THEM. 



exception of some small boys, they all declared that they saw 
something very different in color from what they held in their 
hand. Yet, really, they were gazing at nothing but the well- 
knowa "Ocular Spectra." Thus to each one the orange man 




Blue. 



Bed. 



appeared blue; the blue, orange red; the red, bluish green; the 
green, a sort of reddish violet, the violet, bluish green, yellow 
indigo; indigo, orange yellow; black, white, and white black. 
By having duplicate outlines, one colored and the other plain 
placed beneath each other, on the upper being removed the plain 
outline was filled up with the complementary color of the first 
picture. 

The Professor did not explain that this simple experiment con- 
tained the germs of a delusion that has lasted until our own day. 
The magic crystals by which fortunes are told, have refracting 
surfaces of various colors, and on the dupe looking at them the 
retina of the eye travels over the,surface until the varying col- 
ors assume regular shape, which he easily transforms to the 
people and scenes he wishes to see. The old Egyptian's pool 



34 



GHOSTS, AND HOW TO RAISE THEM. 



of ink acts in the same way, and, as it reflects strongly from 
its slightly concave and variable surface, it gives forth won- 
derful and fanciful pictures, by which the world have been 
gulled into a belief of the supernatural in times long gone by. 
The old Egyptian priests, the Professor told us, had so many 
modes of producing an illusion so real, so perplexing and so 
astounding, as to amaze the people who witnessed it, and suffi- 
cient to silence any skeptic who refused to believe in their su- 
pernatural powers. Thus figures floated in the clouds of in- 
cense which came from their altars; real events were depicted 
on the solid walls; the figures on the pictures moved; the sword 
of the avenging deity became stained with blood, or the beati- 
fied soul of the lost one was seen ascending to heaven. He 
said that all this proved that the priests were further advanced 
in scientific knowledge than we thought, even if we allowed 
something for the mystified state of mind in which the specta- 
tors were naturally in. The laws of refraction and of reflection 
were evidently well known and practically applied, and it 
seemed that they possessed the germs of our magic lantern if 
they had not the instrument itself. 




The Professor then produced from a box a sheet of glass like 
an ordinary window. This he placed on the table, at right an- 
gles in an upright position. This was the secret of all modern 
ghosts and spectres, he told us, aiid he proposed first to show 
us how it could be made useful. First he placed a sheet of pa- 
per on the table, beneath the edge of the glass, and on one side 
of the glass, he placed a small flat medal on the paper about two 
inches from the side of the glass (A). On placing the eye at B, 
the image of A was found so accurately reflected at C, that it 
could be sketched on the paper with a pencil, and in fact, aa 



GHOSTS, AND HOW TO EAISE TIIEM. 3 r > 

the Professor stated, was more useful for copying simple flat 
objects, than an expensive camera lucida. In fact, it was that 
instrument in another shape. 

The professor said that this very principle was the secret of 
the "ghost" illusions which created such a sensation a short time 
ago, at various exhibitions. They were, however, produced in 
several ways. The model was not difficult to make, and when 
made, it could be used for more purposes than the one, as it 
formed a good model theatre and a depository for many apjDli- 
ances for the phantasmagoria, and diorama. The Professor's 
box was about 2 feet G inches wide, 18 inches high, and 2 feet 
deep, and was evidently home-made. 

The Professor simply pointed out that he kept his sheet of 
glass 2 feet by 18 inches in the box, and then threw a piece of 
dark calico over all, and in a few minutes the box was thrown 
open to our view, the screen was withdrawn, and this is what we 
saw: 




The front of the box was cut out in fantastical shape and was 
painted to represent trees. Behind there appeared a church 
and churchyard, and when we first saw it two or three figures 
were mourning over a small tomb. A few bars of mournful mu- 
sic were heard from the back of the church, when gradually the 
tomb became brilliant and there appeared an angelic figure in 
white robes, the music increased slightly, the mourning figures 
bowed down to the earth, and the ghost began to ascend, as it 
were, to heaven, and then to fade away fainter and fainter, un- 
til the scene was, nothing but misty darkness. In the meantime 
the Professor changed the position of part of the box silently 
and gently, and as we wondered, a slight vapor arose on the 
top of the box, and floating as it were on the vapor was a faint 
outline of the bright figure we had seen below. 

We could scarcely believe our eyes, for though the figures 
were necessarily small, the illusion was perfect. The Professor 



36 GHOSTS AND HOW TO RAISE THEM. 

explained that this was a modification ot his own — the combin- 
ation of an old with a new illusion; but that the changes were 
infinite. For instance he could produce the spectre in the 
wood, the proverbial "Banshee," or white lady of the Irish le- 
gend, on an old castle; the horned spectres in an alchemist's 
laboratory, or Banquo in the halls of Macbeth, not forgetting 
Hamlet's Father on the walls at Elsinore. He could produce 
the Lady in White, or the Castle Spectre at will— and doubtless 
with a larger apparatus greater effects could be produced. 

The professor thus explained how he did it, how the contriv- 
ance ought to be made, and how it could be modified. 

"I went to see Pepper's ghost at the institute, and afterwards 
I saw Gompertz's exhibition, and I conceived the idea of making 
a model, that I could raise my own ghosts " said the Professor. 
"I found that the principle was to let the light fall on a solid ob- 
ject, on a reflective surface, and if that surface was translucent 
the body appeared solid, and not a mere image. Those who 
have seen the ordinary ghost apparatus will recognize the prin- 
ciple of the following sketch: 




A is the auditorium, B the proscenium, C the stage, D the 
invisible glass reflective surface, E the object to be shown, and 
F the lamp which supplies the illuminating power which ia 
thrown on E, and which the audience see on D. The platform 
on which E lies, has a black background, unless it is colored 
to imitate the room in which the reflected ghost is seen. It is 
by no means essential that the platform at E should be an in- 
clined plane, unless each portion of the figure is wanted to 
stand forth with equal brightness. As a rule, a piece of dark 
drapery to serve as a background is all that is required in prac- 
tice. This would not answer in a model, so I devised the plan 
which you now see. 

A glance at the plan shows that the apparatus consists of a 
long box; and a most effective one can be made by making 
the box on the same scale as the plan — one inch to the foot but 
it may be made much smaller. B B is the box which is open 
in front, and the portion marked E E can, if desired, be made 
separate from it. G G is the sheet of gla&s placed anglewise in 



GHOSTS, AND HOW TO ItAISE THEM. 37 

the box as marked -whilst all the portions marked A are scenes 
which may be changed with the subject, but those in front 




should really have a well painted mass of trees and foliage to 
serve as a proscenium. The mourning figures M M M, should 
be either cut out of cardboard, or clothed models may be used. 
The latter have by far the best effect. The box at H should be 
made to open like a door on hinges. The Professor explained 
now his combination. He had obtained a description of an 
optical deception which would almost appear the same 
as that used by the Witch of Endor to raise the ghost of Samuel 
and as he required a strong light for his ghost, he resolved to 
combine the two, and accordingly made this portion of his box 
to fit this part of his apparatus; but this is not essential, though 
a most excellent idea. Otherwise a powerful bull's eye lamp, 
or a magic lantern is placed at C, so as to throw all its light on 



<38 GHOSTS, AND HOW TO RAISE THEM. 

to the figure D, and the slide at I controls the light, so as to 
cause the figure to faint away or become stronger. This slide 
I, formed the end of the Professor's second box, and he had so 
arranged this part of the box, that by the action of four circular 
wire springs at E E E E, similar to those used in patent candle- 
sticks, he caused the lamp and figure to rise as he removed the 
governing weight from the top; this gave the ghost at S the ap- 
pearance of rising to heaven, and when risen out of sight, it 
enabled the old apparatus to be used with the vapor. The ap- 
paratus is here shown. The lantern is moved farther back in 
the box, the reflecting mirror is placed between the slides at I; 
a painted slide of the ghost is inserted; the top of the box is 
raised as shown, and the ghost is now seen on the vapor of a 
little incense burnt on a small vessel on the top of the box. 
This gives a final ending to the exhibition ; which, with the ex- 
ception of a little trouble in regulating the gradual rise of the 
box is not difficult to manage. A small chimney is necessary 
to carry off the smoke and heat of the lantern. This is indeed 
an uncommon exhibition, and, if well managed, will create 
wonders of astonishment. 




The Professor's ghost wonders were not exhausted by this, for 
he showed us a model of a magic mirror, on the pattern of that 
described by Sir Walter Scott, by means of which he prod uced 
various spectres. This may be carried out in a large as well as 



GHOSTS AND HOW TO EAISE THEM. 39 

in a small model, if you are content with merely an ordinary 
mirror, and dispense with the magical surroundings. The Pro- 
fessor's box was of the appearance and size of a common tea 
chest, but the inside had been painted and papered so as to re- 
semble a cave of a magician. A small figure of one stood with 
a wand in his hand in the centre of the magic circle, as if en- 
deavoring to decipher the cabalistic signs. At the back there 
was a large oval mirror formed really of an ordinary square 
looking glass, hinged to the back of the box, but much larger 
than the opening. The wizard was mounted on a pivot and was 
moved by a magnet working underneath in a circle. On an in- 
quiry being made for a certain subject, he consulted his circle, 
and then the object was seen in the mirror. Spectres supposed 
incidents in one's life, all made their appearance ; now it was a 
ship in distress; now an emigrants cabin by moonlight; indeed, 
to every question, "Where shall I be next year or this day six 
years ?" all met with a response by the wizard and the wonder- 
ful picture in the mirror. The most astonishing part of the 
Whole was that the cave was dark. On each side there were 
dark curtains, yet the mirror was alone brilliant. Now it re- 
flected the central face which asked the question, and anon it 
changed with the answering scene. No one was allowed to 
touch or interfere with the apparatus, or go, indeed, too close 
to it. A mystical light came into the cave after each question. 

The cave itself was formed of pasteboard, painted to resem- 
ble rocks, and then powdered with frosts, (obtained at the oil 
and color shops,) at the top. There were a few small openings 
in which differently colored glass was inserted. Then the 
question was asked, and the light applied, it cast a subdued hue 
over the whole. The illusion was managed thus: after the 
question was asked, the cave was darkened, and a thin screen 
Df blue and green muslin was placed between the mirror and 
the cave. The mirror was then swung'back to an angle of 45 
degrees, and the image was cast on the mirror by a small magic 
lantern. The muslin screen was then moved, and the picture 
appeared as it fronted the spectator. 

This illusion is best seen in a room with a temporary par- 
tition across in the centre of which a large picture frame is 
placed, behind which the mirror acts. The magician may be a 
live boy in this case, whilst another lad propels the scenes be- 
hind the partition. It may be varied ad infinitum, and be the 
source of much fun and amusement. 

When the Professor had completed all his exhibitions, we 
agreed that really he deserved the name of the Professor, and 
that if he could not "call spirits from the vasty deep," he 
could at all events produce "Spectres light as air." 



THE GALLANTY SHOW. 

The comical moving shadows of the Gallanty Show rival 
Punch and Judy in popularity, and when exhibited never fail 
to attract a large audience. A private gallanty show can be got 
up with very little trouble in any house where there is a room 
which communicates with another apartment by means of fold- 
ing doors, so that the operator may be in one room and the 
spectators in another. 




The figures are to be cut out of carboard or very stiff paper, 
and their limbs are to be made movable by forming them of 
separate pieces, and making them work on pivots of thread or 
wire. All the figures should be blackened on both sides either 
with India ink or lamp black mixed with water and size. The 
figures are to be worked behind a semi-transparent screen 
formed by stretching a piece of linen or cotton-cloth over a 
wooden frame about three feet in width by two in depth. Dur- 
ing the exhibition the screen is to be illuminated by a 
lamp or candle placed behind it at a distance of three or four 



THE GALLA.NTY SHOW. 41 

feet. The screen must be stipported at the height of about five 
feet from the floor, in the doorway between the two rooms, by 
a light framework of wood or by any other means which the 
ingenuity of the operator may devise. Curtains or shawls must 
now be hung over the doorway on the outside, so as to hide 
the showman from the spectators, and shut out all the light 
except that which passes through the linen screen. A piece of 
strong tape stretched along the bottom of the frame by a nail 
driven in at each corner, serves to hold one figure in its proper 
position while the operators is engaged in moving another. The 
engraving on the preceding page represents the interior of the 
gallanty show, and shows how the figures are to be worked; the 
smaller boy holds all the figures, and hands them one at a time 
to the showman. The operator should pay particular attention 
to the actions of the different figures, while carrying on the 
dialogue, to see that they make appropriate gestures and 
movements with their heads, arms, and legs. The scenery 
need not be very elaborate. It is cut out of the same material 
as the figures, and is easily made and worked. For dialogues 
the exhibitor can make one to suit his figures. We offer one as 
a specimen of the style, and give engravings Illustrating the 
figures employed. 

THE WONDEEFUL CEOCODILE. 

A GALLANTY SHOW PLAY. 

[The annexed illustration shows how this figure is 
to be cut out. The showman gives motion to the 
legs by means of the long slips of cardboard at- 
tached to the feet. Sambo's eye may be made to 
roll about in a comical manner, if the exhibitor 
will take the trouble to stretch a hair with a black 
glass bead strung- upon it, across the hole cut in 
the face to represent the white of the eye.] 

Scene I. Egypt. A desert plain. On one side 
a single palm tree, on the other a Utile hut. 

Enter Sambo, 
Sambo. Oh golly ! me neber see sich a terrible brute in de 
■whole course ob my life! Here; missis, come out directly, or 
else you'll be eaten up in your bed! 

Enter Mas. Smith from the hut. 

[The figure of Mrs. Smith does not require much description. 

The arms are loosely attached to the shoulders, and made to 

move up and down by a thread or wire passing behind the 

figure.] 





42 THE GALLANTY SHOW. 

Mrs. Smith. How dare you summon me in that 
rude manner? My poor nerves have been in 
such a dreadful state ever since I left home, that 
I tremble like a leaf at the slightest noise. 

Sambo. Oh, missis ! I've seen sich a dreffle 
creature! 

Mrs. Smith. Heavens! what do you mean? 

Sambo. Great big large monster, ninety, eleventy 
hundred feet long — cohered all ober wid scales 
like de roof ob a house — hundred million teeth in 
him mouth, and tail dat would reach all de way from here to 
New York. 

Mrs, Smith. Good gracious ! Oh! why did Mr. Smith bring 
me to this dreadful country ? Where is your master, Sambo ? 
Go and find him directly, and tell him that he is a brute to 
leave his poor wife all alone by herself in this desert place. 
Oh, deary me ! Why did I ever marry a traveler. 

[Exit into hut. 

Sambo. S'pose me must go and look for massa, but me so 
berry frightened ob de fellow wid de teeth, dat me take good 
care to go right away from him. [Exit. 

Enter Little Jim. 
[The figure of the black child, little Jim, shown 
in the margin, need not be made with movable 
limbs.] 

Jim (calling after Sambo). Daddy take de little nig- 
ger wid you. Him out ob sight two or three times 
ober. [Cries. 

Enter the Wondeeful Ceocodile. 





[The figure of this remarkable animal should be very careful- 
ly cut out. The tail and lower jaw work on pivots, and are 
moved together with two of the legs, by means of two long slips 
of card.] 

[ The Wonderful Crocodile crawls slowly loioards little Jim. seizes that 
helpless youngster, and backs out with him between his huge 
jaws. 2 lie child yells. 

Enter Mes. Smith. 
Mrs. Smith. Mercy on us! I thought I heard poor little Jim 
scream. I wonder where the little one has got to? Oh, dear! 



THE GALLANTY SHOW. 43 

I wish my cruel, cruel husband would come! Oh, here he is 
at last. How frightened he looks! 

Enter Smith. 
[The arms and legs of this figure need-not be formed 
of separate pieces, as Smith plays an unimportant part 
in the drama. ] 

Smith. Oh, my love! I've seen a crocodile with poor 
little Jim in its enormous jaws. (Mrs. Smith screams.) 
Ah, my dear, we are not safe an instant in this place. 
The authorities ought to put a stop to crocodiles and all 
other dangerous reptiles. I am not afraid for myself 
nor for you. 

Mrs. Smith. Oh ; yon heartless man! 
Smith. Be patient, my love! lam only afraid for the 
safety of my valuable notes on the domestic habits of the ostrich. 
Mrs. Smith. Botheration! I wish you had never interfered 
with the ostrich, and had stopped at home like a sensible 
man. Oh, gracious goodness! look there! [Screams. 

[ The Wonderful Crocodile makes its appearance, swallows Smith and 
backs out again. Mrs. Smith continues screaming.] 
[The swallowing is easily managed. The showman moves the 
Crocodile close up to Smith, and pulls the latter figure out of 
sight.] 

Enter Sambo. 
Sambo. Can't find massa. Look for him eberywhere. 
Mrs. Smith. Oh, Sambo! Your poor master! 
Sambo. What! Hab de fellow wid de teeth eat him up? 
Mrs. Smith. Don't ask me. Oh, dear! oh, dear! 
Sambo. Where's little Jim? 
Mrs. Smith. He's with your poor master. 
Sambo. Oh, dear! poor little Jim, de pride ob my heart. But 
see; him come again. 

\_lhe Crocodile appears at one side, Sambo and Mrs. Smith run ou\ 
screaming at the other; the monster after opening and shutting Us 
jaws a few times disappears."] 

Enter Captain, followed by the Aemt. 

[The figure of one of the soldiers is represented in the 
annexed illustration. The best plan of moving the sol- 
diers across the stage is to fasten them to a long piece of 
tape, which is passed over to empty cotton-reels taming 
on strong pins driven in the lower corners of the wooden 
frame ; the ends of the tape axe fastened together so as to 
form an endless band. The army will continue on the 
march as long as the showman keeps turning one of the 
reels. J 

Captain. Forward my brave men! Let us exterminate 
the terrible monster without delay. 



: 



44 THE GALLANTY SHOW. 

[The Crocodile pops its head in on one side, and the soldiers all march 
into its mouth. Having eaten up the whole army the monster 
retires. ] 

Enter Jack Bowline and Mrs. Smith. 

f[The legs of the sailor are movable but the arms 
are cut out with the body Each leg has a slip of 
card attached to it for the showman to hold.] 
Jack. Eaten your husband and a little black 
baby say you! Shiver my timbers ! I'll chop the 
lubber into mincemeat! 
Mrs. Smith. You're very good, sir, but suppose 
the monster should swallow you! 
Jack. Swallow one of Uncle Sam's navy! I should 
like to see him do it! But where's that Sambo; he 
promised to show me where this land-shark harbors. 
So come along, my little craft, let's take a cruise in chase of 
him. 

Mrs, Smith. If you kill the crocodile, sir you will convey me 
to my aged papa, will you not? 

Jack. I should think so! The man who would not protect a 
lovely widow isn't worthy of the name of a sailor. [Exeunt. 

Scene II. — The Crocodile's home on the banks of the Nile. 
Enter the Young Crocodile. 

[The comical figure of the youthful croco- 
dile shown in the margin, is easily worked 
by pulling the strip of card which is con- 
nected with the lower jaw and tail.] 

Young crocodile (supposed to be speaking the 
Crocodilian language). Oh! I do wish papa 
would come home! I have had nothing to 
eat since breakfast, and then I had only two 
oxen and a few skinny Arabs. I'm so hungry! 
Pa-pa-a-a! pa-pa-a-a-a! (Cries.) Oh! here he 
comes with something in his mouth. Hoor- 
ray! La di diddle de, da de da. [Sings 

and dances in an absurd, manner. ] 

[Enter Wonderful Crocodile with Little Jim in his mouth. 

Wonderful Crocodile (putting down Jim). Well, my son, I hope 
you've been a good little reptile in my absence. See! I've brought 
something nice for supper. 

Young Crocodile. What a little bit! That won't be enough. 

Wonderful Crocodile. Don't be greedy! I'm going to bed as 
I'm not very well. I swallowed a troop of soldiers this after- 
noon, and those ugly guns and bayonets have given me a pain 
in my chest. I never could digest iron. Good night, my 
child, have your supper and go to bed. [Exit. 

Young Crocodile. Good night, daddy! Now for iny supper. 




THE GALLANTY SHOW. 45 

[ Tries to catch little Jim, who runs backwards and forwards crying 
all the lime. After many unsuccessful attempts the crocodile 
catches Jim. 

Enter Jack Bowline. 
Jack. Hold hard, yon lubber! The crocodile that would go 
to eat a little baby like that isn't worthy of the name of a Yankee 
sailor! [ The Crocodile leaves Jim and makes a rush at the 

sailor. ] 

Jack. What! you fresh-water shark! Do you want to try 
the temper of a Yankee cutlass? Come on then! 
[ Terrific combat between Jack and the Young Crocodile. At the con- 
clusion of the fight the Crocodile falls buekwards out of sight. 

Jaek. Hurrah ! Three cheers for Uncle Sam, the stars and 
stripes, and the American Sailors ! ( To Jim) Now, young 'un 
let me take you to your daddy, then I'll come back and look 
for the father of the chap that was going to make salt junk of 
you. The man who would be content with thrashing one 
crocodile isn't worthy of the name of a sailor. [Exeunt. 

Scene III. — The sailor's native village. A pump on one side, a sign- 
board with the words "Ihe Jolly Sailor" cut out, on the other. 
Enter Jack Bowline. 
Jack. Here I am again in my native village, safe and sound 
as a new frigate! Wont my blessed old dad be glad to set eyes 
on me, and wont all the folks stare when they see my tame 
crocodile ? Sambo, a-hoy, tow the vessel into this port. 
Enter Sambo leadmg the Wondekful Cbocodile by a string, 
Little Jim following. 
Sambo. Here we be Massa ! be critter as tame as pos'ble. 
Tink him turned vegetarian as him eat noting but grass and 
clober. Him cry like a child when me scold him. 

Jack. It's a queer craft to look at. Let me get on deck. 
(Mounts the Crocodile.) Now, music, strike up "Jack Robinson." 
The man who wouldn't dance a hornpipe on a crocodile's back 
isn't worthy of the name of a sailor. 

[He dances a hornpipe on ihe batk of ihe Wonderful CrofodUe. ] 
Ctjbtain Falls. 



THE 

COMPLIMENTS OF THE SEASON. 

» 

A FANCY-FUL INTERLUDE, 

FOB NEW TEAB'S EVE. 



Dramatis Persons. 



The Old Year. 
Christmas. 

Fancy. 



The New Year. 

Spirit of Francis Moore. 



Costumes. 



Old Year. — Long dark robe, reaching to feet, and girdled 
round the waist, with a hood or cowl drawn over the head; long 
white hair and beard; a crutch stick. 

New Year. — Fashionable modern evening dress with a wreath 
of white and yellow crocuses. 

Christmas, — Long white robe, trimmed with white fur, and 
bordered with holly, ivy, and mistletoe ; a broad belt over right 
shoulder, studded with mince pies; shoulder knots made of 
sausages; cap in the shape of and painted like a plum pudding, 
with twig of holly stuck in the top, and a garland of holly 
round the base of it; a bough of holly in his hand; face highly 
colored, with ample white beard. This costume is merely sug- 
gested by that of a popular actor; and may be modified at the 
pleasure of the person representing the character. 

Spirit of Francis Moore. — A magician's black gown, and 
mantle, with scarlet astronomical figures upon it; a high peaked 
black hat; ruff; an astrolabe and a black wand with magical 
characters on it. * 

Fancy. — A rich fancy dress; bandeau of gold and silver, or 
jewels, with small silver gauze wings attached to it, one on each 
side of the head ; silver or gold wand. 



THE COMPLIMENTS OF THE SEASON. 47 

SCENE— A DRAWING-ROOM. 

(If Convenient Curtains at the back to open when required. 

Enter the Old Yeae. 
Old Year. Pity the sorrows of a poor Old Year, 

Whose trembling limbs have borne him to your 
door — 
Whose days have dwindled to the shortest here, 

And who, "to-morrow," will behold no more ! 
This is my last appearance on the stage, 

And so to say farewell I have made bold. 
Yet not so very great appears my age. 

Though an old year, I am but a year old ! 
The fact is — I've been living much too fast, 

A fashion which has made so many fail; 
The world has had a rage for some time past 
To go a-head — and thereby hangs a tale. 
Don't be alarmed ! I haven't time to tell it, 

For *'soft ! methinks I scent the morning air;" 
And as I'm not allowed to stop and .smell it, 

I'll call in christmas — he's got time to spare. 
(Calling) Christmas ! 

Enter Christmas 
Christmas. I'm coming ! no, I mean I'm come — 

That is I came 1 — I'm always making some 
Confusion in that verb ! It seems as though 
Christmas was always coming for to go. 
Old Y. To go il, I suspect you mean to say ; 
For you do go it finely while you stay. 
Excuse my poor old joke ! 
Christmas. Of course — O dear ! 

That's nothing to what I'm compelled to hear ! 
The poor old jokes are bad enough 'tis true; 
But mercy on us — hear some of the new. 
In cracking theirs, our former funny men 
Broke Priscian's head a little, now and then ; 
But these young wags run such a muck for fun, 
They knock his very brains out for a pun. 
Talking of going — arn't you gone ? (bells strike up). 
Old Y. All but. 

Christmas. It strikes me it's quite time for you to cut. 
Old Y- Yes, yes ! I hear the bells. Ah me ! just so 
They rang when I was born twelve months ago. 
Poor, silly, empty unreflecting things ! 
How can they tell what my successor brings ? 
They may regret, they cannot me recall ! 
Well, well; a happy new year to you all, 
This poor old body wishes from his soul; 
Time sounds my knell — I go to pay the toll. 



48 THE COMPLIMENTS OP THE SEASON. 

Duet— Old Year and Christmas. — Air, "Gavotte de Vesiris." 

Old Y. Just twelve o'clock ! 

My stay by minutes now I measure; 
At twelve o'clock — 
Precisely I take flight. 
You'll see me out ? (to Christmas) 
Christmas. Of course I mustn't add— with pleasure, 
Or you no doubt 
Would think it not polite 
Old Y. Let not my leave-taking 

Mar your merry-making; 

For the New year yearning, 
Time his hour-glass turning, 
Will like an ancient watchman soon shout — 
"Past twelve o'clock !" 
Together. For the New Year yearning, etc. 

Christmas. You've helped to keep up Christmas since he 
came. 
In turn he's bound to do for you the same; 
So take my arm, I'll see you to the door. 
I've seen some hundreds of you out before, 
Old Y. I hope you'll live to see out many more. 
Christmas. Thank you. 
He leads Old Year to the door or wing — clock chimes the four 
quarters then strikes twelve. 

Old Y. Good night ! the clock has given me warning. 
Christmas. Good night ! 

They shake hands — exit Old Year. 
There goes another year. 

Bells strike up — Enter New Year. 
New Year. Good morning ! 

Christmas. Whoe'er you are, young sir, the same to you. 
New Y. I'm the New Year. 

Christmas. I thought so, How d'ye do ? 

New Y. Do ? I'm as fresh as paint, sir. 
Christmas. And you look it. 

New Y. I thought that old bloke never meant to hook it. 

Either the clock or he was awful slow. 
Christmas I hope you're not too fast ? 
New Y. Why fancy so ? 

Christmas. There's something in your manner, speech, 
and face, 
Which makes me think you prone to go the pace; 
And it's the pace that kills nineteen in twenty; 
Remember Caesar's words, " Feslina lente." 
New Y. Ah, well, we'll see, sir; but to all around 
You introduce me as in duty bound. 



THE COMPLIMENTS OF THE SEASON. 49 

Chbistmas. Upon my life I don't know what to say. 
New Y. Oh — "Here we are again !' 
Chbistmas. We again ? Nay, 

Christmas has here oft made his holly bow, 
But you, my friend, were never here till now. 
However if I must, of course I must; 
I'll say the best I can for you on trust. 
(to Company) Ladies and gentlemen, you've welcomed 

me in, 
Now this is the New Year you've come to see in: 
I could tell tales of him who has gone out; 
But this young chap I know no more about 
Than you do. He is just the sort of lad 
May turn out good, or may go to the bad. 
He don't seem, I should say, much like a sappy one, 
And we'll all wish that he may be a happy one. 
There, (to New Year) Now say something for yourself 

— address 
The meeting, and your sentiments express. 
Give them some hint of what you mean to do. 
New Y. I ! Bless your heart ! I know no more than you. 
Chbistmas. Indeed; suppose then you consult the table. 
New Y. To answer do you think it really able ? 
Chbistmas. It has been found to answer wond'rous well 

By those who know the trick to make it tell 
New Year. I'll try it then. Here, will this table do ? 
Chbistmas In one sense, I've no doubt it will do you. 

But we must have a medium I suppose. 
New Y; "A generous friendship no cold medium knows." 
Chbiptmas. Oh, if a generous friendship you would test, 
You'll find "the circulating medium*' best; 
If that responds according to your need, 
The friendship will be generous indeed ; 
But in this special sort of necromancy. 
'Tis no cold medium but a heated fancy, 
That works the spell. So to your aid I'll call 
Fancy — the greatest medium of them all. 
( Waves his wand— the curtains at the back open and discover 
Fancy (or she enters), of course in a fancy dress.) 
Trio. — Christmas, New Yeae and Fancy. 
" Va pensiero sutt dor ate. " — " Nabucco. " (Verdi). 
Chbistmas. Fancy ! Queen of Imagination, 
By the aid of thy potent spell, 
Be our medium of communication, 
With the spirits you know so well. 
New Y. Of the New year in life now starting 

The coming events imparting 
Fancy I appear at your invocation ; 

And by the aid of my potent spell, 



60 THE COMPLIMENTS OE THE SEASON. 

Will afford you such information 

As the spirits may choose to sell; 
To your visual organ impartin' 
The pow'r of Elizabeth Martin 
• j Fancy ! Queen of, etc. 

ALL * ( I appear, etc. 

Fancy. You wish for a seanee ? 
Chbistmas. Exactly so ! 

Fancy, (seating herself at the table) Be seated. What is it you 

wish to know ? 
New Y. All that will happen during my existence. 
Fancy, A mode«t wish ; but yet with my assistance, 

It may be gratified. You're the New Year. 
New Y. {to Chbistmas) Now how could she know that ? 
Christmas 'Twas pretty clear 

From what you told her. Folks in conversation 
Furnish themselves half of the information. 
Fancy. Is there a spirit in the room ! (a rap is heard) 
You hear, 
There is. 
NewY Could you induce it to appear? 

Fancy. A hand or foot I have contrived to show, 
But the whole animal I never go. 
Still upon this particular occasion 
Fancy might do it by extreme persuasion. 
New Y. Whose spirit is it 
Chbistmas. At the name to get, 

You must call over all the alphabet. 
Fancy. My spell's more rapid. Such work is to me, 
Without an alphabet mere ABC, 
This spirit was a weather-wise magician. 
Known by the name of Francis Moore, physician 
New Y. The great astrologer — the very man ! 

O, let us, Fancy, see him if we can. 
Fancy Well, if on Fancy you have full reliance, 
She will set all your senses at defiance. 
Behold ! (waves her wand) 

The spirit of Fbancts Moobe rises from behind the table (or en- 
ters), dressed like a magician, icith an astrolabe in one hand, 
and a wand in the other. 
New Y. I see him ; astrolabe in hand — 

The magic mantle — the divining wand. 
He is all there ; and I am now all ear. 
Fancy, (to Spirit) Say month by month what will occur 

this year. 
Spibit Aquarius comes with his watering pot — 

Some folks may find that they've in hot water got. 

For congress, office-seekers will be waiting, 

And should there be hard frost there may be skating. 



THE COMPLIMENTS OF THE SEASON. 51 

New Y. That's an-ice calculation; cool and wary. 
Fancy. What's your prediction, pray, for February ? 
Spirit. Some love-letters will furnish food for laugnter. 

On the fourteenth, a day before or after. 
Fancy. March ? 
Spibit. A malignant aspect now has Mars — 

If peace be not preserved — there will be wars. 
New Y. {to Christmas) This prophet seems to me uncom- 
mon small. 

I shall not profit by such news at all. 
Fancy. April ? 
Spirit. Unsettled are the mining powers, 

Which renders probable the fall — of showers. 
New Y. Bother the weather ! Tell us some event, 

Which in the month of May is imminent. 
Spirit. Harper's horse a sportsman wins a lot upon. 

If the horse isn't scratched, he's put the pot upon. 
New Y. Give us a tip. Tell us whieh horse will win. 
Spirit. Between ourselves the one that first comes in. 
New Y. The spirit will move me to kick it soon. 

I'll ask it no more questions. 
Fancy. What in June ? 

Spirit. Let concert goers now for squalls look out, 

And certain parties are much talked about. 
Fancy. July ? 

Spirit.— The dog-star rages— and 'tis puzzling 

To say if dogs or damsels most needs muslin. 
Fancy. August ? 
Spirit. A potentate renowned for craft 

Great danger runs of being— photographed. 
Fancy. September? 
Spirit. To much peril man exposes; 

Many will get their goose cooked ere it close*. 
Fancy. October? 
Spirit. Hops are either cheap —or dear, 

And something's brewing which may turn out beer. 
Fancy. November ? 
Spirit. On the first Tuesday you may. 

Expect commotions both by night and day; 

Votes on the forms on the latter fogs. 

May party leaders not prove demagogues] 
Fancy. December ? 
Spirit. Matters in the East look murky — 

Projects reviving to dismember Turkey. 
New Y. Oh, worse and worse ! This is the spirit sure 

Of Old Joe Miller, not of Francis Moore ; 

That patters with us in a double sense. 

I'll hear no more — unreal mookery hence! 

(Spout sinks or exits. ) 



52 THE COMPLIMENTS OF THE SEASON. 

For Information still I am athirst; 

Not a whit wiser than I was at first. 
Christmas. Yes, from this seance you hare learned what 
may 

Be useful to you while on earth you stay. 

As sings a bard too little read of late, 

"Heaven from all mortals hides the book of fate.'* 

And those who would pretend to read its pages 

Deserve what schoolboys mean by "monkey's wages." 

Your task is not to pry into that mystery, 

But add a glorious page to modern history. 

There's work enough for a good year before you, 

Get it well done, and — no — we can't encore you ; 

But we'll raise a statue to your name 

New Y. Not if you love me ! thank you all the same; 

For judging from the specimens I see, 

I'd rather nobody should chisel me. 
Christmas, (rive art new life !— free it from job and fetter, 

And take my word for it, 'twill soon be better'! 

It is not genius that otir country lacks, 

But courage to contend with cant and quacks; 

There's room in all things for much reformation. 

Bid trade revive, check frantic speculation; 

Stop fools from plunging into where they burn, ye 1 

secure us safety on a railway journey; 

The prices down of beef and mutton beat for us; 

And don't drive us to eat what isn't meet for us ; 

If horseflesh won't suffice to feed the masses, 

Our next resource will certainly be asses ; 

And heaven only knows where that will end, 

Some people won't have left a single friend — • 

The present company excepted • 

SiwT. Ob, 

I say, shut up ? Don't go on preaching so. 

I came to pass a merry morning here, 

And thought you'd make us grin from year to year. 

Not stand there lecturing in this dull way: 

It's like Ash Wednesday more than New Year's Day 

If anything my temper irritates, 

It's waiting — and of all waits, Christmas Waits. 
Christmas. I knew it I I foretold you would be fast. 

But let us hope you'll be all right at last. 

With Fancy, we have only made believe 

To raise our spirits upon New Year's Eve; 

And wouldn't for the world call up blue devils; 

Therefore have with you to our Christmas revela 

I waive all ceremony with my holly. 

Away with forms, and' let's be "awful jolly." 



THE COMPLIMENTS OP THE SEASON. 52 

Of .ardent spirits here's a famous stock ! 
It's past twelve ! go it boys, "like one o'clock !" 
Make everything to everybody pleasant, 
And prove no pastime can surpass the present. 

Finale—Air, "The Season of the Tear." 

Fancy. Oh, could we only fancy your fancy we have hit; 
But that's a flight of fancy I scarcely dare permit; 
So will but hope upon our thoughts you won't be too 

severe, 
And I wish you all the compliments of the season of the 
year. 
New Y, I trust a meny Christmas you each and all have 
known 
And a happy new year wish you for my sake and your 

own; 
Your pockets full of money and your cellars full of 

beer," 
The good old-fashioned compliments of the season of 
the year 
Christmas. Now bring me, boys, my wassail bowl with spicy 
drink fill'd up, 
King Christmas drinks to all around in his best "loving 

cup;" 
When he says "May God bless you," the wish is most 

sincere, 
And not an empty compliment ot the season of the year. 

Cubtain Falls. 



ABANDONDINO THE BLOODLESS. 

A ROMANTIC DRAMA. 



\ 

DbAMATIS PEESONaS. 

Abandondino the Bloodless. 
MTSTEEioira Individxjal (in a cloak). Two Cocks (who crow). 



Scene— An Inn Chamber, 
Abandonmno discovered sitting gloomily in the centre; he is pale and 
bilious. An old fashioned kitehen clock on the right of the stag* 
strikes. 




Aband. (counting the strokes) One ! — Two ! — Three ! — Four ! — '■ 
Five !— Six !— Seven !— Eight !— Nine !— Ten !— Eleven !— Twelve! 
— Thirteen ! — Fourteen ! — Humph ! — it will soon be daybreak. 
For three years and a quarter no traveller has put up at my 
hostelry. "With difficulty, therefore can I squeeze a profit from 
my annual returns. The house I fear me has an evil name. 
Seven poor travelers who stayed here during the great race week 
of five years since, when Maccaroni ran a dead heat with Car- 
dinal Wiseman, and both won by eight necks — ever since then, I 
say, when the seven customers came in and did not go out again 
slander's venomed breath has been a going on at me awful. It's 
54 



ABANDONDINO. 55 

fearful to be alone and know what I know— But what is this, 
Abandondino— a tear ? luckily it fell in the spittoon. Con- 
science, get out ! (mnsic, a knock. ) 

Aband. Who's there? 

Voice. Me ! 

Aband. Ha ! That is the smith's vice ! Come in ! 

(opens door.. 

Enter Mystebious Individual in a cloak, l. 

Individual. I would sleep here ! There is gold ! Call me 
at half-past four in the afternoon of next Friday week. 

Aband. (aside after several strong spasms) Next Friday week ! 
the fatal day on which I killed my wife and packed off my in- 
fant son and hare in a game hamper, directing it to the Chan- 
cellor of the Exchequer on account of unpaid Income-tax (after 
a struggle with himself turns even more pale and bilious if possible 
than before — to Individual) You — you cannot sleep here. 

Individual, (sitting c. ) I will, (sleeps. ) 

Aband. How sudden is the slumbering of the innocent. 

Individual. ( reviving suddenly) Oh, by the way, my luggage 
is without, consisting of a couple of pen wipers and a tooth 
brush. Fetch them. 

Aband. (aside with malignity) 'Twas ever thus from childhood's 
hour; but I will humor him. Exit b. 

Individual, (looking around) Time indeed works wonders, and 
honi soit qui mal ypense; but I anticipate. 

Abandondino returns with box, b. 

Abandondino. Why travel with this ? (holding up the tooth brush) 
I keep one for the use of all my customers. 

Individual. Varlet, the bloom is on the rye, and let the best 
man win. 

Aband. Enough, I am answered. 

Individual. Remember next Friday week, at half past four. 
(Sleeps.) 

Aband. The day ! the hour ! He sleeps, (in a hoarse whisper 
and exhibiting as many teeth as possible) He must never WAKE ! 
(creeps stealthily up to him and bawls xoith all his might into his ear) 
Boohoo ! Hurryabagoolabah ! (pause.) 

Individual (in his sleep) Some one whispered my mother's 
name. 

Aband. Poor boy. And yet he must die. (goes to clock, opens 
it, and produces an enormous horse pistol). This pistol is loaded . 
with powder, several slugs, and a couple of ordinary snails. 
What is this feeling that comes over me and chills me to the 
marrow bone ? Pshaw ! also Tush ! likewise Pish ! not mention 
Bosh ! (points the pistol at Individual) One, two — (a loud crow is 
heard) Abandondino drops the pistol.) 



56 THE WILD WOLF OP TABTABY. 

The rooster's toll'd the hour of parting night. 
'Tis he my lord, the burly Yankee cock, 
The cock crows sal-volatile to the morn. 

Individual, (awakes) Where is my box? 

Aband. There. 

Individual. It contains a change of linen and the certificate 
of my birth. 

Adand. His loose kit. and his stiff-kit — oh, agony, you have 
a strawberry pottle on your middle temple ? 

Individual. Yes, a hautboy. 

Aband. Hautboy ! Ho, boy you are my boy ! 

Individual. And you— you— if I am your son, there can be 
but one conclusion — namely, that you are my — 

Aband. Father. Yes. Embrace me ! (embrace— the two roosters 
appear at window and crow) Nothing but the approbation of our 
kind friends is now neccessary. 

Individual. Here are our hands — join but yours, then (hold- 
ing out his luggage) Box 

Aband (pointing to the roosters) And Cocks^ 

Both. Are satisfied. (Curtain.) 



THE WILD WOLF OF TARTARY. 

OB, 

THE EMPTY KHAN AND THE KHU&DISH 
CONSPIRATOKS. 

A GBAND EQUESTBIAN DEAMATIC SPECTACLE. 



CHARACTERS. 

DEAMATIS PEBSON.E. 

Asstd (the lartaric Elian) I 2nd Conspieatoe. 

Al Kali (his enemy). ' 3ed Conspieatob. 

1st. Conspieatoe. Couetiees, etc. 

Scene. — The Steppes of Tartary. 
Enter Theee Kuedish Conspieatoes at different entrances. 

1st Con. The Khan of Tartary is 

2nd Con. Worse ! I consider him 

3ed Con. Why mince matters ? It is universally admitted^ 
he— 0~ 

1st Con. He must not live. 

2nd Con. Certainly not, it is for the interest of the State, and 
the general community that he should die. That being deter- 
mined upon, it simply waits for us to settle when. , - 



THE WILD WOLlf OF TARTART. 



67 



3rd Con. At once — on this spot {indicates a particular place on 
the stage, which is inspected and approved of by 1st and 2nd Con- 
spirators) 

1st Con. But see— he comes ! 

2nd Con. Base tyrant; he is always coming. 

3rd Con. (with grim intensity) But he will soon be going ! 

1st Con. Muffle me, night, awhile, (retires to be muffled, r.) 

2nd Con. "Shades of evening close not o'er us. ' 

(retires, l.) 
3rd Con. (to audience) They think I am with them ; but — ha, 
ha ! no matter. 

(Music. — 3rd Conspirator loinks twice; produces handcuffs, 
kisses them with fervor, and hides them again— a sudden and 
tremenduous burst of noisy martial music, in which there is more 
than the ordinary amount of cymbal— after a few bars of a loud 
military march, the music ceases) 

GEAND PEOCESSION. 




58 



THE WILD WOLF OP TARTABY. 




3rd Con. (after having thrown himself on the stage and listened 
with his ear close to the boards) Ha ! surely I cannot be mistaken ; 
there is the sound of music ! (tremendous solo on the ophecleide) At 
first I took it for the sort sigh of the wind, or the plaintive wail 
of the wood violet. However repetition convinces me it is the 
Imperial band of the Tartarian Khan; he whose life— but I an- 
ticipate. My two companions have gone different ways; I will 
go up the Steppes until I have arrived sufficiently high to see 
them, and then— ha ! ha ! to keep an eye on both, (goes off 
stealthily — march continued) 

Enter the Pioneer Forte, followed by Dancing Dervishes — then 
Four Tartar Emetics (or private physicians to the Khan) — 
then the Prime Minister Tar-Tar Samivel, in his robes of office — 
then an Array of Koyal Academicians, drawn in a handsome 
crate de visile or morning-call-coach — then the Imperial Dra- 
matic Company of Cossacks, who of co-sacks so admirably — 
then several Plum Tartras, being the wealthiest men of the 
kingdom, some of them being Sir-cash^uns— following these 



THE WILD 'WOLF OP TABTABY. 59 

come the Elian's Corps de Ballet, composed of the Cream op 
Tartar Dancers — and then the Khan in a splendid carriage of 
state — Tag Rag and Roberttail in (very) ordinary to the Khan 
— the Crowd throw up their caps, and. wave their handkerchiefs, 
whilst the Musicians flourish their trumpets. 

Khan, (coming down) Bless you, my Children ! 

1st Courtier. What eloquence ! 

2nd Courtier. And what brevity ! 

3rd Courtier (a icag). Which is the soul of wit ? (all laugh, in 
which the Court joins) 

Khan. But where is Al Kali, my nephew ? 

Enter Al Kali, r. He is sulky and defiant. 

Khan. Al Kali, I hope I see you. 

All Khan, I scorn and spit upon ye ! Who killed my father, 
mother, two sisters, three brothers, seven servants, house, horse, 
and pony-chaise ? Who devastated my home, upset my Lares 
and Penates, blighted the joy of my household, and set his cruel 
foot upon the domestic beetle of my hearth-stone ? Echo an- 
swers, " Which it's the Khan." 

Khan. Echo not only speaks bad grammar, but lies in her 
throat, (draws his rifle, and cocks his sceptre) Thus doth Assid 
Khan punish those who rebel against his authority, (selects a 
soft spot on the head of Al Kali, and with one blow fells him to the 
earth). 

Khan. And now we will proceed upon our journey. 

(Lively music — the Procession wends its way over the Steppes, 
B. u. e., leaving the prostrate nephew of the Khan in the centre 
of the stage pale and determined). 

Al Kali. Can it be ? or is it all a hideous dream ! A blow ! 
and delivered with a fatal steadiness of aim upon the one bald 
oasis in my Desert of fcJa-hairer!-f- I have endured much, but 
now (whistles). 

Enter simultaneously the Three Conspirators. 

'Tis well ! not a moment must be lost in securing the crown of 
the kingdom, and our own heads ; a second's delay may be fatal 
A short pause for a glee, and then to horse. 

Glee — the 3rd Conspirator pretending to join in, but, for motives of 
his own, which will transpire in the sequel, not doing so. 

The Wolf of the Steppes is a terrible thing, 

It flies o'er the earth with a light'ning wing ; 

Oh, beware ! oh, beware ! when there's no one by, 

Of the feverish flash in that animal's eye ; 

For it winks and it blinks with a hateful sneer, 

And its yell is doom in the travellers ear ; 

And its terrible teeth are all bared to the gums, 



» DO THE WILD WOLF OF TARTAR?. 

And its equal to any nutrition that comes 
In the way of the Wolf — in the dead of the night ; 
For he's got a peculiar sort ot a bite ; 
And he's always as hungry as hungry can be 
Is the Wolf of the Steppes. 
3rd Con. {cutting in) Which are not in Step-nee. 

(indignation on the part of the two other Conspirators, and sneer 
of contempt from Al Kali— the chorus is then repeated pianis- 
simo, and to the final strains of the music, the Two Conspira- 
tors and Al Kali slink off, r. — the 3rd Conspirator is left 
on the stage. ) 

3rd Con. Since I was an infant, and took delight in tinselling 
Skelt's penny characters, I have always delighted in foiling vil- 
lains. Here comes the Khan ! More partial to the charms of 
virtuous solitude than the pomp and parade of regal splendor, 
he has come to this lone spot to cool himself. Humph ! 

Enter the Khan, nfleclively, r. u. e. 

Khan. Where is my long-lost son ? Ah ! where is he ? Years 
have rolled by, but he has never returned. And yet I was never 
cruel to him ; never spoke one harsh word to him. Perhaps — 
indeed more than likely — he is dead. How many thousand of 
my poorer subjects are at this hour asleep ! J have not slept 
since my boy left his home. It is some years now. Ya-a-a-h ! 
(yawns) I feel somewhat drowsy, (lies doun) "Uneasy lies the 
head that wears a crown." (takes off his crown, and wrapping it in 
his ermine robe, makes an extemporaneous pillow of it) How sweet it 
is to quit the hubbub of the court for the calm seclusion of soli- 
tude ! May the present moment be the worst of our lives. 



3rd Con. (gazing on the sleeping form of the Khan) Humph ! yes, 
ah, indeed ; just so, of course ; and yet why ? but it always was 
so ; and all things considered — why not ? (weeps copiously) 

Enter the Wild Wolf of Tartart, hungry, l. u. e. 

3rd Con. What do I see ? The Volpas ! The Wild Wolf ! The 
terror of the country ? What is to be done ? 

(the Wild Wolf walks round the Khan, evidently with the object 
of selecting a soft place to begin upon) 

Khan, (in his sleep) My son, my Waldemar, my boy ! If he 
will return to his agonized parent, all shall be forgiven. No 
cards. Friends will please accept this intimation. P. P. C, and 
I may add E.V.S.V.P. For characters see small bills, (again 
sleeps) 

3rd Con. to Wild Wolf) Hoosh ! (shakes hisjisi at him) 

Wsl» Weu. H»w«wowgrrrb»llwrnow I. 



THB 'WILD WOLF OF TARTARY. CI 

3rd Con. Ha ! I have my two revolvers. I will fire fit him; 
or perish in the attempt, (fires the twelve barrels — misses each lime 
— draws his sword) This is to thy heart-a ! (runs the Wild Wolf 
through ; the blade having passed Ihrouyh the body of the Wolf, grazes 
the calf of the sleeping Monarch— he rises). 

Khan. What ! Treachery ! (springs the Imperial rattle). 
Enler, on horseback, the Suite— 1st and 2nd Conspirators very 
prominent — Al Kali likewise forward. 

Khan. Assassination ! Seize the slave ! 

Al Kali. Never ! He was but doing my bidding. He is in 
my pay ; concealment is no longer of any avail. I must havo 
the crown. Khan, you're an old idiot. The people are with 
me. Are you not people ? (no reply from the people) Yes; I see your 
hearts are too full for words, (to Khan) Die I (he thrusts at the 
Khan — the blade is parried by 3rd Conspirator, who appears in the 
simple bid effective uniform of the Tartarian detective— before Al Kali 
can resist, the quondam conspirator handcuffs him — consternation) 
Sold again ! 

Detective, (pocketing the reward which has been handed him by 
ihe First Lord of the Treasury) And got the money. 

Khan, (to Detective) You have preserved my life; but some- 
thing tells me you are more near and dear to me than that uni- 
form would suggest. You are 

Detective. Do not press me, jour Majesty. Seek not to know 
•who I am. 

Khan, (greatly agitated) You had a father ? 

Detective. I admit it. 

Khan, (more agitated than ever) I had a son, (ihe Courtiers, Troops 
Physicians, and Supernumeraries become painfully enterested) Tell 
me— in pity, tell me — are you my son ? 

Detecttve. Hush ! (leads the Khan foward with a great air of 
mystery) I would rather have perished in a foreign land, than 
have divulged this dreadful secret, but 

Khan. Proceed — ■ this suspense is awful ! Are you my son? 

Detective. No your Majesty; I am not. 

Khan. Oh indeed, (reflects for some time, and then waking up to 
the necessity for action, smilingly observes) Then there is nothing 
left me but to ask our kind friends to overlook the many failings 
of the Wild Wolf of Tartary, the Empty Khan, and the Threo 
Kurdish Conspirators, (general discharge of artillery — most of ihe 
men returning to their families — as the curtain descends_ toith rapid 
strides. 



Curtain. 



THE EVER-SO-LITTLE BEAR, 



THE EVER-SO-LITTLE BEAE; 



THE_PALE FACES AND THE PUTEMINDECAULDEON 
INDIANS. 



DRAMATIS PERSONS!. 



Pongowongo (the Great Coal- 
scuttle, Chief of his Tribe). 
Kowdi. (Chief of another Tribe). 



Paramatta (the Prairie flower). 
Native Warriors. 



Scene — The boundless Prairie, visible as far as the neck stretches. ■ 

Enter a Procession of Native Warriors with a pipe a-piece, r. u. e. 
2 hey sit in a demi-semi-circle, into which bounds Pongowongo th« 
Great Coalscuttle. 




r Pongo. Tribe of the Putemindecanldron Indians, sons of the 
forest and the prairie, partners of Pongowongo's toil, of Pongo- 

■wongo's feelings, of Pongowongo's fame (sounds of dissent) 

Another hiss and I leave off. (a volley of hisses immediately) Now I 
just shan't leave off— there. 

Indian. The Great Coalscuttle has spoken. 

Pongo. Which, begging your pardon and granting your grace, 
the Great Coalscuttle means to go on. (weeps). 

Two op the Waewors, (who are not weeping, in a lucid interval) 
We shall go (they go, u.) 



THE EVER-SO-LITTLE BEA.B 63 

All the other Warriors, (wiping their eyes) A good idea— so 
will we. (they go, l.) 

Pongo. (solus) They have left their chief to his mournful 
reflections— beasts ! but no matter; what can you expect from a 
set of wretches who paint their noses sky-blue, and eat their 
enemies without vegetables? Never mind, I have made up my 
mind; I will be civilized. Here goes, (is retiring with the firm 
determination of becoming civilized immediately, when he is intercepted in 
his path and object by another object, Rowdi the Ever-so-Little Hear). 

Kowdi. (with extraordinary self-possession) Humph ! 

Pongo. Let me go by. 

Kowdi. (who is sarcastic No, you are base coin, and cannot 
pass. 




Pongo. (with Muse malignity) I don't see it, and what's more I 
icon'J see it. 

Eowdi. (preparing to scalp him) You shall. 
i Pongo. (shutting both eyes) I won't. 

Kowdi. Then die ! (seizes him by the top-knot, and commences 
sawing at it with the edge of his tomahawk— pauses for breath, the tom- 
ahawk being out of condition). 

Pongo. Much more of this and you rouse an Indian's indom- 
itable nature. 

Kowdi. These shilling tomahawks of Brummagen are really in 
ninety-nine cases out of a hundred 

Pongo. (suddenly) Ha ! I have you now ! In ninety-nine cases, 
eh ! They are never in cases ; they are always wrapped in paper. 
Now what do you say ? 

Kowdi. What do I say ? Why that 'twere vain to tell thee all I 
feel — and 'twas within a mile of Endinboro' town. 

Pongo. Base subterfuge; but it shall not avail you. The palis- 
adoes of the pale faces' dwellings are visible to the completely 
undressed eye. I will go to them, and tell them my private 
opinion of your character. 



"64 THE EYER'-SO-LITTLE BEAR. 

Kowdi. Do so; but ere you do so, allow me to repeat — die ! 
(is about to kill Pongowongo once more, when Paramatta enters, with 
a rifle across her shoulder, and transfixes him to the spot— Kowdi 
drops his fell determination, and is for some moments unable to pick it 
up again). 

Param. Would you lift your Land against an aged parent ? 

Kowdi. I would. 

Param. Then you are unworthy the name of a brave sailor. 

Kowdi. (trembles) I — I — am. (aside) Confusion ! can she suspect 
me? What can I do to disarm suspicion ? Ha ! I have it. (to 
Paramatta) Beautious daughter of the pathless prairie 

Pongo. Nothing of the kind; she's the beauteous daughter of 
me. 

Kowdi. To see you leaping the indigenous frog, to watch you 
skipping the native novel, to behold you bound over to keep the 
peace, and all with the agility of the wild soft roe of the old her- 
ring, was to admire you— to love you. It is true you belong to 
a nobler and wealthier tribe than ours, that you revel in riches, 
all settled upon yourself, and I am poor indeed; but I will waive 
all that. Come to my burning bosom and my warm wig — I mean 
my wig-wam. All my fortune I lay at your feet, (placing bow 
and arrows and a postage stump on the ground) All is thine, if you 
will, as has been before observed, " be mine." An answer will 
oblige. 

Param. Oh, this struggle between love and a lot of other 
things, and to think that a lot of other things are getting the 
worst of it. Brave sailor 

Kowdi. That fatal — them fatal— hem ! those fatal words again. 
What mean j'ou ? 

Param. (to her father) Behold the fiend's war-paint; look at the 
devil's tattoo; both sham. He's no more an Indian than I am. 

Kowdi. Woman, another word, and I forget your sex and quit 
the prairies. 




Param. (gelling more excited as she goes on) Do you remember 
Portsmouth Hard. ? P# y»u remeuiVer J«miiMa Soft ? Bo you 



THE EVER-SO-LITTLE BEAK. , 65 

remember being pressed, and going to sea as flat as possible ? Do 
you remember striking your superior officer by your unintelli- 
gent bearing, and being elevated so much that you were actually 
sent up to the mast-head ? Do you remember forming a desper- 
ate resolution to drown yourself, and then, with a superhuman 
effort, actually changing your mind ? Do you remember deter- 
mining to do something and then not doing it? Do you remem- 
ber dining with the mess and deserting immediately afterwards? 
Do you ? 

Eowdi. (who has now become dogged) No, I don't. 

Pakam. (at a nonplus) Don't you? 

Pongo. (with a look of native idiolcy) I am all abroad. What 
does it all mean ? (to the audience) Perhaps our kyind friends 
can 

Eowm. No they can't — not one of them. 

Pakam. Then there is nothing for it but this, (takes off her 
hunting pouch, and puts on afresh expression) 

Eowdi. Horror Jemima ! 

Pongo. My child not my child ! this is too much for a warrior 
full of years, (retires to the back of the stage and snivels) 

Param. For years have I worn the unbecoming costume of a 
wild huntress of the exceedingly uninteresting prairie. For years 
have I assumed a different expression to my natural one. This, 
for the first six months, I found wearying, but I gradually be- 
came used to it, and I feel quite uncomfortable in getting back to 
my own look. I swore revenge against you for your deceit; I 
followed you in the vessel ; I was the man at the wheel, and of 
course no one was allowed to speak to me; I tracked you through 
the forest; I saw you join the tribe of the Putemindecauldron 
Indians — I stole the sleeping daughter of Pongowongo out of her 
cradle, and put myself in her place. I painted, myself exactly 
like her, and the alteration was never discovered, and 

Pongo. (waking up) But what became of my dau 

Param. I have never taken my eyes off you since that day— in 
the trackless forests, in the boundless prairies, in the councils 
of the warriors, in the kettle drums of the elderly squaws, have 
I been watching you, and now— (loading her rifle) the moment of 
vengeance has arrived, and 

Pongo. But my daug 

Param. Old man, 6hut up ! (lakes aim at Rowdi) Are you ore- 
pared ? 

Eowdi. Certainly not. Have pity. 
J Param. What pity had you for me when — but I repeat — 

Pongo. I say, you know, about my daugh — - 
™ Eowdi. Pongowongo, tell her not to fire, or, at all events, come 
and stand before me. 

Pongo. See you hanged first.. 

Eowdi. And this is friendship ! 



66 THE EVER- SO-LITTLE BEAR. 

Pongo. My daught 

Pabam. I wait to hear you say you are prepared. 

Bowdi. Hah ! a brilliant idea ! Will you continue to wait un- 
til I say I am prepared ? 

Pabam. I will. 

Bowdi. Then nothiDg is wanting but the applause of our kyind 
friends who 

Pongo. But about my daughte 

Pabam. What do you mean ? 

Eowdi. Why simply that if you don't intend firing until I say 
I am prepared, you will have to wait a considerable time, for I 
will never say it. (folds his arms, and is about to put them in an envel- 
ope, when Pongowongo periinaciously and interrogatively remarks) 

Pongo. Excuse me, but is my daughter 

Pabam. That you shall never know. 

Pongo. Then blow cheeks snd crack your winds ! 

{raves aside) 

Eowdi. Can you forgive me ? 

Pabam. I can — I do. Take me to your manly bosom, and try 
to forget the troublous times which have stamped wrinkles upon 
your manly brow. As for me, I am getting grey, and the prairie 
has no charms for me. I freely give up the dirt, discomfort, and 
misery of al-fresco existence for the elegant delight and luxuries 
of civilization and progress. 

Eowdi. Unselfish generous darling ! Ah, still the same yield- 
ing angel; but what is that in the offing? a ship ? 

Pongo. (at back) There is no offing; this is the prairie, and the 
sea's miles away. 

Pabam. Poor old man; his mind still wanders. Come, let us 
for home, ho ! 

Eowdi. But first 

Pabam. What? 

Pongo. (cutting in) Why our kyind friends 

Pabam. Oh, ah ; may they never forget the lesson of to-night, 
but may it sink into the innermost recesses of their waistcoats, 
and console them in the chilling hours of coming winter, for 
tnough a burnt child fears the fire, the heart that can feel for 
another can also appreciate the charms of our uncultivated 
nature, and the rude, though simple-minded manners of the 
copper-colored children of the Prairies of our Western Wilds. 



Highland Reel and Curtain. 



THE WHITE BOMS OF THE PLANTATION. 67 



THE 

WHITE KOSE OF THE PLANTATION: 

OB, 

LUBLY ROSA, SAMBO DON'T COME. 

A NEGRO DRAMA. 



DBAMATIS PEBS0N.2BL 



Gbowls (an Overseer). 

Gincinnatus (a polished Black). 

Pete (an old Bigger). 

Rosa '.called " The WJiite Rose of the Plantation.' 



Scene. — A Cotton Held, in which several Negboes are picking the 
plant. Ovebseebs with whips are looking on; and in the back dis- 
tance is distinctly observable, lending an enchantment to the view with- 
out interest. Two Ootoboons and one Macgaboon are down in 
the front, and one old Negbo with a hump is up in the back. 

Opening Chorus. 

Down in Tennessee — 
Uly, oley, EE— 
Massa, misses, me, 
And Pickaninnee 
Went out for a spree 
And put out my knee, 
Uly, oley, EE. 

Rosa, (coming down) See the sun is sinking 

Down behind a cloud, 
And the moon like winking, 

Not by no means proud 
Is a gently rising 

Like a thingumbob. 
Oh ! how appetizing 

Is the sweet corn cob. 



THE WHITE ROSE OF THE PLANTATION. 



All the Slates. 



Dance around the kettle, 
In the dough nut pop, 

Let the dripping settle- 
Settle at the top. 

Down in Tennessee — 

Uly, oley, EE— 
Flip \\\) in de skid a majink, 

With & riddle cum dinky dee. 




{Ecstatic Dance on the part of the Negroes — after the dance most of the 
Slaves retire to their quarters, except the married ones, who no to 
their better halves. TJie stage is untenanted save by Eosa, tc/io is 
alone and unhappy) 

Eosa. I am alone. The merry sons of toil have retired to 
their happy homes, having picked the requisite time, namely, 
thirty-two hours out of the twenty-four, while I — I — but let me 
drown my miseries in a wild ditty of my youthful days. 

Song. 

' Twas in the dismal swamp, 

Where my father had the cramp, 
And my mother had a chronic rheumatiz-tiz-tiz; 

And where my brothers six, 

Had sciatica like bricks, 
For its p'r'aps the dampest neighborhood as is-is-is. 

It was one afternoon, 

I think but very soon, 
After I'd recovered from the ague, or, or, or, 

Neuralgia, can't say which, 

That young Lorrimor so rich, 
A coming down the road just by I sor, sor, sor. 



THE 'WHITE ROSE OF THE PLANTATION. 69 

Says he, " Your name, I pray ? " 

Says I, ' ' Sir, Rosa May ;" 
Says he, " I'll marry you upon the spot, spot, spot; '' 

But as there was no church, 

He left me in the lurch, 
And marry me of course why he could not, not, not. 

Though I'd a chronic cold, 

I very soon was sold, 
Oh miles away from Lorrimor, but he, he, he, 

Some day I'm sure will come, 

And Rosa will ran-som 
Down here in melancholy Tennessee-see-see. 

(Rosa retires as Growls, the overseer,'' enters, R.) 

Growls. There she is a settin' by herself, like the sun. When 
I look, upon that girl all my past life rushes afore me like a 
penny-rammer. Oh, 'orror ! likewise remorse ! also despair 1 
(weeps) 

Rosa. Ha ! Growls, and weeping too. 

Growls. Oh, Rose, once I was as innocent as you — innocenter 
I may say; but now! Oh Rosa, I have done things as would 
make your Lair curdle and your blood stand on end. I was 
scarcely four when I killed my father, in a mortal struggle, and 
he wassoon followed by my mothei-, who crossed my path and 
shared his fate. I had a brother— a little chubby boy —all inno- 
cence, frill and freckles — ask me not what became of him, 'cos I 
don't know. He was took away — far away, and I. /was left 
alone with my own dark thoughts, a small looking-glass, and my 
own 'orrid reflections. Rosa, my 'art is full and my 'ome is 
empty. Be my bride. All I have I lay at your feet. It ain't 
much, but it will serv6 to keep the wolf from the door; for, 
mark me, I shall not live long; about sixty-five more years will 
finish me off. You will then be able to choose a youthful bride- 
groom, more suited to your age. 

Rosa, (aside) The prospect is tempting — but oh, Lorrimor ! 

Growls. Remember how kind I have been to you, how I have 
winked at your being late in the field, and how when a remorse- 
less master has compelled me to administer chastisement to you 
I have dispersed the blows as much as possible over your beau- 
tiful black — I mean back. It always went against me to do it. 

Rosa. I beg your pardon, it went against me. 

Growls. Girl, your replies madden me. You must and shall 
be mine. 

Duet. 
Lubby Rosa, Sambo scum, 
Isn't fit to wed you — r~ 



70 THE WHITE EOSE OP THE PLANTATION^ 

Rosa, (with intelligence above her station) Turn, turn, turn. 

Growls. Say, you'll wed your faithful Growls 
He's got a tea-pot and six tow'ls. 
Oh, Rose, cold black Rose, 
I'm brimful of affection from my topknot to my toes. 

Rosa. You plead with an eloquence few women could find 
it in their hearts to resist, but 

Growls. Then away to a happier clime with me, where the 
boathook grows on the ketchup tree; where the roaring wind on 
the billowy deep keeps infant kids from their beauty sleep; 
where the wild bee hums all the newest airs, and the mustard 
plant grows thick on the stairs; where the possum hops in his 
light canoe, and the bounding brothers of Cariboo toss cabers 
high in the blithesome glee; where the oozly bird and the lively 
flea, the whistling oyster, the golden fleece, the great balloon, 
and the new police, dance round and round to a Christmas tune, 
while the street boys bellow out " Yar bar-loon," and the youth- 
ful sprigs of the house of Smith are sent with slaps up to bed 
forthwith, and the maid of Athens entwines her locks with pages 
torn out of Box and Cox, where all is revelry, all delight — will 
you come, my Rosa, so right and light; will you come, my Rosa, 
and off we goes — a — if you'll be Growl's cara sposa. 

Rosa, (overcome by the rhyme) Oh ! (faints) 
(Growls lifts her tip ana is about lo carry her off when he is in- 
iercepkd'by Cincinnatus, l., a young black) 

Cin. Hold, Growls ! 

Growls. Who are you calling old ? 

Cin. Am I not a man and brother? 

Growls. No, you ain't. 

Rosa, (reviving) Hah, that mysterious young negro who has 
done nothing but haunt me 

Growls. P'r'aps he's haunt Sally; yet, no, she was a woman, 
and he— he is 

Cin. A man and a brother. 

Rosa, (to Cincinnatus) Oh, save me. 

Cin. I will die in your defence or perish in the attempt. 

(Growls whistles — the stage is immediately filled by Overseers, 
Slaves, etc) 

Growls. Seize that man. (three Overseers who attempt it are 
immediately knocked-over-seers— Growls to Slaves) There are four 
hundred of you; every one of you lay hold of that fellow's col- 
lar. 

Pete, (o venerable Negro) No, Mas'r Growls, can't do it, Mas'r 
Growls, die rader than disobey Mas'r; Pete chop of his right 
hand rather than disobey Mas'r; Pete go through fire and water 



THE WHITE HOSE OF THE PLANTATION. 71 

for Mas'r; but before Pete raise him hand 'gainst Cincinnatus, 
Pete see Mas'r 

Cin. Stay ! fetch me a basin of warm water 

All. Hah ! 

Cin. And a piece of soap. 

All. Hoh! 

Cin. And a rough towel. 

All. Hooh ! 

(intense excitement whilst the basin is brought) 

Growls, (aside) I begin to 

Pete. So do I. 

Rosa. So do I. 

Evebybody. So do we all ! 

(Cincin. looks up with his face a pale brown) 

Rosa. Hah ! can it be ? Lor 

(Cincin. looks up with his face a paler brown still) 

Rosa. Ri (Cincin. looks up clean) 

Rosa. MOR ! ! ! (faints) 

Cin. Yes, it is your own Lorrimor; anxious to see how you 
behaved yourself in tli6 humble capacity of a cotton picker, I 
assumed the garments and hue of a man and brother, and amply 
have I been rewarded for my bold determination. Rosa, you 
are an ornament to any society. You shall be educated in 
French, Italian, German, Hibernian, the use of the globes 
and conic sections. In about twenty years you will be a fitting 
bride for me. 

Rosa, (delighted) So soon ! 

Geowls. (aside) Ha ! ha ! /shall not live to witness their hap- 
piness; I will starve myself into a premature decline. 

(retires to back and commences) 

Lobrimob. And now, let one of the stirring ditties of the mel- 
odious cotton pickers wind up the proceedings of the day. 

Finale. 
Dance and sing 
Ebery ting, 
Makes de nigger cheerful, 
And ob joy 
Without alloy, 
Ton our honors we're full. 
Bring de corn and make de mush, 
Bring the drink and make de lush, 
Heads as rough as scrubbing-brush, 
Shins so black and tender; 
Heel and toe it Sambos all, 
Keep alive de nigger ball, 
Rosa we a credit call, 
To de female gender. 

Dance and sing, &o. 



72 



THE WHITE BOSE OF THE PLANTATION. 




Gi'and Negro Ballet, concluding with picture; Lokbimob standing 
supper, Rosa standing on her toe, arid Growls {already much 
thinner) standing on his dignity — Black tire and 

Curtain. 



CHARADES IN ACTION; 



PLAYS WITHOUT WORDS. 



/.INTRODUCTION. 

This game is, as its name expresses it, a Charade, acted instead 
of spoken. The two most celebrated performers of the party 
choose " their sides," and, whilst the one group enacts the 
Charade, the other plays the part of audience. A word is then 
fixed upon by the corps dramatique, and "my first, my second, 
and my whole " is gone through as puzzlingly as possible in 
dumb show, each division making a separate and entire act At 
the conclusion of the drama, the guessing begins on the part of 
the audience. If they are successful, they in their turn per- 
form , if not, they still remain as audienee. 

The great rule to be observed in Acting Charades is — silence. 
Nothing more than an exclamation is allowed. All the rest must 
be done in the purest pantomime. 

If, on the working of the plot, there should be some sentence 
that it is impossible to express in dumb-show, and yet must be 
made clear to the audience, then placards may be used. As 
Hamlet says, they must " speak by the card." 

Another very important point with Acting Charades is the 
proper delivery of the gestures in the pantomimic readings of 
the parts. Every actor ought to study the different expressions 
and suitable actions of the passions. So much depends upon 
this, that, under these circumstances, perhaps it would be bet- 
ter to draw up a kind ot code of expressions, or laws for the bet- 
ter regulation ot frowns, smiles and gestures. 

Love, one would think, is too well known to require many 
directions. The pressing of the left side of the waistcoat or the 
book muslin, the tender look at the ceiling, and the gentle and 



74: INTRODUCTION. 



elegant swinging of the body, have always accompanied the 
declaration of a true devotion in tiie upright and dumb indi- 
vidual. The name may, perhaps, be made a little more devour- 
ing by the kissing of a miniature, or the embracing of a well- 
oiled ringlet or figure-of-six curl. 

Bage, like a mean husband, can only be managed by fits and 
starts. It may be pictured to an almost maddening amount by 
the frequent stamping of the foot, and the shaking of the fist. 
Frowning and grinding of teeth should be accompanied by 
opening the eyes to their greatest possible size ; and, if a great 
effect is desired to be produced, the room may be paced, pro- 
vided the legs of the performer are of a sufficient length to en- 
able him to take the entire length of the apartment in three or 
four strides. 

In Despair the action is slightly altered ; there, the limbs 
must almost seem to have lost their power. The actor must sink 
into a chair, pass his hand through his hair, with Ms five fingers 
spread open, like a bunch of carrots, or else, letting his arms fall 
down by his side, remain perfectly still — like a little boy on a 
frosty day — either gazing at his boots or the ceiling. Despair is 
made more tragic by a slight laugh, but this must only be at- 
tempted by the very best tragedians, on the principle that laugh- 
ter, like the measles, is very catching. 

Hope, like money sent by post, is seldom properly delivered.' 
Here there must be no violent gestures — everything must be 
soft and pleasant. The finger must be occasionally raised to the 
ear, and the performer's countenance wear a bright smile and a 
look of deep intensity, as if listening to the soft still voice 
within. The ceiling may be looked at frequently, and the bosom 
pressed ; but if great care is not taken, and the hands are not 
frequently clasped at arm's length, the audience will be imagin- 
ing you are in love— and in a state of love of course one is quite 
hojjeless. 

Disdain is perhaps the easiest passion to be expressed. The 
dignified waving of the hand and the sco-rnful look, gradually 
descending from top to toe, are well known to all who have been 
mistaken for waiters at evening parties. The eyes should be 
partly closed, the nose, if possible, turned up, the lips curved,, 
and the countenance gently raised to the ceiling. 

If any embracing should be required in the course of the 
piece, it is — under the present rigid Shermanian laws of society 
— better to leave this interesting process to husbandsand wives. 

The effect, from the sheer novelty of the situation, will be 
startling. If they should refuse, the old theatrical plan should 
be resorted to — press^heads over each other's shoulders, and look 
down each other's backs. 

Many pieces conclude with a blessing. This is simply done 
by raising both the hands over the heads of the kneeling couple; 



75 



look steadily at the ceiling till the eyes begin to water, and 
move the lips slowly, as if muttering. At the conclusion, the 
tear can be dashed away, and always has a pretty effect. Weep- 
ing is generally performed by burying the face in the handker- 
chief, bending the head to the breast, and nodding it violently. 

The great difficulty to be overcomo in Acting Charades is the 
absence of a theatrical wardrobe. Very often it is necessary to 
dress as a Roman, a Persian or a Turk. Sometimes an ancient 
knight is wanted in full armor. We have known Louis XIV 
called for in a full court dress, and only five minutes allowed for 
the toilet. In all these trials the mind must be exerted with 
high-pressure ingenuity/ The most prominent characteiistic of 
the costume must be seized and represented. In the Roman, a 
sheet will do for a tioga; in the knight, the coal-scuttle for hel- 
met, and the dish-cover for breast-plate, make capital armor; 
and in Louis XVI, the ermine victorine wig, for well-powdered 
peruke, and the dressing-gown for embroidered coat, would ex- 
press pretty well the desired costume. 

Great coats, veils, whips, walking-sticks, aprons, caps and 
gowns must be seized upon and used in the dressing up of the 
characters. No expense should be spared, and every sacrifice 
be made, even though the incidents of the piece should include 
the upsetting of a tray of tea-thingo, or the blacking of all the 
young ladies' faces. 



COURTSHIP. 

A CHARADE IN THREE ACTS. 



ACT I. 
COURT— 

dkamatis persons. 

Lord Chief-Justice. Cottnsel. 

Peisoner (a Sailor). Eight Ladies {his Wives). 

Jurymen. Policemen. Spectators. &c. 

Time — Before supper-time. 

A Court of Justice. At back of Drawing-room the Lord 
Chief- Justice 's easy-chair, and oilomanfor Counsel. To the right, 
sofa for Jurymen. To the left, fire-screen for Prisoner's dock. 

Flourish of splendidly-imitated trumpets. Enter procession 



76 COURTSHIP. 

in following order i— The Usher, holding the carpet-broom of 




office; His Honor, robed in gorgeous dressing-gown, and wear- 
ing a magnificent wig of ermine victorine; the Counsel, carry- 
ing carpet-bags, holding briefs of music, and properly wigged 
with night-caps; the wretched Sailor, who stands charged with 
the dreadful crime of polygamy, in the close custody of the 
Jailor, bearing the street-door key of office, and endeavoring to 
restrain hip prisoner from dancing the hornpipe.* 

As soon as Prisoner is safely secured behind fire-screen, he 
again breaks out in a hornpipe, when 

Enter the eight Plaintiffs (ladies whom the inconstant Pri- 
soner has respectively married in the several ports be lias visited.) 
They are natives of various countries, and dressed in their dif- 
ferent national costumes. 




At sight of the vile sailor they are deeply moved, and inti- 
mate a strong desire to get at him. 

Enter Jurymen, who are immediately packed into the sofa. 

Counsel for prosecution, in the most electrifying dumb show, 
proves, by pointing and frowning at Prisoner, who is still danc- 
ing, what a villain the man is. He shows the validity of each 
marriage by putting an imaginary ring on his third finger; and 
having referred to the case of "Lachi darem — in Ee Don Gio- 
vanni," Italian Duets, Vol. II, demands, by a thump on the otto- 
man, that the scoundrel should be punished with the utmost 
rigor of the law. 

Judge, putting on the black hat, proceeds to pass sentence of 
death on the wretched Prisoner, who evinces the utmost callous- 
ness by doing the split in the hornpipe. 

The Wives no sooner hear their joint Husband's doom, than 



♦Unfortunately for the pantomimic art, the hornpipe is the only 
left for proving that a gentleman in black continuations is a sailor. 



COURTSHIP. 



77 



an affectionate rush is made towards him, which the wretched 
man perceiving, he seeks safety in flight. 




Captain. 



act n. 

-SHIP. 

DRAMATIS PFRSONE. 

Sailors. Passengers. &a. 



Scene — The deck of thai fast-sailing craft, the Xront Drawing-room. 

Enter Captain, with noble cocked-hat, made out of yester- 
day's Herald, and hair brushes for epaulettes. He shouts through 
a set of quadrilles, when 

Enter several tight lads, who proceed to the music-stool to 
heave at the capstan and weigh the imaginary anchor; whilst 
others pulley-oi at the larboard bell-rope to let out gallant main- 
top ceiling. Two more brave boys take the wheel, and, by means 
of the arm-chair, steer the room beautifully. 

Passengers on after-ottoman now begin, by wild gesticula- 
tions — the turning up of eyes, and the sudden application of 
handkerchiefs— to intimate that they have passed the Lightship; 
whilst others, leaning over the backs of their chairs, implore 
their neighbors, in the most affecting pantomime, to throw them 
overboard. 

Enter Steward with basins, at which the passengers make a 
simultaneous rush. He also enables several poor creatures — who 
are walking about in the most extraordinary manner, and rolling 
from side to side of drawing-room- -to reach their berths. 

Presently a fearful storm is supposed to arise. The Passen- 
gers, binding life-preservers of comforters round their waists, 
jump hurriedly from their berths, and, springing over the sides 
of the ship, strike oat for the door, where exeunt omnes. 



78 



COURTSHIP. 



Old Father. 

Retainers. 



act in. 

COURTSHIP. 

DRAMATIS PERSONS. 

His Daughter. 
Lawyer. 



Her Lover. 
&c, &c. 



Scene — Apartment in mansion of Old Father. 

Enter Daughter, who shows, by pressing her side and swing- 
ing about, that she is deeply in love. She commences laving a 
table for two, and, having set down a lovely round of cold 
bandbox, she again expresses her fond devotion for one of the 
knives and forks. 

Sweet plaintive sounds of a splendidly-executed whistle are 
heard without. She claps her bands, and 

Enter Lover in full new uniform of the police, richly silvered 
with chalk. He glances anxiously at the cold round of band- 
box, and then gives vent to the wildest movements of joy. They 
advance to table, and feast commences. Just as he has helped 
himself to the lid, a loud and continued knocking is beard 
without. They become agitated; and Lover, endeavoring to 
avoid an angry parent's just wrath, seizes some bread, and 
plunges beneath table. 

_ Enter Oed Eather, suffering acutely from an attack of suppo- 
sitious gout, and forced to use brooms whilst walking. He ex- 
presses his surprise at banquet, but is pleased when he learns it 
was intended for him. Lover, growing tired of bread, endeavors 
to snatch some meat off his angel's plate. Old Father alarmed 
on seeing the mysterious hand, and, jumping from his seat, 
drags Lover from under the table. Grand exposure. He is 
about to curse the villain, when 

Enter Lawyer with placard announcing that the scoundrel has 
just come into a fortune of $2,000,000. He crowns him with a 
meat cover. Old Father relents, and blesses his children. Re- 
tainers and maid of all work rush in, and arrange themselves 
into the subjoined 




GKAND TABLEAU. 



7y 



MISCHIEF. 

A CHARADE IN THREE ACTS. 



ACT I. 
MISS- 



DRAMATIS PERSONiE. 

Old Loed. Aecheks. Musicians. Servants. &c. 

Scene— Splendid Turkey carpet lawn, surrounded by magnificently 
veneered woods. In the distance is seen (ike nv.isiej Canterbury. 
At one end of scene the window-curlains pitched as lent. Chairs 
for Visitors. 

Enter Old Lord, surrounded by Servants, who cheer him. 
On his breast he wears the star of the oyster scallop. 

Enter Musicians, who forthwith commence turning their bel- 
lows, and ascending the chromatic scale on their pokers-a-pis- 
ton. (Soft music.) 

Enter Ladies and Gentlemen, as merry foresters— the Ladies 
with pea-jackets over their dresses, and large bulgy umbrellas 
slung at back for quivers; the Gentlemen with their collars 
turned down, and their what-do-you-call-'ems tucked up above 
their boots; in their hands they carry their unstrung whips for 
bows. The Visitors are graciously received by the Old Lord, 
who exhibits to them the splendid bright poker they are to 
contend for. (Soft music.) 

Enter Servants, who arrange the loo-table as the target.* 

The archery commences in a most spirited manner, the 
barbed walking-stick darting from the twanging whip as fast 
and as far as it is possible to throw it. Not one can hit the 
bull's-eye of the loo-table. At last the Old Lord takes his whip. 
All look on with anxiety. He shoots, and the sound of broken 
glass tells that the arrow has smashed the conservatory. All 
laugh, and call upon the only remaining Young Lady to show 
her skill. She advances, rebuking them for their want of tal- 

•*Many ladies may object to liavo tbeir loo-tables made targets of; but 
tjiey should remember that the whole point of this Act lies in nobody hit- 
ting the mark. *■" 



MISCHIEF. 



ent. As she draws her walking-stick from its umbrella, betting 
begins. She takes her aim and tires, and immediately a pierc- 
ing scream is heard from Old Lord, who has been looking on, 
and who rushes about holding up to his face the Young Lady's 




arrow, which, by some mistake, has hit his eye instead of the 
bull's. (Soft music. ) 



ACT II. 
-CHIEF. 



dramatis pfrson.2e. 

Old Father. His Daughter. 

The Brigand Chief. 

Brigands. Postboy. Brigand's Wives. 

Scene — Imaginary cave, a little to the south of Rome. The fearful 
roar of a neighboring waterfall is supposed to be heard. 

Enter Brigands, who place their loaded brooms against the 
wall, and casting themselves on the floor, forthwith commence 
gambling wi-th flour-dredging dice-bos. 




Enter Wives in Italian costume, with flat napkins on their 
heads. Some begin working with their distaffs of umbrellas, 
whilst others hand round wine. 

Enter Chief, splendidly dressed, with coat-tails turned up, 
and wearing a hat made, peaked, with a copy of a paper; a spa- 
cious green baize table-cloth is thrown over his shoulders, and 
in his girdle are numerous double-barrelled hoop-sticks. He 



Suddenly a shrill whistle is heard. The Brigands seize their 



MISCHIEF. 81 

brooms, and following their Chief, hasten to attack the passage, 
lie-enter Brigands, dragging in Old Father, His Daughter 
(both in traveling costume), Postboy, and several other portman- 
teaus, bags and boxes, which the Wives proceed to rifle of their 
contents.* The Postboy is bound to the piano, whilst the Chief 
orders Old Father's boots to be taken off, and draws from them 
a purse heavily filled with card-counters. He distributes the 
counters among his men, and then, by laying his hand on his 
heart, and turning his eyes up to ceiling, intimates his extreme 
love for Young Lady. All the Brigands do the same, and a 
scuffle to possess her takes place. Suddenly the Chief rushes in 
with two full-cocked hoop-sticks, and, by shooting two of his 
men, restores peace and harmony. Then taking the Young 
Lady's hand, he kneels with her before Old Father, who blesses 
them. The Brigands cheer, and throw their hats in the air. 

GRAND TABLEAU. 

ACT HI. 
MISCHIEF. 

DRAMATIS PERSONS. 

A Medical Student. His Friend. The Doctor. 

Policemen. Citizens. &c. 

Scene — Tlie outside of the Doctor's house, with lighted candle placed as 
lamp over door. On one of the posts is a placard, on which is 
written "Night Bell." Eerostne lamps are lowered. 

Enter Medical Student and His Friend on tiptoe. They 
commence laughing and laying their fore-fingers on one side of 
their noses, to prove what a bit of fun they are going to have. ' 
By pointing at the Doctor's door, they show that he is to be their 
victim. After hu-sh-ing a little, they advance cautiously, and, 

* The fun herejmay be greatly increased by the production of several 
articles which form part of the mysteries of the toilet. A false front or a 
bustle is sure to produce a good three minutes' laughter. Grimaldi was the 
first to discover this. 



having wrenched from the door the flat-iron knocker, commence 
pulling the night-bell, which is made to ring violently by rat- 
tling a knife in a tuinbler in the passage outside. 

Enter Doctor, with sheet thrown round him as night-gown, 
and holding rush-light shade in his hand. Medical Student 
pretends he is very bad in his interior from having swallowed 
something deadly; and whilst doctor is feeling his pulse, he, by 
an act of legerdemain, brings the flat-iron knocker out by his 
nose. His friend then closes the door, and locks out the Doc- 
tor, who expresses his great alarm lest any one should come. 

A scuffle ensues, when enter the Neighbors in haste, with 
sheets thrown over them. They, in pantomime, intimate their 
great indignation at having been disturbed, and then gather 
round the Doctor, who forthwith recommences his scuffle with 
the Medical Student's Friend. During fight Medical Student 
creeps round, and after much blowing out of cheeks, stamping 
on floor, and holding of sides to express fun, proceeds to pin 
all the Spectators together. Doctor is knocked down, and all 
the Neighbors hasten to pick him up, but are held back by their 
being fastened to each other. Medical Student and his friend 
decamp. Great confusion. 




BIKTHDAY. 

A CHAEADE IN THREE ACTS. 



ACT I. 
BIKTH- 

dramatis persons. 

Mother. Her Child. Monthly Nurse. 

Husband. Lady Visitors. 

Scene 1. — The street outside of Mother's house. To the right the door, 

with flat-iron for knocker. 

Enter Monthly Nursb dressed in showy gown, with large cap 



and clean apron on. She points to the hoxise, and dangles an 
imaginary child in the air, to inform the audience that there 
has been a slight addition to the family. Then taking from her 
pocket a white glove, she fastens it round the knocker. Exit 
Monthly Nurse dancing for joy, and still dangling child. 

Scene 2. — Interior of Mother's bed-chamber. On the sofa is seen 
Mother in white jacket and cap, nursing her cluld. 

Enter Monthly Nurse leading in Husband. She shows to him 
Child, and by her actions informs him that it is exactly like 
him, having got his nose, his eyes, and his mouth. The de- 
lighted Father gives Monthly Nurse a small chromo. 

Enter Lady Visitors, who rush up to Mother, and, in impas- 
sioned action, inquire after her health. Monthly Nurse shows 
them the Baby. They are delighted with it, and clasp their 




hands in admiration. Each Lady Visitor requests to be allowed 
to kiss it. The delighted Mother smiles, and the Monthly Nurse 
madly embraces the Child. 

The Ladies are enchanted with the scene. Caudle is handed 
round and drank, and the Monthly Nurse, placing herself at 
the door, ushers out each Lady, who slips into her hand a sup- 
posed half-dollar. 



ACT II. 

—DAY (Dey). 

deamatis pfeson.e. 

The Dey of Algiers. Capttve Lady. Her Husband. 

Slaves. Militiamen. 

Scene — The Ramparts of Algeria. 

Enter the Dey of Algiers, dressed in his robes-de-chambre of 
state, with a turban on his head. He is followed by his Slaves, 
who arrange the ottoman for him to sit cross-legged upon, and 
hand him his pipe. 

Enter further Slaves, bringing with them the Lady, who has 
a veil tbrewa •v«r hor. The U&avbs salaam, and the ©by ©rdere 



84 



BLRTHDAV. 



them to remove the veil from their Captive. They obey him, 
and the Dey is visibly moved with the charms of the Lady. He 
rises from his seat and paces the room. Then advancing to her 
he presses his heart and declares his passion. She repulses him 
haughtily. He draws from his pocket a heavy purse, and offers 
it to her, but she points to her wedding ring, and casts the 
purse at the feet of the tyrant. 

The Dey's love is then turned to rage, and he gives a signal 
to his Slaves, who salaam, and bring in a cannon, made by 
placing the sofa bolster on the music stand. 

The Slaves seize Captive Lady, and bind her to the mouth of 
loaded bolster. The Dey once more offers his love, and is once 
more refused. The signal to fire is given, when 

Enter Heb Husband at the head of a gallant band of Militia- 
men. A scuffle ensues, each Militiaman engaging two Slaves in 
combat. The Dey is dethroned, and the Lady is released, and 
rushes into the arms of her Husband. 




( The Militiamen kneeling on prostrate Algerines. 



ACT HI. 

BIETHDAT. 



Old Lobd. 



DBAMATIS PEBSONE. 

His Son, aged 21 Tenants Theie Wives. 



Seevants. 



Musicians. 



table 



Scene — Park on Estate of Old Lord. In the centre is placed 
with chairs on each side, in preparation of a feast. 

Enter Tenants and their Wives, gaily dressed, and carrying a 




flag, made out of an old newspaper. They form themselves into 
two rows, when 



85 



Enter Old Lord and His Son. The Tenants wave their hats in 
the air, and their Wives curtsey. The Old Lord bows to them 
and delivers a short speech, constantly pointing to his son. 
The Tenants again wave their hats in the air, when 

Enter Servants, bearing a bandbox barrel of beer, which they 
place on the table. Glasses are handed round, and the Old 
Lord, taking one, proposes the health of their young Squire. 

Enter Musicians, when the Tenants all stand up for a dance, 
his Son leading off with one of their Wives. j 



SEASHOKE. 

A CHAKADE IN THEEE ACTS. 



ACT I. 
SEA— 



dramatis persons. 

Careful Mother. Little Children. Two Bathing Women. 

Nervous Old Gentleman. Visitors. 

Scene — TJie Sands of Long Branch, with the curtains at the end of the 
room bulged out like the awning of a Bathing-machine. 

Enter Bathing Women, supposed to be wet through. They 



^^sJht Jhl ~-45LiiB!r 



bow to Careful Mother and Little Children, and express 
their great love for the darlings. Careful Mother makes signs to 
them, and they fetch towels and hand the Bathing Party into 
the machine. 

Enter Visitors, who, by pretending to swim, inform Bathing 
Women that they wish to bathe; and. having each paid half a 
dollar, they demand towels, and hurry off with them under 
their arms. 

Enter (from behind curtains) one of the Little Children in its 




night-gown. It screams at the sight of the -water, and kicks 
violently, but is instantly seized by the Bathing Women, who 
take it by the arms and legs and plunge it into the waves. This 
is done three times, when the Infant is taken out in a fainting 
condition, and handed to Careful Mother. 

When all the "angels" have been dipped, the Mother closes 
the curtain, and exeunt Bathing Woinrn. 

Enter Nervous Old Gentleman, swimming in a huge India- 
rubber cloak for bathing gown. He wears spectacles. He ex- 
presses that it is very cold, and that he is about to get into his 
bathing-machine, and points to the one which Careful Mother 
and Little Children have hired. Advancing to the curtain, he is 
surprised to find the door locked, and pushes violently against 
it. A loud scream is heard within. As Nervous Old Gentleman 
continues pushing, a parasol is thrust out from the curtains. He 
is pushed back, and falls head over heels into the water. 

Enter Two Bathing Women armed with long sticks. They 
keep their eyes shut and drive off Nervous Old Gentleman. 

tfli •£§ -j^v 

The curtains of bathing-machine are then drawn aside, when 
exit Careful Mother and Little Children with very wet hair, and 
looking go much better for their fainting and screaming. 

Bathing Women bow them out. 



ACT II. 
-SHORE. 

dramatis pfrson.ze. 

Eichaed, Duke of Gloster. Lord Hastings. 

Duke of Buckingham. Lords of the Council. 

Cardinal Bourchter. Bishop of Ely. Jane Shore. 

Soldiers. Citizens. 

Scene 1 — Council Chamber at the Tower. Alike end of the slage, the 
sofa of state for Lords of the Council. Arm-chair for throne. 

Enter Lords of the Council, robed in dressing-gowns of state, 
and wearing their ermine victorine wigs of office They take 
their seats on sefa. 



87 



Enter Lord Hastings, as magnificently dressed as he can be. 
He is received by the Lords of the Council, who hand him to 
the arm-chair throne. Some converse, and some read news- 
papers. 

( Flourish of Trumpets. ) 

Enter Richard, Duke of Gloster, in cap and plumes, and a 
pillow stuffed up the back of his mantilla for royal hump. At 
his side is hung his sword, which he draws on entering. The 
Duke of Buckingham, also very richly dressed, follows closely. 
The Dukes wink to each other, and the Council seem alarmed. 

Gloster, advancing toward the table, bears his arm and 
strikes the table with his sword, whilst Buckingham exhibits a 
placard on which is written, "Jane Shokedidit." 

Lord Hastings, rising, expresses great indignation, and, by 
hitting the back of his head with his hand, intimates that Jane 
Shore ought to be beheaded; or at least (puting an imaginary 
cord around his neck) hung. 

Gloster is greatly enraged, and striking the table three times 
as a signal, 

Enter Soldiers, with helmets of meat covers, and armed with 
brooms for halberts. They seize Lord Hastings, who is led off 
to execution. 

Exit Gloster, surrounded by trembling Council, who compli- 
ment him on his great beauty and wisdom. 

Scene 2. — An imaginary Sired, with St. Paul's supposed to be visible 
in the distance. 

Enter Grand Procession, headed by Cardinal Bourchter and 
the Bishop of Ely in their sacerdotal robes of chintz curtains, 
with mitres of newspapers; the Dukes of Gloster and Bucking- 
ham, and the Lords of the Council, follow in their robes of 
state, 

Enter Soldiers well armed, and carrying banners of fire- 
screens. 

Enter Jane Shore, with her hair down and closely guarded. 
Over her is thrown a white sheet, and in her hand she carries a 
drawing-room candle-stick. She is pale and weeps, but is hur- 




ried on by brutal Soldiers. Gloster again winks to Buckingham, 
who puts his 'finger against his nose in answer. 



Enter Citizens, who cheer the Dukes and hoot Jane Shore. 
She trembles and does penance by the window curttiins, after 
which she is hunted irom the stage by enraged citizens. 

Gloster is proclaimed King, and exit procession. 

(Nourish of Trumpets.) 



ACT HI. 

SEASHOEE. 



DEAMATIS PEESONiE. 

Aetist. His Wife. HisDaughtee. Boatmen. 

Scene — Tlie Seashore at Coney Island. The tide is down. 

Enter Aetist, whose beard of tobacco proclaims him to be a for- 
eigner. His Wife and His Daughtee follow in walking cos- 
tume. In his hands the Artist carries the music-stand for easel, 
and under his arm a music portfolio. His Wife has her basket, 
and His Daughtee a large umbrella, and the shovel for spade. 
The Artist opens his umbrella and commences painting, while 
His Wife kDits a purse, and His Daughter, in a white pinafore 
and sash, digs holes in the sand. The Artist several times leans 
back to see the effect of his picture, and they are delighted with 
the fine painting. They are so intent upon their work that they 
do not see that the tide is coming in very fast. This can only 
be shown by sudden exit of Artist's hat floating to the door by 
means of a piece of string. 

Enter Boatmen, who shout to Artist, but are unable to make 
him hear. 

His Wife, on looking up, is alarmed at finding they are sur- 
rounded by the waves. They are greatly terrified and fly to the 
ottoman, to which they cling as if to the rugged rocks. Artist 
waves a pocket-handkerchief, and puts his wife's hat on the end 
of the umbrella as a signal. His Wife, in vain, endeavors to 
pacify His Daughter, who is kicking and screaming; and, at 
last, overcome by her feeliDgs, she bursts into tears. The waves 
are supposed to mount higher and higher. His Wife and His 
Daughter cling tightly to Artist, who becomes more and more 
frightened. He embraces them, and trie» to persuade them to 
let him swim to shore, but they refuse. 

Enter Boatmen, rowing the sofa, which they pull close up to 
rocks of ottoman. Artist, His Wife and Daughter, hastily step 
into the craft. Artist gives the Boatmen money, and then falls 



BUGBEAR. 



on his knees. His Wife and Daughter do the sama. 
pray. 

The Boatmen weep. 



89 
They 




GRAND TABLEAU. 



BUGBEAR. 

A CHAKADE m THEEE ACTS. 



ACT T. , 

BUG- 



deamatis persons. 
Young Man. Landlady. Servant. 

Scene — An Apartment at a Lodging-house. Ihe sofa for Bedstead 
placed on one side of the room. 

Enter Young Man, being shown into the room by Landlady, 
the Servant following with his carpet-bag. The Landlady places 




the candle on the table, and having dusted the chairs. 

Exit with Servant. The Young Man takes off his coat and 
jumps into bed. He has scarcely been there a minute before he 
jumps up again, and intimates that something has fallen on his 
face. He waits a few seconds, and then suddenly slaps his 
cheek sharply, as if to kill something. Then he commences 
scratching himself. At last, finding he cannot sleep, he jumps 



90 



up, and taking the candle, commences an active search over the 
bed. At last he falls back, shuddering with horror, as he points 
to his bed. He flies to the bell and pulls it violently. 

Enter Landlady and Servant rapidly, and wearing an expres- 
sion of surprise on their faces. The Young Man invites them 




to come and examine the bed, at the same time scratching him- 
self vigorously. The Landlady is greatly surprised on behold- 
ing the strange visitor, and taking from the cupboard a bottle 
labelled "Poison," commences putting some on the joints of 
the sofa bedstead, with the feather end of a quill. She then in- 
vites the youth to once more try the bed. Hut he shakes his 
head as he still scratches himself, and pointing to the arm- 
chair, vows he will sleep there. The Landlady endeavors to re- 
assure him, but he only shakes his head the more. At last she 
beckons him to follow her, and he consents, taking his clothes. 
Exit Youth and Landlady. The Servant also begins scratch- 
ing her neck, and feeling alarmed, rushes from the room. 



ACT II. 

—BEAR. 

deamatis pfbson.e. 

Queen Elizabeth. Coubtiebs. Beae Baitees. 

Dogs. Beae. 

Scene — As close a representation of the Bear Gardens of old as can 
possible be managed. The sofa must be placed for a visitor's gal- 
lery, and the arm-chair for a throne. 

Enter the Queen and all her Couetiees. She wears a huge 
frill of paper round her neck and the jelly-mould for crown on 
her head. In her hand is the bright poker for sceptre. The 
Courtiers all wear, if convenient, the costume of the period. 

Enter Beae Baitees, leading in the huge Beae, made grisly 
with the door mats. It is fastened to one of the legs of the sofa 
with a long cord. The Baiters commence teazing the brute with 
long poles of broom handles. 

Enter the Dogs, who begin barking and dancing round the 



BUGBEAR. 91 

Bear, who raises himself on his hind legs and prepares to re 




ceive them. Every now and then ne knocks one over with his 
paw, and then the Queen and all her Courtiers wave their 
pocket-handkerchiefs with delight. The Baiters urge on the 
Dogs, clapping their hands and hissing behind them. The 
Bear is surrounded by the savage animals that fasten on him in 
all directions. The Court is in a delirium of delight, and stand 
up to see the sport the better, when the bear, making a spring, 
Enaps his cord. The Queen is alarmed, and the Courtiers draw 
their swords of walking-sticks. They beckon to the Baiters to 
seize the bear, but the men are afraid, and throwing down their 
poles, fly. The Dogs are knocked over in all directions by the 
savage brute, and those that are able run off yelping. Some of 
the Courtiers, leaping into the Garden, attack the Bear, and 
after a fight lead it off. 
Exeunt the Queen hurriedly, and followed by rejoicing Court. 



ACT III. 
BUGBEAR. 

DRAMATIS PERSONS. 

Nervous Old Gentleman. His Boor Kelation (A Sponge). 

Servant. 

Scene — Dining-room in the house of Nervous Old Gentleman. The 
table is prepared for dinner. 

Enter Nervous Old Gentleman, dressed for dinner. He 
places a bottle of wine on the table, and taking up the news- 
paper, reads. 

Eater Servant with the dishes. Old Gentleman rubs his 
hands, and pulls his chair to the table. He looks under the 
dish-cover, and smacks his lips with delight. Then taking up 
his kniie he sharpens it. (A knock heard without.) 

Enter His jf oor IIelation hastily. Nervous Old Gentleman on 
seeing him falls back in his chair, and lets the knife fall from 
his hand with horror. He remains with his eyes fixed on the 
ceiling with a look of anguish, whilst Poor Kelation smiling 
pretends to be startled at having come at dinner-time, and draw- 



92 TABLEAUX VIVANTS. 

ing a chair to the table, seats himself. Nervous Old Gentleman 
rises from his seat, and with his face red with passion, paces the 
room with his hands in his pocket. 

Poor Kelation, pointing to the dish, invites him to be seated, 
but he refuses, shaking his head violently, and only walking 
the quicker. Poor Relation immediately uncovers the dishes 
and commences eating, the Old Gentleman remaining rooted to 
the spot with astonishment at his impudence. He shakes his 
fist at him and dances about with rage, but the other is too busy 
with his knife and fork to see him. He helps himself to wine 
and drinks it, when the Old Gentleman can contain himself no 
longer, and rushing to the table he seizes the bottle, and holds 
it under his arm. But his visitor will not be insulted, but con- 
tinues eating very quietly. 



Ks^ 



At last, when he has finished, he rises from the table, and 
having in action informed his host how delicious the dinner 
was by smacking his lips, and looking at the ceiling, he takes 
up the wrong hat, and leaving his old one, takes his departure. 
The Old Gentleman is electrified with this last act, and is foL- a 
time unable to move. At last, recovering his faculties, he 
rushes from the room. 



TABLEAUX VIVANTS. 



GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 

As in all projects worthy of exertion for the value of the end 
to be attained, a little discipline is necessary, so in the getting 
up of a set of tableaux there should be chosen a commander-in- 
chief, a manager, who shall arrange and group the pictures, 
decide upon all properties and accessories, and, in a word, be 
the umpire in all contested points; otherwise chaos ensues, the 
rehearsals resemble the chattering at Babel, and the evening's 
performance is certain to be marred in some unfortunate par- 
ticular. 

As a tableau is a picture, care should be taken to avoid false 
lights, jarring colors, and unnatural positions. 



TABLEAUX VTVIANTS. »3 

In these days, when scented tableau lights of the most varied 
tints are supplied at a nominal rate, there is no excuse for per- 
petrating red moon-light or green sun-set. 

Without the slightest danger or inconvenience of any kind, 
tableau-lights may now be made use of in red, green, bine, 
violet, white, pink, yellow, and orange; while a magnesium 
light affords the most effective glare to statuary, imparting the 
dead black shadows so peculiar to marble. 

A small sum purchases the secrets of the stage in the form of 
a Make-up Box, containing every conceivable complexion, from 
that of the dusky Turk to that of the ethereal angel or iairy. 

Care should be taken to raise the tableau as nearly as possible 
upon a level with the eye of the observer; let the frame be 
square or oval; see that the light falls from one point naturally; 
have the colors harmoniously arranged, and the illusion will be 
irrestible. 

A curtain of delicate gauze stretched between the figures and 
the audience is often effective. 

The music, which is an important adjunct of each and every 
tableau, should precede the rise of the curtain by a few mo- 
ments, in order to prepare the minds of the audience for the 
picture which is to be presented. 

Subjoined will be found a collection of subjects for tableaux, 
from which several entertainments may be selected, and thus 
dispense with the services of a manager and a costumer. 

The directions for arrangement, as Right, Left, and Centre, 
are given as if viewed from the audience. 



THE FORTUNE-TELLER. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
1st Young Lady. — Full ball-costume, white, pink, blue, or any faint 
lint; flowers in the hair; gloves; fan; lace handkerchief; light hair, 
2nd Young Lady. — House-dress of some dark material; dark red 
flowers in bosom, and in the hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The centre of the stage is occupied by a small but handsome 
table, at the left of which sits the second young lady, her elbows 
resting upon the table and a pack of cards open in her hands; 
her profile is exposed to the audience and her attention is riv- 
eted upon the cards. 

At the right of the table stando the first young lady, looking 
down upon her friend; her hands rest carelessly upon the back 



94 TABLEAUX VIVAKTS. 

of the chair beside the table, over which chair she has thrown 
her opera cloak; she holds her gloves and handkerchief. 

In the second picture the fortune is supposed to have been 
told. 

The fortune-teller looks up with a smile, while the first young 
lady has crossed, and kneeling beside her friend, has cast her 
arms about her in delight at the result. 

White light from both sides. Weird music. 



THE LOEELEI. 



CHAEACTEE AND COSTUME. 
Nymph. — Loose white robe, cut low, and. frilled in at the neck; belted in 
at the waist with a golden belt; sleeves made to float off from the 
shoidders, displaying the arms bare, loiih two broad bands of gold 
vpon each, above and below the elbows; very pale complexion, and 
perfectly yellow hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The Lorelei was that nymph of the Rhine whose song 
charmed the luckless boatmen until, listening, they perished in 
their pleasure. 

The tableau represents the Lorelei sitting upon a pinnacle of 
rock, with her golden lyre upon her knee, in the act of sing- 
ing. 

By building up a strong pedestal and massing brown cambric 
or tissue paper, a heap of rocks from four to six feet in height 
may be effected. 

The nymph sits upon the top, and faces the right; her left 
foot, which should be naked, is cast forward, and upon her left 
knee rests her golden lyre, which she touches in an inspired 
way; her head is a little thrown back; her yellow hair floats 
about her shoulders, and her lips are parted as if in song. 

The more weird the picture, the better. 

Yellow light from right. Soft, agitato music. 



CEKES AND THE SEASONS. 



CHAEACTEES AND COSTUMES. 
Ceres.— Long white robe; low neck; arms exposed. 



TABLEAUX VIYIANTS. 



Spring. — Faint green robe trimmed with grasses and small flowers; 
low neck; arms exposed. 
Summer. — Deep rose robe trimmed with bright flowers; low neck? 



Autumn. — Rich red robe trimmed with fruits arid gorgeous flowers; 

low neck; arms exposed. 
Winter. — Black robe trimmed with evergreens and Christmas roses, 

powdered with snow; a white veil should cover face and float about 

the person. 

the tableau. 
Ceres, a little raised, stands in the centre with golden cornu- 
copia empty in her hands, ready to receive the offerings of the 
Seasons. On her right are Spring and Summer kneeling, ex- 
tending their hands with flowers; on the left, Autumn and Win- 
ter, the former offering fruits; the latter a brace of birds. Sum- 
mer and Autumn should be nearest; though a little forward of 
Ceres; Spring and Winter a little back of tbem. The profiles of 
the Seasons are exposed, and the picture should form a semi- 
circle. 
Strong red light from right side. Komantic music. 



THE RE APER and the FLOWERS. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Angel. — Long white robe, with floating sleeves displaying the arms; 
low neck; hair falling about the shoulders; white wings, if pos- 
sible. 

Mother. — Black dress and white widow's cap. 

Children. — Blonde and brunette, in long white night-dresses. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The tableau represents the evening prayer. The mother ia 
seated on left of stage, and at her knees kneel the two children 
in prayer; their hands rest upon her la]?, and her face is bent 
forward over them. At the right, a little back, stands the angel, 
raised upon a cloud of white tarletan, with her hands out- 
stretched towards the children. 

The second scene discovers the mother kneeling at left with 
her hands clasped toward the angel. The children kneel beside 
the angel, whose left hand one of them holds, while with the 
right she points upwards. Children follow the direction with 
their eyes. 

Strong white light on the angel. Soft music. 



96 TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 

ZEKLE AND HULDY. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Huldy. —Plain dress of brown stuff; tight-fitting sleeves; kerchief over 
shoulders; ruffle at neck, and red bow; white apron; hair coiled up 
with aii old-fashioned high comb. 

Zeele. — Shabby dress-coat with sleeves loo tight and short; short 
pants and low cut shoes; collar and cotton cravat; old silk hat, 
faded umbrella, and red handkerchief in back pocket. 

THE TABLEAU. 

This is a country courtship. Huldy sits at right of a plain 
deal table paring apples into a bowl in her lap. On the table 
are a lighted candle and several apples. At a window in the 
back Zekle is discovered, looking in. By her smile Huldy proves 
that she knows he is there, but does not notice him. 

Second Scene. — Zekle is discovered standing opposite Huldy, 
with his hat on and umbrella in hand. Huldy does not raise 
her eyes. 

Thied Scene. — Zekle is upon his knees with his arms round 
Huldy; she has half risen, turns ner face toward the audience 
and threatens him with her knife ; the bowl is overturned, and 
the apples and parings are scattered about 

Strong red light from left. Comic music 



WITH THE TIDE AND 
AGAINST THE TIDE. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Girl. — Pretty blue boating dress trimmed with white; white straw hat 

with blue ribbons; ichUe sillk sun-shade. 
Man. — White flannel boating shirt trimmed with red; red silk scaif in 

sailor's knot; white straw hat with red ribbon; white pants. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The scene rspresents a boat, which, if one cannot be obtained, 
may be easily improvised by shaping a dark shawl over two 
chairs laid upon their sides. 



TABLEAUX VTVIANTS. 97 

In the picture With the Tide, the lovers are seated facing 
each other in the middle of the boat. The man rests on Lis 
oars, holds the girl's hands, and looks into her face. She has 
her eyes cast down, and holds the sunshade over them both. 

In Against the Tide, the girl is turned about with her back 
towards her lover, and has cast her sunshade behind her so that 
he cannot see her. The man has drawn his hat over his nvw, 
and is in the act of pulling vigorously at the oars. The stern 
of the boat should rest on right of stage, the bow being left 

Strong white light from left. Boating song. 



TWO BLIND BEGGAES. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Two Beggars. — Make up like old men. Bagged clothes; old hats and 

crutclies at side; card on each of their breasts with the wordBiXKD 

distinctly marked; tin cups in their hands. 
Lady. — In handsome street dress; with purse. 

THE TABLEAU, 

The beggars are seated side by side in centre of stage, a little 
back; their eyes are closed, their expression is piteous, and they 
stretch out their hands with the tin cups towards the lady, who 
stands on right, opening her purse. 

The second scene discovers the beggars sitting opposite each 
other, their eyes open, their placards thrown over their backs, 
and they playing cards. The trick lies on the stage, and one of 
them is in the act of picking it up with a canning smile on his 
lace. The other man holds his cards and looks annoyed. 

Strong green light from left Very sad music 



PAUL AND VIKGINIA. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Virginia. — GirTs white frock; low neck and short sleeves; the feel art 

bare, and the hair falls about the shoulders; upon the head rests 

a chaplet of smaUfiowers. 
Paul.— White ruffled shirt with wide collar, open at the neck; hose 

white pdnts rotted up to the knee; bare fid and legs; the hair « 

Wtel<^<^tMlg,4C*ditodiSorder. ... 



TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 



THE TABLEAU. 



The picture represents Paul, as a boy of ten years, carrying 
Virginia across a brook upon Lis back. 

A few large flat stones should be placed transversely across 
the stage, from right to left. Paul is discovered in centre of 
stage, in the act of stepping from one stone to another. Vir- 
ginia's arms are about his neck; her feet rest in his hands; his 
face is thrown back over his right snoulrier, so that he may see 
her eyes. She looks down upon him with a smile. 

In the next scene they are seated among some shrubbery, un- 
der the shade of a great leaf, the stem of which Paul holds in 
his right hand, being seated left, and Virginia catches the tip of 
leaf in her left hand. 

Strong green light from left. Komantic music. 



CAIN AND ABEL. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Abel. — White cashmere blouse, fulled hi about the neck, bound at (he 
waist with a cord, and descending almost to the knee; arms bare; 
legs undfeet in flesh-tinted tights and leather sandals. 

Cain. — In dark brown blouse; the remainder of the dress the scwne as 
Abel's. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The scene presents the sacrifice. A white altar, raised upon 
two or three steps, occupies the back-centre of the stage; on it 
a fire is burning. 

Abel stands to the right with his right hand raised in warning 
to Cain. Cain is in the act of stooping to pick up with his left 
hand a knife which lies upon the steps of the altar; he keeps 
his eyes upon Abel. 

The second scene discovers Abel lying face downwards upon 
the steps of the altar; his head rests upon his right arm, while 
the left hangs lifeless by his side. Cain, now on the right, is 
about to fly, but turns his head toward the audience to look 
back upon his work; his hands are cast out towards the right as 
if in terror. 

Strong blue light from loft. Hurried musi*. 



TABLEAUX VTVIANTS. ?S 

OLD WOMAN IN THE SHOE. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTJMES. 
Old "Woman. — Wide frilled while cap,- small shawl over shoulders; 

calico dress; spectacles. 
Children. — Boys and girls, all of about one age, in every variety of 

shabby juvenile costume. 

the tableau. jr 

The scene represents the well-known nursery cutty. 

The stage is occupied by a huge shoe, which niay easily be 
constructed out of dark paper, or by covering a frame in the 
shape of a shoe with black cambric. 

Old woman sits high in the heel with a boy across her lap; 
she holds a switch raised over him. Four or five children are 
hanging out ot the shoe on all sides. One is climbing up the 
heel behind the old woman, another lies upon the outside of the 
toe, while three are grouped seated on the table under the mid- 
dle of the shoe. 

The toe of shoe rests on left of stage; the heel, right. 

Strong white light, left Comic music. 



SNOW BIRDS. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Little Gibls. — There should be three little girls, about six or eight 
years old, dressed in winter dresses of dark material trimmed 
with fur; muffs, fur caps, and red stockings. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The picture should present the snow birds huddled together 
in a group in the centre of the stage. The dresses, which should 
be exactly alike, must be amply flecked with bits of white paper 
in imitation of snow. A clump of evergreens behind should 
be powdered with white cotton. Stage must be covered with 
white cloth. 

Strong white light from both sides. Soft music 



100 TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 

INDIAN SUN WORSHIPPERS. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUME8. 

Indians. — There should be Jive East Indians, in long white robes, belted 
with sashes of bright colors, and wearing turbans of green, red, 
pink, orange, and purple; complexions dark; moustaches black, 
with the exception of one who is aged, and has a white moustache. 

THE TABLEAU. 

As the curtain rises the old man is discovered standing in the 
centre of the stage, with his arms cast upwards, as if in prayer; 
the two on his right and left are kneeling with their arms 
stretched upwards; the other two are on the extreme ends, and 
are bowed down upon their faces. 

The group should be arranged in a semi-circle, and as a centre 
there should be a pan of fire blazing upwards. Each worshipper 
should ha\e an Indian sabre at his side. 

Strong yellow light from both sides. Solemn music. 



FLOWEK OF THE FAMILY. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 
LiTTXfi GiM»— White dress with gay ribbons and flowers. 

THE TABLEAU. 

As curtain rises a flour-barrel is discovered standing alone, 
with a tin scoop on the top ; barrel should be smeared with flour to 
indicate ito contents. When the curtain is raised the second 
time, the barrel is discovered lying upon its side with the open 
head towards the audience, and inside of it sits the little girl 
with a doll in her lap. 

Pink light from right. Gay music. 



FAITH. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Mcthee. — Iw rich dress of dark silk, with ruffles at neck and jewelry. 
Fatheb. — Ordinary gentleman's dress. 
Doctoe. —Ditto. 
Child. — Long white night-dress. 



TABLEAUX VIVIANTS. 101 

THE TABLEAU. 

The picture represents the moment when the parents deliver 
the life of their child into the hands of the physician. 

The centre of tbe stage is occupied by a small bed, upon 
which rests ihe child, very pale; at the right sits the motber, 
with her eyes bent anxiously upon the doctor's face. At the foot 
of the bed stands tbe father, with clasped hands and anxious 
face, watching tbe cbild. The doctor sits beside the bed, holds 
the child's pulse with his left hand, and his watch in his 
right. 

In the second scene, the mother holds the child, the doctor 
stands iu centre in the act of dropping something from a phial 
into a glass. The father steps forward as if about to touch the 
doctor in nis anxiety. 

The foot of the bed is left; the head, right. Some furniture 
should dress the stage. Table behind bed, with lamp burning 
faintly. 

Pale yellow light from both sides. Pathetic music. 



HOPE. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Woman. — Brown dress of common stuff , tucked up over a blue petti' 

coat; white apron; small shawl tied over shoulders; low cut shoes; 

handkerchief tied over the head. 
Chtldken. — Common dress for girl, with handkerchief over the 

head; little boy in ordinary rough dress. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The scene represents the anxious moment for the fisherman's 
family just before the storm breaks. 

The mother occupies the centre of the stage and looks off to 
left with a telescope at her eye. The girl stands close to her 
mother and shades her eyes with her right hand. The little boy 
plays in front of them with a toy-horse. 

The second time the curtain is raised the mother is discov- 
ered kneeling in the same place in prayer; the girl kneels with 
her back to the audience; the little boy looks up at them in sur- 
prise. 

Strong red light from lsft. Soft music of the boat song order. 



102 TABLEAUX VIVANTS. 

CHARITY. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 

Beggar — Made up to represent an old man; shabby grey coal, with 
bright colored muffler round the neck; old brown pants; old boots 
a?id cane; red night-cap, with tassel, on the head: pouch of old 
bagging at side. 

THE TABLEAU. 

Scene represents the beggar in the act of raising the knocker 
of un outside door. The door must be in the centre; the beg- 
gar faces the left, and raises the knocker with Lis right hand; 
tiie fore-finger of his left band is laid beside his nose, and he 
winks slyly at the audience. 

The next scene shows that the door has been opened and shut 
in his face. The beggar, in great rage, has turned to go off, 
right, but glances back at the door with his face dark with 
anger; his month has dropped open, the eyes scowl, both hands 
are clenched, ami with the right one he menaces the door. 

Strong green light from left. Ubw music. 



MERRY CHRISTMAS. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Giel. — Dress of some dark material in rags; hair in disorder; old 

shoes. 
Box. - - Old suit, also in rags; general untidy appearance. 
Faiey. — White tarletan dress trimmed with silver; silver xcand and 

crown of stars. 

THE TABLEAU. 

This tableau presents the interior of a garret. An old bed, 
lei": ; a biokeu table and chair, right; some straw in corner and 
bioom with baskets. A white sheet is stretched across the 
middle of the stage. 

Tlie boy and girl are seated upon the floor in the centre, and 
the boy amuses the girl by throwing the shadow of a rabbit 
from las hands on to the sheet. A piece of a candle, stuck in 
a bo! tie, is so arranged as to cast the shadow. Boy is on his 
knees a little to the right; the girl rests upon her left hand, 
uad faces him; both profiles are exposed. 



TABI^LiUX VIVIANTS. 103 

"When the curtain rises the second time the boy and girl have 
fallen asleep on the floor and dream. The sheet is drawn aside 
and (Uncloses the fairy raised upon a cloud, and bearing in her 
bauds a basket tided with toys, bon-bons, &e. 

Fairy occupies the centre, aud looks down with a smile upon 
the children. 

Pink light from both sides upon the fairy. Soft, pathetic 



SUNRISE, 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Nymph. — Delicate white gauze robe, low neck, short sleeves, and caught 
up so as to show one foot in ichite slipper; silver belt, a>id silver 
band catching back thejiowing hair; no other ornament or decora- 
tion. 

THE TABIiEAU- 

The scene should be decorated with evergreen trees so as to 
form a semi-circle, in the centre of which is a mound adorned 
with flowers and ferns as profusely as possible. For sunrise the 
nymph is standing upon the centre of the mound, looking off 
right; in her hands rests a cloud of pale blue gauze powdered 
with silver, to rejiresent mist. 

Strong pink light from right Low music, 



NOON. 

The same nymph stands upon the mound facing the audience; 
the blue gauze is cast over her head and is folded with her 
hands upon her breast. 

Strong white light from both sides. Music 



SUNSET. 



The same nymph is lying upon the mound half raised upon 
her left elbow, and face's the left. The blue gauze covers the 
lower part of her body. 

Yellow light from left. Music. 



104 TABLEAUX VTVANTa. 

MIDNIGHT. 

The same nymph lies extended upon the mound, her head 
slightly raised upon her right hand, while the left rests upon 
her breast. The blue gauze is cast over the entire ligure. 

Blue light from left. Music. 



SONG OF THE SHIRT, 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Woman. — Old, tattered dress of some dark material, open ai neck, 
showing the bare throat. An old shawl hangs upon the shoulders; 
hair caught up with comb, but allowing the trees on the left to hang 
beside the face, which should be pale and very sad. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The picture presents the midnight hour, with the poverty- 
stricken woman still at work. A little to right of centre a 
plain wood table, upon which is a candle stuck in a bottle, and 
several common pieces of crockery. To the left and in the cor- 
ner a bed, with scanty covering; here and there an old chair or a 
trunk. The woman sits to the left of the table, and about the 
centre of the stage; her work basket, with work in it, rests at 
her feet, the shirt which she is making lies forgotten in her lap, 
and she seems lost in a deep reverie. Her right hand supports 
her left arm and upon her left hand rests her chin. Her face is 
turned full towards the audience. 

The second picture presents the woman turned slightly toward 
the table ; her head is bent over her work, and she is in the act 
of drawing the thread as she sews. 

Soft white light from right side. Low music of some melan- 
choly air. . 



YES OR NO. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 



Yonng Lai>t. — Violet silk dress, fashionably made, with graceful 
train; white lace fichu over the shoulders, and caught at the 
breast with a bunch of violets; hair crimped and gathered into a 
fall of curls at the back. 



TABLEAUX VIV1ANTS. 105 

THE TABLEAU. 

The tableau represents that all-important question as to how 
a certain letter shall be answered. 

On the right, a little back, a writing desk with paper, pens 
and ink, in a conspicuous position; chair beside it; waste basket 
on the floor. The centre of the picture is occupied by the 
figure of the yoang lady, who stands looking directly left, thus 
exposing her full profile to the audience. Her hands are clasped 
behind her, and in tliem is the opened letter, which must be 
distinctly seen. Her head is thrown back slightly, as though 
she were in deep thought. If an open window could be devised 
opposite the young lady, the effect of the picture would be 
heightened. 

Green light from left. Romantic music. 



MUSIC, SONG, AND DANCE. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Music. — White gauze robe; low neck, and long sleeves flowing down 

from the wrists; a belt of green bay, or laurel leaves, and crown 

of the same. 
Song. — Faint pink gauze robe; low neck, and short sleeves; belt of 

bronzed leaves, and crown of the same. 
Dance.- -Pale blue gauze robe, belted and caught up at the right side 

with garlands of pink roses; wreath of large pink roses upon the 

head. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The three figures snould be slightly raised, that of Music be- 
ing rather more commanding than the other two. Music stands 
erect, with her hands folding a golden lyre to her breast; her 
eyes are cast upwards, as though inspired. Song kneels upon 
one knee at the left, and gazes raptly up into Music's face; in 
her extended hands rests a parchment. Dance kneels upon one 
knee on the right; her body is turned to right, but her head is 
cast back over her shoulder, and her eyes seek those of Music 
with a smile in them; in her left hand she raises a tamborine, 
and the fore-finger of her right hand is raised as if awaiting a 
signal; as she kneels upon her right knee the left foot and ankle 
should be exposed. 

Strong pink light from both sides. - Soft music - - 



106 TABLEAUX VTVANTS 

COME TO DINNER. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 
Little Boy. — While shirt open at neck, and fastened by a blue cravat 
tied in a sailor's knot; brown corduroy pants; striped hose and 
shoes; white straw hat on the back of the head. 

THE TABLEAU. 

Two green banks should bearranged to cross the stage about 
mid-way; this may be easily accomplished by covering a row of 
boxes with green cambric, and laying boughs of evergrens upon 
them. A rustic gate should be improvised to divide the banks 
exactly in the centre. Evergreen shrubbery at the back. 

The little boy sits upon top of the gate facing the left, with 
one leg on each side of it. His head is thrown back, and with 
both hands he raises a large conch shell to his lips. His cheeks 
should be distended as if in the act of blowing the shell 
lustily. 

Strong green light from left. Comic music. 



YOU'RE NOT EXPECTED, SIR. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Young Lady. — Pretty summer costume in muslin; straw hat, with 

bright ribbons; small basket of flowers. 
Young Man. —Ordinary light walking suit, with ichite strath hat. 
the tableau. 

The stage arrangement which serves in the preceding tableau 
will be all that is necessary for the present picture. 

As the curtain rises the young girl is discovered leaning upon 
the gate, sUading her eyes with her right hand and looking 
eagerly off to left; her hat has fallen beside her upon the 
ground; in her left hand she holds the basket of flowers. 

The second picture shows the young man creeping up behind 
the young lady, but on the opposite side of the gate, and lean- 
ing over to try to take the basket from her hand; she still 
shades her eyes with her hand as though unaware that he is 
there. 
_ In the third pictnre the young lady has turned away to the 
right, ad droops he head with a smile; the young man holds 



TABLEAUX VmANTS. 107 

her right hand in both of his, and leans over the gate to 
catch a glimpse of her face. 

The basket of flowers is overturned upon the ground in front 
of them. 

Strong green light from left. Eomantic music. 



LEAR AND CORDELIA, 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Leak. — Purple velvet robe trimmed with ermine, descending to the 

ankles, and bound at the icaist with a jeweled belt; wig of long 

white hair, and beard. 
Coedelia. — Pink satin robe, richly jeweled; long icing sleeves; jeweled 

belt, and light crown, from which the hair falls about the shoulders; 

light hair. 
Doctoe. — Brown velvet doublet trimmed with black fur; black tight* 

and velvet shoes; long black hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

King Lear is seated upon a huge easy-chair, which stands in 
the centre of the stage; his head is thrown back, and his eyes 
are closed. The doctor, standing on the right of the chair, 
holds the King's right hand to feel the pulse, and bends slightly 
as if listening to his breathing. Cordelia kneels upon her left 
knee on the left of the King, and holds his left hand^ in 
both of hers, resting it upon his knee; her eyes are bent upon 
the doctor's face, while her expression is one of intense 
anxiety. 

Red light from left. Soft, sad music. 



FLORA'S GARDEN. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 
Floea. — White gauze robe; low neck, and short sleeves; the dress is 
profusely ornamented with garlands of gay flowers; a wreath of 
various flowers upon the head; hair falling about th« shoulders; 
long silver wand. 

THE TABLEAU, 

^This humorous series of pictures is arranged by dividing the 



108 TABLEAUX VITANTS, 



stage midway with a fall of dark drapery, and allowing for a 
square or oval aperture in the centre large enough to allow of 
the pictures being seen from all sides. 

As curtain rises, Flora is discovered btanding a little to the 
right of centre, and pointing with her silver wand towards the 
aperture, which is veiled. 

At the sound of a gong the following pictures appear and 
slowly fade in succession. A pale white light should be thrown 
upon Flora from the left. Soft music. 



SNOW-DROP. 

An old man in long brown overcoat, ample muffler round the 
neck, and large snow-shoes. He faces the audience, carries a 
basket, with bottle, poultry, etc., in it, in his left hand; in his 
right he carries an open umbrella over his head. The old man 
has had the misfortune to be caught under a snow-slide; a 
quantity of snow has crushed his umbrella and driven it down 
over his head. His whole attitude betokens terror. The snow 
may be imitated by flour or cotton. 

Blue light, and soft music. 



BLUE-BELL. 

Some stout man, blackened to imitate a negress; dressed in a 
blue waist or shawl; hat trimmed profusely with blue ribbons; 
blue sun-shade and blue gloves. The bust is all that is neces- 
sary to show off this picture. The figure should face the left. 

Strong blue light from left. Comic music 



ROSE. 



When the veil is drawn aside a huge cabbage, as blooming as 
possible, should occupy the picture. 
Strong red light from both sides. Soft music 



COW-SLIP. 

The picture represents a boy who hiis been milking, and has 
suddenly been interrupted in his pursuit by the heels of the 
cow. 

The boy has fallen backwards from right to left; hi9 legs and 
arms are cast wildly up into the air, as if striving to break his 
fall. The three-legged stool is upset, as also the milk-pails. 
The more comic the boy's dress the better. 

White light from right. ' Comic music. 



TABLEAUX VmANTS. 109 



PINK. 

A very tall man dressed in long pink domino, with pink hood 
over bis head, and pink mask. ^ 

Pink light from both sides. Low music. 



PEONY. 

A stout Irish girl in full national costume of short skirts, blue 
hose, low cut shoes, little sbawl over shoulders, and handker- 
chief over the head. Extremely red, plump cheeks. A fat boy 
renders the picture far more amusing. The bare arms should 
be akimbo, and the face turned full toward the audience. 

Red light from both sides. Irish music. 

This series of pictures may be multiplied ad libitum by pre- 
senting tulips, honeysuckles, wall-flowers, and many more. 



BETSY AND I ARE OUT. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Little Giel. — Flowered brocade frock, icith long train; black lace 
mantilla; old-fashioned waist, with ruffles; antique bonnet, with 
gay ribbons; white hat puffed at the side of the face; long white 
gloves; lace handkerchief and Chinese fan. 

Lute Boy. — Old-fashioned embroidered silk dress-coat; light silk 
vest; ruffled shirt; cocked hat, with while feathers; silk hose; satin 
breeches; buckled shoes, and large snuff-box; powdered toig. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The figures should face the audience, though turned a little 
toward the left. 

The little boy, giving his right arm to the little girl, holds an 
old-fashioned sunshade over her head. In his left hand he 
holds the open snuff-box which he is in the act of offering to 
her. The girl's right hand is raised as though about to take the 
pinch, and from her left hand, which rests upon the boy's arm, 
depend the lace handkerchief and fan. 

White light from left. Quaint music. 



110 TABLEAUX TTVANTS. 

EETITEN OF THE ETTNAWAY. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Sailor. — Usual sailor's costume; ichite flannel shirt; wide collar; loose 

pants; sailor's cap, and parcel tied up in a red hankkerchief. 
Mothee. — Plain dark dress; white cap; white apron; spectacles, and 

grey hair. 
Father. — Ordinary farmer's suit; spectacles, and grey hair. 
Little Box. — Short white child's dress. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The scene presents the interior of a farmer's cottage. 

Left, a table laid with white cloth and tea-service, cups, sau- 
cers, plates, kettle, etc. Behind table sits the aged mother in 
her high-backed chair, and faces right. At the right of table 
sits the father with his legs crossed, a newspaper upon his lap, 
and his spectacles pushed up upon his forehead. In front of 
the table, centre, sits the child upon the floor, playing with a 
toy-horse; he faces left. Lighted lamp on the table. A little to 
the right of centre stands the sailor, gazing upon the group be- 
fore him; his cap is on his head, and in his left hand he carries 
the red parcel. The father, who is turned a little toward the 
table, looks over his left shoulder at the sailor as though he 
were a stranger. The mother, with her right hand upon the 
table, is j nst about to rise to her feet as if she recognized her 
boy. The sailor stands firm. 

The second picture discovers the sailor with his right arm 
round his mother's waist; she has cast both her arms about his 
neck, while the father holds the son's left hand in both of his. 
The child upon the floor has turned his head about, and looks 
at the group in surprise. 

Eed light from both sides. Pathetic music. 



COURTSHIP. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Young Lady.— Fashionable dress of the most approved style; laces, 

flowers, and ornaments. 
Young Man.— Fashionable walking-suit; flowers in eoat; sUk hat, and 



cant. 



TABLEAUX VmANTH. Ill 



THE TABLEAU. 

The fccene presents a garden arranged as in the tableau of 
Broken Vows, except that the rustic seat is drawn a little more 
toward the centre of the stage. 

Upon the seat sits the young lady, with her hands resting 
beside a bouquet that lies in her lap, while her lace is bent 
downward as if blushing; she should face the left. 

Behind, and leaning upon the seat, stands the young man, 
his hat hanging over the back of the seat in both his hands, 
and his eyes trying to seek those of his lady-love. 

In the second scene the lover holds the young girl's hands in 
his and their eyes have met; his position is the same, while the 
young lady has risen to her feet. 

Green light from left. Soft, gay music. 



MATRIMONY. 



The same characters as in the preceding. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The young man sits upon the lounge with his feet up, reading 
a newspaper. 

Behind the seat stands the young lady, looking at him and 
extending a bill towards him. 

In the second scene the young man has cast down his paper, 
has risen to his feet and is in the act of tearing his hair. 

The young lady has turned her back upon him in a sort of 
resolute desperation. 

lied light from left. Loud, stormy music 



LOYE LOOKS NOT WITH 
THE EYES. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Gibl. — White muslin short dress; pink hose; white slippers; pink 

sash and ribbons. 
Boy. — White flannel suit; blue cravat, and handkerchief tied over the 

eyes. 
Childben.— Ihree or four girls, and asrnany boys, in pretty dresses, 

with fans for the girls. 



112* 



TABLEAUX YIYANTS,- 



THE TABLEAU. 



The picture represents a game of blind man's buff. 

The boy, who is blind-folded, has caught the girl in white 
muslin, and thrown his arms about her to try to steal a kiss. He 
is a little shorter than she, and is therefore obliged to stand 
upon tiptoe. The two occupy the centre of the stage, the boy 
right and the girl left, though she turns her head left and tries 
to escape. . 

The other girls latighingly conceal their faces behind their 
fans, and the boys peep through their fingers. Their positions 
should be as confused as possible. 

Ked light from both sides. Gay music. 



BEST IN THE DESEKT. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Abab. — Loose mantle of various colors in stripes, over a brown un- 

der-gown that descends to the ankles; Oriental slippers; white 

Arabian turban; long pipe, with red bowl. 
Woman. — Pale green under-robe; faint red mantle; white turban, with 

gold ornaments. 
Child. — Loose white robe; low neck, and short sleeves. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The centre of the stage is occupied by a heap of packages and 
bales, such as are carried by camels. A Turkish rug is spread 
in front of these, and half-raised upon them lies the woman, 
facing left, with her head resting upon her right arm. The 
child lies with his head upon her lap. 

To the right of the pile stands the Arab, erect, and looking off 
right. He rests his right arm upon the pile, the right foot is 
thrown over the left, and the left hand holds the pipe which he 
has just taken from his lips. 

Strong red light from right. Komantie musit. 



TABLEAUX WVIANTS. 113 

FORBIDDEN FRUIT. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Giel. — Ordinary servant's dress of light calico; skirt tucked up 

about the waist; sleeves rolled up as far as possible; small white 

cap on the head. 
Man. — Policeman's dress as nearly as possible. 

THE TABLEAU. 

In this picture the girl stands on the left of the stage, and is 
busily engaged bending over a washing-tub, into which her 
arms are plunged. 

At a window in the back stands the policeman, leaning in as 
far as he dares to catch a glimpse of his lady-love. 

In the second picture the girl stands on tip-toe at the win- 
dow, with her back to the audience, and has her arms thrown 
round the man's neck, while he, with his hat thrown back, is in 
the act of stealing the forbidden fruit in the shape of a kiss. 

A third picture may be made very amusing by introducing 
the mistress of the house. She should stand on the right, the 
maid should be plunged deeper than ever in the washmg-tnb, 
and the policeman, outside the window, should display his lull 
back to the audience. 

White light from left. Comic music. 



THE SOLDIER'S DREAM, 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
-German uniform; dark blue coat trimmed with red; blue 
pants piped with red; regulation helmet arid rifle; short sword. 
Gibl. — Grey dress trimmed icith black velvet; square corsage; the 
whole made after the fashion of Marguerite's dress; light hair, 
braided. 
Lovek. — Fashionable hunting-suit; jelt hat, with feather; gun, and 
game bag. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The stage should be decorated with evergreen trees. 
On the right, to profile, lies the soldier upon his back, with a 
dark mantle thrown over his legs, while his head rests upon his 



114 TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 



knapsack; his gun lies beside him, clasped by his left hand, 
and tue right rests upon his breast. 

On the left of stage a camp-fire throws up fitful gleams. 

Pale blue light on the soldier. Soft music. 

The dream appears by a veil being drawn aside at the back, 
between the trees, and disclosing an oval frame, through which 
the girl is seen standing erect and looking towards right, with 
her right hand resting on the spinning-wheel. 

The second time the drearn appears the girl is seated, and by 
her side kneels upon one knee the lover, holding her hand in 
both of his and looking up into her face. 

Strong white light from right. Low music. 



THE AETIST'S DREAM. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Aetist. — Picturesque suit of black velvet; velvet skull cap, and long 

hair; long black hose, and buckled shoes. 
Vision. — Young girl, with long yellow hair, dressed in a robe of faint 

pearl-colored gauze; no ornaments; short sleeves and low neck; 

luair floating about shoulders. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The same arrangement for the vision will answer which was 
used in the preceding tableau, though the stage must be altered 
from the Held to the studiu. 

The easel, with unfinished picture, stands a little to the right 
of the centre. 

In a chair in front of it sits the artist, with his left hand, in 
which are the palette and brushes, resting upon it; his head has 
sunk forward upon his left arm, and his right hand, with a 
brush in it, hangs listlessly beside him. 

The artist faces the right; the vision appears just back of and 
above him. 

The veil should be slowly drawn and disclose the vision, with 
her bare arms thrown up gracefully above her head and her 
eyes cast upward, as if in the act of rising, her yellow hair 
floating about her shoulders. 

Stroug pink light on the vision; red light from right on the 
artist. Soft music. 



TABLEAUX VIVIANT3. 115 

SPRING. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Gikl. — Short skirt of pale blue; white chemise; little pink shawl 
crossed over the breast; white apron; large straw hat ornamented 
wiihjlowers; barefooted, and light hair. 
Boy. — Buff knee-breeches; white shirt, open at neck, and rolled up to 
the elhows; bare legs and feet; no hat, and dark hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The picture represents the two children returning from the 
fields. 

The two occupy the centre of the stage, and face a little to the 
left. The boy, who is farthest up stage, holds the girl's right 
hand in his left, while with his right he shades his eyes as if 
looking anxiously towards home. By his side, though a ltttle 
back, as if being led, stands the girl. Her right hand rests in 
that of the boy, while her left holds up her apron with its 
freight of tall grasses and flowers. Her eyes are cast down- 
wards, and her hat is pushsd back, allowing her hair to fall 
about her face. 

Strong pink light from left. Soft, pretty music. 



SUMMER, 



CAARACTEKS AND COSTUMES. 
Maiden. — White muslin dress, with pale blue ribbons; pink roses in 

the bosom, and hair; no hat; light hair. 
Loveb. — Ordimry light summer suit; straw hat, and flowers in the 

coal; dark hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The figures occupy the centre of the stage. The maiden 
stands with her face turned to the right and cast down to con- 
ceal her blushes. 

The lover holds her right hand, and is bending forward as if 
endeavoring to catch a glimpse of her lace and therein read his 
fate. 

In the second scene the two stand facing each other full; they 
hold each other's hands; the maiden glances up half timidly, 
and the lover returns the glance with one of fond affection. 

Green light from left. Soft, romantic music. 



116 TABLEAUX TTVANTS; 

AUTUMN. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Wife. — Rich and elegant home-dress, or the plain costume of a 

meaner station in life, as may chance to please the taste; light 

hair. 
Husband. — Full military suit; that of an officer, if the wife be richly 

dressed; a private, if her costume be plain; dark hair. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The moment here portrayed is the last before the departure 
for the war. 

The husbands stands erect, looking off right; his right hand 
rests in the breast of his coat, and the left hangs by his side. 

Upon the right of her husband kneels the wile upon her right 
knee, buckling with both hands the sword-belt about her hus- 
band s waist; her head should be bent forward as if indicative 
of grief. 

In the second scene the wife is upon her feet; the husband 
has turned and clasped her to his breast; her hands rest about 
his neck. The faces should wear a sad, intense expression. 

Bed light from right. Soft, martial music. 



WINTER. 



CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 
Grandmother. — The ordinary black dress of an elderly lady,' white 

muslin fichu, and cap; white hair; spectacles, and black mittens. 
Grandfather. — Usual old man's dress; white hair, and beard; spec- 
tacles. 
Grandson. — Black velvet boy's dress; white stockings; low cut shoes; 
white ruffle at neck. 

the tableau. 
Two great arm-chairs, with old-fashioned high backs, occupy 
the middle of the stage. 

In the right-hand chair sits the grandfather; a newspaper lies 
upon his knees, and his hands rest clasped upon it. His spec- 
tacles are pushed up upon his forehead, and his eyes are fixed 
upon distance, as though lost in deep thought. The grand- 
mother sits in the left-hand chair; she is in the act of knitting a 
blue stocking, but her hands are at rest for a moment as she 



TABLEAUX VIVANTS. 117 

gazes clown upon her grandson at her feet. The hoy lies at his 
lull length upon the floor before the feet of his grandparents, 
dud faces the left. Hj lies face downward, and raises hi.-i head 
by supporting his chin upon both hands; before him a large 
picture-book lias open. 

While light from both sides. Soft, quaint music. 



ROCK OP AGES. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 

Maiden. — Loose white robe, with train; long wing-like sleeves, dis- 
playing the whole arm; low neck; hair loose, and floating over the 
shoulders. 

the tableau. 

A large cross, covered with white cloth, should be erected a 
little upon the angle in the centre of the stage. Around this 
should be arranged brown cambric or tissue paper, in imitation 
of rocks. 

The figure of the maiden is supposed to be hanging upon the 
cross by the hands. This may be effected by placing the 
maiden's hands upon the arms of the cross, allowing her head 
to fall upon her left arm, thus causing her to look off towards 
the right. Her profile will be exposed and her back turned 
toward the audience. 

The eyes should be cast upwards and the whole attitude be 
that of exaltation. 

Strong white light from right. Soft music. 



THE PRODIGAL SON, 



CHARACTERS AND CCSTUMES. 

Father. — Rich Oriental robe of dark velvet, trimmed with fur, de- 
scending to the ankles; sandals; bright turban of rich material; 
long white beard. 

Son. — Fall suit of flesh-colored tights, with a sheep-skin caught with a 
strap over the right shoulder, and, falling over the left side; old 
sandals; hair in disorder, and staff. 



118 TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 



THE TABLEAU. 

The scene represents the moment of meeting of the father 
and son. 

The father stands in the centre of the stage, turned a little 
towards the lelt; his hands are thrown up above bis head in an 
attitude ot thankful surprise, and his eyes follow the same 
direction. At his feet, and facing the right, kneels the son 
upon his left knee; his arms are thrown about his father's knees, 
and his bauds clutch at the robe in a sort of terror; his face, 
bent downwards, is turned toward the audience. 

Strong red light from the left. Soft music. 



STATTTAKY, 



DEVOTION. 



CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 

Maiden. — White dress made after the pattern of Marguerite's costume 
in Faust; over-skirt looped up with long belt; square neck; tight- 
fitting sleeves; white hair braided in two large braids down the 
back; lohite prayer-book; while jeweh-y, and white flowers in the 
bosom. 

the tableau. 

White cashmere is the softest and most convenient fabric to 
imitate marble. 

A little to the left of centre stands a high white cross. 

Before this cross kneels the maiden upon her left knee, and 
faces the left; her eyes are cast upwards, and her hands fold 
the prayer-book to her breast. 

The face, neck, and hands should be of marble whiteness, an 
effect which the Make-up Book explains. 

Magnesium light from left Religious music, . 



TABLEAUX YIYANTS. 119 

PUCK. 

CHARACTER AND COSTUME. 

Fuck. — A little boy or girl of about eight years, the stouter the better. 
The dress should be a little shirt of white cashmere, belted in at the 
waist; low neck and short sleeves; the legs and feet are bare. A 
curly white wig should be worn, with two white horns peeping out 
of thefront. Short white wings, if possible. 

THE TABLEAU. 

Puck occupies the centre of the stage, npon a round white 
pedestal. He is turned slightly to the right; the fore-finger of 
his right, hand rests upon his lips in token of silence, and in 
his left hand he raises the white flower which Titania sent him 
in search of when he says, 

"I'll put a girdle round about the Earth, 
In forty minutes ! " 

Puck rests upon his left foot, while his right is pointed upon 
the the toe hehind it. as if he were about to take flight. 
Magnesium light from right. Soft, fairy music. 



THE OTff. 

CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Ntm. — A long white robe, with ample folds, just touching the dage; 
ichite band over the forehead, and extending round under the chin; 
the white veil covers the head, and is brought round gracefully, 
and folded with the crossed hands upon the breast. White rope 
round the waist; white rosary and cross at the side; one white 
shoe visible. 

THE TABLEAU. 

The man occupies the centre of the stage upon a slightly raised 
white platform. She faces the audience directly, though her 
eyes are cast down in humility. The hands are crossed upon 
the breast, and she rests upon the left foot, the toe of which is 
visible, as if abont to .stop. 
Magnesium light from left. Beligious music 



120 TABLEAUX VTVANTS. 

NIOBE. 

CHARACTERS AND COSTTTMES. 

Niobe. — Roman matron's costume; long white skirt, with antique pat- 
tern on the border; the waist, low neck and short sleeves, belted, in 
at the girdk. The white hair, parted in the middle, crimped and 
drawn back over the ears with short curls at the sides Long 
white mantle, with similar border, over (he shoulders. 

Child. — Little while Roman sacque, low neck and short sleeves, belted 
in at the waist. Legs and arms bare. Curly white wig. 

THE TABLEAU. 

Niobe occupies the centre of the stage, and faces the left 
partially. ; 

She bends forward over the child, who clings in terror to her 
knees, with his face toward the audience. 

Niobe's face is cast upward in agony, as if beseeching the 
mercy of the Gods. She raises her mantle in both hands, as if 
about to protect her child. 

Magnesium light from left. Hurried music 

THE MOTHER OF THE GRACCHI. 

CHARACTERS AND COSTUMES. 

Cobnelia. — Roman matron's dress, as in the case of Niobe; white 
sandals; a small white tiara upon Gie head, under which the white 
hair is parted, and drawn straight back in classic style. 

The Gkacchi. — Iwo boys of about ten and twelve years of age; they 
wear the Roman sacque belted at the waist, with low neck and 
short sleeves; legs bare; white sandals; curly white wig& 

the tableau. 

Upon a raised white platform sits Cornelia in an ample arm- 
chair, covered with -white; she faces the audience directly. 

Her right arm rests about the waist of the elder boy, -who 
stands watching his mother, with his profile toward the audi- 
ence. Cornelia's left hand encircles the waist of the younger 
boy, whose body is turned toward the audience, though his face 
is thrown off to the right as if in the act of listening. 

Magnesium light from both sides. Martial or heroic music. 



The subjects which present themselves for statuary are legion, 
and involve no difficulty in arrangement. 



121 



RIDDLES, CONUNDRUMS, 
PUZZLES, Etc. 



KIDDLBS and CONUNDRUMS. 

1. When is love deformed? 

2. What is the goat-stealer's song ? 
—3. Where is happiness found? - 

~ 4. Name me, and you destroy me. 

5. Why should all sober people go to rest directly after tea? 

6. What grows in winter with its root upward, and dies in 
summer ? 

7. What is the first thing a gardener sets in his garden? 

8. Why is a younger brother like a fair complexion ? 
-•9. What was the longest day of Adam's life? 

10. Why is a room full of married ladies like an empty one? 

11. What makes everybody sick but those who swallow it? 
—12. What is the difference between a cat and a comma? 

13. Who is the first nobleman mentioned in the Bible? 

14. Why is a pig like the letter N? 

15. Why is a tradesman like a divinity student ? 
-16. Why is a mouse like grass? 

17. What would a nut say if it could speak? 



122 



EXDDLES AND CONUNDRUMS. 



18. I'm a creature most useful, and active, and known 
Of any that daily progress through, the town. 
-Take from me one letter, and yet rny good name 
In spite of this loss, will continue the same. 
Take from me two letters, and still you will sea 
That precisely the same as before I shall be. 
Nay, take from me three, take six, or take more, 
Yet still I continue the same as before. 

Nay, rob me of every letter I've got — 

My name you'll not alter nor shorten one jot. 

19. Art's offspring, whom nature delights here to foster, 

Can death's dart defy, tho' not lengthen life's stage; 
Most correct at the moment when most an imposter, 
Still fresh'ning in youth a3 advancing in age. 

20. What is pretty and useful in various ways, 

Tho' it tempts some poor mortals to shorten their days ? 
Take one letter from it, and then will appear 
"What youngsters admire every day in the year; 
Take two letters from it, and then without doubt 
You will be what it is if you don't find it out. 



21. In other days, when hope was bright, 
Ye spoke to me of love and light, 
Of endless spring and cloudless weather. 
And hearts that doted link'd together. 

n. 
But now ye tell another tale — 
That life is brief and beauty frail, 
That joy is dead and friendship blighted, 
And hearts that doted, disunited. 



Away ! ye grieve and ye rejoice, 
In one unfelt — unfeeling voice 1 
And ye, like every frierid below, 
Are hollow in your joy and woe ! 

22. What of all things in the world is the longest and the 
shortest, the swiftest and the slowest, the most divisible and the 
most extended, the most neglected and the most regretted; with- 
out which nothing can be done, which devours- all that is little 
and ennobles all that is great ? 

23. When is a door not a door ? 

24. What is. enough for one,, too much for two, and nothing, at 
all for three ? 

25. What is most like a hen stealing ? 

26. Why was Moses supposed to wear a wig ? 



KIDDLES AND CONUNDRUMS. 123 

27. What is the difference between a cow and a broken chair? 
2S. What did Job's wardrobe consist of ? 

29. If a house is on fire, why does the piano stand the best 
chance of escape ? 

80. "When is a sailor not a sailor ? 

31. What is black, white, and r(e)ad all over? 

32. If a man met a crying pig, what animal would he call him? 

33. Why i3 a postage stamp like an obstinate donkey? 
31. What part of the face resembles a schoolmaster ? 
35. Why is a root like a farmer ? 

3G. What is worse than raining "cats and dogs ?" 
37*. When is a ship like a half-dressed woman ? 

38. Why is it that you and I must never dine together ? 

39. What profession is a postman? 

40. Why is a clergyman unlikely to be an impartial dramatic 
critic ? 

41. What snuff-taker is that whose snuff-box gets fuller the 
more it takes ? 

42. Why is anger like a potato ? 

43. Why does opening a letter resemble a strange way of enter- 
ing a room ? 

44. Why is a dandy like a haunch of venison ? 

45. Why is a tavern waiter like a racehorse ? 

46. Why are prize-fights called pitch-battles ? 

47. Why is the letter S like a furnace in a battery ? 
4S. Why is a lover like a crow ? 

49. What word is that which deprived of a letter makes you 
sick? 

50. In marble halls as white as milk, 
Lined with a skin as soft as silk, 
Within a fountain crystal clear, 
A golden apple does appear. 

No doors there are in this stronghold, 
Yet thieves break in and steal the gold. 

51. Two sisters on one clay were born, 
Eosy and dewy as the morn, 
True as a sailor to his lass, 

Yet words between them often pass. 
At morn they part, but then at night 
They meet again and all is right. 
What seldom you in nymphs discover — 
They're both contented with one lover. 



124 BIDDLES AND C0NTTNDRT7MS. 

52. Though banished from Heaven and sentenced to Hell, 
The world still contains me, and owns I excel. 
The virgin disdains rne and maids disapprove, 
But both must acknowledge I'm useful in love. 
To evil I'm known, and saintships all flout mo 
Yet angels and devils are nothing without me. 
To the wind I'm not useful, yet blow with the gale, 
I'm nothing to women, yet much to female; 
Though far from a hero, and farther from brave, 
I scorn a base coward, and still am a slave. 
I'm first as a lover, though nothing to kiss, 
Yet married and single owe to me their bliss. 
I'm cold to good nature, though warm in the soul, 
I'm hardened in malice, but gentle in whole. 
I'm nothing, yet all — and all must confess 
Without me they're nothing, and with me they're less. 

.' 53. I'm not what I was, but the very reverse; 

I'm what I was, which though bad is now worse. 
And all the day long I do nothing but fret, 
Because I can't be what I never was yet. 

54. Why is the death of Socrates like the upper room of a 
house ? 

55. What do we do, when to increase the effect we diminish 
the cause ? 

56. What letter in the alphabet is most useful to a deaf woman? 
-57. In which month do ladies talk least? 

58. Why is a cock-eye like a note of interrogation ? 

59. Where was Humboldt going When he was thirty-nine years 
old? 

-60. Which is the most ancient of the trees? 

61. What are the most seasonable clothes? 

62. Why are lawyers and doctors safe people by whom to take 
example ? 

63. What is the difference between a soldier and a sailor ? 

64. Why are wooden ships, (as compared with iron-clades) of 
the female sex ? 

65. At what time of life may a man be said to belong to the 
vegetable kingdom ? 

66. Which are the lightest men— Scotch, Irish, or Englishmen? 

67. Which are the two hottest letters of the alphabet? 

68. Why is cutting off an elephant's head different from cutting 
off any other head ? 

69. Who is the man who carries everything before him ? 
-70. Which are the two kings that reign in America? 



KIDDLES AND CONUNDKUMS. 125 

71. When may a man's pocket be empty and yet have some- 
thing in it ? 

7 2. Why is a clock the most modest piece of furniture ? 

73. Why is U the gayest letter in the alphabet? 

74. Why are wheat and potatoes like Chinese idols ? 

75. Which is the merriest sauce ? 

76. Why is a cat going up three pair of steps like a high hill ? 

77. Why is a lead pencil like a perverse child? 

78. Why is a horse like the letter O ? 

79> Why are pen-makers incited to wrong doing ? 

80. Why should we never sleep in a railway car ? 

81. When is a boat like a heap of snow? 

82. What 'bus has found room for the greatest number of 
people ? 

83. Who is the first little boy mentioned in American History? 

84. Why is a nabob like a beggar? 

85. What sort of a day would be good for running for a cup ? 
~~^ 86. What is the difference between a spendthrift and a feather- 
bed? 

87. Is there one bird that can sing "The Lays of Ancient 
Home?" 

88. What have you to expect at an hotel ? 
*--» 89. What comes after cheese ? 

90. When does a man sit down to a melancholy dessert ? 
; 91. What notes compose the most "favorite tunes, and how 
many tunes do they compose ? 

92. When may a man be said to breakfast before he gets up? 

. .93. When is the soup likely to run out of the sauce pan? 

— 94. What is that word of five letters of which when you take 
away two only one remains? 

95. When are volunteers not volunteers ? 

96. Why is the letter B like a fire? 

97. Why is the letter K a profitable letter ? 

— 98. What word may be pronounced quicker by adding a syl- 
lable to it ? 

99. What is the difference between a dairymaid and a swallow? 

100. Which animal has the most property to carry with him 
when he travels, and which two have the least ? 

101. How many sticks go to the building of a crow's nest ? 

102. Why was Eobinson Crusoe not alone on his desert island? 

103. Why are there no eggs in St, Domingo? 



126 KIDDLES AND CONUNDRUMS. " 

104. What is invisible blue? 

105. "Which is the most wonderful animal in the farmyard ? 
"108. What town is drawn more frequently than any other ? 

107. When does beer become eatable ? 
10S. Who was the first postman? 

109. Why are bakers very self-denying people? 

110. Why is whispering in company like a forged banknote? 

111. Which constellation resembles an empty fire-place ? 

112. What is the last remedy for a smoky chimney ? 

113. What relation is that child to its father who is not its 
father's own son ? 

111. When does a cow become real estate ? 

115. What is the key-note to good breeding? 

116. Why did Marcus Curtius leap into the gulf in Rome? 

117. Why is a soldier like a vine ? 

118. Which is heavier a half or a full moon ? 

119. When should you avoid the edge of a river ? 

120. Why must a fisherman be very wealthy ? 

121. If the fire-grate and fire-irons cost 50 dollars, what will a 
ton of coals come to ? 

122. Why are the fourteenth and fifteenth letters of the alpha- 
bet of more importance than the others ? 

123. What is the way to make your coat last ? 

121. Why is an alligator the most deceitful of animals ? 

125. Why is it impossible that there should be a best horse 
on a race-course ? 

126. Why are fowls the most economical creatures that farm- 
ers keep ? 

127. When may a ship be said to be in love ? 

128. What relation is the door-mat to the scraper? 

129. What vegetable most resembles little Fanny's tongue ? 

1 30. Why is gooseberry jam like counterfeit money ? 

131. What is that which has never been felt, seen, nor heard — 
never existed, and still has a name ? 

132. Why is a congreve-box without matches superior to all 
other boxes ? 

1*33. Why is a postman in danger of losing his way? 

134. What is that which comes with a coach, goes with a 
coach, is of no use to the coach, and yet the coach can't go with- 
out it ? 

135. What three letters give the name of a famous Roman 
general ? 



TODDLES AND CONUNDEUMS. 



127 



130. "Why would it affront an owl to mistake him for a pheas- 
ant ? 

187. If your uncle's sister is not your aunt, what relation is 
she to you ? 

138. Of what profession is every child ? 

139. Why is the letter i in Cicero like Arabia? 

14-0. Why is troy weight like an unconscious person ? 

141. Why is chloroform like Mendelssohn? 

142. Why does a duck put its head under water? 

143. What wild animals may be correctly shut up in the same 
inclosure ? 

144. What makes a pair of boots ? 

145. What three is of the greatest importance in history? 

146. Which is the most moral food — cake or wine? 

147. Why is a good resolution like a fainting lady at a ball ? 

148. Why is a carpenter like a languid dandy ? 

149. When does a donkey weigh least? 

150. What is the last blow a defeated ship gives in a battle ? 

151. Why should a sailor be a good pugilist? 

152. What had better be done when there is a great rent of a 
farm ? 

153. Why is an uncomfortable seat like comfort ? 

1 54. What two letters do boys delight in, to the annoyance of 
their elders? 

155. What single word would you put down for 40Z. borrowed 
from you ? 

156. When is a river like a young lady's letter? 

157. Why are guns like trees ? 

158. Why would a pelican make a good lawyer? 

159. Describe a suit of old clothes in two letters? 

160. Which is the proper newspaper for invalids ? 

161. What precious stone is like the entrance to a field? 

162. When is a man like frozen rain? 

163. Which of the stars would bo subject to the game laws? 

164. Spell an interrogation with one letter ? 
1G5. When is a bill not a bill ? 

166o What pen ought never to be used for writing ? 

167. When is a subject beneath one's notice? 

168. What trade never turns to the left ? 

169. What trade is more than full? 



128 RIDDLES AND CONTJNDKUMS. 

170. What tune makes everybody glad ? 

171. W T hy is electricity like the police when, they are wanted ? 

172. When is a straight field not a straight field ? 

173. Why is a fish-hook like the letter F ? 

174. What letter is that which is in-visible, but never out of 
sight ? 

175. How would you express in two letters that you were twice 
the bulk of your companions ? 

176. Why is attar of roses never moved without orders ? 

177. If the Greeks had pushed Pan into the Bay of Salamis, 
what would he have been when he came out ? 

178. When is a lady's arm not a lady's arm ? 

179. What is that which occurs once in a minute, twice in a 
moment, and not once in a hundred years ? 

180. What is an old lady in the middie of a river like ? 

181. When is a fish above its station ? 

182. When do we witness canibalism in America ? 
188. When is a boy not a boy ? 

184. When is a city like a ship ? 

185. When is a skein of thread like the root of an oak? 

186. What is that which has a mouth, but never speaks, and a 
bed but never sleeps in it ? 

187. What word contains all the vowels in their proper order ? 

188. What letter used to be distributed at tournaments? 

189. When is a river not a river ? 

190. Why is I the happiest of all the vowels? 

191. Why should you never employ a tailor who does not 
understand his trade ? 

192. Why are your eyes like friends separated by distant 
climes ? 

198. Why is a bad-tempered horse the best hunter ? 

194. What sort of a face does an auctioneer like the best ? 

195. Why is the letter F like a cow's tail ? 

196. What i^ the difference between a husbandman and a 
sempstress ? 

197. Whan is it of which we have two every year, two every 
week, and two every day ? 

198. How does a boy look if you hurt him? 

199. What medicine ought to be given to misers? 

200. Why do the regular soldiers never run away ? 

201. What weight cr measure would no competitor wish to be? 



KIDDLES AND CONrNDKTTMS. * 129 

202. What part of a railroad car resembles Fanny when she ia 
sleepy ? 

203. Why is the letter E most important to young people ? 

204. Why is a healthy boy like the United States ? 

205. When is a book like a prisoner in the States of Barbary ? 
20G. What wind would a hungry sailor prefer ? 

207. On which side of a pitcher is the handle ? 

208. When may a chair be said to dislike you ? 

299. What is that which divides by uniting and unites by 
dividing ? 

210. Why are young children like castles in the air? 

211. What is higher and handsomer when the head is off? 

212. Why is a proud girl like a music-book ? 

213. Why is a short negro like a white man ? 

214. Why are bells the most obedient of inanimate things? 

215. Why are the boxes at a theatre the saddest places of 
public amusement ? 

21 G. Why is the most discontented man the most easily satis- 
fied ? 

217. Why are ripe potatoes in the ground like thieves ? 

218. Why is it unjust to blame coachmen for cheating us? 

219. When is a thief like a reporter? 

220. When is the French nation like a baby ? 

221. What does a lamp-post become when the lamp is re- 
moved ? 

222. What things increase the more you contract them ? 

223. Why is a mother who spoils her children like a person 
building castles in the air? 

224. When you listen to your little brother's drum, why are 
you like a just judge ? 

225. Why is a pig in the drawing-room like a house on fire ? 

226. Why is a conundrum like a parrot ? 

227. Why is a dancing master like a cook? 

228. Why is a watchman like a mill horse? 

229. Why is money like a whip? 

230. Why is a portrait like a member of congress ? 

231. Why is a madman like two men ? 

232. Why is a man who believes in God, like one who denies 
his existence? 

233. Why is a man of color like a lawyer? 

234. Why is a race-horse like a leaky barrel,? 



130 



KIDDLES AND CONTJNDETJMS. 



235. Why is tlie monument like a proud man ? 
238. "Why is a smith like a ferryman ? 

237. Why is a man's hand like a hardware store? 

238. "Why is a carrot ty lady like a band of soldiers ? 

239. Why is a man on horseback like a fan ? 

240. "Why is the gallows the last refuge of a condemned man f 

241. "Why is a man who runs in debt like a clock ? 

242. Why is a slanderer like a bug ? 

243. Why was Adam when he awoke, like a man who has no 
bones ? 

244. Why is a boaster like a game at cards ? 

245. What fruit is that, whose name answers to a busy body ? 

246. Why is a shipwrecked man like an abandoned reprobate? 

247. Why is a cat on her hind legs like a waterfall ? 

248. Why is an unbound book like a lady in bed 1 

249. Why is a poor man like a sempstress ? 

250. Why is a drawn tooth like a thing forgot ? 

251. Why is that which never fails like a strong knot ? . 

252. Why is an ajDothecary like a woodcock ? 

253. Why are the Houses of Congress like an account book ? 

254. Why are false wings like mushrooms? 

255. Why is an impudent fellow that is knocked down, like a 
plain dealing man ? 

256. Why is a dejected man like one thrown from a precipice? 

257. Why is a fire-office like an impudent fellow? 

258. Why is a man led astray, like one governed by a girl ? 

259. Why is paper like a beggar ? 

260. Why is a crooked man like a partial judge? 

261. Why is Death called the King of Terrors and the Prince 
of Peace? 

262. Why is a perspective glass like time? 

263. What kin is that child to its own father, who is not its 
father's own son ? 

264. What is that which is often brovight to table, always cut, 
but never eaten ? 

285. Why is a jailor like a musician? 
288. Why is sealing wax like a soldier? 

267. Why is a key like an hospital ? 

268. Why is a man in the putrid fever like an abusive person? 

269. Why is a condemned malefactor like the root of a tongue? 



KIDDLES AND COKUNDETJMS. " 131 

270. "Why is a blind beggar like a wig? 

271. Why is a brewer's horse Lire a tapster? 

272. Why is a poor lawyer much employed, and a rich cue, 
who has lj.t off practice, like a phenomenon in nature? 

£73. Why is a drunken man like a noun adjective ? 

274. What is that which makes every one sick but those who 
swallow it ? 

275. Why is a tailor like a battering-ram? 
27G. Why is a Jew in a fever like a diamond? 

277. Why is life like a publican's door-post? 

278. Why are fixed stars like pens, ink, and paper? 

279. Why is a painted lady like a pirate? 

250. Why is a jest like a fowl? 

2 51. Why is a man in a garret committing murder like a good 
man? 

252. Where was Peter when his candle went out? 

2 S3. What relation is your uncle's brother to you, who is not 
your uncle ? 

254. Why are there three objections to a glass of brandy? 

255. What class of people do I name, when I say "I can't 
improve ?" 

256. What difference is there between live fish and fish alive? 

257. What step must I take to remove the letter A from the 
alphabet ? 

258. What is the difference betwixt a soldier and a woodman ? 

259. Why is a school-boy, who has just begun to read, liko 
erudition itself? 

290. Why are broken heads like a rule in arithmetic ? 

291. Why is a loose knot like an infirmity? 

292. What is that which is lengthened by being cut at both 
ends? 

293. Why is an avaricious man like one with a short memory? 

294. What is that which lives in winter, dies in summer, and 
grows with its root upwards ? 

295. Why is a man walking to a town, like one endeavouring 
to prevent a blow ? 

296. Why should ladies, squeezing wet linen, remind us of 
going to church ? 

297. Why is a huntsman like juvenile card players? 

298. Why is a pair of skates like an apple? 
289. Why is the sua like people »f fashion? 



132 KIDDLES AND CONUNDRUMS. 

390. Why is a surgeon like a kidnapper? 

301. "Why is a pious man like a sifting shovel ? 

302. Why is a blacksmith's apron like a convent ? 

303. Which is the heaviest, a bargeman or a lighterman ? 
394. Why is a solitary person like a bricklayer's laborer ? 

305. Why is a man, who has parted from his bed, like op-a 
obliged to keep it ? 

306. Why are sober garments like the dress of the dead? 

307. Why is a school like a garden ? 

308. Why is a lady embraced, like a pocket book ? 

309. Why is a rich man like a grocer ? 

310. Why is your eye like a man being flogged ? 

311. Why is eternity like a circle ? 

312. Why is a bad pen like a wicked man ? 

313. Why is swearing like a thread-bare coat? 

314. Why is a parson's gown like charity ? 

315. Why is a grave-digger like a waterman? 

316. Why is a penny cart like the lottery? 

317. What are we all doing at the same time? 

318. Why is the wick of a candle like Athens ? 

319. I am forever, and yet was never. 

320. Why is the soul like a thing of no consequence ? 

321. Why is a bee-hive like a spectator ? 

322. Why is a handsome woman like bread? 

323. Why is a false report like a tottering house ? 
824. Why is a tale-bearer like a brick-layer ? 

325. Why is a man in the midst of troubles like a prudent 
man? 

326. What sort of an eye must that be that can penetrate a 
deal-board ? 

327. Why is a Welshman on St. David's-day like a foundering 
vessel ? 

328. What is that which a coach cannot move without, and 
yet is not of the least use to it ? 

329. What does a stone become in the water ? 

330. Why is a man in love like a lobster ? 

331. When is a man over head and ears in debt ? 

332. Why is a peevish man like a watch ? 

333. Why is a barrister like a poker ? 

334. What snuff is that, the more of which is taken, the fuller 
the box is ? 



CHARADES. 



133 



385. What trade is the sun? 

336. What is smaller than a mite's month ? 

337. What is Majesty deprived of its externals? 

338. Why is a passionate man like 59 minutes past 12 ? 
839. Why is an Island like the letter T? 

340. Why is the letter E like London ? 

341. Who can see best; a blind man, or one that has not eyes ? 

342. If you throw a man out the window what does he fall 
against? 

843. _ What question is that to which you must answer "Yes? " 



CHARADES. 



1. Enough for one, too much for two, and nothing at all for 
three. 

2. You eat me, you drink me; describe me who can ! 
I'am sometimes a woman and sometimes a man ? 

8. If from a reasonable quantity of my second, I frequently 
but judiciously take my first, it will materially contribute to my 
third. 

4. My second was given through my first to an old woman in 
the dark. 

5. Eliza is looking untidy to-day, 

As she may very often be seen ; 
For my whole round her head, though they useful may be, 

Are not ornamental, I ween. 
Let her twist up my first in her second at night, 

She should take them all out in the morn, 
For my whole, though they be pretty well in their way, 

Ought never at noon to be worn. 

6. My first is what you're doing now, 

My second is procured from stone; 
Before my whole you often stand, 
But mostly when you are alone. 

7. My first you will never find out; my second is founded in 
truth. I trust that you will never be my whole. 

8. My first is the lightest of things, without doubt; 
My second we should not be always without. 

My whole*, you will find, as a great prize is reckoned 
By peopla who are a long way from my second. 



I 3 * CHARADES. 

9. My first is French, my second English, and my whole is 
Latin. 

10. Without my first my second could never have existed, and 
my whole is coeval with creation. 

11. My first makes all nature appear with one face; 
My second has music, and beauty and grace; 

My whole, when the winter hangs dull o'er the earth, 
Is the source of much pleasure, of mischief, and mirth. 

12. My first the fair Ophelia gave the Queen; 

My next a steed, as ancient legends make it. 
If fair Ophelia's gift my whole had been, 
Pray would her Majesty do right to take it? 

13. I am the first, and one of seven; 

I live betwixt the seas and heaven. 
Look not below, for I am not there, 
My home is in the ambient air. 
Come to my second: behold how fair 
I am, how bright and how debonair; 
A pleasant vision and a beauty, 
A thing of life and joy and duty. 
. My youth is changed — I live alone; 
My views are crossed — my hopes are gone I 
My whole is sorrow, grief, and. woe, * 
My singing now is all heigh ho ! 

14. Oh ! dost thou see yon maiden fair, 
With glowing cheeks and golden h 
Then know, my first is with her there. 
At it her blue eyes shine so bright 
With an admiring, happy light, 

For 'tis a love-gift from her knight. 
But while she gazes lovingly 
My second falls. "Alas ! " cries she 
' "To think this should so fragile be !" 
She stoops, and gently from the ground 
My second takes; then, looking round, 
She listens for the faintest sound, 
Lest any should be near to see; 
Then in her bosom carefully 
She puts my whole. What may it be? 
For while abstractedly she stands 
(My first still holding in her hands), 
E'en as she gazes it expands. 

15. The bridesmaids are waiting, and what must they do ? 
There's Constance, and Alice, and Adelaide too; 

And that old prude Gorgon, who sits on the right, 
At their charms curls her lip with envy and spite; .. 



CHARADES. 



135 



As badly all fidget and chafe as the worst, 
Lingering impatient till cometh my first. 

But my first sits calm at the dressing-glass, where 
She so oft may be found, arranging her hair? 
Her maidens are twining a wreath in her curls, 
They deck her with lace and white roses and pearls. 
A few minutes more, and my second, they say, | 

Will loose the white steeds — they'll be dashing away. 

The mystic gold circle is on, and the word 

Which joins two in one through the choir has been heard; 

The priest's blessing hands have reposed on the brow 

Of my first; and my whole have uttered their vow. 

The marriage is over ; but is there a soul 

Who thinketh not, "Fortunate fellow — my whole "? 

16. My first is a term that's distinctive of joy, 

For all plans that are form'd it has power to destroy 

'Tis fear'd in the palace as well as the cot. 

And yet had a hand in the gunpowder plot. 

My second of life has been sometimes the bane, 

And still has a mighty effect on the brain. 

I scarce know what order my whole now must rank 

But I yet declare it is nought but a blank. j 

17. My first is as senseless as iron or steel, 

But my second is very acute. 
The highest sensations it often can feel, 
And yet 'tis a part of a brute. 

My whole no idea that's brilliant can know, 

And from the first hour of its birth, 
He scarcely can tell e'en a friend from a foe (J 

In short, 'tis a mere lump of earth. 

18. Though my first's a single thing, 
Yet many hundreds from it spring, 
To men and animals a treat 

For each will freely of it eat. 

Now I declare it is a flower, 

That sweetly scents the verdant bower; 

Within my second I discover, 

The true exactness of a lover. 

And when Aurora's tints are spread, 

Behold my second leave its bed. 

Undaunted by a sense of fear, ■* 

His courage now will soon appear. 

For when contesting for a prize 

He never yields, though sometimes dies; 

My whole, I now beg leave to say, 

13 always deck'd in gay array. 



136 CHARADES. 

19. My first you must own is intended to bring 
All urgent despatches of state to the king. 

The peasant, the postman, the farmer, the squire, 

Declare that my first they all greatly admire. 

And even the soldier with, pride will proclaim 

He help'd to procure him his splendor of fame. 

Again I may say 'tis a bit of dry wood 

That oft in the kitchen unmov'd has long stood. 

But now near the hearth I will give it a station, 

And then it shall rise to a high elevation. v 

Though warmth to my first no one good can supply, 

Yet oft it assists in keeping things dry, 

My second with silver is sometimes bedecked 

Yet at others I have seen it all spotted and specked. 

'Tis satin and silver united together, 

Again, I have known it compos'd of red leather. 

My whole by a metal becomes a defence, 

Protecting a part without feeling or sense.- 

20. Ladies, my first you ought to shun, 

If you would beauty prize ; 
And those poor ladies who have none, 

May yet be very wise. 
My second then I recommend, 

"Which you may jointly find : 
My second's happy to attend 

The beauty of the mind. 
To you, then, ladies, I compare 

My whole as being bright, 
For like the beauty of the fair, 

It always charms the sight. 

21. Behold my first in sable hue, 
View it again, an azure blue; 
Sometimes carnation's not more bright, 
Again it seems a milky white. 

My second, I must make confession, 
Is a most choice and rich possession, 
Which all enjoy; for rich and poor 
Possess alike this valued store. 
My whole is sometimes formed by lead, 
And vertic rises o'er our head. 

22. My first to Music gives expression, 

Yet often is produced by fright; 
My second, I must make confession, 

Will send you to the shades of night. 
My first and second rightly placed, 

Behold at once this nation's pride, 
Whose mem'ry has long since been grae'd 

With honors that have never died. 



137 



28. My first is sometimes white as milk, 
And often is composed of silk; 
And though it's somewhat like a fable, 
Again its color is a sable. 
To make the wonder still more rare, 
I've often seen it made of hair. 
So you'll find out without much paing 
'Tis not far distant from the brains. 
My second, I must now reveal, 
Is formed my former to conceal; 
My first and second now connect, 
And then my charade you'll inspect. 

24. If you feel yourself sad, to my first pray apply, 

Your spirits will quickly restore; 
It can gladden the heart and enliven the eye, 
And always dwells near the sea-shore. 

My second's a vacancy, gap, or a space, 

And may be both little and large; 
My whole now appears in a very fit place, 

And is meant to convey a discharge. 

25. Against advice, one gloomy night, 

Scarce heeding what I had to say, 
My second went, attired in white, 
To join some friends a mile away. 

She lost my first, so she came back; 

She'd slipped into a muddy hole. 
She went out white, but came in black; 

It served her right : she was my whole. 

26. What is that sound the silence breaks ? 
'Tis martial music, loud and clear. 

An army comes: the firm ground shakes 
With their measured tread, as my whole appear. 

Their waving plumes, their helmets bright, 

Proclaim my second's in my first, 
My whole is, too, my first in fight, 

As headlong on the foe they burst. 

27. O'er distant hills the rising moon 

The evening mist dispersed ; 
And, beaming radiant from her throne, 
She plainly showed my first. 

A horseman, now seen by her light, 

Approached with headlong spead; 
And, as he passed, my second said, 

To urge his foaming steed. 



138 



C1TAKADES. 



For his lady-love still waited, 

Though the trysting hour was past. 
My whole she was, in truth, because 

He was my third and last. 

28. Ofttimes you'll find, laid up in store, 

Within my first, my second. 
In tales of love, and deeds of war, 
Quite fair my whole is reckoned. 

29. My first to male or female doth relate; 
My second, ladies, is a pond'rous weight; 

When of his prey, grim death hath made him certain, 
My whole our bed prepares, and draws the curtain. 

30. My first is term'd a vital juice, 
The heath my second does produce, 
The sturdiest oak that e'er was seen, 
My tender total once has been. 

31. My first is unaffected seen, 

My next a ponderous weight will show; 
My whole appears with vacant mien, 
Almost an idiot you'll allow. 

32. When thro' the meadows Sally strays, 
My first with sportive zephyrs plays; 
One-half a mountain's ancient name, 
Where dark combustion bursts in flame, 
Will name my next: on Sally's breast, _, 
My glittering whole does often rest. 

33. My first is condemn'd by the elegant belle, 

As fit for old woman to wear; 
In my second, instruction and pleasure I find, 
My whole I can use thro' the year. 

34. My first, an adjective of frequent use; 

My second, is of no avail on land; 
My whole, you may complain of, if you choose, 
When cruelty uplifts her iron hand. 

35. My first is a prayer, or a service divine, 

By my next, is a portion of land understood, 
My total, alas ! you may truly define, 
A horrid effusion of innocent blood. 

38. My first is an useful animal, my second is a root, and my 
whole is a root. 

37. My first is a noisome insect, my next a ferocious animal, 
and my wholo is used to frighten children and foo 

38. My first is a virgin, my second what, lovers compare their 
mistresses' hearts to, and my whole is the name of a celebrated 
town in England. 



CHARADES. 139 

39. My first is a liquor, my second contains it, and my whole 
is an ancient musical instrument. 

40. I am what I was, which is so much the worse, 
I'm not what I was, but quite the reverse; 
From moruing till night I do nothing but fret, 
And sigh to be what I never was yet. 

41. Productions first of various good. 
For man and beast supplying food; 
My next th' effect of cold or fear, 
Or from the feather'd tribe we hear; 
My whole strikes terror to the heart, 
And awful rends my first apart. 

42. When scudding with a pleasant breeze, 
Jack calls my first his friend; 
Drinks to my next and is at ease, 

Such hours he loves to spend. 
But when my first doth chance to fail, 

Or otherwise doth prove; 
Straight from my whole to furl each sail, 

"With haste the tar will move. 

43. Your heart is heavy, when my first is light; 
My second, fools as well as wits can write; 
'Twere vain, at first, within my third to try, 
For secrets it will tell you by and by. 

44. My first, ye fair, adorns your head, 
You wear not any thing instead; 
Within the convent's gloomy walls, 
My second to devotion calls; 

In July's eve, my whole is sound, 
Decking, with azure tint, the ground. 

45. My first is the Supreme Being, my second a resemblance, 
and my whole, the highest epithet that can be bestowed upon a 
hero. 

46. My first, a substance hard and bright, 
Is useful, morning, noon, and night; 
My second, find it where you will, 

Is of the same dimension still: 
And by my whole, I often try, | 
Butchers' and grocers' honesty. 

47. My first brings joy to all around, 

My second may bring sorrow; 

My whole but once a year is found, 

And may be yours to-morrow. 

48. Most attentive's my first to all tales that are told, 
And as Moses relates, was with Adam of old; 

In my second, each year many thousands are laid; 
How transient, alas 1 in all earthly parado I 



140 CHARADES. 

Let a man in his life-time be ever so droll, 
He'll never once jest when he's laid in my whole. 

49. My first for trambling oft is nam'd, 
My second in the battle fam'd; 
Both these, my lovely fair ones join, 
They paint a poet most divine. 

50. Brave conquerors in my first— of old, 

Where drawn from battle home; 
Out of my second, silver, gold, 

And copper too do com-e. 
The lady who looks wan thro' years, 

Whose face no redness shows; 
By using of my whole appears 

As fresh as any rose. 

•51. When sable night rides down the west, 

Chased by my first array; 
My second comes then with the first, 

And hails the genial ray. 
My whole combined, to you will show 

A time allowed for rest; 
Tho' tis absurd, alas ! too true, 

Good Christians all confess. 

52. My first is my wife, and my next lent a grace, 

To the Parson who locked us in Hymeneal embrace; 

But my bride would have thought herself left in the lurch, 

If my whole had not deck'd her fair bosom at church. 

53o My first is a person of whom we've all read, 
On my second, I fear we oft heedlessly tread; 
"When these are selected, and rightly combin'd, 
A substance proverbially hard you will find. 

54» My first's a portion of a book, 

One of the insect tribe my second; 
Whene'er upon my whole you look, 
A splendid show it must be reckon'd 

55o My first, tho' a small, is a most useful word, 

And there's scarcely a page where it has not occurr'd. 

My next, to the cattle and corn is a guard. 

And should it be wanting, they all may be marr'd: 

My whole I'd not give, nor would willingly take, 

Consider and weigh, it may be a mistake; 

Por things do not always appear as they are, 

And who judges too rashly may fall in a snare. 

56e My first secures and guards my second, 
Which is a sort of profit reckon'd, 
And from my total doth proceed, 
As is by ev'ry trade agreed. 



CHARADES. 141 

67. The laurelled bard, my first vouchsafes to wield, 

A personal pronoun my second will disclose ; 
And in my third, upon th' ensanguin'd field, 

The war-worn soldier seeks a rude repose: 
My contrite total, the unbounded scope 

Of heaven surveys, with contemplative eye, 
Anl trust to gain, thro' firm religious hope, 

These mansions where the righteous never die. 

58. My first is said to be a squeeze, 
My next may be defin'd a nod; 
My whole's a compound metal sure, 
Eesembling that for which we plod. 

50. My first is a noble animal, my second is the lord of the 
creation, and my whole is a rider. 

60. My first is the protection to a building, my third quickly 
fades, and my whole is fragrant. 



ENIGMAS. 

Pray what is that, which I've been told. 

(Though never told in rhyme) 
That is almost itself as old 

As Adam, or as time. 
For it's been made in early days, 

As many folks have said; 
And yet is subject to decays, 

And, even now is made. 
But, as it is a secret deep, 

— Yet I to tell may choose; ' 
It is what no one likes to keep, 

And no one likes to lose. 

I'am fram'd for use, or pleasure, or for war, 
The prince and peer and peasant me prefer: 
To mode and motion I am not confin'd, 
I vary with the various turns of mind: 
Sometimes I skim it o'er the verdant plain, 
As oiten bustla in the fierce campaign; 
I've lour supporters, yet I two support, 
"Who twist my arms, for I was made for sport; 
A dupe to caprice, I to humor suit, 
And barrier am betwixt the man and brute; 
But when with fitness we do not comply, 
Quarrels ensue with galling hip and thigh, 



142 



Yet strange to see th' occurrences that pass, 
I'ra often jumbled 'twixt the mule and ass. 

3. I daily breathe, say what you will, 

And yet I have no life ; 
I kindle feuds, but never kill, 
Nor cause the smallest strife. 

4. I lend my assistance to all, 

To tradesmen, the merchant, and clerk; 
And am too at all people's call, 

Provided it's not in the dark. 
I messages take far and near; 

I travel all over the land, 
Without any power to hear, 

Or legs ev'n to walk, go, or stand. 

5. As soon as I'm for business fit, 
My master throws me in a pit; 

And there does plunge me to and fro, 

Until a set of teeth I show, 

In number oft above a score, 

Which wood or stone can't stand before: 

Whene'er my work I do come nigh, 

I make the very dust to fly: 

I never work but with my teeth, 

Then am I not a hungry thief? 

6. Attend all yo artists, attend to my lay, 

And to you all my pmperties soon 111 display. 

In wit, or in learning, in wisdom or knowledge, 

I often outshine the great dons of the college; 

For, in Latin, French, Spanish, nay Hebrew and Greek, 

On proper occasions, I frequently speak. 

And as to my service, a numerous train 

I help to support, and some wholly maintain. 

Yet I'm not without blame; for I cause your surprise, 

When I make false alarms, and, to fright you, tell lies ! 

At all times of day I'am fondly sought after, 

To some I bring grief, and to others give laughter ! 

Without my assistance the critic would pine ; 

For many consult me before they can dine. 

The noblest of passions that dwells in the breast, 

By what I contain is too often suppress'd. 

To me politicians most ardently flock, 

Who prefer my instructions to Bacon or Locke. 

7. Some people by my aid work real wonders, 
Whilst others only make the grossest blunders; 
I always please while aiming to offend, 

And make that worse which I intend to mend: 

Nay, often add fresh lustre to the fame 

Of those I strive to load with matchless blamd. 



ENIGMAS. 1*3 

Sometimes reflect dishonor and disgrace, 

Upon the person that I mean to please ; 

So rogues ond tools, by turns, are fair and wise, 

And e'en the best, by tits, what they 

In short, I bring the lawyer cash, attend 

The politician, am the doctor's friend; 

And make the parson's text say this or that, 

Just as in pulpit he's dispos'd to prate. 

But lest you miss, this I will further shew, 

I spring from flesh and blood, but more from you, 

8. Belov'd by beggar, king, and lord, 
Caress'd at cottage and at court; 
More dangerous than the murderous sword, 

The villain's weapon, children's sport. 
The laborer, oppress'd with toil, 

Takes me to cheer a winter's eve, 
Yet those who're bless' d by fortune's smile, 

Of wealth and plenty I bereave. 
"When night revolving doth appear, 

To hold her sable cheerless reign; 
If I invade the gloom, what fear, 

What horror strikes the rustic train. 
I'm bless'd and curs'd, hated and lov'd, 

Despis'd, detested, and approv'd. 

0. Sometimes I have sense, 

Sometimes I have none, 
Sometimes I offend, 

Then you bid me begone; 
Sometimes I am rnerry, 

Sometimes I am sad, 
Sometimes I am good, 

Sometimes very bad; 
However, to make me, 

I cost many brains, 
JIuch labor, much thought, 

And a great deal of pains. 

10. In Africa once I delighted to range, 

On the tail of my owner I fled, 
But in America experience a wonderful change," 
And instead of a tail, dress a head. 

11. "We. seldom touch the earth, though we always go to the 
ground ; always born together, every body takes great care of us, 
and those who lose us, are much distressed. 

12. Sometimes, I aid the lover's cause, 
Sometimes, the soldier in the Avars; . 
Sometimes, I with the thief conspire; 
Sometimes, I'm useful at a fire; - 



144 ENIGMAS. 

Sometimes, the carpenters befriend, 
Sometimes, the bricklayers attend; 
Sometimes, the gardener takes my aid, 
Sometimes, I help the painter's trade; 
And sometimes, little masters try 
By me to gain a bird's-nest high. 

13. I am of slight texture, but great worth; can procure both 
the necessaries and luxuries of life, and change into various 
metals at the will of my possessor. 

14. Never still for a month, but seen mostly at night. 

15. In Spring I look gay, 
Deck'd in comely array, 

In Summer more clothing I wear; 

When colder it grows, 

I fling off my clothes, 
And in Winter quite naked appear. 

16. A tall and slender shape I bear, 
No lady's skin more white or fair; 
My life is short, and doth decay 
So soon, it seldom lasts a day. 

If in the evening brought to light, 
I make my exit in the night. 

17. I'm sometimes of copper, and sometimes of tin, 

Of iron I also am made; 
One element I always carry within, 

Of another I'm never afraid. 
For so constant they teaso mo, I seldom am known 

To be left by the one or the other alone. 

18. By nature's law, to me is giv'n 
The greatest power under heav'n; 
The proudest monarchs I confine, 
Who silently themselves resign, 
And own obedience by a nod, 

To me, their more than demi-god; 

So universal is my sway, 

That high and low my laws obey; 

If more of me you wish to know, 

Enquire not of the sons of woe, 

But of the weary and the gay, 

Who to me ready homage pay; 

Though while they in my pow'r remain/ 

Should you enquire, 'twill bo in vain. 

19. What force or strength can't get thro', 
I with a gentle touch can do ; 

And many in the streets would stand, 
Were I not as a friend at hand. 



ENIGMAS. 145 

20. Although we are but twenty-six, 

We change to millions too; 
Although we cannot speak a word. 
We tell what others do. 

21. I've a tail like a flame, 
Pray tell me my name ? 

22. I am taken from the mine; confined in „ ooden «ase; and 
•mi used by many people. 

23. I bear much, devour much, and reach from pole to pole. 

24. I'm a creature by travellers very well known, 
Aud walk on the ice, in the north frigid .zone. 

25. What beauties with a grace may do, 
What, when you'ra drest, looks well on you; 
What every social man would be 

To please the present company; 

What master for a wife would give, 

On what a parson's horse might live; 

What misses use for similes, 

When fingers smart or head aches teases 

What antiquarians gladly <d give, 

To make the former ages live; 

What some men never think too bold, 

To load their chests with ill-got gold; 

What I with pleasure would pursue, 

If you my fair one would prove true. 

28. Let kings and tyrants boast no more. 
Of vassals and -despotic pow'r; 
By nature's law to me is giv'n 
The greatest power under heav'n; 
The proudest monarchs I confine, 
Who silently themselves xesign, 
And own -obedience by a nod, 
To me, their more than demi-god, 
So nniversal is my sway, 
That high and low my laws obey. 

27. Come, riddling, "wits-say "what am I, 
Distinguish'd by my crimson dye; 
It's probable I'd first my rise 
Prom mother Eve in Paradise; 

In her I'll fix my pedigree, 

Her sin at the forbidden tree, 

<xave birth to shame and shame Tjore me. 

28. In eas'ern climes, where Nilus laves 

The neighboring plains with his nutritious waves, 
I first appear'd on earlh, and then began 
To execute my vengeance upon man,—. 



146 



Whom I oppress'd with wide destroying hand? 

Nor could all earthly help my pow'r withstand. 

Six letters form my name — but what is strange, 

In losing two, I suffer little change ; 

The difference this — when six I had, ) 

"Where'er my quick destroying hand I laid, >• 

The mortal wretch was well, was sick, was dead. ) 

Possess'd of only four, — I cannot kill, 

Vet I remain man's sore tormentor still. 

Bat what's most strange, tho' I've two letters less - , 

Yet I in syllables receive increase, 

Let this suffice, I dare not tell you more; 

Guess the six letters and you'll know the foux. 

29. There's, a thing as they say, 
That appears not in day, 

And its visits but scarcely bestows; 

And it is no surprise 

To' draw it with eyes, 
Besides too a chin, mouth,, and nose. 

As for body, lis true, 

It ne'er brings to view, 
And, believe me, I fear it has none; "1 

So excuse me, I pray-, 

For I really can't say 
That it has either flesh, blood or bone. 

30. When first my maker form'd me to his mind, 
He gave me eyes-, but left me dark and blind;! 
He form'd a nose, but left me without smell; 
A mouth, but neither voice nor tongue to tell 
The world my use ; yet oft the fair thro' me A 
(Although I hide the face) do plainly see. 

Sl» Tho' you seem of me fond, 

For my safety provide, 
And when you walk out 

Take me close by your side; 
Tet you oft use me ill, 

Which I take in good part, 
Nor ev'r murmur or- sigh 

Though I'm stabb'd to the heart. 

32. When mortals are involv'd in ills, " 
• I sing with mournful voice; 
If mirth their hearts in gladness fills, 

I celebrate their joys;. 
And as the lark with warbling throat 

Ascends upon the wing, 
So I lift up my cheerful note, 
And as I mount I sing. ' ' 



147 



33. I live, altho' I have no lands, 

Nor for to-morrow care at all; 
A house I have, not built with hands, 

Yet mind what often doth befal: 
Stout-harted men with keenest knives • 

Beset me and my hapless crew; 
And if I had a thousand lives, 

I must be slain and eaten too. 

34. Two legs I've got which never walk on ground, 
But when I walk or run, one leg turns round. 

35. To king and subject I assistance lend, 
In war a firm ally, in peace a friend; 
To their diversions am a perfect slave, 
At home submissive, but in battle brave, 
To poor and prelate I give health and ease, 
The lady, merchant, and the peasant please; 
Nay of such general use is my employment, 
Without me, life would scarce be worth enjoyment ) 

36. An hundred years I once did live, 
And often wholesome food did give, 
Yet all that time I ne'er did roam, 
So much as half a mile from home, 
My days were spent devoid of strife, 
Until at last I lost my life. 

And since my death— I pray give ear, 
I oft have travell'd far and near. 

37. In these corrupt degenerate times, 
When men are raised for their crimes, 

Utility I boast; 
And if my path they will pursue, 
By easy steps I lead them to, 

Possess the highest post. 
There are, who with good address, 
Pursu'd my steps with eagerness, 

And did their hopes obtain; 
But finding what a pond'rous weight 
They had to bear, resign'd it strait, 

And soon retir'd again. 

38. To me maids frequent visits make, 
And always come for getting's sake, 
And unless I demands can pay 
They discontented go away. 

When they arrive with their demand 

They duly take me by the hand, 

Nor quit it till I promise fair 

To grant the amount for which they care, 

They take it home to their embrace, 

And let it kiss their pretty face. 



148 ENIGMAS. 

39. Homer of old, as stories tell, 
His Hiad put in a nut-shell; 

But did you know what I conceal — 
The fate of kingdoms' commonweal. 
In me a thousand mischiefs lie, 
A thousand pleasures I supply; 
In me the merchant lays his dust, 
In me the tradesman puts his trust : 
But hold — my being to explore, 
Know I'm inanimate — no more. 

40. A slave I am, of frequent use, 
None can more varied gifts produce; 
I shield from wet the gadding fair; 
From drowning save the pamper'd heix; 
The mutilated soldier, I 

"With shapely leg do oft supply; 
Bacchus, his soul-enliv'ning wine, 
Does to my fost'ring care consign; 
Intent the finny prey to catch. 
My motions eager anglers watch. 

/ 41. A serio-comical being am I, 

I'm as warm as a toast, and light as a fly. 

I am of no sex, neither female or male; 

Bat I'm oft between both, and tho' strange is the tale, 

I am of no shape, no color, no size; 

Yet I may be seen by the vulgarest eyes. 1 

I may also be felt, nay, sometimes I've been heard; 

Sometimes I am sought, and sometimes I am fear'd. 

"Who most earnestly buy me, most willingly give me; 

They'll give me the moment in which they receive me. 

I'm a token of peace, and, when Joan and her dear 

Forget and forgive, I'm sure to be there. 

I was the first gift, as I think you'll believe, 

That e'er father Adam presented to Eve; 

And the humor so took, as a body may say, 

That his children observ'd it to this very day; 

And in China, in Guinea, and eke in Peru, 

In Ireland, in Greenland, and all the world thro"; 

Tho' in color and custom they differ so wide, 

I still am the gift of a lad to his bride. 

T 42. Altho' in heaven I have a place: 

Yet 'mong the saints and sons of grace 

You'll never find me nam'd; 
Suah is my fate, that I in hell, 
With horrid shapes and howlings dwell, 

Tho' not among the damn'd. 
Yet not to hell alone confin'd, 
I claim a share with human kindj. 



H9 



Let Neptune boast his sea, 
While I on earth my empire fix, 
(Tho' not one-fourth) above one-sixth 

Of which belongs to me. 
To search me out in open day, 
"Were merely labor thrown away, 

I dwell in shades and night; 
Yet while in shades you search around, 
iand, water, air, or under ground, 

I'm never out of sight. 
Creatures that haunt earth, sea, or sky, 
Have no one such a shape as I, 

Of all the various throng; 
Take one hint more (tho' strange to say) 
You'd find that hell, (were I away) 

"VVou'd not be two yards long. 

43. Hail, ladies fair, once more I try ' 
My skill in mystic truth: 

Pray then bestow a gracious smila 

Upon a simple youth. 

'Pore Adam was I date my birth, 

My origin's not known: 

But now I constitute a part 

Of every mortal man. 

When Handel liv'd he knew my word, ' 

And Hayden own'd my pow'r. 

Nay, 'twas my aid alone that bade, 

Their heav'nly genius tow'r. 

"Where bloody Mars his scepter sways 

O'er Plains embrued with gore. 

Here I am found, and almost rent, 

By cannon's dreadful roar. 

A part of every lady too, 

Sometimes adorn'd with gold ! 

But one hint more and then my name 

You quickly will unfold. 

When beaunteous Ceres crowns the year, 

The lands in plenty yield, 

I then to bless the farmers near, 

Am full in every field. 

44. I never laid within a bed,' 

My lodging is against tlie wall; 
I'va fifty eyes, yet ne'er a head: 

My name, ye Misses, can you call ? 
To tell you more, my body's re und, 

And I am seldom out of use ; 
I oft in greens and roots abovnd, 

And oft discharge a wat'ry juice. 



* 50 ENIGMAS. 

45. Trundle was a jolly blade, 

Of courage stout and free, 
Many a noble match he made, 
To fight with three times three. 
^ I'll tell you how the coast he clears, 

He gets among the throng, 
i Then kicks and cuffs them by the ears, J 

And lays them all along. 
Tho' he be short and they be tall, 
He very often throws them all. ■ 

46. Can you the name of me devise ? 

My mouth is form'd just like a bow; ^ 
A nose I have and many eyes, 

From whence my tears do often flow; | 
I seldom weep in winter time, 

Altho 1 the weather's ne'er so cold, 
But when gay Flora's in her prime, 

My tears you often may behold. 

47. My habitation's in a wood, 

And I'm at any one's command, 
I often do more harm than good, 

If once I get the upper hand. 
I never fear a champion's frown, 

Stout things I oftentimes have done; 1 
Brave soldiers I have oft laid down, 

I never fear their sword or gun. 

48. I lived in a house of glass, 

Where I with glorious beams was blest; 
But such my fate, it came to pass, 

At length that I was dispossess'd, 
Then being brought to open view, 

Indeed, the nak'd truth I'll tell, 
I was both flay'd and quarter' d too, 

By those that lov'd me passing well. 

49. Firm tho' I am, I'm firmer still, 

From that great cause which does me fill; 

But mortal eyes ne'er saw the face 

Of him that fills my sacred space : 

I'm form'd of stone, of brick and wood, 

And visited by all the good. 

I keep one clerk, whose desk I'll own 

He uses'not to write upon. 

Those brought to me, with me remain, 

And none know when they'll wake again. , 

50. Great numbers do our use despise, 

But yet at last they find 
"Without our help in many, things, 
They might as well be blind. 



151 



51. In almost evary house I'm seen, 

(No wonder then I'm common) 
I'm neither mam nor maid, nor child, 

Nor yet a married woman. 
I'm pennyless and poor as Job, 

Yet such my pride by nature, 
I always wear a kingly robe, 

Though a dependent creature. 

52. I am the terror of mankind; 

My breath is flame, and by its pow'r,' 
I urge my messenger to find 
A way into the strongest tow'r. 

53. Before creating nature will'd, 

That atoms into form should jar, 
By me the boundless space was fill'd, 

On me was built the first made star. 
For me the saint will breake his word; 

By the proud atheist I'm rever'd; 
"At me the coward draws his sword, 

And by the hero I'm fear'd. 
Scorn' d by the meek and humble mind, 

Yet often by the vain possest; 
Heard by the deaf; seen by the blind; 

And to the troubled conscience rest. 
Than wisdom's sacred self I'm wiser, 

And yet by evesy blockhead known; 
I'm freely given by the miser, 

Kept by the prodigal alone. 
As vice deform'd, as virtue fair, 

The courtier's loss, the patriot's gains, \ 
The poet's purse, the coxcomb's care, 

Guess, — and you'll have me for your pains. 

54. I am found in riches, though not in wealth, 
In illness and sickness, but not in health. 
In a hint I lurk, but I'm never known 

In a sarcasm or sally; I hold my own 

In a skilful compliment; never give way 

To scandal or quarrel, although I must say 

In mischievous gossips and fights I am found, 

For in evil, not good, doth my influence abound. 

I am not pretty, but shine in pleasing. 

I'm given to loving, and hating, and 

I dwell in a mansion, a ship, or an inn; 

Indeed in the latter I choose to begin. 

I am known in your life, but not in your death, 

Though I die in a sigh, yet not in a breath. 



1^2 ENTG5TAS. 

I am giren in marriage, though single I lire. 

I am not generous, yet always give. 

When you meet me double, you may rely 

I am talking latin undoubtedly. 

When you discover me, I know 

You will jealously guard me from friend or foe. 

Though selfish I am, for I never shun 

To take every care of number one, 

As the Eomans styled me; when I appear 

Asa personal pronoun, you hold me dear ! 

55. A famous dancer, born in Florence, and a pupil of Dupre. 
He obtained great fame at the Opera in Paris. His vanity was 
even greater than his talent, for he often used to say, "There are 
only three great men in Europe — I, Voltaire, and the King of 
Prussia ! " (Frederick II.) 

1. An Emperor of Rome, a wicked, gluttonous, and cruel man. 
One day, visiting the field of battle alter his lieutenants had 
gained for him a victory, he uttered these shocking words : — 
"The body of a dead enemy smells sweet !" 

2. The English king who instituted an order of knighthood, 
and at the same time spoke these words — "Honi soitquimaly 
pense." 

3. A Grecian sage, who having paid Croesus, the rich King of 
Lydia, a visit, that monarch, with pride, displayed his riches 
before him. The philosopher, instead of being struck with 
amazement (as Croesus expected) at the sight of so much mag- 
nificence, merely remarked, "Let us account no man happy 
before his death." 

4. The translator of the Scriptures into English who was 
condemned to be burnt for heresy. When fastened to the stake 
he cried with a loud voice, "Lord, open the eyes of the King of 
England I" 

5. A river which formed the domestic boundary of a great em- 
pire. It was crossed by a celebrated man who was leading his 
army thither, with this exclamation — "The die is cast." 

6. A country to which James n. was going on an unsuccessful 
endeavor to regain his crown, when the parting words of Louis 
XIV. of France to him were — "The best thing I can wish you is,; 
that I may never see you again." 

7. A famous philosopher who was unjustly accused, and con- 
demned to drink poison. His wife was lamenting that he had 
been unjustly condemned. "Wouldst thou rather," said he, "that 
my condemnation had been just? " 

H each of these names 
You write down as you find, 
The answer is plain, 
By th' initials combined. 



153 



56. From rosy gates we issue forth, 

From east to west, from south to north, 
Unseen, unfelt, by night, by day, 
Abroad we take our airy way. 
"We foster love and kindly strife, 
The bitter and the sweet of life; 
Piercing and sharp, we wound like steel, 
Now, smooth as oil, those wounds we heaL 
Not strings of pearls are valued more, 
Nor gems encased in golden ore; 
Yet thousands of us every day 
"Worthless and vile are cast away. 
Ye wise, secure with bars of brass 
The double gates through which we pass, 
For, once escaped, back to our cell 
Nor art, nor man, can us compel. 



PUZZLES, ACROSTICS AND REBUSES. 



1. Geographical Acrostic. — My first is a sacred river in the 
East, on whose waters maidens float their signal lamps, and to 
whose banks the sick are brought to die. 

My second is an island, whose bars were too weak to keep $ 
mighty spirit imprisoned. 

My third is a river in the West, renowned for the musical boat- 
men floating down it. 

My fourth is a town with a fine lake of its own, much beloved 
by straitlaced people for its narrow principles and musical boxes. 

My fifth is the glory of the ancient world, "now fallen from 
her high estate." 

My sixth is said to be the largest river in the world, and is 
haunted by plenty of crocodiles. 

My seventh is a mountain that many find very hard to climb — 
few reaching to its summit. 

My eighth the mountain, whose cool breezes bring fresh health 
and vigor to languid and enervated Europeans in the East. 

My ninth and last, a quaint little old town in Flanders, owning 
a good collegiate school, and which is not pronounced quite as 
written. 

The initials of all these will give. the name of the science which 
describes them all. 



1°'* PUZZLES. 

2. A Protean Puzzle. —I am to be met with in many more 
shapes than one, and will tax your ingenuity by giving you a few 
to discover. 

1. You will meet with me in water in a park or large landscape 
garden. 

2. You will find me at sea, where I generally get very wet 
through, or am torn into strips. 

3. I am to be met with in an oven, with plenty of cakes and bis- 
cuits on me. 

4. I am composed of several metals, and am sometimes stout, 
sometimes attenuated. 

5. I am a necessary part of your bed, and bear your signature 
very often. 

6. I am to be met with in the water-butt during Jack Frost's 
teign. 

7. I am a manufactured article, sometimes tinged with an in- 
finite number of hues, more generally of none at all. 

8. I am bound and yet free, and have twenty-four pages in 
Waiting. 

9. I am transparent, colorless, and fragile. 

10. I am one of the wax-fiower maker's materials. 

11. I am given to cotton, and addicted to quilts. 

Lastly. I am the criminal's uniform, the ghost's sole garment, 
and the likeness of yourself when blanched with terror. 

3. I am a merchant, and like many other people have a ship 
at sea, about which I am slightly uneasy. She was laden with a 
cargo of red wine, bound from a Spanish town. She will touch 
at several places in her way back, I know, and perhaps you can 
h lp me to trace her on her way. One harbor is a troublesome 
one, on account of Government formalities, so I know she will go 
by that. The second is the warehouse for all the goods we send 
out of the country. The third bears itself very well. The fourth 
is remarkable for holding up everything. The fifth has a good 
deal to do with the Spiritualists. The sixth is in the ocean. The 
seventh contains all we bring into the country. The eighth has a 
meaning. The ninth is an unpleasant mixture of soldiers and 
convicts, so I hope she will not touch there. The tenth is the place 
all our news comes from ; and the neighboring harbor the eleventh, 
makes it all false when it can. The twelfth is entirely given to. 
amusement. The thirteenth, and last, will be, I hope, her own 
iarbor, where she may unload. Now tell me all these places. 

4. The following letters are inscribed on a stone tablet placed 
immediately above the Ten Commandments in a country church 
in the north-west of England, and are deciphered with only one 
letter : 



153 



PRSVRYPRFCTMN! 
VRKPTHSPRCPTSTN. 



r\i i i i i 

5. Add five strokes to the above and make nine. 



6. If the £mt put some : but if the B, 



7. "Why is this gone 

8. What difference is there between twice eight and fifty, and 
twice fifty-eight — and what is their product ? 

9. In an army consisting of 187 squadrons of horse, each 157 
men, and 207 battallions, each 560 men — how many effective 
soldiers, supposing that in 7 hospitals there are 473 sick ? 

10. The Spectator mentions a club of fat people, whose num- 
ber was only 15, and yet weighed no less than 3 tons — what was 
the weight of each person ? 

11. Three boys met a servant maid carrying apples to the 
market. . The first took half what she had, but returned to her 
ten : the second took one-third, but returned two : and the third 
took away half those she had left, but returned her one. She had 
then twelve apples left— how many had she at first ? 

12. A schoolmaster being asked how many scholars he had, 
said, if I had as many, half as many, and one quarter as many 
more, I should have 86 — how many had he ? 

13. A person having about him a certain number of Portugal 
pieces, said, "If the third, fourth and sixth of them were added 
together, they would make 54." — I desire to know how many ha 
had? 

14. A man overtaking a maid driving a flock of geese, said to 
her, "How do you do, sweetheart; where are you going with 
these thirty geese ? " — ' ' No, Sir, said she, I have not 30 ; but if I 
had as many more, half as many more, and 5 geese besides, I 
should have 30. " — How many had she ? 

15. Three persons discoursing concerning their ages; says H, 
I am 30 years of age; says K, I am as old as H, and one-fourth of 
L; and says L, I am as oid as you both — what was the age of each 
person ? 

16. D, E, and F, playing at cards, staked 324 crowns, but dis- 
puting about the tricks, each man took as many as he could ;D 
got a certain number; E as many as D, and 15 more; and F got a 
fifth part of both their sums added together — how many did each 
©f them get? 



156 PUZZLES. 

17. A stealing apples, was taken by B. and to appease him 
gave him half of what he had, and B gives him back 10; going 
farther he meets C, who took from him half of what he had left, 
and gives him back 4; after that, meeting with D, he gives him 
half of what he had, and returns him back 1. At last getting safe 
away, he finds he had 10 left — how many had he at first ? 

18. A gentleman going into a garden, meets with some ladies, 
and says to them, " Good morning to you 10 fair maids." " Sir, 
you mistake, answered one of them, we are not 10 : but if we 
were twice as many more as we are, we should be as many above 
10 as we are now under." — How many were they? 

19. If 100 eggs were placed in a right line, exactly a yard as- 
under from one another, and the first a yard from a basket, what 
length of ground does that man go who gathers up these hundred 
eggs singly, returning with every egg to the basket to put it in ? 

20. A man had 8 sons, the youngest was 4 years old, and the 
eldest 32, they increased in arithmetical progression — what was 
the common difference of their ages ? 

21. A man is to travel from London to a certain place in 12 
days, and go about 3 miles the first day, increasing every day by an 
equal excess, so that the last day's journey may be 58 miles — what 
is the daily increase, and how many miles distant is that place 
from London ? 

22. A man being asked how many sons he had, said, that the 
youngest was 4 years old, and the oldest 32, and that he increased 
one in his family every four years — how many had he ? 

23. How many changes may be rung upon 12 bells; and how 
long would they be in ringing but once over, supposing 10 changes 
might be rung in a minute, and the year to contain 365 days 6 
hours? 

24. There is an army consisting of a certain number of men, 
who are placed rank and file (that is, in the form of a square, 
each side having 577 men) — I desire to know how many the whole 
square contains ? 

25. A certain pavement is made exactly square, each side 
of which contains 97 feet — I demand how many square feet are 
contained therein ? 

28. What length of cord will be fit to tie a cow's tail, the other 
end fixed in the ground, to let her have liberty of eating an acre 
of grass, and no more, supposing the cow and tail to be 5 i yards? 

27. The top of a castle from the ground is 45 yards high, and 
surrounded with a ditch 60 yards broad; what length must a 
ladder be to reach from the outside of the ditch to the top of the 
castle ? 

28. How many changesmay be rung on 6 bells ? 



157 

29. If 360 men be in garrison, and have provisions for 6 months, 
but hearing of no relief at the end of five months — how many 
men must depart, that the provisions may last as much longer ? 

30. A man had 12 sons, the youngest was 3 years old and the 
oldest 58; they increased in arithmetical progression — what was 
the common difference of their ages ? 

31 . A snail in getting up a May-pole, only twenty feet high, was 
observed to climb 8 feet every day, but every night it came down 
again 4 feet — in what time by this method, did it reach the top of 
the pole ? 

32. What is the difference between 14676, and the fourth of 
itself ? 

33. "What is the difference between twice eight and twenty, 
and twice twenty-eight; as also between twice five and fifty, and 
twice fifty-five ? 

34. A schoolmaster being asked how many scholars he had, 
said, if he had as many more, one-half as many, and one-fourth as 
many, he should have 99 — how many had he? 

35. An ancient lady being asked how old she was, to avoid a di- 
rect answer, said I have 9 children, and there are 3 years between the 
birth of each of them; the eldest was born when I was 19 years 
old, which is now exactly the age of the youngest — how old was 
the lady? 

36. A gentleman went to sea at 17 years of age; 8 years after 
that he had a son born, who lived 46 years, and died before his 
father; after whom the father lived twice twenty years, and then 
died also — what was the age of the father when he died ? 

37. A person said he had 20 children, that it happened there 
was a year and a half between each of their ages ; his eldest son 
was born when he was 24 years old, and the age of the youngest 
is 21 — what was the father's age ? 

38. A sheepfold was robbed 3 nights successively ; the first 
night one-half of the sheep were stolen and half a sheep more ; 
the second night half the remainder were lost, and half a sheep 
more; the last night they took half that were left, and half a sheep 
more; by which time they were reduced to 20 — how many were 
there at first ? 

39. There are two numbers, the one 48, the other twice as much 
— what is the difference between their sum and difference ? 

40. Two men depart both from one place, the one goes north, 
the other south; the one goes 7 miles and the other 11 miles a day 
— how far are they distant at the 12th day of their departure ? 

41. "When first the marriage knot was tied between my wife 

and me, 
Her age did mine as far exceed, as three times three does 
three: 



158 



ANAGBAMS. 



But when seven years, and half seven years, we man and 

wife had been, 
My age came then as near to her's, as eight is to sixteen. 
"What was each of our ages when married ? 

42. If 12 oxen will eat 3 acres and one-third of grass in 4 weel; s 
and 21 oxen will eat 10 acres in 9 weeks — how many oxen will crt 
24 acres in 18 weeks, the grass being allowed to grow uniformly ? 

43. A lady was asked her age who replied thus — 
My age, if multiplied by three, 
Two-sevenths of that product trippled be, 
The square root of two-ninths of that is four- 
Now tell my age, or never see me more. 



ANAGRAMS AND TRANSPOSITIONS. 



1. Complete I'm a card; behead me, in brief, 

You'll find me a delicate nice bit of beef; 
Curtail me again, and a liquor appears, 
That raises your spirits, and banishes fears. 

2. If you transpose a term for low, 

What horses have 'twill plainly show; 
Transpose these letters yet once more, 
"What's said in churches you'll explore. 

3. Though small I am, yet, when entire, 

I've force to set a house on fire; 
Take off one letter, and 'tis clear 
I can contain whole herds of deer; 
Dismiss another, and you'll find 
I once contain'd all human kind. 

4. The useful produce of the dairy I am, ^ 

And sit down to tea with master and ma'am; ^ 

My head take away, and you'll instantly see 

That my remains a parcel of paper will be; 

"Which, if rightly transposed, will bring to your view 

An animal useful for saddle and plough. 

Next untail my whole, and the rest rightly place, 

And you'll see what exhibits the speed of the chase. 

5. Transpose a portion of the year, 

A Christian name will then appear; 
The same, transpos'd again, will show. 
A plant that does in India grow. 



ANAGKAMS. 159 

6. My whole is by the curious made 

Of numbers and right lines; 
Upon the same a game is play'd, 
And sweet Lucilla dines. 

. Now transposition brings to view" 

What pretty little lambs 
Are piteously heard to do, 

When they have lost their dams. 

7. I'm first a tax; and then transpose me, 

A mark of pity you'll expose me. 

8. Transpose a Chinese plant, 'twill give 

What you must do if you would live. 

9. A term for scolding, backwards read, 

Will give what all good people dread; 
A character so base, that none 
The epithet would call their own. 

10. A vessel transposed, will give the highest point, and a 
child's toy. 

11. What in winter you feel, 

When the frost's on the ground, 
Eevers'd 'twill reveal, 

(And it is truth I'll be bound, ) 
A name that to rustics we give, 
Who in clownish simplicity live. 

12. The cause that first brought grief and death in the world, 
And Adam and Eve from their Paradise hurl'd, 
Transpos'd will reveal you a dress of the fair, 

Which to hide, while it heightens their beauty they wear. 
Reverse it again, 'twill expose to our views, 
The name of a tribe 'mong the circumcis'd Jews. 

13. Transpose what we do in harvest, you will have a fruit in 
autumn. 

14. The god of battles, animals that crop the meadows, and 
the terror of our foes, may all be expressed by the same characters. 

15. A rich fruit, and how we would like to buy it, are expressed 
by the same letters. 

16. What race-horses do transposed, will give a vessel used in 
making tea, and which formerly contained the ashes of heroes. 

17. Transpose sixty, and it will show what every lover sa;s 
his mistress does. 

18. The hardest and almost the heaviest substance in nature 
transposed, will give the light9st. 



ANAGRAMS. 



19. Spare him not. 

20. Moon-starers. 

21. Golden land. 

22. To love ruin. 

23. Best in prayer. 

24. Great helps. 

25. Oh, use malt. 

26. Bare mad frolic. 

27. Yes, Milton. 

28. Oh, stranger, I pine. 

29. Ten teapots. 

30. Nay, I repent it. 



31. Mock— joy — a tin 

pan — cask ! 

32. Sly ware. 

33. Fat bakers. 

34. Nine thumps. 

35. 'Tis no demon's art. 

36. In magic tale. 

37. Guess a fearful ruin. 

38. Love to ruin. 

39. Got as a clue 

40. I hire parsons. 



PROBLEMS. 



1. The figure in the margin is formed by first 
cutting a piece of paper into a square, and afterwards 
cutting away one-fourth (being the triangular part 
made by the intersection of the two diagonals). 
"When the paper, by this means, is brought into the 
shape of the figure, the puzzle is, to cut it into four 

parts, each of which shall be alike in shape and size. The paper 

on which the experiment is made, ought to be twice or three 

times as large as the annexed figure. 

Solution. The figure must be divided, as in 
the margin; but, in cutting out the four pieces AA, 
BB, CC, DD, care must be taken not to cut through 
the external edge of the figure, or the pieces will 
not hang together. The scissors, or knife, must be 
brought as near as possible to the edge. It will be 
perceived that the pieces, though similar in shape, 

are not precisely so in size; but they are so nearly alike as to 

make the puzzle a very fair one. 




2. The annexed figure explains a most ingenious 
device for forming flat roofs or floors of pieces of 
timber, little more than half the length of such 
roof or floor. This plan is well known to architects. 
The way in which a young person may be amused 
with this puzzle is as follows : — suppose a common ba- 
sin to be six inches in diameter, it may be roofed over, 



PROBLEM'S. 1^1 

as in the figure, with three slips of wood &c, although these 
Blips shall very little exceed half the diameter of the basin, say 
half an inch longer. In performing this puzzle, let the slips of 
wood be thin, like matches, or they will not lap over each other, 
so as to form a flat roof. 

3. Two men, A and B, went to C, to purchase some spirits. A 
had a five gallon keg, B a three gallon keg, and C had no other 
measure but an eight gallon keg. Now A and B want each four 
gallons of liquor, I wish to know if it be possible for C to mea- 
sure the desired quantities to his two customers; and if it be pos- 
sible, how he does it. 

Solution.— Fill the three gallon keg out of the eight; pour the 
three into he five ; fill the three again out of the eight, and pour 
two of it out of the three into the five. This will fill the five, 
and leave one gallon in the three ; empty the five into the eight, 
and the one out of the three into the five. Fill the three again 
and then pour it to the one in the five. There will be four in 
the five, and four in the eight, each man's equal share. 



4. Let a piece of stiff brown paper be cut into the 
form of the arch of a bridge, somewhat like the annexed 
but twice or three times the size. The other piece 
(which may be supposed to be the ladder) would be 
better of pasteboard. When the two parts are cut 
across, and placed as here represented, supporting each other, 
they may be raised from the table, both together, and replaced in 
their present position, without letting either piece fall, by means 
of a long pin, knitting needle, thin pencil, &c. , inserted between 
the arch and the ladder. It is best done when there is a cloth on 
the table 

Solution. — Let the top of the arch be gently moved aside by 
the pencil until the top of the ladder fall a little within it. The 
whole may then be raised. 

5- Let a piece of apple, turnip, &c, be cut into the 

horse-shoe form; stick six pins where the dots appear; the 

puzzle then is by two cuts only, to divide the apple or 

turnip into six parts, each containing one pin. 

Solution. — Cut off the upper circular part, containing two of 

the pins, then, by changing the position of the piece, another cut 

will divide the horse-shoe into six portions, each containing one 

pin. 

6. Place ten cents in a row upon a table; then take up any of 
the series, place it upon some other, with this provisio, that you 



162 



PROBLEMS. 



pass over just two cents. Repeat this until there be no single 
cent left. s 

Solution.— 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, cents. Place 4 upon 1 
7 upon 3, 5 upon 9, 2 upon 6, and 8 upon 10. 

7. Place nineteen cents on a table (a round one is best) 
ia such a manner as they will make nine rows, of five in each. 

Solution. — Make an hexagonal figure, as in the 
margin, and at every angle and point of intersec- 
tion, place one cent or counter. 




8. How can you plant twelve trees in six rows, so as to have 
four in each row ? 

a Solution. — One tree to be planted at each angle and at 

V V each point where the lines intersect each other. 

9. If from six you take nine, and from nine you take ten, 

Ye wits, now the puzzle explain; 
And if fifty from fourty be taken, there then 
Will just half a dozen remain 
Solution. 
Prom SIX take IX and S ) 

IX — X — I y will remain. 

XL — L — X ) 

10. A parallelogram (A) may be cut into two pieces, which shall 
form the two other figures (B and C). It need scarcely be added 
that whatever may be the dimensions of the piece A, the pieces 
B and will bear the same proportion to it as they do in this figure. 




PROBLEMS. 163 

11. A ship was in a situation with a hole in one of her planks 
of twelve inches square, and the only piece of plank that could 
be had, was sixteen inches long by nine inches broad. Required 
to know how this said piece must be cut into four pieces, so as to 
repair the hole perfectly and without waste ? 

Solution. — Cut off four inches from the narrow end of the 
given piece, and divide the piece so cut off into three equal pieces 
by cuts in the shortest direction. When arranging these three 
pieces lengthways on the top of the remainder, a square of twelve 
inches will be formed. 

12. To name five weights, which, added together, make 121 
pounds; by means of which may be weighed any intermediate 
weight, including fractions. 

Solution. The five weights, which, added together, make 121, 
and by means of which may be weighed any intermediate weight, 
are, 1, 3, 9, 27, 81,-121. 



yyj 13. A figure similar to the annexed, but much 

y( larger, may be drawn on paper, a slate, a board 



X 



K 



■^-y or on a table with chalk. From any point proceed 
y\ along a right line, as from 1 to 6 or 4, 2 to 5 or 7, 
^-^ 3 to 6 or 8, 4 to 7 or 1, 5 to 8 or 2, 6 to 1 or 3, 7 
to 2 or 4, 8 to 3 or 5, and deposit a counter or cent, 
&c. , at the extremity of the line so traced, in such 
a way as to cover seven of the points, always proceeding from one 
uncovered point to another along a right line. 

Solution. — The mode of accomplishing this is always to cover 
the point from which you last proceeded. To illustrate this, sup- 
pose we begin from 1, and the two methods of performing it from 
that point:— 1 to 6, 4 to 1, 7 to 4, 2 to 7, 5 to 2, 8 to 5, 3 to 8; thus 
seven of the points will be covered. If from 1, instead of pro- 
ce3ding in the first instance to 6, we choose to move to 4, the 
operation will then be, 1 to 4, 6 to 1, 3 to 6, 8 to 3, 5 to 8. 2 to 5, 
7 to 2. On this principle, whatever point you preceed from, the 
problem will be solved. 

14. A countrywoman carrying eggs to a garrison, where she 
had three guards to pass, sold at the first half the number she had, 
and half an egg more ; at the second the half of what remained, 
and half an egg more; and at the third, the half of the remainder 
and half an egg more; when she arrived at the market place, she 
had three dozen still to sell, how was' this possible, without break- 
ing any of the eggs ? 

Solution. — The possibility of this problem will be evident 
when it is considered, that by taking the greater half of an odd 
number, we take the exact half — \. It will be found therefore, 
that the woman, before she passed the last guard, had 73 eggs re- 



164 



PROBLEMS. 



maining, for by selling 37 of them at that guard which is th* lalf 
— i, she would have 36 remaining. In like manner before she 
came to the second guard, she had 147 ; and before she came to 
the first, 295. 

15. A figure similar to the annexed, but much 
larger, should be drawn on a slate or paper, &c. 
It will be observed, that there are five marks in 
each square; and that, counting as from one to 
three, they reckon fifteen each way. The puzzle 
is to take away eight of these marks, and substi- 
tute only four in such a way that they shall still 



EX 



reckon fifteen each way. 

Solution. 
1 2 3 




Take two marks from each of the 
four squares indicated by the figure 2 ; and in lieu 
of those eight abstracted, place one mark in each 
of the four squares^ 1,3 — 1,3. They will then 
count fifteen each way as they did before. 



K N/ 



■■?■ 



16. Cut out of card or paper five pieces, similar in shape and 
size to the above; viz. one piece of fig. 1, one of fig. 2, and three 
pieces like fig. 3. — These five pieces may then be so joined as to 
form a cross like that presented by fig. 4; but, of course larger in 
size. 

Solution. — A simple inspection of the annexed cross 
will show how the five pieces must be arranged to form a 
cross. 



€f 



17. A parellelogram, consisting of a square, 
and a half a square, must be formed of paper 
or card; and by one cut divided into two pieces 
which, joined, form an exact square. In this 
ingenious problem there is no doubling up of 
the paper. 



165 




Solution. — With a pair of compasses divide 
the longer side of the parallelogram into five 
parts, and the shorter side into four parts; 
then cut the whole in steps , as indicated in 
the annexed figure: the two halves (A and B) 
may then be put together so as to form an ex- 



act square, by raising the part B one step. 



18. Given five squares, much larger than that in the 
margin, each divided into two parts, by a line from 
one angle bisecting the opposite side. Divide each of 
these five squares into two parts, by cutting along the 
diagonal line; there will be then ten pieces. Required 
so to arrange these ten pieces, that they shall form one square. 

The solution of the above may be readily found by exercising a 
a little ingenuity; but it would require a very eomplex figure to 
explain it. 




DISSECTED SQUARE. 

19. Cut twenty triangles out of a squars piece 
of wood, as marked in the engraving, mix them 
together, and bid any person make an exact 
square with them. 



Solution. — The solution to_ this problem may be acquired by 
remembering the black lines in the engraving ; by which it will 
be seen that four triangles are to be placed the corners, and in a 
small square made in the centre ; when this is done, the remain- 
der is easy of execution. 




20. When first the marriage knot was tied, 
Betwixt my love and me, 
My age did then her age exceed 

As three times three doth three. 
But when we ten and half ten years 

We man and wife had been, 
Her age came up as near to mine, 
As eight is to sixteen. 
Solution.— The man was 45, the woman was 15. 



166 



ANSWERS TO RIDDLES. 



1. When it is on one side. 

2. " O, Nanny, wilt thou gang 
wi' me?" 

3. In the Dictionary. 

4. Silence. 

5. Because when " t " is gone, 
night is nigh. 

6. An icicle. 

7. His foot. 

8. Because he is injured by 
the son and heir. 

9. The day on which there was 
no Eve. 

10. Because there is not a single 
person in it. 

11. Flattery. 

12. A cat has its claws at the 
end of its paws, a comma 
its pause at the end of a 
clause. 

13. The barren fig-tree. 

14. Because he makes a sty 
Nsjsty... _ 

15. Because he studies the pro- 



16. Because the cat'll (cattle) 
eat it. 

17. Give me none of your jaw. 
18- Postman. 

19. A portrait. 

20. Glass. 

21. Church-bells. 

22. Time. 

23. When it is a-jar. 

24. A secret. 

25- A cock robin. 

26. Because he was sometimes 



seen with Aaron (hair on), 
and sometimes without. 

27. The one gives milk and the 
other gives way. 

28. Three wretched comforters. 

29. Because it cannot be played 
A on. 

30. When he's a-board. 

31. A book. 

32. Pork, you pine. 

33. Because the more you lick 
it the more it sticks. 

34. The eyelid, because it al- 
ways has a pupil under the 
lash. 

35. It shoots from the eye. 

36. Hailing cabs and omnibuses 

37. When she is in stays. 

38. Because U can never come 
until after T. 

39. He is a man of letters. 

40. Because he has taken orders 

41. A pair of snuffers. 

42. He gets his grub by tho 
plough. 

43. Because it is breaking 
■ through the sealing. 

44. Because he is a bit of a 
buck. 

45. Because he runs for the 
plate. 

46. Because they are by two 
men (bitumen). 

47. Because it makes hot shot. 

48. Because he has an attach- 
ment to carry on. 

49. Musick. 

50. An egg. 



167 



51. A lady's lips. 

52. The letter L. 

53. An old maid. 

54. Because it is an attic story. 

55. Snuff the candle. 

56. A, because it makes her 
hear. 

57. February, because it is the 
shortest. ^ 

58. Because it is a queer eye. 

59. Into his 50th year. 

60. The elder-tree. 

61. Pepper and salt. 

62. Because they practice their 
professions. 

63. One ties his ropes, the other 
pitches his cent. 

64. Because they are the -weaker 
vessels. 

65. When long experience has 
made him sage. 

66. Englishmen. In Scotland 
there are men of Ayr; in 
Ireland men of cork; but 
in England are lightermen. 

67. K N (Cayenne). 

68. Because you don't separate 
it from the trunk. 

69. The footman. 

70. Smo king and soa-king. 

71. When it has a hole in it. 

72. Because it covers its face 
with its hands, and runs 
down its own works. 

73. Because it is always in fun. 

74. Because they have ears 
which can't hear, eyes which 
can't see. 

75. Caper sauce. 

76. Because she's a mountain. 

77. Because it never does write 
(right) of itself. - 



78. Because Gee ! makes it go. 

79. Because they make people 
steel pens and say they do 
write. 

80. Because the train always 
runs over sleepers. 

81. When it is adrift. 

82. Columbus. 

83. Chap. I. 

84. He is an India gent (indi- 
gent.) 

85. A muggy day. 

86. One is hard up and tha 
other soft down. 

87. Yes ; they are Macaw-lays. 

88. Inn-attention. 

89. Mice. 

90. When he sits down to wine 
and pine. 

91. Bank notes and they make 
for — tunes. 

92. When he takes a roll in bed. 

93. When there's a leek in it. 

94. Stone. 

95. When they are mustered. 

96. It makes oil boiL 

97. Because it makes rice of ice. 

98. Quick. 

99. One skims milk and the 
other skims water. 

100. The elephant the most, 
because he carries his trunk ; 
the fox and cock the least, 
as they have only a brush 
and comb between them. 

101. None; they are all carried. 

102. Because there was a heavy 
swell on the beach. 

103. Because they banished the 
whites and cast off the 
yoke (yolk). 

104. A policeman when he is 
.. wanted. 



168 



105. A pig, "because lie is killed 
first and cured afterwards. 

106. Cork. 

107. When it is a little tart. 

108. Cadmus, he carried letters 
from Phoenice to Greece. 

109. Because they sell what 
they knead themselves. 

110. Because it is uttered but 
not allowed (aloud). 

111. The great bear (grate hare) 

112. Putting the fire out. 
113? His daughter. 

114. When she is turned into a 
field. 

115. B natural, 

116. Because he thought it a 
good opening for a young 
man. 

117. Because he is 'listed, train- 
ed, has ten drills and shoots 

118. The half, because the full 
moon is as light again. 

119. When the hedges are shoot- 
ing and the bull rushes out. 

120. Because his is all net pro- 
fit. 

121. Ashes. 

122. Because we cannot get on 
> (o n) well without them. 

123. To make your waistcoat 
first B 

124. Because he shows an open 
countenance when taking 
you in. 

125. Because there's always a 
better. 

126. Because for every grain 
they eat they give a peck. 

127. When she wants a mate. 

128. A slip farther. 

129. A scarlet xunner. 



130. Because it is not currant 
(current). 

131. Nothing. 

132. It is matchless. 

133. Because he is guided by 
the direction of strangers. 

134. A noise. 

135. C P O, Scipio. 

136. He would be making gaim 
of him. 

137. She is your mother. 

138. A player. 

139. It is between two C's. 

140. It has no scruples. 

141- Because it is the greatest 
of modern composers. 

142. Por divers reasons. 

143. 16 ounces in one pound. 

144. Two boots. 

145. The date. 

146. Cake, because it is only 
sometimes tipsy, while wins 
is always drunk. 

147. Because it ought to be 
carried out. 

148. Because he often feels a 
good deal board. 

149. When he is within tha 
pound. 

150. Striking her own flag. 
151> Because he is constantly 

boxing the compass. 

152. It had better ,be sown 
(sewn). (Something might 
be said of the tares. ) 

153. Because it is devoid of 
case (e's). 

154. TwoT's. 

155. XL-lent. 

156. When it is crossed. 

157. People plant them and 
then they shoot, _^-- 



im 



158. He knows how to stretch 
his bill. 

139. C D, 

160. The weakly news. 

1G1. A gate. 

162. When he is hale (hail), 

163. Shooting stars. 

164. Y. 

165. When it is due. 

166. A sheep-pen, 

167. When it is under consi- 
deration. 

168. A wheelwright. 

169. A fuller. 

170. For-tune. 

171. Because it is an invisible 
force. 

172. When it is a rye field. 

173. Because it will make an 
eel feel. 

174- I. 

175. I. W, 

176. Because it is scent wher- 
ever it goes. 

177. A dripping pan. 

178. When it is a little bare. 

179. LetteTm. 

180. Like to be drowned. 

181. When it rises and takes a 
fly, 

182. When we see a rash man 
eating a rasher, 

1 83. When he is a regular buck, 

184. When it is under canvass. 

185. When it is full of knots. 

186. A river. 

187. Facetious. 

188. Largess (large S% 

189. When it is eye-water. 

190. Because it is in bliss, -* 



while most of the others 
are in Purgatory. 

191. Because you would get 
bad habits from him . 

192. They correspond but nev- 
er meet. 

193. Because he soonest takes 
offence (a-fence). 

194. One that is for-biddinj> 

195. It is the end of beef. 

196. The one gathers what he 
sows, the other sews what 
she gathers. 

197. Vowels, 

198. It makes him yell «» Oh !" 

199. Anti-money. 

200. Because they belong to 
the standing aTmy. 

201. The last. 

202. The wheel, because it is 
tired, 

203. Because without it we 
should have neither Christ- 
mas nor a new year, 

204. He possesses a, good con- 
stitution. 

205. When it is bound in Mo- 
rocco. 

206. One that blows fowl and 
chops about. 

207. The outside. 

208. When it can't bear you. 

209. Scissors. 

210. Because their existence is 
only in fancy, 

211 . A pillow, 

212. She is full of airs. 

213. He is not at all black. 

214. Because they make a noise 
whenever they are cold. 

215. Because they ars always,., 
in tears (tiers), Zi~. . 



170 



216 Nothing satisfies him. 
217. They ought to- be taken. 

up. 
213. Because we call them to 

take us in. 

219. When he takes notes. 

220. When it is in arms,. 
221 A lamp-lighter. 

222. Debts. 

223. She indulges in fancy too 
much. 

224. Because you hear both 
sides. 

225. Because the sooner It Is 
put «wit the better. 

226. It Is far-fetched and full 
of nonsense. 

227. He cuts capers. 
223. He goes his rounds. 

229. It makes the mare to gov 

230. It Is a representative- 

231. He is a man. beside him- 
self. 

232. He is a-theist. 

233. II 3 is a-tawney (attorney J. 
234 It runs, 

235. It is lofty. 

236- He handles the are (pas). 

237. It has nails. 

238.. She bears fire-Iocksi 

239. He is mounted. 

240. Ho has nothing, else to* de- 
pend upon. 

241. He goes on. tick, 

242. He Is a back-biter.. 

213. He was; bone-less.. 

214. He is a brag, 

215. Meddler, (medlar.)* 
246'. He-is a cast-away. . 
247. She ia a cat-erect (cata- 

KICtV \ . 



243. It is in sheets'. 

249. He makes shifts, 

250. It Is ©ut of the head, 

251. It is a certainty (certain 
tie). 

2521 He has a long bilL 

253- It contains many eyphers. 

254. They are sham pinions 
(champignons), 

255. He Is down-tight, 
256". He is down-cast. 

257. It deals in assurance, 

258. He is miss-led. 

259. It is eomposed ©f ragsu 
200. He Is all on ®ne side. 

261. It Brings dread to the 
wickedandjoy to the right- 
eous. 

262'. It brings distant things 
hear. 

263. His daughter. 

264. A pack of cards* 

265. He fingers the keys. 
266o- It is often under arms. 
267. It has. wards. 

268'.. Heis.foutmouthedL- 

269 s . He is down- in the mouth, 

270, He is cuffed 

271. He draws drinks,, 

272 In one we^ see eatses with- 
out effects, and fn the oth- 
er: effects without «auses. 

273- He seldom stands alone, 

274. Flattery. 

275. He makes breeches (brea^ 
ches), 

276*, He is a jew-iH (jewel). 

277. It Is ehequer'd. 

278. They are' stationary, 

279. She wears false: colors. 



. It contains 
thought. 



a merry- 



231. He is above committing a 
bad action. 

282. In the dark. 

283. Your father. 

234. There are three scruples 
to a drachm. 

235. Mendicant (mend I can't) 
2S6. There is A difference. 

237. By B-heading it. 

238. The one supports his arms, 
and the other's arms sup- 
port him. 

289. He is learning. 

290. They are Vulgar Fi-actions. 

291. It 13 a frail-ty. 

292. A ditch. 

293. He is always forgetting. 
2D4- An icicle. 

295. He is going' toward it. 

298. The belles are wringing. 
.297. His game runs upon all- 
fours. 

293. They have both caused 
the fall of men. 

299. It turns night into day. 

300. He trepans. 

301. He is holy. 

302. It keeps off the sparks. 

303. A bargeman. 

304. He is an odd (hod) man. 

305. He is bed ridden. 

306. They are grave cloths. 

307. It is a seminary. 

308. She is clasped, 

309. He is worth a plum. 

310. It is under the lash. 

811. It has neither beginning 
nor end. 



315. 
316. 
317. 

318. 



EES. 171 

312. It wants mending. 

313. It is a bad habit. 

314. It covers a multitude of 
sins. 

He handles the skulls. 
It goes upon wheels. 
Going round. 
It is in the midst of grease, 
(Greece.) 

319. Eternity. 

320. It is immaterial. 

321. It is a bee-holder, (be- 
holder. ) 

322. She is often toasted. 

323. It has a week foundation. 

324. He raises stories. 

325. He is care-ful. 

326. A gimlet-eye. 

327. He carries a leak. 

328. Noise. 
Wet. 

• He has a lady iu his head. 
. When he wears a wig that 

is not paid for. 

He is often wound up. 

He is often at the bar. 

The snuff of a candle. 

A tanner. 

Any thing that will go 
into it. fa * 

A jest— M(a jest)y. 
. He is just going to strike 
one. 

It is in the midst of water. 

It is the capital of Eng- 
land. 

A man that has not eyes. 

Against his inclination. 

"What does Y, E, S. 
spell?" ' 



329. 
330. 
331. 

332. 
333. 
334. 
335. 
336. 

337. 
338. 

339. 
340. 

341. 
342. 
343. 



172 



ANSWERS TO CHARADES. 



1. A Secret. 


31. Simpleton. 


2. A Toast. 


32. Locket. 


3. Support. 


33. Pocket-book. 


4. Blunderbuss. 


34. Hardship. 


5. Curl-papers. 


35. Massacre. 


6. Looking-glass. 


36. Horse-radish. 


7. Invalid. 


37. Bugbear. 


8. Light-house. 


38. Maidstone. 


9. Latin. 


39. Sackbut. 


10. Sun-day. 


40. Old maid. 


11. Snow-ball. 


41. Earthquake'. 


12. Rhu-barb. 


42. Windlass. 


13. A-las. 


43. Pocket-book. 


14. Lily-leaf. 


44. Hair-bell. 


15. JMde-groom. 


4o. Godlike. 


16. iMar-gin. 


46. Steelyard. 


17. Block-head. 


47. Birth-day. 


13. Pea-cock. 


48. Silent grave. 


19. Horse-shoe. 


49. Shakespear. 


20. Sun-shine. 


50. Carmine. 


21. Sky-light. 


51. Sunday. 


22. Shake-Spear. 


52. Bride-knot. 


23. Hat-box 


53 Adamant. 


21. Port-hole. 


51. Pageant. 


25. "Way-ward. 


55. Offence. 


26. Yan-guard. 


56. Bargain. 


27. Disc-on-so-late. 


57. Penitent, 


23. Strata-gem. 


53. Pinchbeck. 


29. Sexton. 


59. Horsemanship 


30. Sapling. 


60. Wallflower. 



173 



ANSWERS TO ENIGMAS. 



1. A bed. 

2. Saddle. 

3. Pair of bellows. 

4. Pen. 

5. Saw. 

6. Newspaper. 

7. Pen. 

8. Cards. 

9. Book. 

10. Ostrich feather. 

11. Feet. 

12. Ladder. 

13. Bank-note. 

14. Moon. 

15. Tree. 

16. Candle. 

17. Kettle. 

18. Sleep. 
10. Key. 

Alphabet. 

Comet. 

Pencil. 

Sea. 

Bear. 

25. Any thing. 

26. Sleep. 

27. A blush. 

55. Vitellius— Edward 
by Julius Caesar v,hen 
Socrates. 

56. Words. 



28. Plague — ague. 

29. Moon. 

30. Mask. 

31. Pin-cushion. 

32. Bell. 

33. Oyster. 

34. Wheel-barrov. 

35. Horse. 

36. Oak-tree. 
Ladder. 
Pump. 



37 



40. Cork. 

41. Kiss. 

42. Letter H. 

43. Air — hair — ear. 

44. Cullender. 

45. Skittles. 

46. Watering-pot. 

47. Barrel of beer. 

48. Melon. 

49. Church. 

50. Spectacles. 

51. Cat. 

52. Cannon. 

53. Nothing. 

54. The Letter I. 

III.— Solon— Tyndale— Rubicon (passed 
leading his army to Borne)— Ireland— . 



174 



ANSWERS TO PUZZLES, ETC. 



1. Geographical Acrostic. — Geography.— Ganges— Elba— Ohio 
— Geneva— Eome — Amazon — Parnassus — Himalayas — Ypres. 

2. A Protean Puzzle. — A sheet, 1 of water, 2 a sail, 3 baking 
sheet, 4 sheet of metal, 5 linen sheet, 6 sheet of ice, 7 of paper, 8 
of a book, 9 of glass, 10 of wax, 11 of wadding. 

3. Port. — 1. Pass-port; 2. Ex-port; 3. Corn-port; 4. Sup-port; 
5. Rap-port; 6- Sea-port; 7. Im-port; 8. Pur-port: 9. Trans-port; 
10. Re-port; 11. Misre-port; 12. Dis-port; 13. De-port. 

4. The letter E. 

'■' Persevere, ye perfect men, 
Ever keep these precepts ten." 



5. NINE. 


24. 331776. 




6. If the grate be empty, put 


25. 9409. 




some coal on; but if the 


26. 6136 perches. 




grate be full, stop. 


27. 75 yards. 




7. Because it is D parted. 


28. 720. 




8. Difference 50, product 7656. 


29. 288 men. 




9. 144808. 

10. 448 lbs. 

11. 40. 


30. 5 years. 

31. 4 days. 

32. 11007. 




12. 32. 


33. 20 and 50. 




13. 72. 


34. 36. 




14. 10. 


35. 62. 




15. H 30; K 50; and L 80. 


3(3. in. 




16. D127i;E142£;andF54. 

17. 60. 


37. 73 a years. 

38. 167. 




18. 5. 


39. 96. 




19. 5 miles, 1300 yards. 


40. 216 miles. 




20- 4. 


41. 10i years the man, 


31 i the 


21. Daily increase 5 days, 366 


woman. 




miles distance. 


42. 36. 




22. 8. 

23. 91 years, 3 weeks, 5 days, 6 


43. 28 years. 





hours. 



175 



ANSWERS TO ANAGRAMS AMD TRANSPOSITIONS. 



1. Tramp, ramp, rum. 

2. Mean, mane, ameru 
C. Spark, park, ark. 

4. Cream, ream, mare, race. 

5, May, Amy, yam. 
C. Table, bleat 

7. Rate, tear. 

8. Tea, eat. 

9. Rail, liar 

10. Pot, top. 

11. Cold, clod. 

12. Evil, veil, Levi. 

13. Reap, pear. 

14. Mars, rams, arms. 

15. Cheap, peach. 

16. Run, urn. 

17. LX-XL (excel.) 
13. Rock, cork. 

19. Misanthrope. 
20- Astronomers. 



21. Old England. 

22. Revolution. 

23. Presbyterian. 
2-1. Telegraphs. 

25. Malt-house. 

26. Radical Reform. 

27. Solemnity. 

28. Peregrination. 

29. Potentates. 

30. Penitentiary. 

31. A joint-stock company. 

32. Lawyers. 

33. Breakfast. 

34. Punishment. 

35. Demonstration. 
£6. Enigmatically. 

37. Universal suffrage. 

38. Revolution. 

39. Catalogues. 

40. Parishioners. 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 177 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



CHAPTER I. 

INTRODUCTION. 



Having been asked to write a few hints on Conjuring that may 
interest amateurs, I purpose to supply, in these pages, a short se- 
ries of papers on the subject, in the hope that my suggestions may 
furnish some lively and innocent amusement in home-gatherings 
and social entertainments. 

As I have given much attention to the art, and, in the course of 
several years' experience, have attained (if I may be allowed to 
say so) ability and distinction in it, I shall be able to give some 
good practical guidance ; and I am ready to do this, as I sympa- 
thize with the young aspirants who feel an interest and delight 
even in its simpler elementary experiments. 

As I am writing for young students of the art, of course it would 
be out of place to dwell upon the more complicated and more ar- 
duous wonders which a professor is able to exhibit ; I shall not, 
therefore, in these elementary papers advert to those experiments 
which require ample resources, or a prepared stage, for exhibiting 
them — or which can only be displayed to advantage by consum- 
mate skill and the most adroit manipulation — but confine my re- 
marks at present to those branches of the art to the performance 
of which a young amateur may aspire with prospect of success. 

A few hours' practice will enable the learner to execute the sim- 
ple tricks that I shall first treat of ; and they will only require for 



178 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



their display such articles as are readily available in every house- 
hold. Most of them will be supplied by any company of a few 
friends, and if not in the parlor, can be brought from no greater dis- 
tance than the kitchen or housekeeper's room ; such as handker- 
chiefs, coins, oranges, or eggs, a glass bowl, etc., etc. There may 
only remain a few inexpensive articles to be supplied from reposi- 
tories for the sale of conjuring apparatus, or they may be had di- 
rect from the publishers of this work. 

It may be well explicitly to avow that the time is quite gone by 
when people will really believe that conjuring is to be done by su- 
pernatural agencies. No faith is now reposed in the " black art of 
sorcery," or even in the art to which the less repulsive name was 
given of "white magic." Many years have elapsed since conjur- 
ers have seriously assumed to themselves any credit as possessing 
supernatural powers, or as enabled by spiritual agency to reveal 
that which is unknown to science and philosophy, or mysteriously 
to work astonishing marvels. 

A well-marked contrast exists between the old school of conjur- 
ers and those of modern times. The former, who used boldly to 
profess that they employed mysterious rites and preternatural 
agency, designedly put the spectator upon false interpretations, 
while they studiously avoided giving any elucidation of the phe- 
nomena, nor would ever admit that the wonders displayed were to 
be accounted for by the principles of science and natural philosophy. 

Modern conjurers advance no such pretensions. They use as 
scientifically as possible, the natural properties of matter to aid 
in their exhibition of wonderful results. They are content to let 
the exhibition of their art appear marvelous. They sometimes 
mystify the matter, and so increase the puzzle, in order to height- 
en the interest and amusement of the spectators ; but they throw 
aside any solemn asseveration of possessing hidden powers, or of 
ability to fathom mysterious secrets. 

It may be admitted that proficients and exhibitors still adopt 
language that has become current with co jurers, and in common 
parlance it may be asserted that the wonderful Mr. So-and-So un- 
dertakes to pass some solid object through a wall or a table ; to 
change black into white, and white into black ; to place rings in 
closely-fastened boxes, or draw money out of people's ears ; and 
conjurers may with ridiculous humor distract the attention of spec- 
tators, so that accurate observation is not fixed upon the object 
that is to undergo before their eyes some singular transformation ; 
but no outrageous bombast or positive falsehoods are commonly 
advanced. And the practical meaning of any exaggerated preten- 
sion is clearly understood to mean no more than that Mr. So-and- 
So undertakes to present before you what, to alii appearance, is 
the conversion ef black into white, or vice versa; and the aud- 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 179 

ience are clearly aware that no more is assumed to be presented to 
them than a very striking illusion, undistinguishable from a reali- 
ty ; and how this is effected will be in many cases wholly untrace- 
ble, and therefore the trick is inimitable. 

Wo may be permitted to feel some pleasure in the conviction 
that the exhibition of our art in its more striking exploits is really 
marvelous, and very attractive ; for we certainly have the power of 
placing some astonishing phenomena before our audience; and we 
may surely prize the estimation with which the uninitiated are dis- 
posed to honor us, but we erect no vain-glorious assumptions upon 
these data, as we are quite contented with fair praise intelligently 
accorded to us. And so far from closely concealing the principles 
and arcana of our science, we are ready plainly to avow that it all 
depends upon faculties that all may attain by patient culture, and 
exhibit by careful practice. Undoubtedly there are less and greater 
degrees of excellence to be obtained by proportionate intelligence 
and dexterity. There are attainments in the art, at which, by natur- 
al qualification and peculiar adaptation, special study, practice, and 
experience enable some few only to arrive. These qualifications 
cannot be easily communicated to every one who might wish to 
possess them ; and therefore the highest adepts will ever have an 
incommunicable distinction. But this is no more than is the case 
in the medical, the legal, and any learned profession, in all which 
the most eminent proficients reserve to themselves, or unavoidably 
retain, an unquestioned superiority, At the same time there is 
much in our art that may be communicated, and the present papers 
will show to our friends that we are willing to impart to others 
such portions of our art as they are capable of acquiring ; and we 
trust that what we shall communicate to them will furnish them 
much rational recreation among themselves, and enable them to 
supply innocent and interesting amusement to their friends and 
companions. 



180 MAGIC AND COSUTTBINO. 

CHAPTER II. 

OF PALMISTKT AND PASSES. 

The true nature and limit of the art of Conjuring has now been 
defined — what it is that we assume to do, and wherein we have 
discontinued the exaggerated pretensions of the conjurers of the 
old school ; and I have hinted in what respects, and within what 
bounds, a young amateur may aim at exhibiting some amusing 
experiments in our art. But it remains for me to explain the 
grand prerequisite for a novice to cultivate before he should 
attempt to exhibit before others even the simplest tricks of pres- 
tidigitation or legerdemain, to which we at present confine our 
attention. 

I have first to speak of Palmistet, not in the sense that the for- 
tune-teller uses the word, but as expressing the art of the conjurer 
in secreting articles in the palm of one hand while he appears to 
transfer those articles to his other hand. It is absolutely neces- 
sary that the young amateur should acquire the habit of doing 
this so adroitly as to escape the observation of others while doing 
it openly before their eyes. 

The two principal passes are the following : 
Tirst Pass ; or, method of apparently carrying an object from 

the right hand to the left, while actually retaining' it in the 

right hand. 

The reader will please to observe that the illustrative sketches 
depict the hands of the performer as seen by himself 

First Position of Pass 1. — The right hand, having the knuckles and 
back of the fingers turned toward the spectators, and holding 
openly a cent, or some similar object, between the thumb and fore- 
finger, mustbe moved toward the left hand. 
Fig. 1. 




first Position of Pass 1. 
The left hand must be held out, with the back of the hand 
toward the ground, as exhibited in the illustration. (Fig. 1.) 



MAGIC AND CONiUBINO. 181 

, Second Position of Pass 1. — The left hand must appear to close 
over the object that is brought toward it, at the same instant that 
the right hand secretes and withdraws that object. 

The left hand that appeared to receive it must continue closed. 
The right hand, though it actually retains the object, must be 
allowed to hang loosely over it, so that it appears to have nothing 
in it. 

Fig. 2. 




Second Position of Pass 1. 

The performer then may blow upon the closed left hand, and 
may say, "Fly," or "Begone," or any similar expression, and 
then open his left hand, holding it forward. Of course there is 
nothing in it, and the object seems to have flown from it, and the 
spectators are much surprised. 

Second Pass.— Method of apparently transferrin? an object from 
the left hand to the right, while retaining it in the left hand. 

First Position. — Let the left hand hold up the object in its open 
palm. The right hand is brought toward the left hand, but only 
appears to grasp it. 

Fig. 3. 




First Position of Pass 2. 

Second Position. — The left hand secretes the object in its palm, 
while the fingers are allowed to fall loosely down, appearing to 
retain nothing under them. At the very same moment the right 
hand must be closed, and remain in shape as if containing the 
object, with the second joints of the fingers pointed toward the 



182 MAGIC AND CONJURING. 

spectators, and the back of the hand toward the ground. The 
performer then holding his right hand forward, may blow on it 
and say " Change— fly, " and opening that hand, the spectator 
deems the object has passed away from it, though in fact it has 
remained all along in the left hand. 
Fig. 4 





Second Position of Pass 2. 

The illusion in either of these passes is, that the spectator see- 
ing both hands move as if the object were passing from one to the 
other, thinks it has done so ; whereas, in fact, the object always 
remains in the hand where it was first visible to the spectators. 
The back of that hand where the object is first displayed must 
afterwards be kept well toward the spectators. 

Observe, the eye of the performer must rest always on the hand 
or object at which he desires the spectators to look, and whatever 
he wishes them not to notice, he himself must refrain from look- 
ing at. 

It is not required that the very object that has been held up in 
these passes be seen again by the spectators, the performer must 
quietly pocket it, or drop -it on a handkerchief on his table, or 
inside a hat, or otherwise get rid of it as soon as he conveniently 
can. 

On the contrary, if that very object must be again produced or 
transferred to a person standing at some little distance, this must 
be effected by one of the following methods : 

Either you must take care beforehand to place adroitly in that 
person's cap or pocket a double or similar object. 

Or, you must walk up to him, and putting your hand on his 
hair, sleeve, or pocket, quickly place there the object you have all 
along retained, and which you must pretend by this manoeuvre to 
find in his possession. 

Or, lastly, you will see in the first trick subjoined, a method of 
substituting one object for another. 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 183 

First Trick.— To command a dime to pass into the center of a ball 
of Berlin wool, so that it will not toe discovered till the toall is 
unwound to the very last of its threads. 

Requisite Preparations, to be Made Privately. — You will require a 
glass bowl or quart basin, and you must have a flattened tube of 
tin about four inches long. It must be just large enough to let a 
dime slide easily through it by its own weight. Round the end on 
this tube wind a ball of Berlin wool of bright color, covering about 
two inches of the tube, and projecting about an inch beyond the 
end of it. Place this ball with the tube in it in your right-hand 
pocket of coat tail, (or in the left breast-pocket, if that is large 
enough to hold it completely covered). Lastly, place a dime con- 
cealed in the palm of your left hand. 

Commence the exhibition of the trick by requesting one of the 
spectators to mark a dime (or cent) of his own, so that he will be 
sure to know it again. Then ask him to lend you that coin. Hold- 
ing it up in your right hand, you may say, "Now, ladies and gen- 
tlemen, this is the marked dime which I shall experiment with. 
The gentleman has accurately marked it, so that there can be no 
mistake about its identity when reproduced." Then by Pass 1 
pretend to transfer the marked coin to your left hand, but in reality 
retain it in your right hand. Next, hand with your left hand your 
own dime (which had been secreted in that hand) to some person, 
and request him to hold it. Choose for this person some one 
three or four yards distant from yourself, and also from the person 
who originally marked the coin. It is unnecessary to explain that 
you do so, lest the two should compare notes. Of course, the per- 
son who is asked to hold it will believe that it is the very dime 
that was borrowed. 

You may proceed to say : "Now we want a ball of worsted." So 
placing your right hand in your pocket, pretend to feel about for 
something in your pocket, and while doing so you must place the 
dime in the top of the tin tube, and shake it down. Then carefully 
draw the tube out of the ball of worsted, and leave the tube in 
your pocket, but draw the ball out of your pocket, pressing it 
together while doing so. 

Then request some one to feel the ball in order to ascertain that 
it has no opening towards its center. 

You may here make some humorous remark about your having 
such a ball in your pocket. As for instance : 

"Ladies may think it odd that I have such a ball of Berlin wool 
in my pocket. It was bought to please my cousin Mary Ann, or 
my Aunt Tabitha. "Well, it will do very fairly for our experiment." 

Then request some one to hold the glass basin containing the 
woolen ball. While you retain in your hand the end of the woolen 
thread, address the gentleman who has consented to hold the dime, 



184 MAGIC AND CONJUBING. 

asking him to hand it to you. Take it in your right hand, pretend 
by Pass 1 to transfer it to your left hand, but in reality keep it 
concealed in your right hand. 

Holding up your closed left hand, (which in fact has nothing in 
it), you may say : 

' ' Now, dime, pass along this woolen thread into the very center 
of the woolen ball which is there held in the glass bowl or basin." 

Blow upon your left hand, and show that the dime is gone. 

You must adroitly get rid of the dime, which has remained 
secreted in your right hand, by placing it in your pocket or sleeve 
while making some humorous remark, or while asking some lady 
or gentleman to draw the woolen thread till it is all unwound. It 
will be done the quicker by letting the ball be confined loosely in 
the bowl with two fingers preventing its leaping out. 

Draw attention to how completely the coin is wrapped up till 
you arrive at the very last circles, when it will drop into the bowl. 

Hand the dime to the owner who marked it, and let him declare 
whether he recognizes it as the very one he lent you. His affirma- 
tive will surprise the spectators. 

Second Trick.— To change a bowl of ink into clear water, with 
g-old fish in it. 

Requisite Preparation, to be Made Privately Beforehand. — The same 
glass bowl as in previous trick. If your bowl has not a foot to it, 
it must be placed on something that will hold it high above your 
table. Some small fish, a white plate or saucer, a piece of black 
silk just fitting the inside of your bowl, a spoon of peculiar con- 
struction, so that in a hollow handle it will retain about a spoonful 
of ink, which will not run out as long as a hole near the top of the 
handle is kept covered or stopped. A large tumbler and two or 
three minnows will do for a simpler exhibition, but will, of course, 
not be so pleasing to the eye. 

Fig. 5. 





Place the black silk so as to cover the part of the bowl that is 
Shaded ; when damp it will adhere to the glass. Pour in clear 
water to fill the space covered by the black silk, and place the fish 
in the water. 



MAGIC AND CONJUBTNG. 185 

Commence the trick in public thus : Holding the spoon-handle 
slanting up and uncovering the hole in the handle, the ink which 
you have placed in the handle will run into the bowl of the spoon, 
and the spoon being held carefully to the surface of the water, 
concealing the black silk, will give the spectators the impression 
that you rill the spoon from the glass bowl. 

Pour the spoonful of ink on a white saucer, and show it round 
to convince the spectators it is ink. They will see it is undeniably 
ink, and they will conclude, if the spoon were properly lifted out 
of the bowl, that the glass bowl contains nothing but ink. 

Borrowing a silk handkerchief, place it for a few seconds over 
the bowl, and feigning to be inviting fish to come to the bowl, ex- 
claim "Change!" Then, placing your hand on the edge of the 
bowl near yourself, draw off the handkerchief, and with it take care 
to catch hold also of the black silk. The bowl when uncovered 
will exhibit the fish swimming about in clear water. While the 
spectators are surprised at the fish, return the handkerchief, hav- 
ing first dropped out of it the black silk on your side of the table. 
Decline giving any explanation, as people wjll not thank you for 
dispelling the illusion. 

Third Trick.— The Dancing 1 Eggf. 

Requisite Preparation to be made in Private. — An egg-shell that has 
been blown (my young friends will know that the way to blow, an 
egg is to make a small hole at each end of the egg. Then, by 
blowing at one end, the yolk will be driven out, and the egg-shell 
be left empty). 

Fig. 




Make a hole also on the side of the egg, in which insert a chip 
of wood, or a small pin, held by a fine black silk thread, about 
twelve or fourteen inches long, which must have a loop at the far 
end, which loop fastens to a button on the coat or waistcoat ; and 
have on a dark vest, otherwise the dark thread becoming visible, 
will reveal the moving power. 

Commence by borrowing two black hats. If there is an instru- 



186 MAGIC AND CONJUEING. 

ment in the room, ask some one to play a lively tune, as "eggs 
arc fond of lively music to dance to." Then, with the brim of a 
hat in each hand, interpose the round of each hat successively un- 
der the thread that holds the egg, moving them from your breast 
toward the egg. The egg will appear to move of itself over the 
hats, as you place them under it. 

You must not allow people to handle the egg on the thread af- 
terwards, for when they see the simplicity of the process they will 
undervalue- the trick, whereas it appears marvelous as long as they 
do not understand how the extraordinary movements are produced. 
And in these illusions, as Hudibras expresses it, 

Doubtless, the pleasure is as great 
In being cheated as to cheat. 

Pourtn Trick.— The Walking Cent. 

Preliminary Preparation in Private. — Ask for a long dark hair 
from some lady's tresses. Have a pin in shape of a hook, or a 
small loop affixed to the end 'of this hair, and fasten a little piece 
of beeswax (less than a pea) at the other end of the hair. Fasten 
the hair by the loop to a button on your vest, taking care to wear 
a dark-colored vest. The hair may be allowed to hang from your 
VGst, with the beeswax visible. Have a glass of water or cup on 
the table. 

Commence the exhibition of the trick by borrowing a cent. 
"While pretending to examine the cent to see if it is a good one, 
press the waxed end of the hair firmly to the under side of the 
cent, and place it about a foot from the edge of a table. Then bid 
the cent to move toward you, to the right or to the left, and by 
geatly moving your body in whatever direction you name, the hair 
will draw the cent in the same direction. You may say, while 
your left hand is near the table, " Now, cent, move up my arm." 
Advancing your arm gently, the cent will appear to move up to 
your elbow. It is your arm that moves, but it will appear to the 
spectators as if the cent moved ; or you may help it up the outside 
of the sleeve by interposing your right hand under the hair, so as 
to draw up the cent, while appearing to beckon it. 

"Now, cent, as you have performed so well, you shall have a 
bath." Placing the tumbler near the edge of the table, draw the 
cent into it. After exhibiting it in the water, say, " Oh, cent, you 
must not stay so long- in the water." Then jerk it out upon the 
table. Detach the waxed end of the hair by your nail, after which 
return the cent to the person who loaned it to you. 

"When performing this trick, in order to keep the spectators at a 
little distance, you must inform them that "the cent is very sus- 
ceptible to magnetic influences, and request ladies not to approach 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 187 

too near it, as the loadstones of their eyes are the cause of the 
magnetic attraction." 

My young friends must remember that it is absolutely necessary 
to keep up in spectators their belief in the mysterious, and there- 
fore must decline on the spot to give explanations before cr after 
the performance of this trick, however they may be disposed to 
reveal the secret privately to any friend. A singular instance is 
recorded of a person who was grievously disappointed when by 
importunity he had received an explanation of this very trick, 
which had appeared at first to him a most marvelous phenomenon; 
and he was quite annoyed when the gilt was stripped off his gin- 
ger-bread. It is said that a gentleman walked into a coffee-room 

Fig. 7. 




at Manchester, England, and was exhibiting to a friend the above 
trick. A traveler at a table near them had his attention drawn by 
their laughing discourse, while one of them exhibited the trick to the 
other. The cold barrier of English reserve was broken down, and 
he addressed one of the strangers, requesting to be informed how 
the trick was done. For his part he imagined it must be connect- 
ed with some perfectly new philosophical law of attract! on involved 
in the experiment. "Will you be kind enough to tell me? I shall 
be happy to offer a fee to learn it. I was about to proceed by the 
next train, but I will gladly defer my journey to understand this, 
which appears so unaccountable." 



188 MAGIC ANt> CONJTTEINO. 

The gentleman declined for a considerable time ; but at length, 
being overcome by the importunity, in order to get rid of the mat- 
ter, assented. The time of the departure of the train had arrived 
and passed by, and the aspirant offered two guineas to learn the 
trick. The gentleman acceded to his request on condition that he 
should faithfully promise not to reveal it to others, or to make 
public the mystery. " Agreed," says the traveler. The mail train 
was gone — the money paid — the trick exhibited and explained to 
him. "Oh !" cried the traveler, " how easy and plain it is. What 
a simpleton I have been to lose my journey and spend my money 
only to learn how you — " "Stop !" cried the gentleman, "remem- 
ber you have promised not to divulge the secret." " Yes, but how 
foolish to care for an experiment which only depends on — " ' ' Stop, 
sir, stop. Are you going to tell all the room?" and thus a good 
half-hour's amusement was caused by the traveler fretting over his 
simplicity, and having relinquished an important journey for that 
which, though marvelous while a secret, became so simple and 
uninteresting to him after explanation. 



MAGIC AND CONJURING, 



CHAPTER II L 

TRICKS WITH AND WITHOUT COLLUSION. 

In resuming my hints to amateurs, I shall now offer some re- 
marks upon two subjects. 

First.— I will notice the class of tricks that are performed by 
the collusion of a confederate. Old books on conjuring record 
several of this description, and some conjurers still practice them. 
But I do not advise the inexperienced frequently to exhibit tricks 
of this sort, for the co-operation of assistants used in them is lia- 
ble to be traced by the spectators, or to be divulged by the person 
who has been employed to aid in the exhibition of them. They 
may, indeed, be very well as a make-shift until dexterity of hand 
is acquired ; but they will always rank as an inferior branch of the 
science of conjuring, and if the collusion is discovered, it will 
throw discredit even upon those tricks which the same performer 
may exhibit without such collusive arrangement. An instance of 
the annoying failure of such dependence upon confederates is re- 
corded in " Houdin's Memoirs." It is there related that Torrini, 
at the commencement of his career, was insidiously induced by an 
envious rival (Pinetti) to undertake a public exhibition of his art 
before a very grand assembly. Torrini was at the time diffident 
of his own attainments, but he was persuaded to make the attempt 
by the assurance of Pinetti that he would take care that several 
confederates should be present, and should help in carrying out 
sundry illusions which he would have to display. One of these 
was, that the conjurer, after borrowing a ring, was to restore it 
magically into the possession of its owner. The ring was borrow- 
ed, and some mysterious gesticulations practiced ; but instead of 
the contemplated result being produced, the false confederate pro- 
claimed aloud that he had lent a very valuable jeweled ring, and 
had only received back a common copper ring. The audience 
was, of course, disappointed at such words so derogatory '< tb' 3 
conjurer. This unpleasant feeling was deepened by the malicious 
meddling of another false confederate. Torrini had to presem, 
some cards to the King of Naples, who was honoring the assembly 
by witnessing the exhibition, and a card was selected by his Maj- 
esty. Instead, however, of being pleased with what he saAV on the 
card, the king manifested intense disapprobation, The confeder- 
ate had written on the card words of disrespect and insult, and Tor- 
ri.ii had to retire amid the loud censures of the enraged spectators. 
There may be no danger of so disastrous results to a young ama- 
teur; but dissatisfaction of a milder kind will probably ensue 



190 MAGIC AND CONJUBINC. 

whenever it is discovered that any trick has depended upon the 
secret co-operation of an asyistant among the spectators. 

The second topic which I propose at present to discuss is the 
employment of mechanism— such mechanical constructions as 
boxes with false sides, cabinets with secret drawers, or double 
compartments, etc. 

It makes a great difference whether such arrangements are used 
as subordinate aids, or as constituting the essence and substance 
of the illusion. In the former respect it is quite legitimate to take 
advantage of any well-arranged mechanical aid subordinately. In 
fact, nearly all the tricks must be performed with some modified 
aid of artistic contrivance, or with mechanical implements adroit- 
ly used. The conjurer, therefore, unavoidably requires, and may 
advantageously employ, mechanical arrangement? to give greater 
effect to his illusions. I only wish to dissuade thra learner from 
relying solely upon mere mechanical puzzles, or artistic contriv- 
ances, for furnishing an interesting exhibition of the conjurer's art. 

The fewer the contrivances which he employs of this sort, and 
the more entirely the performance rests upon sleight-of-hand the 
more lively will be the surprise of the spectators. 

I myself prefer doing without the aid of any confederate and 
without mechanical aids ; but I must remember that I am writing 
for amateurs and novices in the art, and that, in proportion as they 
are unpracticed in palmistry, and in what the French term presti- 
digitation, (preste digite, signifying "ready fingers,") it will be 
desirable for them, at first, to have the assistance which mechan- 
ism will supply towards the exhibition of their tricks. 

Let them, however, keep such aids as subordinate and as secret 
as possible. For instance, in the preparation for exhibiting the 
first trick described on page 12, the small tin tube (which is requi- 
site for the performance of that trick) must not be seen by the 
audience, either before or after the trick is exhibited, but must 
be kept secreted in the pocket. Again, in. Trick No. 4, the prepa- 
ration of the hair and beeswax must be made privately before- 
hand ; and these implements must vanish out of sight when the 
trick is over. And the reader must observe that in both the first 
and'fourth tricks the mechanical aid employed is the minor and 
subordinate part of the tricks, and that a successful exhibition of 
either of them depends really on the dexterity of the passes, and 
of manipulations by the performer. 

It may be admitted, then, that, with regard to the first topic of 
our present paper, the young conjurer need not be restrained from 
employing the subordinate aid of an assistant, so far as this may 
carry him over difficulties which he cannot otherwise surmount in 
the present stage of his imperfect skill. 

And in regard to the second topic, the employment of mechani- 



MAGIC AK» CONTOKINO, J91 

cal contrivances, (though it may be well to begin witn those de- 
partments of the art which arc easier, because aided by mechani- 
cal apparatus), it will be desirable for the amateur to strive to get 
free from dependence upon such aids. Mechanical arrangements 
cannot be wholly discarded at any time, and the conjurer will 
always require a few implements ; but the more h© advances in 
dexterity of hand, quickness of eye, control of his hand and eye,- 
instantaneous adaptation of his words and movements to contin- 
gencies as they arise, the more able will he become to elude the 
observation of the most watchful spectators, and to mislead their 
imagination, so that they shall fancy that they see him do things 
which he only appears to do, and shall blindly fail to observe 
actions and movements carried out before their very eyes. 

And here let me say, that I have, by long experience, come to 
the conviction that the simpler and more common the objects are 
on which, and with which, a trick is performed, and the less any- 
thing beyond dexterity of hand is openly used, the greater will be 
the astonishment and the amusement of the spectators. There 
are, it is true, some very striking and complicated illusions which 
it is impossible to present without resorting to artistic contrivances 
of mechanical or scientific arrangement. On these illusions, as 
being beyond the power of a young amateur, I need not dwell, 
Nor need the preceding remarks be considered as any disparage- 
ment of the combinations and extrinsic aid which are indispensa- 
ble for developing such startling illusions. The scope of my pres- 
ent remarks is simply to this effect, that to depend mainly upon 
the co-operation of a confederate, or upon mechanical contri- 
vances, for what ean be far better carried out by mere sleight-of- 
hand will not pass for a satisfactory exhibition of conjuring now- 
a-days ; and the amateur will find that, as he advances in skill and 
dexterity, he will swim more freely the less he trusts to such 
unsubstantial bladders to uphold him. 

Having thus discussed my two topics I shall now add explana- 
tions of a few more tricks, which the learner may practice with 
the hope of making progress in the art of conjuring. The only 
way to make such progress and gain high attainments in the art, 
is to practice diligently over and over again the passes I have 
described in my former paper, and to learn to do a few tricks 
neatly, and without hesitation or stumbling. I subjoin, therefore, 
some simple but effective tricks, in which they will do well to per- 
fect themselves. 

Trick 5.— To make a quarter and a penny chang-e places, while 
held in the hands of two spectators. 

Preparation. — Have a quarter of j 7 our own secreted in your right 
hand. Then borrow two handkerchiefs, and a quarter and » 
penny, from any one in the audience. Tell the lender to mark or 



192 MAGIC AND C0NTDEIN5. 

accurately observe them, so that he will know them again. In 
placing them on the table, substitute your own quarter for the 
borrowed one, and conceal the borrowed one in your palm. 

f Memorandum.— It is better to use things borrowed than coin of 
your own. Still, the conjurer should provide himself with articles 
requisite to display any trick, or otherwise much delay may occa- 
sionally arise while borrowing them. 

I Commence the trick by pointing out where the quarter and the' 
penny are lying on the table. Take up the penny and show it 
openly to all. Then take up one of the handkerchiefs, and while 
pretending to wrap up the penny in it, substitute in its place the 
borrowed quarter which you had concealed in your palm, and ask 
One of your friends to feel that it is infolded in the handkerchief, 1 
and bid him to hold the handkerchief inclosing it above his head. 
Ask him if he has got the penny there safely. He will reply that 
he has. 

| Then take up your own quarter which was laid upon the table ; 
pretend to wrap it up in the second handkerchief, but adroitly sub- 
stitute the penny, (which you concealed in your palm while wrap- 
ping up the first handherchief). Ask some friend to hold it up 
above his head, indulging in some facetious remark. Slip your 
own quarter into your pocket. Clap your hands or wave your 
wand, saying, "Change." Tell your friends to unfold their hand- 
kerchiefs. They will be astonished to find that the quarter and 
penny have changed places. 

Trick 6.— -Another trick with the dime, handkerchief, and an 

orange or lemon. 

Prtparativn.— Have an orange or lemon ready, with a slit made' 
in its side sufficiently large to admit the dime easily ; and have in 
your pocket a good-sized silk handkerchief with a dime stitched 
into one of its corners. 

Borrow a marked dime. Take out your handkerchief, and while 
pretending to wrap this dime in the handkerchief, conceal it in 
your palm, and take care that the one previously sewn into the 
corner of the handkerchief can be felt easily through the handker- 
chief. Giving it to one of your friends, tell him to feel that it has 
the dime in it, and to hold it up over his head firmly. While 
giving these directions to your friend, the dime that is in your 
palm'must be transferred to your pocket, and introduced into the 
slit of the orange. Then bring the orange out of your pocket, and . 
place it on a table ; you will keep the slit on the side away from 
the audience. 

Then make a few mesmeric passes over the head of the person 
that holds the handkerchief, saying, " I will now destroy the sense 
©f feeling in your hands. Tell me, can you feel the dime?" He 



MAGIC AND COXTURING. 193 

will say, "Yes." You can reply, "Oh, you must be wrong, sir. 
See! I will shake out the handkerchief." Taking hold of oue 
corner of it, shake it out, saying, "Observe, nothing will fall to 
the ground. You see that you were mistaken about feeling it in 
the handkerchief." 

The fact is, the dime being stitched in the corner could not fall 
out, and you must take care not to let that corner of the handker- 
chief hit against the ground. Put the handkerchief in your pocket, 
and say, "But I must return the borrowed dime." Exclaim: 
"Fly, dime, into the orange on the table." Cut up the orange, 
and show the dime concealed in it, and then restore it to its owner, 
asking him to tell the audience if he finds it to be his own marked 
dime. 

Trick 7.— How to double your pocket money. 

The only preparation is to have four cents concealed in your left 
palm. 

Commence the trick by calling forward one of the spectators, 
and let him bring up his hat with him. 

Then borrow live cents, or have them ready to produce from 
your own pocket should there be any delay. 

Bequest your friend, while he places them one by one on a small 
plate or saucer, to count them audibly, so that the company may 
hear their number correctly. Inquire, "How many are there?" 
He will answer, "Five." Take up the saucer and pour them into 
your left hand, (where the other four are already concealed). Then 
say, "Stay, I will place these in your hat, and you must raise it 
above your head, for all to see that nothing is added subsequently 
to them." You will have placed these nine cents in his hat unsus- 
pected by him. 

Borrow five cents more. Make Pass 1, as described on page 9, 
appearing to throw these five into your left hand, but really retain- 
ing them in your right hand, which is to fall by your side as if 
empty. 

Afterwards get rid of four of the five cents into your pocket, re- 
taining only one in your right palm. 

Hold up your closed left hand, and say, while blowing on it : 
"Pass, cents, from my left hand into the hat. Now, sir, be kind 
enough to see if they have come into your possession. Please to 
eount them aloud while placing them in the saucer." He will be 
surprised, as well as the spectators, to find that the cents in his 
hat have become nine. 

You may then put on a rather offended look, and say : "Ah sir ! 
ah ! I did not think you would do so ! You have taken one out, I 
fear." Approaching your right hand to his sleeve, shake the 
sleeve, and let the one cent, which you have in your own hand, 
drop audibly into the s'aueer. It will raise a laugh against the 



194 MAGIC AND COXJUSIBTG. 

holder of the hat. You can say : " Excuse rue, I only made it ap- 
pear that you had taken one. However, you see that the original 
money is now doubled." 

Trick 8.- The injured handkerchief restored. 

Preparation. — Have a dime of your own wrapped in the center ol 
a piece of cambric about five or six inches in diameter, the ends 
falling down loose. Conceal these in the palm of your left hand. 

Borrow a marked dime from any of the spectators, and a white 
S- t capibric handkerchief. Throw the handkerchief spread out over 
your left palm, (holding under the handkerchief your own dime ^ 
wrapped in the small piece of cambric). 

Openly place the borrowed dime on the eenter of the spread-out 
handkerchief. Keeping hold of that dime, jerk the ends of the 
handkerchief over, so as to fall loose down from the lower side of 
your left hand. Draw out from between your thumb and fingers 
(that is, from the upper side of your left hand) about two inches of 
the smaller piece of cambric, containing your own dime. The 
spectators will naturally conceive the two pieces of cambric you 
hold in that hand to be merely the cambric handkerchief. 

Call any of the spectators forward, and request him to mark off 
with his knife the portion of the piece of cambric which holds your*' 
own dime, and whisper to him to cut it completely off, and to let 
the dime drop on the table. The spectators will believe that he lias- 
cut a hole in the handkei chief itself , and that the dime falling out 
is the one you recently borrowed, whereas, it is in fact, the other 
piece of cambric that has been cut, and the borrowed coin remains- 
still wrapped up in the handkerchief. 

Pretend to blame the person who cut the two- inches off, saying ; 
"Dear me, sir, what have you done? You have quite destroyed 
this nice handkerchief. Well, I hope, madam, you will pardon the 
mistake, if I manage by magic to restore to you your handkerchief 
in perfect order, and I request you to allow me to try to do so." 
Carefully holding in the candle the edges of the cambric, (both of 
the part cut off and of the portion from which it was cut,) and le J > 
ting the real handkerchief hang down from the same hand, pretend 
with a conjuring wand to weld together the edges of the cambric 
when they get hot, as a blacksmith welds metals together. You 
can prevent the flame from reaching the real handkerchief by 
tightly pressing your fingers. Then exclaim : " Oh, where is the 
dimeV" and while picking it up from the table, get quietly rid of 
the pieces of cambric with their burnt edges- into- a hat or some 
corner unseen by the audience. 

Holding up the dime which you had just lifted from the table 
say : "But to complete my trick I must replace this dime in the 
center of the restored handkerchief, whence it was cut out.' 

Make the Bass 1,. appearing to pass it into the center of the hand* 



MAGIC AND CONJtTKING. 135 

kerchief, but retaining it in your hand, and afterwards secretly 
pocket it. The handkerchief has already the borrowed dime in it. 
Say to the handkerchief: " Change— restore !" and unfolding it, 
show the borrowed coin in it. Shake out the handkerchief and 
show it is all sound and right, and restore it with thanks, as well 
as the borrowed dime, to the owners. 

Trick 9.— To make a large die pass through the crown of a hat 
withotit injuring 1 it. 

I will now give my young friends a nice, easy trick, requiring very 
little dexterity, as the articles for its exhibition can be purchased 
at any depot for the sale of conjuring apparatus; therefore, the 
most diffident amateur will bo able to display this trick. 

Preparation.— Have a die exactly like the common dice, only it 
may be about two inches square. Have two covers for it, one of 
them exactly resembling the appearance of a die, only hollow, ex- 
cept that one side of it is open, so that it can easily be placed over, 
or be taken off, the solid die. 

^The other cover may be of decorated material, and it is intended 
to be placed over the lirst die-cover. Let this last cover be made 
of some pliant material, so that by compressing gently two of its 
sides with your fingers, while lifting it up, you can lift up the first 
die-cover, which will be within it. 

Commence the trick by borrowing two hats ; placo one with its 
rim upwards on the table, and show that you place in that hat the 
die with its first cover on it. But say, ' ' I forgot to appeal to the 
company whether they will like to see the trick done visibly or in- 
visibly." They will most likely say, "Visibly;" but it is of no 
consequence which answer they make, for the process of the trick 
is the same in either case. 

Take out from the lower hat the first cover, which is painted ex- 
actly like a die, and having placed the second hat (with its rims 
downwards) on the other hat, display the first cover, and openly 
place it on the crown of the upper hat. All the spectators will be- 
lieve it to be the solid die itself. Then take your penknife ; you 
may just thrust it into the crown of the hat, and pretend to cut all 
round the die-cover there lying; say — "I shall now bid it move 
into the lower hat, but it will not do so while uncovered, so I must 
place this ornamental cover over it." Do so ; show that you have 
nothing in your hands or sleeves ; then wave your wand or your 
hand, and say, "Change; pass, die, into the lower hat" Give 
it a little time. Then, compressing the outward cover gently, lift 
off also with it the painted die-cover, which it has inside it. Lift 
up the lower hat, and show the company the solid die lying in it. 
Show all that the upper hat has received no injury. 

The illusion to the audience will be that the solid die has passed 



196 MAGIC AND CONJURING. 

through the crown of the upper hat without at all injuring it. Re- 
turn the hats to the owners, and show them to be uninjured. 

Erick 10— To produce from a sills handkerchief bon-bons, candies, 
nuts, etc. 

Preparation. — Have packages of various candies, wrapped up in 
bags of the thinest tissue paper, and place them on your table 
rather sheltered from observation. Have also a plate or two on 
your table. 

Memorandum. — It will be always desirable to have the table re- 
moved two or three yards at least from the spectators, and of a 
height that they cannot see the surface of it while sitting down in 
front of it. 

Cammence the trick by borrowing a silk handkerchief, or any 
large handkerchief. After turning it about, throw it out on the 
table, so as to fall over one of these packages. 

Having carefully observed where the bag lies, place your left 
hand so as to take up the bag while catching hold of the middle of 
the handkerchief. 

Taking the handkerchief up by nearly the center, the edges of it 
will fall around and conceal the bag ; make some pretended wav- 
ing of your wand or right hand over the handkerchief, and say, 
" Now, handkerchief, you must supply my friends with some bon- 
bons." Squeeze with your right hand the lower part of the bag 
which is under the handkerchief; the bag will burst, and you can 
shake out into a plate its contents. 

Asking some one to distribute them among your young friends, 
you can throw the handkerchief (as it were, carelessly) over 
another bag, from which you can in the same way produce a liber- 
al supply of some other sweetmeats, or macaroon biscuits, etc., 
etc., all of which will be duly appreciated by the juveniles, and 
they will applaud as long as you choose to continue this 
trick. 



MAGIC AND CONJTJKING. 19* 

CHAPTEE IV. 

v PKACTICE. 

In conjuring, as in all other arts and sciences, perseverance is 
requisite in order to become expert and successful. There is 
no royal road, or possibility of acquiring the end, without exer- 
cising the means to that end. Let my young friends, then, care- 
fully practice over and over again the passes and the tricks which 
I have already explained to them. It is the only way to attain 
dexterity and confidence, without which they will never be able to 
make any creditable exhibition of the art of conjuring. After 
they have attained considerable skill and sle'ight-of-hand in dis- 
playing a few tricks, they will easily extend the range of their per- 
formances, and gradually rise to greater ability. I may, there- 
fore, parody an old injunction for obtaining success, and say : 
There are three rules for its attainment : The first is "Practice." 
The second is " Practice." The third is "Practice." In a word, 
constant and careful practice is requisite, if any wish to be suc- 
cessful as amateur conjurers. They should never attempt to ex- 
hibit before their friends any tricks that they have not so fre- 
quently practiced that no bungling or hitch is likely to occur in 
their performance of it. 

Let no one be staggered by the simplicity of the processes rec- 
ommended in these tricks. The result will in fact be all the more 
astonishing, the simpler the operations employed. 

The great point is the address of the performer, and that will 
carry through successfully the means employed. However sim- 
ple and insignificant those means may appear to the learner when 
they have been explained to him, if there is good address and ac- 
curate manipulation, the astonishment at the result will be infi- 
nitely greater than any one would imagine possible to be produced 
by such simple means. 

There is one help that I can suggest towards the better manage- 
ment of the hands in concealing or removing objects ; it is the use 
of a conjurer's rod or short magic wand. This is, now-a-days, 
commonly a stick of about fifteen inches long, resembling a com- 
mon rule, or a partially ornamented one. You may often have ob- 
served this simple emblem of the conjurer's power, and deemed it 
a mere idle or useless affectation. The conjurer waves it mysti- 
cally or majestically as he may be disposed. Of course, you are 
right in your judgment that it can do no good magically ; but it 
does not follow that it is useless. The fact is, that it is really of 
considerable service to him. If he wants to hold a coin or any ob-. 



198 MAGIC AND CONJUKING. 

ject concealed in his hand, without others observing the fact of his 
hand being closed, the wand in that hand is a blind for its con- 
cealment. He may require to pick up or lay down some object, 
and ho can do so while openly fetching or laying down his wand. 
If he wants to gain time, for any illusion or process of change, he 
can obtain it while engaging the attention of the specta- 
tors by some fantastic movements of his wand. By the use 
of the wand, therefore, you will be able to prevent the observation 
of your audience too pointedly following t)ie movements which you 
wish to carry on secretly. You may also, at the same time, dispel 
their attention by humorous remarks, preventing it from being con- 
centrated on watching your movements. 

As a general rule, you must not apprise your audience of what 
you are actually doing, but must often interpose some other thought 
or object to occupy their mind. For instance : Do you desire that 
a person should not examine too closely any object which you. 
place in his hand, tell him to hold it well above his head. That 
takes it out of range of his eyes. It would never do to tell him not 
to look at it. He would then immediately suspect that you are afraid 
of something being observed. 

Have you perchance forgotten to bring on your table any article 
requisite for displaj-ing any trick, a feint must be made that you 
must have more candles, or must remove some other object, thus 
gaining the opportunity to fetch what you require without naming 
it. 

Do not even announce too fullv or vauntingly beforehand what 
is to be the result or development of any trick; rather proceed 
with it, and let the audience come unexpectedly upon a result 
which they had not contemplated. Their surprise will be greater, 
and their amusement more lively, at such unexpected result. 

It is for this reason that it will be well to avoid the repetition 
of the same trick in the same evening, though requested to per- 
form it over again. The minds of the spectators have already 
trace J once the whole performance of it— the beginning, the mid- 
dle, the end. The zest of it, therefore, is gone off; their minds are 
languid and disinterested about its second repetition; and the 
conjurer's art proportionately sinks in their estimation. 

Having offered these general remarks, I will now invite the 
attention of my young friends to another batch of interesting 
tricks, which, with a little effort, they may succeed in exhibiting. 

Erick 11. -A sudden and unexpected supply of faathers from under 
a silk handkerchief or cloth. 
Preparation. — Have ready a good supply of plumes of feathers. 
They may be obtained from a fur or fancy store, or purchased 
there loose, and tied up so as to lie thin and flexible where you 
wish to place them. You may have at least four batches of them. 



MAGIC AND CONJUEING. 



199 



Tho common hackle feather will do, stitched round a thin pieco 
of whalebone. Feathers that arc a little injured for sale as orna- 
ments may be picked up at little cost. 

Take off your coat. You may then have one cr more batches 
of leathers placed round each arm ; the lower point of tho stem 
on winch the leathers are fixed being near your wrist, and the top 
of each batch of feathers confined near your elbow by a slight 
worsted string, so that they do not stick out the coat sleeve tco 
much, or slip down together if two batches arc concealed in tho 
same sleeve. You can have one or more batches placed just 
within each side of your waistcoat, with the lower point of tho 
steji within easy reach of your hand — about four inches below 
your chin. Then put your coat on. 

Commence the trick by borrowing a large silk handkerchief or 
cloth of the same size. Show it to be empty by holding out tho 
two top corners in front of your breast, and shake the handker- 
chief while it falls loosely down over your vest. Then moving the 
handkerchief toward your loft, catch hold (with your right thumb 
and finger) of the end of the stem of the plume, No. 1, and draw 
it from under the left side of your vest. It will remain concealed 
behind the handkerchief while you move your two hands to tho 




Position 1. 



Position 2. 



right, which will draw out the plume from under your vest, then 
over the center of your chest. Then toss the handkerchief about, 
enveloping the first batch of feathers; say, "Handkerchief, you 
must supply me with some feathers." In a minute or so, take off 
the handkerchief, and display the plume to tho spectators. 

Show the spectators again that the handkerchief is quite empty. 
Move your arms toward your right till yovr left hand comes just 



200 MAGIC AXD CONJT7EIXG. 

over the edge of the right side of your vest. With your left 
thumb and fore-finger catch hold of the stem of the feathers there 
concealed, and by moving your arms back toward the left, you 
can draw out without its being observed the plume that had been 
concealed under the right side of your vest. Toss about and dis- 
play as before this second batch of feathers, and then place them 
aside. 

Then show to the company again that your handkerchief has 
nothing in it, and lay the handkerchief over both your hands. 
While waving it mysteriously about, exclaim that the handker- 
chief must furnish you with some more feathers. Draw out of 
the left sleeve one of the plumes, shake the feathers out while 
taking off the handkerchief from this, which will be plume the 
third. 

-~ Then, throwing your handkerchief over the hand, and clapping 
your hands together (with the left over the right hand), manage 
to catch hold of another point of a plume, and pull it out from 
your right sleeve while waving about your two hands with the 
handkerchief over them. You have now produced four plumes. 

The exhibition may be continued to an increased number of 
plumeS, if you have more concealed in y r our sleeves, or elsewhere ; 
but four will probably be sufficient to manage at the commence- 
ment of your career as an amateur conjurer. 

Trick 12.— Heads or Tails ? 

I shall now give directions for reproducing, before a juvenile 
audience, a trick that will carry us back to the primitive style of 
conjuring in old times. I cannot say that there is anything very 
scientific or elevated in it, but, if neatly and adroitly executed, it 
will tell very well with a youthful audience. 

Preparation. — You must take care that your table be so placed 
that none of the spectators can see behind yourself or the table. 
You must provide yourself with some young pet of the juveniles, 
such as a puppy, a kitten, or any other small pet. The performer 
must either have some little bag hanging under his coat-tails, or 
some provision for concealing the little animal behind him, or in a 
drawer before him, so that there will be no chance of any of the 
audience seeing it before the proper time. He must have ready 
also a penny or any coin. 

To begin the exhibition cf the trick. Standing with all the 
nonchalance you can assume, and placing one or both your arms 
behind your back, you may say, " For a variety, I will challenge 
one of my young friends to come and try which of us will succeed 
best in a few tosses of -this penny." 

Induce \somo young person to come to the front of your table, 
and tell him to bring forward his hat. Ask him to 'toss first with 
the cent and put the hat over it, while you will guess "heads" or 



MAGIC AND CONJUKING. 201 

"tails." Say it shall be seen who is most successful in five 
guesses. After lie has tossed up twice, you can take the penny, 
and say, "Now, I will vary the method of tossing. You shall 
name now which you choose, ' heads ' or ' tails.' " 

Toss up the penny, and while attention is occupied with this, 
and he is looking to see which is uppermost, beads or tails, you 
withdraw your loft hand from behind you, holding the little animal 
you have concealed, and slipping it into the hat, and turning the 
hat down over it, exclaim, "Stay, I mean to pass the penny 
through the hat upon the table, and the whole affair shall be 
settled by the result of the present toss. You shall see the heads 
or tails on the table." 

By Pass 1, pretend to place the penny on the hat, but retain it in 
your right hand. Say, "Fly, pass, and quickly." Lift the hat, 
and show both head and tail on the little animal or pet there con- 
cealed. 

If you should have had a Guinea pig, you must make the guesses 
go on till your adversary guesses "tails," and then it will make a 
good laugh to say, ' ' He has won, and he had better now take it 
up by the tail." 

Trick 13.— To cook pancakes or a fiat plum cake in a hat, over some 
candles. 

Requisite Preparation. — Have two gallipots or earthen jars, of a 
size to go easily into a hat, but of such dimensions that the one 
reversed will fit closely over the other. Tie worsted or a strip 
of linen round the smaller gallipot, so as to insure the larger one 
holding firmly round the smaller one. Have ready some thin, 
fluent dough, some sugar, and a few currants, enough for two or 
three pancakes or a small plum cake ; also a spoon to stir the 
ingredients up. 

Have at hand two or three warm pancakes that have just been 
prepared by the cook for you, with the same ingredients as men- 
tioned above. Let them be firm and free from grease. Have also 
at hand two small plates, with knives and forks. 

Commence the exhibition by borrowing two hats, to give you a 
choice with which to perform. You can remark that as you should 
be sorry to injure your friend's hat, you will secure it from being 
soiled by placing some reaper in it as a lining. Hold up the paper 
to show it is only paper, and then openly place it in the hat, and 
lay the hat down on its side on the table near you, having the 
brim toward you. 

Have the ready-prepared pancake lying near you, and whilst 
taking off the attention of the spectators by pretending to arrange 
the articles on your table, slip the prepared pancake or plum-cake 
into the hat. 

Unobserved, also place the smaller gallipot in the hat, and while 



202 



MAGIC AND CONJTTErNG. 



doing so, if requisite, add some remark, such as : "Please to shut, 
or open, that door," or any words that will draw off the attention 
of the spectators from what you are doing. You must next, with 
some parade, mix the fluent dough with the sugar and currants in 
the larger gallipot. It must be fluent enough to pour out slowly, 
apparently into the hat, but really into the smaller gallipot, which 
has been already concealed inside the hat. Show you have 
emptied the larger gampot, all but a little ; then, placing it over 
the smaller gallipot again, empty the very last of it, and press the 
larger gallipot firmly down over the smaller one. Then, with it, 
lift the smaller gallipot also, with its contents, while you appear 
only to take back the larger gallipot. Remove the gallipots, as 
supposed to be empty, out'of sight. "Now, ladies and gentlemen, 
I must request your patience a few minutes for the process of 
cooking." Put two or three candles near one another, and move 
the hat at a safe distance above them for two or three minutes, 
making in the meantime any laughable remarks that may occur 
to you, such as : "My young friends will find this a capital way of 
supplying themselves with a delicate dish when they have lost 
their puddings from being in the black books of their teacher or 

Fig. 9. 




parents," or any similar humorous remark; but take care not to 
burn the hat whilst the (supposed) cooking is going on. After a 
short interval, place the hat on the table, and with some little 
ceremony take out the real pancakes or plum-cake. Let it be cut 
up and handed round to the juveniles who may be present. 

Remarks. — A more finished or surer arrangement for holding the 
dough, etc., can be made with a tin apparatus, whieh can be pre- 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



pared by any tinman, upon the same principle as the gallipots, 
taking care not to have it made larger than the inside of a youth's 
hat. 
An amateur can render a common table more suitable for con- 
Fig. 10. 




cealing any little object he wishes to have secreted, by placing 
three or four tumblers under each end of a plank, about the length 
to extend across the table, and throwing any common cloth over 
the board and table ; or a kitchen table, covered with a cloth, 
having a drawer pulled out about six Mjches, will furnish a very 
good conjurer's table. It is well to have the table rather broad, 
so as to keep the spectators at a sufficient distance. 

Trick 14.- To eat a dish of paper shaving's, and draw them out of 
your mouth lite an Atlantic catole. 

Preparation. — Procure three or four yards of the thinnest tissue 
paper of various colors. Cut these up in strips of half an inch or 
three-quarters of an inch breadth, and join them. They will form 
a continuous strip of many feet in length. Eoll this up carefully 
in a flat coil, as ribbons are rolled up. Let it make a coil aboutas 
large as the. top of an egg-cup or an old-fashioned hunting-watch. 
Leave out of the innermost coil about an inch or more of that end 
of the paper, so that you can easily commence unwinding it from 
the center of the coil. 

Procure a large dish or basketful of paper-shavings, which can 
be obtained at little cost from any bookbinder's or stationer's. 
Shaken out it will appear to be a large quantity. As you wish it 
to appear that you have eaten a good portion of them, you can 
squeeze the remainder close together, and then there will appear 
to be few left, and that your appetite has reason to bo satisfied. 

Commence the trick by claiming you have a voracious appetite, 
so that you can make a meal ©ff paper-shavings. Beud dowa «v<»r 



204- MAGIC AND CONJURING.. 

the plate, and take up handful after handful, pretend to munch 
them in your mouth, and make a face as if swallowing them, and 
as you take up another handful, put out those previously in your 
mouth, and put them aside. Having gone on with this as long as 
the spectators seem amused by it, at last, with your left hand, slip 
the prepared ball of tissue paper into your mouth, managing to 
place towards your teeth the end you wish to catch hold of with 
your right hand, for pulling the strip out from your mouth. You 
will take care also not to open your teeth too widely, lest the 
whole coil or ball should come out all at once. 

Having got hold of the end, draw it slowly and gently forward. 
It will unroll to a length of twenty yards or more in a continuous 
strip, much to the amusement of the spectators. 

When it has come to the end, you may remark : "I suppose we 
have come to a fault, as there is a ' solution of continuity here, 
just as the strongest cables break off,' so we must wait to pick up 
the end again, and go on next year, when the Great Eastern again 
goes out with its nest Atlantic Cable." 
Trick 15.— How to cui oSfa nose— of course witaout actual injury. 

Preparation. — Have ready a piece of calico of light color, or a 
white" apron, a sponge saturated with a little liquid of the color of 
blood — port-wine, or the juice of beet-root, will do; also two 
knives, resembling each other, the one of them whole, the other 
with a large notch in its blade, so that when placed over the nose 
it will appear to have cut through the bridge of the nose. (See ad- 
vertisement at end of book. $2.00.) 

Having placed out these articles on your table with seriousness 
and imposing formality, show to the audience the knife that is 
whole, and call upon them to observe that it is sufficiently strong 
and sharp. The other knife must be placed somewhere near you, 
but where it is sheltered from the observation of the spectators. 

Ask some young friend to step forward, assuring him that you 
will not hurt him. Make him sit down on a chair facing the aud- 
ience. After having measured the real knife across his nose, say : 
" But I may as well protect your clothes from being soiled, so I 
will put an apron round your neck." Go to the table to take up 
the apron, and, in doing so, place down the real knife where it 
cannot be seen, and with your left hand take up the conjurer's 
knife, holding it by the blade, lest any one should observe the 
notch in it. Conceal at the same time also, in your left hand, the 
piece of sponge. 

Advancing to the chair, tuck, with your right hand, the apron 
round the youth's neck. Then press the conjurer's knife firmly 
over the nose and leave it there, as if you had cut into the bridge 
of the nose. At the same time gently squeeze the sponge, and a 
little of the liquid will make an alarming appearance on the face 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 205 



and on the apron ; go on for a short time, covering tho face and 
apron with (apparent) blood. When the audience have seen it long 
enough, seize up the apron, wipo the face of the youth quite clean, 
throw away the conjurer's knife, and exhibit your young friend to 
the audience all right, and dismiss him with some facetious remark 
on his courage in undergoing the alarming operation. 



CHAPTEK V. 

TRICKS BY MAGNETISM, CHEMISTRY, GALVANISM, OR ELECTRICITY. 

There is a class of tricks about which I must say a few words, 
viz., those that require to be exhibited by the help of magnetism, 
chemistry, galvanism, or electricity. I need not dwell long on 
them, for I do not consider them such as the young people, for 
whom these notes are written, can be recommended to devote 
their attention to, for the following reasons : In the first place, 
they are, with a few exceptions, attended with considerable ex- 
pense. Secondly, the tricks connected with the powerful agencies 
of galvanism and electricity are dangerous to the unskillful opera- 
tor; and, even in experienced hands, the most effective of them 
are uncertain things to manage ; therefore, their effect cannot be 
depended on. 

Some very interesting tricks have, doubtless, at times been ex- 
hibited by the help of galvanism and electricity. We have read of 
a conjurer by-such help confounding a powerful Arab, by first let : 
ting him lift with ease a box, and afterwards rendering it impossi- ' 
ble for him to raise it, when an electric current had to his dismay, 
paralyzed all his strength. It is evident that an experiment of 
this kind could not be safely attempted by any but a very expe- 
rienced person. We read also of conjurers who have surprised 
their audiences by receiving them in a dimly-lit theater, and then 
firing off a pistol (to startle the audience and cover the real mode 
of operation), they have by electricity lighted up one hundred 
lamps at once. This has proved very successful on some occa- 
sions ; but on others, notwithstanding the most careful prepara- 
tion and the greatest precaution, it has been found that the appa- 
ratus would not act, and the impatient spectators have visited the 
disappointing failure with their indignant murmurs. Other con- 
jurers have become so attached to electric experiments, that they 
have proposed to regulate all the clocks of a large district by elec- 
tricity, or have amused themselves by turning electric cr galvanic 
currents to the door-handles of their houses, so that unsuspecting 
strangers, on touching them, were startled with eleetric shocks. 



206 MAGIC AND CONTOEING. 

There is also a trick for rendering one portion of a portrait electric 
by a metal plate concealed under it, and the spectators being in- 
vited to touch some part of the picture, have, on touching the spots 
that were charged with electricity, received a shock or powerful 
blow, as if the portrait resented their touching it. 

Having briefly given the character of this class of tricks, and 
stated that they not only require expensive apparatus, but are at- 
tended with danger to the inexperienced, there still remains an- 
other serious objection, viz., that, like the experiments performed 
by automaton figures or complicated machinery, they are liable to 
fail, through any trifling disarrangement, just at the moment when 
the performer is hoping that his audience will be delighted with 
his surprising exhibition. 

For these reasons I shall not stay to describe the more elabo- 
rate of these tricks, as, however interesting they may be to the 
scientific, they would not, in a youthful amateur's hands, be sure 
to produce the amusement which it is my primary object to supply. 

The simpler experiments of magnetism and chemistry may well 
be regarded as recreations of science, interesting curiosities, suit- 
able enough to be exhibited by a professor of chemistry for amuse- 
ment and instruction ; but even these can hardly be considered as 
belonging to "conjuring proper." Young people do not care, at 
festive parties, to watch red liquids turning into green, blue, and 
yellow ; or the mixture of different chemical ingredients producing 
strange conversions into varied substances ; nor will experiments 
that are interesting as chemical curiosities produce the same ex- 
citement and pleasing surprise that the wonders of sleight-of-hand 
do. In a word, such experiments in a private circle of young 
friends fail to constitute the most amusing kind of parlor magic, 
while upon a public stage they are too minute for any large au- 
dience to trace and comprehend. 

Lest, however, my young readers should think that I have any 
desire to shut them out from any field of reasonable pleasure, I 
will now carefully select one or two examples of tricks connected 
with the sciences of magnetism and chemistry, and which may, 
even in the hands of amateurs, produce a safe and pleasing exhibi- 
tion. 

In the following trick they will find an amusing instance of the 
combination of science with rational recreation. 

Trick 16.— The watch obedient to the word of command. 

The magnet is a well known agent in producing several toys for 
the entertainment of the young, and though its attraction is won- 
derful, there is no danger likely to arise from employing it, in the 
same way as might arise from unskillful dabbling with electricity, 
galvanism, ©r chemical powers, and a strange and singular effort 



MAGIC AND CONJURING, 207 

' may be produced by placing a magnet of some little strength near 
a watch. 

Supposing the young conjurer to have provided himself with a 
powerful but not very large magnet, let him conceal it in the palm, 
or under a thin glove in his left hand, or near the edge of the cuff 
of his sleeve. Let him then borrow a lady's watch (without chain), 
and the thinner the watch-case is, and if it has a glass, the better. 
Let him then call forward a youth, and placing the watch in his 
own right hand, and near to the ear of the other, ask him if he 
hears it going ; he will answer " Yes." 

Let him next bid the watch to stop ; and on taking it in his left 
hand, where the magnet is concealed, it Avill stop, if held steadily ; 
and on inquiring of his young friend whether he can hear it, he 
will reply "No." 

Observe : you must keep systematically to using your right hand 
when you wish to make the watch go on, and to your left when 
you wish it to stop. Appealing to others among the company, the 
performer may then tell the watch to go on, and holding it in his 
right hand, and giving it a slight shake, apply it to one of their 
ears; it will be heard "tic, tic;" then holding it in his left hand 
and telling it to stop, they will also find that it does stop. You 
can pretend to doubt whether they are all deaf of one ear, but last- 
ly may declare that this is caused by the obedient disposition of 
the watch, which so orderly obeys your command. Remind your 
audience that savages upon first seeing a watch believe it to be a 
living animal with power to think and act of itself. ' ' At any rate, " 
you may conclude, "the present watch seems to hear, to under- 
stand, and to obey my orders." 

It will be an amusing addition to the above trick to say that you 
will now order the watch to fly away and conceal itself. 

You must for this purpose have provided yourself with an elec- 
tro-plated locket resembling a lady's watch, and have two loaves 
ready in some convenient corner. 

When the watch has finished its " manual and platoon" exercise 
on the platform you may say?. " I will now place this watch visibly 
to all upon the table." Turn round to go to your table, and in 
walking to it, substitute the locket for the watch, and place the 
locket on some spot visible to all. It will not be distinguishable 
from the watch by the spectators at six or eight yards distance 
from them. Conceal the watch itself in the palm of your hand. 
You can now exclaim, "I require two loaves," and walking to- 
ward them, slip the watch into the one you have prepared with a 
slit in its side. Advancing to the audience, ask in which loaf they 
will prefer that you shall bid the watch fly. If they name the one 
in which you have concealed it, proceed to break open the loaf and 
find the watch. Bui suppose they name the wreng one ; y«u then, 



2C8 MAGIC AND CONJURING, 

remembering that the left hand of the spectators is your right 
hand, proceed with the true loaf, whichever they have named, or 
manage to cross the position of the loaves as you place them on 
the table. 

Then taking up the locket with your right hand, make Pass 1, 
as if transferring it to your left hand, but really retaining it in 
your right hand (as described in my first paper). Blow upon your 
closed left hand, and say, "Watch, fly irAo that loaf." Clap your 
hands. It is gone. 

Advancing to the loaf, get rid of the locket from your right 
hand ; take up the loaf, break it open on the other side from that 
in which the locket was introduced, bring out the watch, and ap- 
peal to the lady to declare whether it is the same which she lent 
to you. (50 cents each.) 

Trick 17. 

An experiment with a very mild dash of electricity in it, which 
will at any rate be a popular trick with most people that try it. It 
will do for a small entertainment, or at any joyous party of young 
people. It does not, however, require a large number to be pres- 
ent; but, contrary to the usual scientific tricks, its development 
comes off better with one companion than with a dozen. 

Preparation. — You must induce your cousin Jemima, or some 
other young lady who is just of age to have cut her eye-teeth, to 
consent to help you by accompanying you to a room with closed 
shutters and no candles. A moderate-sized looking-glass must be 
on the table, the smaller the better, for reasons below assigned. 
Have ready at hand some ounces of hard candy. 

You commence the trick by placing yourselves, hand-in-hand, 
before the looking-glass. If it is rather small, your heads will be the 
closer — in order to see the reflection of both at once. Then, with 
mouths as open as may be, try which of you can crush his or her 
share of su^ar-candy with the teeth the quickest. In the glass 
will appear the reflection of sparks of electricity, as the experi- 
ment proceeds. If your companion is nervous, you can of course 
support her with one arm — ladies are sometimes susceptible, 
whether from animal magnetism or what not. The electric sparks 
coming between the lips may also be attractive, and you may be 
tempted to try whether the electricity evaporates the sweetness ; 
but of course you must not be tempted to forget the philosophical 
nature of the experiment; and, if you behave with propriety, the 
lady will doubtless, on her return to the company, tell them, in a 
staid manner, that the experiment was all right; and perhaps 
when you see her, even a day or two afterward, you will observe 
there is an areh dimple on her eheek and an electric sparkle light- 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 209 

ing up her eye — and I should not wonder if you should feel a 
desire to try the experiment over again. 

Trick 18.— A chemical trick to follow one where a young- friend 
has assisted. 

Preparation. — You must have a wine-glass, a saucer, and a tea- 
spoon, and the chemical bottles No. 1 (silicate of potash) and No. 
2 (aluminate of potash), which can be obtained from any druggist. 

At the close of some trick in which any young friend has 
assisted, you caji say : "Well, my young friend, you have assisted 
me so courteously and well that I must, in order to express my 
thanks, ask you to take a glass of wine. Do you like wine? Ah, 
I see by your smile you do." 

Pour out of bottle No. 1 half a glass, and, going toward him, 
stop short and say : "Ah, but I am afraid your mamma would be 
displeased with me if I gave you wine so strong without any 
water, and I should be sorry to tempt you to drink what she would 
disapprove. Stay, I will mix a little water with it." 

Mix some of No. 2 bottle, so as to fill the wine-glass, and say : 
" Oh, never mind losing the pure wine ; I dare say you will like it 
very well as it is," and make a few chatty remarks, to give the 
liquids time to mingle their effects in the glass ; and after a min- 
ute or two say: "Ah! I'll tell you what I am sure your mamma 
would like still better— if I could give you some ealves'-foot jelly. 
Now, I really believe, if I were to stir it with this teaspoon, and 
try my magic wand over it, I can turn it to jelly. Let us try." 
Occupy a little time while it is becoming like jelly, and go on with 
a little more talk till you see that it has become solid. Then say : 
"Well, after all, I will not deprive you of your wine; so here it 
is. Please drink it." Putting it to his lips, he will find it has 
become so solid that he cannot drink it, but it can be turned out 
quite solid into the saucer, and a general laugh will greet him on 
the disappointment of his wine. 

Having submitted a few remarks upon the class of tricks that 
are to be performed by help of the sciences, magnetism, chemis- 
try, etc., and having stated my reasons for not more fully dis- 
cussing them, I will now proceed to give an explanation of one or 
two more that are better suited for the practice of amateurs. 

Trick 10. —To draw three spools off two tapes without these 
spools having - to come elf the ends of the tspes, and while the 
four ends of the tapes are held fcy four persons. 

Preparation. — You must have two narrow tapes of about four 
feet long, bent as in Fig. 11. Red tape I prefer. 

You must next insert about half an inch of A through the loop 
of B, and bring it back down on the other part of A. 



210 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



A spool such as cotton is wound on, or an ornamented ball with 
a hole drilled through it, just large enough to hold the tapes 
lightly, will be required (Fig. 13). 

Figs. 11, 12. 



Fig. 13. 



Fig. 14. 



The spool or ball must be put on the tapes at the extreme ends 
of the tape B, and drawn to the left, till it just covers the noose 
at K, as in Fig. 14. 

N. B. — All the above should be prepared before the spectators 
are invited to witness the trick. 

Commence the exhibition by calling upon the spectators to 
observe that you hold a reel, or ball, through which two tapes are 
passed. 

You may then produce two mere spools, or wooden balls, and 
place one of them over the ends at A, and the other over the ends 
at B. 

The following will then be the appearance of the balls or spools 
and the tapes passed through them (Fig. 15) : 



MAGIC AND CONJTJEING. 



211 




You may move about the spools 2 and 3, to show how the tape 
runs through them, but you must not move spool 1. 

You may then say that the puzzle is to get the spools off the 
tapes while the four ends are held firmly in the hands of four per- 
sons. Appoint four persons to hold them, and you may then say : 
" To make doubly sure, I will tie one of the ends at A to one of 
the ends at B with (the first half of) a knot." It does not»signify 
which ends you take to do this, so that you take one A and one B. 
"I will now pull these two ends so tight that it will draw the three 
spools together, and also tighten all along one side of them." 

Then, while four persons hold firmly the extreme ends of the 



Fig. 16. 




tapes, you must take shorter hold of the two A's with your left 
hand (where it is marked by a dotted line, Fig. 16), and also take 
hold of the other tapes where a dotted line is marked on them 
toward B. Then drawing your arms wider apart, so as to pull the 
tapes steadily, the spools or balls will fall to the ground without 
passing over the ends of the 



Trick 20. —To restore a tape whole after it has been cut in the 
middle. 

Preparation. — Have five or six yards of tape about three-quarters 
of an inch broad. 

Take half the length in each hand. You will be able to show the 
audience that you are about to cut it in the middle, by holding 'it 
in two loops of equal length. Call their attention pointedly to the 
equal division of the full length. 

The tape will thus appear to the performer in the position rep- 
resented in Fig. 17. 



212 



MAGIC AND CONTUSING. 



Observe the tape A crosses at z the tape B on the side next to 
the performer, whereas the tape B is to cross the tape y on the 
side farthest from him. 

Fig, 13 represents the hands as they appear to the performer 
himself, holding the tape with the thumb and forefinger at the 
crossings of the tape at y and z, while the outward sides of each 
loop are to be held by the three other fingers of each hand. 



Fig. 17. 



Left Hand. 



Fig. 18. 

Bight Hand. 




To proceed with the trick : Holding your hands in this position 
(Fig. 18), you must request one of the spectators to cut through 
the tape at x, but just as he is about to do so, you must quickly 
lower your hands two or three inches, and then raise them again. 
This movement will conceal the following operation: You drop 
the part (B) of the tape held in your right hand, and at the samo 
moment pick up with that hand the other tape marked C. 

This will bring the portion of tape from C to D, so that it now 
becomes the transverse tape, substituted in place of the tape 
marked x, and your young Mend will then cut it— instead of the 
original tape marked x — without being aware that he is so doing. 

When the tape has been cut through, you can put your hands 



MAGIC AND C0NJTJE1NG. 



-213 



Tig. 19. 



near together, allowing the two ends of the little piece of the 
tape — CD — 10 be seen, but concealing from the spectators that 
you U'u-e hold of two pieces, ouo a very long one, and vho other 
only about live inches long. You can then say : "Now I have to 
join these two ends, and to restore the tape whole a3 
at first. ' You then turn the little piece C D round the 
piece y, which is in your left hand, and you tie a knot 
with the ends of that little piece. You must not tie 
this knot very tight, and after you have tied it, you 
drop the other end of the tape altogether out of your 
right hand. 

The appearance which the tapes will then have is 
represented in Fig. 19. That is, you will seem to hold 
the equally divided pieces of the long tape joined in a 
knot at y, whereas in fact it is only the small end 
piece D, tied round the middle of the long tape, 
which you hold between the thumb and forefinger of 
the left hand. Exhibit the knot to the company, and 
say ; " I admit that this knot hardly looks like a per- 
fect restoration ; I must employ my best art to get rid 
of its unsightly appearance." 

Ask some one to hold, at about three yards distance, 
the end marked with small d, retaining hold of the 
center— at y — in your left hand, which quite covers the 
knot. Tell your friend to wind the tape round his 
hand, and, while pretending to show him how to do 
this, by winding the part which you hold round your 
left hand, slide away toward your right the loose knot 
under your right hand. Then, holding out the end of the tape A 
toward another friend, to hold at about three yards' distance to 
the right, slip from off the long tape the little movable knot under 
your right hand, just before he takes hold of this end of the tape. 
Conceal in your right hand the little end-piece of tape, until you 
can get rid of it into your pocket, or into any unobserved spot. 
Blow upon your left hand, which is supposed still to cover the 
knot, saying: "Knot, begone! — Restore!" Take up your left 
hand, and show the tape to be free from any knot or join from 
one end of it to the other, 



214 MAGIC AND CONTOKINO. 



CHAPTER VI. 

ON THE CONTINUITY OF TKICKS. 



It may be useful now to invite attention to the theory of pre- 
serving a continuity in the development of tricks, where circum- 
stances admit of this being done. Sundry displays of legerdemain 
admit of being adroitly linked together ; and I shall endeavor to 
explain why such an harmonious continuity is preferable to an un- 
connected series of isolated tricks ; for when once a novice gets a 
clear perception of this principle, he will be able, according to his 
own special taste, to produce a pleasing variety of combinations 
in his experiments. He will thus rise above being a mere copyist 
of the methods used by others, and so will give a zest and fresh- 
ness to his performances. 

Now, there are many short and secondary dashes of legerde- 
main, which a spirited periormer will be able to introduce in ad- 
dition to the tricks which he is exhibiting. There are also several 
ornamental or fanciful little tricks which would not rivet the at- 
tention of an audience if exhibited by themselves. These, though 
unqualified to shine as the main object of observation, may never- 
theless be worked into the evening"s entertainment as amusing 
by-play, and may thus prevent the Interest of the spectator from 
flagging. They may come in as accessories — as stimulating side- 
dishes— causing the entertainment to bear a continuous character, 
instead of merely consisting of sundry isolated experiments. 

Let me be allowed to substantiate what I have advanced by ref- 
erence to some of the tricks which I have already described. 

The reader will have seen that, in some of the tricks explained 
in previous papers, there is simply some one definite object to be 
carried out. For instance, in the two tricks which concluded the 
last paper, the performer simply undertakes to throw the spools 
off the tape, or to restore a tape which has been cut. He sets 
about this, accomplishes it, and the trick is over. This is all very 
well as far as it goes. If the trick is really a good one, it is like 
a host furnishing his guests with a solid joint to satisfy their ap- 
petite ; and it may do so. But still it comes short of a lively en- 
tertainment. It is confessedly dull for an audience to come to 
pauses or gaps between isolated tricks. Their attention is unoc- 
cupied while the performer, having finished off one trick, is mak- 
ing mute preparations to introduce some other trick wholly un- 
connected with what has gone before. Such a method will not 
keep awake the lively interest that the skillful combination of the 
conjurer's art will sustain. I maintain that varied by -play and 



MAGIC AND CONJUBINO. 215 

supplementary sets-off will greatly heighten the interest of the per- 
formance. 

It will also serve to disarm the suspicious and incredulous, pre- 
paring them to believe what they might otherwise stand on their 
guard against. Bare tricks brought forward as isolated experi- 
ments give time for the mind to take its estimate of their possi- 
bility ; and, of course, in attempting to exhibit wonders, the im- 
probability of them is apt to stare people strongly in the face. 
They are perfectly convinced that a dime cannot fly into an orange 
at the other end of the room, that ink cannot become water, nor a 
hat be safely used as a frying-pan ; but if you interpose appear- 
ances and movements that are consistent with such processes go- 
ing on, they are gradually prepared to recognize as a legitimate 
result what you have previously indicated as the contemplated end 
of those processes. 

The amplification or fuller development which I speak of can be 
effected at any of the following stages : 

1. In the introductory matter leading on to the main trick or 

transformation : 

2. In the subsequent stages of its development ; or, 

3. In the winding-up smartly or variedly the conclusion of a 
trick. 

I do not say that every trick is to be amplified or loaded with 
extraneous matter in all these different stages, (that would be to 
run into the contrary extreme of over-cumbrous amplification) ; 
but I will endeavor to point out the effect of such development in 
the above three stages of a trick, and if I can show that amplifica- 
tion in each several one may be an improvement, I may be con- 
sidered to have made good my proposition that any trick may be 
improved and rendered more interesting by one or other of those 
amplifications. 

Let us see if we cannot lay down a bill of fare for our guests 
which, going beyond a solid joint, (good as that may be in its 
way), will furnish them with some relishing accessory in the first 
course of a trick, some stimulant side-dishes with its second 
course, or may please with some bon-bons before the entertain- 
ment is quite concluded. 

1. Introductory. — Now, first as to introductory matter. Suppose 
a conjurer is able to perform Trick 3 — the "Dancing Egg" — it will 
waken up his audience if, instead of proceeding at once with the 
trick, he can by sleight-of-hand find out an egg in the whiskers or 
necktie of some unwatchful spectator, and afterwards substitute 
for it the egg prepared with a hair and wax. 

The chief aina of introductory matter should be to enlist the 



216 MAGIC AND CONJUBINO. ] 

thoughts and expectations of your audience under your command, 
so as to preclude their watching what you are driving at. Show 
all you can safely show openly ; enlarge upon the things being 
submitted to their own eyes and touch ; engage their eyes and ears 
with certain appearances leading their thoughts to adopt your sug- 
gestions, so that, when you approach the development intended, 
they have had no reason to suspect your motives ; thus having 
their confidence, you can jump at once to their credulity, though 
there may, in fact, exist some gap, or illogical process, which they 
omit to notice. 

2. During the successive stages of a trick. — I often vary and render 
more interesting the development of a trick by some little by-play. 

For instance, in the trick which I often use as my first trick, I 
make a candle an amusing helper, by snatching it from the candle- 
stick, and asking some one to hold it wrapt up in paper. 

And this unexpected service of the candle is wrought into the 
body of the trick which I have in hand. 

I change also a crystal ball into an orange by skillful manipula- 
tion. 

By such brief diversion of the attention of the spectators, their 
eyes are withdrawn from watching too narrowly some manoeuvre 
that is requisite to carry out the more important trick which you 
have in hand. 

Or you may actually make an act, which is a mere accessory, 
cover some important portion of the trick ; as in the tape trick 
(No. 20). While pretending to show your assistant how to 
hold the tape in his hand, you slip the knot away unperceived 
under your own hand. 

3. In concluding a Trick. — It greatly adds to the efficiency of a 
trick to let it finish off with a sparkle, or some playful addition 
which gilds its exit. 

For instance, in the trick of doubling the pocket-money (7th 
Trick), the little by-play of finding, or rather pretending to find, 
so.no coins secreted in the sleeve of the young friend who has 
helpe'l you, is sure to bring out a good-humored laugh at the ter- 
min ition of the trick. Again, in Trick 16, the additional fact of 
finding the watch in the loaf makes a lively termination of the per- 
formance of the obedient watch. In the 18th Trick, the glass of 
wine becoming solid might be used as a good finish to any trick 
where some friend has assisted in its exhibition. 

You may often raise a good-humored laugh by appearing to 
swallow any object which you have used in a trick — as an orange, 
ball, egg, or dime — and afterward j bringing it out from your 
sleeve ; or, by the use of Pass 1, to drive a coin up one sleeve, 
round the back of your neck, and down the other sleeve, in,to your 
right hand. 



MAGIC AND CONJCBINO. 



217 



I not only consider such amplifications of a trick lively and in- 
teresting, but I maintain this to be the best way of employing 
many secondary and short tricks wherever they can be brought in 
appropriately as offshoots of longer and more important ones. 

Trick 21.— TJie invisible lien; a very useful trick for supplying 

eggs for breakfast or dinner. 
Preparation. — In order to save the invisible hen trouble and de- 
lay, it will be advisable to have eight or ten egg-shells (as de- 
scribed in Trick 3) ; or some light imitation eggs, painted white, 
may be bought at any depot of conjuring apparatus. A linen or 

Fig. 20. 




Position 1, 



Position 2, 



camlet hag may also be procured from the same depot, though I 
think a bag made at home, according to the following directions, 
to be preferable. 

It must be about the size of a small pillow, two feet three inches 
across, and -on© foot nine incke3 deep. It has one of its sides of 



218 MAGIC AND CONTUSING. ^ 

double cloth, (x,) the other single (z,) in the same way as leather 
writing-cases have a pocket on one side, and a single cover on the 
other. The double side is stitched together all round, with the 
exception of an opening at A, which must be about five inches 
long, or large enough to admit easily a hand to put in or take out 
the eggs. This double side of the bag must always be kept towards 
the performer, whereas the single side must be always kept to- 
wards the spectators ; and the only opening Detween these two 
sides is between C and D. On the interior of the side of the 
double cloth bag, a strip or kind of frill of the same cloth must be 
sewn, with an elastic binding round the pockets or cups for eggs. 
The elastic binding will keep them in these pockets, unless they 
are pressed by the thumb or finger, so as to release them and let 
them fall into the center of the double bag. The strip has the ap- 
pearance of a string of inverted egg-cups, thus : 

Fig. 21. 



-V£Ml-^HI%^%-%^ ; 



The position of it in the bag is indicated in Fig. 21 by the dots 
running across the bag ; but the strip itself is never seen by the 
spectators, for it is placed on the inner side of the double bag, 
which is always towards the performer. 

Having carefully prepared the above apparatus, eommence the 
exhibition of the trick by holding up the bag by the corners C and 
D, as represented in Fig. 21. Shake the bag well while so holding 
it, showing it to be (apparently) empty. 

After having thus exhibited the bag, thrust both your hands 
down inside it to the corners, A and B. Holding those corners, 
pull the bag inside out,, and again show it to be empty, in this re- 
versed position, represented in Fig. 21. 

As the spectators have now seen it thoroughly, inside and out- 
side, you may put the question to them, "whether they admit it 
to- be empty, as they ought to know." 

While holding the bag by the same eorners A and B, you must 
now gatherthe bag a little closertogether, and holding it well up — 
see Fig. 21 — press with your thumb one of the eggs out of its elas- 
tic cup. This can be easily done without any one observing the 
movement. This egg, with a little gentle shaking, will fall into 
the large bag made by the double side ; but it cannot fall to the 
ground, however much you shake it, for there is no opening but at 
A, and that is upwards towards your right hand,, so you may shake 
the bag boldly. 

You next lower the bag a little, and spread it on your chest, let- 
ting it rest there while you move your hands from A and B to take 



MAGIC AND COXJUKING. 



219 



hold of the corners C and D ; and you must give an opening for 
what had hitherto been the higher part of the bag, to drop through 
between the opening that there is between C and D. This will 

Fig. 22. 





Position 3. 



Position 4. 



keep the double side of the bag (x) still toward yourself, and the 
bag will now be returned to its original position (Fig. 21). With 
your left hand retaining hold of the corner D, and lowering the 
bag toward your right hand, shake well the loosened egg down 
toward the corner A. Search with your right hand about that 
corner, and the opening of the double bag, and you will be able 
to bring out the egg that had been loosened while the bag was in 
position 3. 

Take out that egg ; shake the bag well, as if it were quite 
empty ; and then, thrusting both your hands into the interior 
corners at A and B, turn the bag inside out ; bring it to position 
2, ready to re-commence bringing out the other eggs one by one, 
as long as the spectators are interested. While you hold the bag 
in position 2, you can safely let any young person feel to the bot- 



"220 .MAGIC AND CONJUSING. 

torn of the bag, as he will not be likely to suspect the eggs are 
toward the top of the bag on the side near to yourself. 

The same bag may be used also, much to the amusement of 
children, by your loading it with walnuts, chestnuts, small apples, 
or pears, or any bon-bon of about the size of an egg; and then 
allowing the children, one by one, to feel in your lucky bag for 
what you take care they shall find in their successive searches. 
A Series of Tricks, 22, 23, 24.— The chief agent being- a plain 
gold ring". 

Preparation. — You must be provided with a small, thin wire, 
pointed at both ends, which, being bent round, will resemble an 
ordinary plain gold ring. 

You must also have on your table an orange or a lemon, a box 
or bowl, a tumbler, and a dessert-knife. 

And you must have four or five needlefuls of thick cotton, which 
have been previously steeped for about an hour in a wine-glass of 
water, with a teaspoonf ul of salt in it ; and have been afterward 
completely dried, so as to burn easily. 
Trick 22. 

Having the fictitious ring in the palm of your hand, commence 
by requesting any lady present to oblige you by lending you a 
plain gold ring, and borrow also from some gentleman a colored 
silk handkerchief. Appear to place the borrowed ring in that 
handkerchief, but in reality place it in the rounded fictitious 
ring. Doubling the center of the handkerchief round it, request 
some gentleman to hold it, so as to be sure he has got the ring in 
the handkerchief — while you fetch a slight cord to fasten it. 
While going to your table to fetch this cord, you slip the real ring 
into a slit in the orange which you had prepared, and which closes 
readily over it. You then tie the cord round the handkerchief, 
about two inches from the ring, and, calling the spectators to 
notice how it is secured, take hold of that part of the handkerchief 
Which incloses the fictitious ring in your own hand, and tell the 
gentleman to place one by one the four corners of the handker- 
chief over your hand. Directly he has begun to do this, your fin- 
gers must proceed to unbend and open the fictitious ring, and to 
press it by its pointed end through the silk, and conceal it in your 
own palm. You tell your assistant to blow upon the handkerchief 
and open it — the ring is gone, and you return the handkerchief to 
the owner. Fetch the orange from your table, and ask some one 
to cut it open, and he will find the lady's ring in the center of the 
orange. 

Trick 23. 

You are now to proceed immediately to the next development 
of the mysterious powers of the plain ring, which ladies so much 
admire. You may commence by remarking that " You have' little 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 221 

doubt that this symbol of love and obedience will at your com- 
mand pass through the table, solid as it is. Let us try." 

Place the tumbler on the table — produce your own silk handker- 
chief, to the center of which a plain ring is already fastened by a 
doubled silk thread of about 4 inches length. 

Use Pass 1 with the real ring, as if passing it into the handker- 
chief ; conceal that ring, and substitute for it the fictitious ring. 

Then addressing the spectators, say : 

"Now, ladies and gentlemen, I will drop this ring into the 
glass, so as you shall hear it fall." Do so. Let the handkerchief 
rest over the glass for a minute or two. "Now I must place this 
bowl under the table to receive the ring." In so placing the bowl, 
you must silently place the real ring in it. Then say aloud, 
"Change, ring; pass from the glass through the table into the 
bowl below." Lift up the handkerchief, and while inviting one or 
two to come and examine the glass and the bowl, smooth your 
forehead with the handkerchief as if heated, and pass it into your 
pocket. Your young friends will be astonished to find the ring 
not in the glass, where they heard it tinkle, but in the bowl under- 
neath the table. 

Trick 24. 

' ' Now, ring, you have amused us so well, that you shall, like 
Mahomet, be sustained in the air without visible support." 

Place over a common walking-stick some of your prepared cot- 
ton threads, having twisted two or three of them together, and 
united them in a loop, which you draw through the ring, and then 
slip the ring through the end of the loop. The ring will then hang 
suspended about a'foot below the stick. The stick itself may be 
steadily fixed, resting on the back of two chairs at an elevation, 
so as to be easily seen by the company. 

When the ring has been thus suspended, set fire to the cotton 
about two inches above the ring; the flame will run upwards 
toward the stick; blow it out when about two inches from the 
stick, and the ring will remain pendulous in the air for some little 
time after the cotton has been burnt. 

The suspension is said to be caused by a filament, or fine thread 
of glass, which has been formed by the ashes of the cotton 
uniting with the heated salt, with which the cotton had been pre- 
pared. 

Now this trick would be too simple an experiment to be exhib- 
ited by itself ; but coming as a finish to two other tricks, which 
have been performed with the same ring, the spectators 
Will give it honor due. 

I trust that I have satisfactorily established the assertion that 
a combination of congenial tricks will often tell more effectively 
than the same tricks would if exhibited without such combination. 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



CHAP TEE VII. 

FRIENDLY SUGGESTIONS. 



As the amateur will aspire to come before his parlor audience 
some day or other, it may be some little service and help to him 
to give a few suggestions as to the best way of conducting such an 
exhibition, and to specify the kind of tricks to which he will do 
well to limit himself. It will be desirable to open with an off- 
hand expression of his wish to place before them a few amusing 
tricks to while away an hour ; and let him assume a lively air, for 
his own liveliness will sustain that of the spectators. 

There are some conjurers who, though they can perform good 
tricks, exhibit them in such a heavy, uninteresting way that they 
create no enthusiasm. An over-anxious look, coupled with a 
creeping, fearful movement, and a dull, monotonous voice, will 
suggest distrust and dissatisfaction, even where the audience has 
come together prepossessed with the expectation of mirth and 
glee. Let none assume, then, to wave the conjurer's wand till he 
has himself some confidence in his powers, knows what he pro- 
poses to do, and means to carry it out. I would say that a mod- 
erate degree of assumption, a gay vivacity, ready to break out 
into a smile, a cheerful spirit, and a joyous voice, will go a great 
way to bespeak favor, which the performer can quickly repay by 
dashing off his tricks with enthusiasm. The language used by 
the conjurer should be studiously guarded. Let there be no vain- 
glorious assertions, no self-praise, but respectful deference to the 
judgment of the spectators; rather inclining to give them the 
credit of understanding more than they do, than twitting them 
with understanding less. Be neither overbearing with conceited 
"chaff" upon any of the company; nor, on the other hand, ven- 
ture upon extreme and disconcerting compliments to any person 
present. Eather, as a courteous master of the ceremonies, con- 
duct the experiments with a simple effort to please and to amuse 
all. With the exhibition of an amateur, the performance of some 
lively airs upon the piano by any friend will form an agreeable 
accompaniment, especially if the spirited and humorous melodies 
are introduced, which the public taste recognizes as the tunes of 
the day. You will do well to have your table neatly and carefully 
arranged. Let it not lie too near to the spectators, nor within 
reach of too minute inspection. It should be of sufficient height 
to show the main objects placed on it ; but the surface of it may 
be just high enough to be sheltered from the spectators clearly 
viewing every article upon it. The ornaments should be few, yet, 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



223 



at the same time, be serviceable to shade a few articles which it 
may be policy to conceal. 

1. The center table may be a moderate-sized kitchen table, with 
a drawer to stand open ; so that the performer can take any article 
out of the drawer with one hand, while engaging the eyes of the 
spectators with his other hand. A colored cloth should be over 
the tables, on the side toward the spectators. 

2. Two small tables, at the sides of the center table, may also 
be useful, as in Fig. 22. 

Fig. 23. 




3. With tables arranged somewhat in this manner the amateur 
will be able to take up articles from either the surface or back of 
the tables, without attracting notice to his doing so. He must 
practice taking up things with one hand, while his other hand and 
his eyes are ostensibly occupied with some other object; for if the 
spectators see him looking behind his table, their eyes will imme- 
diately follow in the same direction. 

The amateur will do well to select the simple tricks for his first 
attempts, and never pretend to exhibit even those without having 
frequently and diligently practiced them. He must make up his 
resolution to ti'ain his hands to the passes, and to the several 
manoeuvres in the tricks, as diligently as young ladies train their 
fingers to the keys of the piano. 

And let them not be discouraged if they feel awkward and ner- 
vous at first. Some of the best conjurers have candidly confessed 
their early failings and misgivings. With practice and perseve- 
rance this will, in most cases, wear off. I would augur that, if 
they feel an interest in the art, and a desire to excel in it, they 
will most probably secure a measure of success that will amply 
repay their efforts. 



224 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



Trick 25.— The Conjurer's "Bonus Genius," or Familiar 
Messenger. 

This is an old triek that has delighted thousands, and may 
amuse thousands more, if adroitly performed. There are only the 
simplest mechanical arrangements connected with it'; its success- 
ful exhibition depends upon the dexterity and vivacity of the per- 
former. 

Preparation. — You must have a strong wooden doll, about eight 
or ten inches high ; the head must fix on or off by a peg at the bot- 
tom of the throat, being placed in a hole made at the top of the 
bust. Besides a close-fitting dress to its body, a large, loose, fan- 
tastic cloak must be placed round the whole figure, but must be so 
arranged as to allow the head to be pushed down through the part 
of the cloak that covers the bust, and an elastic pocket must be 
neatly made inside the cloak to receive and retain the head. 

Having the above apparatus ready, you may commence by say- 
ing: 

"Allow me, ladies and gentlemen, to introduce my learned 
friend and assistant — indefatigable in traveling to the most distant 
parts on any message I may wish to send him. He used to be recog- 
nized by early conjurers as their Bonus Genius — their good, familiar 
spirit. But, whatever his special title, he is gifted with the art of 
rendering himself visible or invisible, as he feels disposed, while 
he travels to distant countries. 

"Allow me to call your attentiorito the solid frame and unflinch- 
ing nerves, at any rate to the well-seasoned constitution, of my 
friend. [Bap him loudly, rap, rap, rap, on the table.] The raps 
he received during his education doubtless accustomed him to 
bear much without flinching. Though his travels have ranged 
from China to Peru, from the Equator to the Poles, you perceive 
he still sounds like a hardy Pole himself. [Bap, rap, rap.] 

"I perceive, however, by the glaring of his eyes, that, after my 
too rough handling, he is desirous of starting on his travels. I 
suppose we must provide him with the needful for his expenses. 
Large sums are given now-a-days to special correspondents in 
foreign countries; who will kindly give him sufficient? He will 
want a golden or silver key to open some curiosities he may wish 
to inspect in foreign cities. (Pause.) Oh, well, as there is a delay 
about it, I must myself supply him. I think I have a few disposa- 
ble coins in my pocket; he shall have them." 

Suiting the action to the word, while your left hand holds the 
upper part of the cloak near the neck, so as to cover what you are 
doing, you withdraw the wooden body with your right hand, while 
you move your right hand down to your pocket for the coins. 
You then leave the body of the doll in your pocket, and taking 
out the coins, present them to the head and cloak of the figure, 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 225 

.which is held in your left hand, saying : "There, my good friend, 
you can now, if you wish, proceed on your tour to Algiers, or 
Dahomey, or Timbuctoo, or wherever the universal Yankee trav- 
elers fancy at the present to resort. 

" Ah, I see he is pleased and in good spirits again. He wishes 
apparently to bid you good-bye. You will excuse his looking also 
round about him, to judge whether the weather is fair to set out; 
after which I will lay my hand on his head to express my good 
wishes for his journey. I dare say he will not stay much longer 
after that than a schoolboy does after his master has bid him 
good-bye." 

Place with formal ceremony your hand on his head, press it 
down through the opening below it, receive it in your left hand 
underneath the cloak, and bestow it safely in the pocket. 

Affect astonishment at finding the gown alone left in your hands, 
and fold it up with a lamentation at Ids departure. You may say : 
" It is clear that he has chosen to go to a hot climate, as he has 
left his cloak behind him." 

Discourse for a few minutes about sending a telegram to over- 
take him at London or San Francisco — talk about the sea-passage, 
railways, tunnels, and what not. 

" Ah, but I need none of this if I wish him back. I can sum- 
mon him again by a few mystic wavings of my wand and by secret 
art. Hey, my friend, J. need thy presence ; quick, return, I pray 
you. I wish to see you again in your familiar garb — 

By the pricking of my thumbs, 
Something ghostly hither comes." 

Swell out the cloak with your left hand, and at the same time 
thrust up the head from the pocket. It will appear as if the whole 
figure stood before them. 

Then say : "I fear, clear friend, I have trespassed by abridging 
your tour. You can hardly have traversed Algeria, crossed the 
Mountains of the Moon, or found the birthplace of the Nile ; and 
no one returns now-a-days without some such marvel to relate. 
I will let you depart again. As some people say to troublesome 
visitors : ' You may depart now ; please to call again to-morrow.' " 

Repeat the manoeuvre, as before, of secreting the head. Then 
exclaim: "Alas! he is gone in earnest, like the sojourner of a 
day (with mock pathos). When we have lost him, we feel our 
loneliness." 

Fold up sorrowfully the cloak of the departed, and so conclude 
the trick. 

Trick 26.— The Shower of Money. 

A dozen silver coins, or pennies, will be equally useful in exhib- 
iting this trick ; but some fictitious coin, in color resembling gold, 



226 MAGIC AND CONJUEING. 

will perhaps more effectively delight those who are charmed by 
the yellow glitter of the precious metal. The performer must 
have provided himself with so many of these in his left nand as 
he proposes to produce at the end of the trick, and two of the 
same coin also must be concealed in his right palm. He must 
further borrow a hat from one of the company. 

The imagination of the spectators having been excited by the 
expectation of beholding a shower of money, the adept in sleight- 
of-hand, keeping one of the two coins in his right hand concealed, 
must advance the other coin to the end of his forefinger and 
thumb, while he pretends to pick a com out of the candle, or of 
the rim of a hat, or from a lady's fan or shoulder, or may pretend 
to clutch a coin floating in the air. As he brings away his prize, 
he may rattle it against the other coin concealed in his right hand. 
Then, making Pass 1, he may pretend to pass it into the hat, 
being careful precisely at the same moment to drop, audibly, a 
coin from his left hand into the hat which he holds in that hand. 
Let him tell the audience to keep count how many he collects ; it 
will rather distract their attention. 

He can continue this pleasant appearance of acquiring wealth 
for ten minutes, or as long as he can devise various methods of 
appearing to clutch it, till the number with which he stored his 
left hand is exhausted. 

He may then request some one to count out, audibly, into a 
plate the coins collected in the hat, which will coincide with the 
number he has appeared to collect so magically from various 
sources. When adroitly done, this trick is very pleasing and 
effective. 

Trick 27 —To furnish ladies with a magic supply of tea or coffee, 
at their selection, from one and the same jug 1 . 

Preparation. — Have a metal jug to hold not less than three pints. 
It must be constructed with two compartments in the lower part 
of it, folding about a pint and a quarter each, and these must 
each have a pipe connected with the spout of the jug and another 
pipe connecting with its handle, and in the handle a small hole 
about the size of a letter— o — in this print. These lower compart- 
ments must be filled with good tea and coffee before the jug is pro- 
duced. 

The upper chamber, or compartment, like the upper portion of a 
patent coffee-pot, must have no communication with the lower 
divisions, and must be well closed also at the top with a tin cover, 
closely fitting. Have half a dozen small tea-cups and half a dozen 
small coffee-cups ready on a tray. 

Begin the trick by placing openly in the upper compartment 
coffee-berries and tea, mixing them together. Take up, as a sud- 
den thought, an old blacking bottle, and pretend to pour from it 



MAGIC AND CONJURING. 



227 



into the jug, to furnish highly-colored liquid to improve the coffee ; 
and a little gunpowder, about a teaspoonful, may bo fired off over 
the mixture to make the tea strong. Wave your wand over the jug. 

Then you may address the ladies ; inform them + hat the ingre- 
dients are well mixed, and invite them to name which they will 
prefer, "tea or coffee," as you can produce either at their com- 
mand from the same jug. 

Get some friend to hand the cups, while you follow him, and, by 
unstopping the holes in the handle for admitting air upon the 
coffee or tea, the one of them that each lady names will flow out 
from the spout of this magic jug. 

Trick 28.— A pleasing exhibition for both the performer and the 
audience, to view when they feel a little exhausted. 

Preparation. — Have two pint bottles and one quart bottle; the 
pint bottles to be filled, one with a liquid resembling port, tho 
other with one resembling sherry ; the large bottle to be at first 
Fig. 24. 





empty. Three opaque metal stands, the center one to stand under 
the quart bottle, to have a large cavity to hold a quart, and the 
upper part of this stand to be full of large holes, like a cullender, 
for the liquor to run from the opening at H into that cavity. 
You must also have three metal covers, of proper size to cover 

Fig. 25, 




^ 




the above three bottles — these covers to have handles at top, so 
as to be easily lifted. The large canter cover is simply a eever ; 



WZ$ MAGIC AND CONJURING. 

but the two side ones, which are to cover the pint bottles, must be 
made with metal cavities large enough to hold, one a pint of port, 
the other a pint of sherry, at top, with a descending pipe to fall 
into the mouths of the pint bottles. 

There must be a small hole at top of each of the small covers, 
at B and 0, which hole, being covered with tinfoil, will, as long as 
it is closed, prevent the wine from running out at D. But when 
the tinfoil is scraped off, and the hole admits the air, the wine will 
then be able to run into the pint bottles. 

The above apparatus being all ready, commence by saying : " I 
will now pour this pint of port and this pint of sherry into the 
large bottle, mixing them inseparably together." Having done so, 
remove the stopper at the bottom of the large bottle as you place 
it on its stand, and immediately place the large cover over it. 
The mixed liquor will gradually run out into the concealed cavity 
in the stand. 

You must now talk a little magic nonsense, to draw off the 
attention, while you place the special covers over each of the 
small bottles, so that the descending pipes in the covers fit in the 
necks of the bottles. Eemove the tinfoil with which you had cov- 
ered the holes at A and B. 

With a few magic waves of your wand, and words of art, say : 
"I shall now cause the mixed liquids in the center bottle to ap- 
pear severally in their own original bottles." Let the covers 
remain a few seconds. Clap your hands, saying: "Change, be- 
gone !" Lift the center cover ; the large bottle will be seen to be 
empty. Lift successively the covers from the small bottles ; they 
will be seen to have each their proper wine — one port, the other 
sherry. 

Trick 29.— To furnish a treat to 'he gentlemen. 

For this the magic bottle must be procured. One with three or 
four compartments is amply sufficient. In these place gin, sherry, 
and port wine, respectively. The bottle will have three or four 
holes, on which you place your fingers as if stopping the holes of a 
flute. You may have a bucket of water and a common bottle, 
resembling the magic one in size and appearance, near your table. 
Have ready also a tray of wine-glasses of thick glass, and holding 
only a very small quantity. 

Exhibit the common bottle to the audience, and then place it on 
your table, and direct attention to some of the other articles on 
your table. "Now I must begin my experiment. I will wash and 
drain my bottle, that you may see the expeiiment from the begin- 
ning to the end." Place it in the bucket, and while shaking it 
about, and letting the water run out, exchange it for the magic 
bottle lying by the bucket. Wipe that carefully with a napkin, as 



MAGIO AND CONJT7KITTG. 229 

if drying it, and calling two or three of the audience forward at a 
time, inquire which they prefer. Have the stops according to 
alphabetical order to prevent your mistaking — gin, port, sherry. 
Continue supplying the small glasses as called for, till your bottle 
gets nearly empty, and then pour them out indiscriminately. 
There will have been sufficient to satisfy the most eager. 

But if you wish to continue the trick, you may have a second 
mau-ic bottle prepared in the same way, and you will easily, while 
propounding sonic magic charm and gesticulating, make some 
pretense that will enable you to exchange the empty for the sec- 
ond bottle, and so proceed. 



EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC. 231 



EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC, 



The Magic Knife. 

This trick, which is at once simple and clever, has not 
before been published. Ask one of your audience for a 
pocket-knife, and stick two small, square pieces of white 
paper on each side. Give the knife to 3'our audience to be 
examined, and then take it in tlie left hand, palm upwards. 
Let the handle of the knife be clasped between the thumb 
and forefinger, and the blade extended outwards from you : 
the handle will then lie on the palm of the hand towards 
you. With practice, you will be able, by a rapid turn of 
the wrist, to pass the knife from one side of ihe hand to the 
other, always keeping the same side of the blade upwards, 
while to your audience it will appear that you reverse it at 
every turn. Wipe the bits of paper off one side, turn the 
knife as directed, pass your fingers again across the blade, 
leading y >ur audience to believe that you have wiped them 
off the second side also. Both sides of the blade will now 
appear to be perfectly clean, but in fact you have only re- 
moved the two pieces off one side. By rapidly turning the 
knife, you may cause the bits of paper to appear and disap- 
pear at command. All that is required is a little dexterity 
in the turn' of the wrist which may be acquired by practice. 

A Cheap Way of being- Generous. 
You take a little common white or beeswax, and stick it 
on your thumb. Then, speaking to a bystander, you show 
him a dime, and tell him you will put the same inte his hand; 



232 EXPEKIMENTAL MAGIC. 

press it down on the palm of his hand with y ur waxed 
thumb, taking to him the while and looking him in the f.ice. 
Suddenly take away your thumb, and the coin will adhere 
to it ; then close his hand and he will be under the impres- 
sion that he holds the dime, as the sensation caused by the 
pressing still remains. You may tell him ho is at liberty to 
keep the dime ; but, on opening his hand to look at it, he 
will find, to his astonishment, that it is gone. 

To Bring 1 Colored Ribbons from Tour Mouth. 

Heap a quantity of finely carded wool upon a plate, which 
place before you. At the bottom of this lint and concealed 
from the company, you should have several narrow strips of 
colored ribbons, wound tightly into one roll, so as to occupy 
but little space. Now begin to appear to eat the lint, by 
putting a handful in your mouth. The first handlul can 
easily be removed and returned to the plate unobserv< d, 
while the second is being <: crammed in." In doing this, 
care should be taken not to use all the lint, but to leave 
sufficient to conceal the roll. At the last handful, take up 
the roll and push it into your mouth without any lint ; then 
appear to have had enough, and look in a very distressed 
state as if you were full to suffocation ; then put your hands 
up to your mouth, get hold of the end of the ribbon and draw, 
hand over hand, yards of ribbon, as if irom your stomach. 
The slower this is done, the better the effect. When one 
ribbon is off the roll, your tongue will ass'st you in pushing 
another end ready for the hand. You will find that you 
need not wet or damage the ribbons in the least. This is a 
trick which is performed by one of the cleverest conjurors 
of the day. 

To Catch. Money from the Air. 

The following trick, which tells wonderfully well when 
skillfully performed, is a great favorite with one of our best 
known conjurors. So far as we arc aware, it has not before 
been published. Have in readiness any number of silver 
coins — say, thirty-four — place all of them in the left hand, 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 233 

with the exception of four, which you must palm into the 
r ght hand. Then, obtaining a hat from the audience, you 
quietly put the left hand with the silver inside ; and whilst 
playfully asking if it is a new hat, or with some such re- 
murk, for the purpose of diverting attention, loose the sil- 
ver, and at the same time take hold of the brim with the 
left hand, and hold it still so as not to shake the silver. 
Now address the audience, and inform them that you are 
going to "catch money from the air." Ask some person to 
name any number of coins up to ten — say, ei^ht. In the same 
way, you go on asking various persons, and adding the num- 
bers aloud till the total number named is nearly thirty; then 
looking round as though some one had spoken another num- 
ber, and, knowing that you have only thirty-four coins, you 
must appear to have heard the number called, which, with 
what have already b en given, will make thirty-four — say, 
the last number you added made twenty-eight, then as 
though you had heard some one say six, and twenty-eight 
and six are thirty-four ; thank you, I think we have suffi- 
cient. Then, with the four coins palmed in your right hand, 
make a catch at the air, when they will chink. Look at 
them, and pretend to throw them into the hat, but instead 
of doing so, palm them agiin ; but in order to satisfy your 
audience that you really threw them into the hat, you must, 
when in the act of palming, lit the brim of the hat with the 
wrist, of the right hand, which will make the coins in the hat 
chink as if they had just fallen from the right hand. Hav- 
ing repeated this process several times, say: " I suppose 
we have sufficient," empty them out on a plate and let one 
of the audience count them. It will be lound that there are 
only thirty, but the number which you wee to each was 
thirty-four, you will therefore say: " Well, we are four sho: t; 
I must catch just lour — neither more nor less." Then, still 
having four coins palmed in your right hand, you catch 
again, arid open your hands, saying to the audience: " Here 
they are." 



234 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

How to Fire a Loaded Pistol at the Hand without Hurting 1 It. 

This extraordinary illusion is performed with real pow- 
der, real bullets, and a real pistol ; the instrument which 
effects the deception being the ramrod. This ramrod is 
made of polished iron, and on one end of it is very nicely 
fitted a tube, like a telescope tube. When the tube is off the 
rod, there will, of course, appear a little projection. The 
other end of the rod must be made to resemble this exactly. 
The ramrod, with the tube on, being- in your hand, you pass 
the pistol around to the audience to be examined and re- 
quest one of them to put in a little powder. Then take the 
pistol yourself, and put in a very small piece of wadding* 
and ram it down; and in doing so, you wdl leave the tube 
of the ramrod inside the barrel of the pistol. To allay any 
suspicion which might arise in the minds of your audience, 
you hand the ramr d to them for their inspection. The ram- 
rod being returned to you, you hand the pistol to some per- 
son 'n the audience, requesting him to insert a bullet, and to 
mark it in such a way that he would know it again. You 
then take the pistol back, and put in a little more wadding. 
In ramming it down, the rod slips into the tube, which now 
forms, as it were, an inner lining to the barrel, and into 
which the bullet has fallen; the tube fitting tight on to the 
rod is now withdrawn along with it from the pi-tol, and 
the bullet is easily got into the hand by pulling off the tube 
from the rod, while seeking a plate to " catch the bullets" ; 
and the marksman receiving order to fire, you let the bul- 
let fail Irom your closed hand into the plate just as the 
pistol goes off. 

Curious Watch Trick. To Tell at what Hour a Person will 
Rise in the Morning-. 

By means of this trick, if a person will tell you the hour 
at which he means to dine, you can tell him the hour at 
which he means to get up next morning. First, ask a per- 
son to think of the hour he intends rising on the following 
morning. When he has done so, bid him place his finger 
on the hour on the dial of your wach at which he intends 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 235 

dining. Then, having reque ted him to remember the hour 
wliicli he first thought, you mentally add twelve to the hour 
upon which he lias placed his finger, and request, him to re- 
trograde, counting the hour you mention, whatever lint 
may he, hut that he is to commence counting wi h t'ie hour 
he thought of* from the hour he points at. For example : 
suppose he thought of. rising at eight, and places his linger 
on twelve sis the hour at which he means to dine, you desire 
him to count backwards twenty -four hours; beginning at 
twelve, he counts eight, that being the hour at which he 
thought of rising, eleven he calls nine, ten he calls ten 
(mentally, but not aloud), and so on, until he has counted 
twenty-four, at which point he will stop, which will b" eight, 
and he will probably be surprised to find it is the hour at 
which he thought of rising. 

The Plying - Dime. 

This is a purely sleight-of-hand trick, but it does not re- 
quire much practice to bo able to do it well and cleverly. 
Take a dime between the forefinger and thumb of the right 
hand, then, by a rapid twist of the fingers, twirl the coin 
by the same motion that you would use to spin a teetotum. 
At the same time rapidly close your hand, and the coin will 
disappear up your coat-sleeve. You may now open your 
hand, and, much to the astonishment of your audience, the 
coin will not be there. This capital trick may be varied in 
a hundred ways. One plan is to take three coins, and con- 
cealing one in the palm of your left hand, place one of the 
others between the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, 
and the third between the thumb and forefinger of the left 
hand. Then give the coin in the right hand the twist already 
described, and closing boih hands quickly, it will disappear 
up your sleeve ; and the left hand, on being unclosed, will 
be found to contain two coins. Thus you will make the sur- 
prised spectators believe that you conjured the coin from 
your right hand to the left. 



^36 EXPEEIMENTAIi MAGIC. 

The Mysterious Bag that Swallows or Ejects any Number of 
Articles. 

M. Phillippe, when appearing before his wonder-struck 
audiences, used to excite the most profound amazement by 
means of a mysterious bag, from which he produced nearly 
every conceivable thing from a mouse-lrap to a four-post 
bedstead; and its capacity was so prodigious, that it swal- 
lowed even more tlian it produced. A similar, but less pre- 
tending, is the one which we give under the title of "The 
Mysterious Hag." Make two bags, each about a foot long 
and six inches wide, of some dark material, and sew them 
togciher at the edge, so that one may be inside the other. 
Next make a number of pockets, each with a cover to it, 
which may be fastened down with a button and loop. Place 
these about two inches apart, between the two bags, sew- 
ing one side of the pocket to one bag, and the other side to 
the other. Make slits through both bags about an inch long, 
just above the pockets, so that you can put your hand in 
the bag-;; and, by inserting your thumb and finger through 
these sslits you may obtain entrance to the pockets, and 
bring out ot them whatever they contain. It is, of course, 
necessary that a variety of articles should b • put in the pock- 
ets. Before commencing the trick, you may turn the bag 
inside out any number of times, so that your audience may 
conclude that it is quite emp^y You can then cause to 
appear or disappear any number of articles of a light nature, 
mucli to the amusem nt of your audience. 

To Produce a Cannon Ball from a Hat. 
This is a very old trek, though it still finds favor with 
most of the conjurers of the present day. You borrow a 
hat, and on taking it into your hands, you ask a number of 
questions about it, or say it would be a pity to spoil so nice 
a hat, or make some such remark. This, however, is on'y 
a ruse for the purpose of diverting attention. Then, passing 
round to the back of your table — (where, by the way, y u 
have arranged on pegs, a large wooden " cannon ball," or a 
cabbage, or a bundle of dolls, trinkets, etc., loosely tied to- 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 237 

petlier, so tli it they may bo eas'ly disengaged) — you wipe, 
in passing* one or other of these articles off the pegs — where 
they must be very slightly suspended — -into the hat so rap- 
idly ns not to he observed. Returning to the gentleman 
from whom you received the hat, yon say t > him: " You are 
aware, sir, that your hat was not cmply when you gave it 
to me," at the same time emptying' the contents in front of 
the audience. S pposing you have, in the first instance, 
introduced the dolls and trinkets, you may repeat the trick 
by wiping the " cannon-ball," or one of the other articles, 
into the hat, and again advancing toward the gentleman 
from whom you received it, say: " Here is your hat; ihank 
you, sir." Then, just as you are about to give it to him, 
say: " Bless me, what have we here ? " and turning the hat 
upside down, the large cannon-ball will I all out. 

Evanescent Money. 
" 'Tis here, and 'tis gone!" This simple but effective 
trick is done in the following manner: Sick a small piece 
of white wax on the nail of your middle linger; lay a dime 
on the palm of your hand, and state to the company that 
you will make it vanish at the word of command, at the 
same time observing that many perform the feat by letting 
the dime fall into their sleeve, but to convince them that 
you have not recourse to any such deception, turn up the 
cuffs of your sleeves. Then close your hand, and by bring- 
ing the waxed nail in contact with the dime, it will firmly 
adhere t > it. Then blow upon your hand, and cry: " Be- 
gone!" and suddenly opening it, and extending your palm, 
you show the coin has vanished. Care must Le taken to re- 
in »ve the wax from the dime before you restore it to the 
owner. 

T'.ie "Winged Coin. 

Take a coin with a hole in the edge, and attach it to a 
piece of white sowing si k at the end of Wiiich is a piece of 
el iS'ie c >rd ab >ut twelvo inch s in length. S -w the cord 
to she lining of your left-hand coat sleeve, but.be careful 
that the end of the cord to wkteh the coin. is attached should 



233 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 



not extend lower than within two inches of the end of the 
sleeve when tlie coat is on. Having done this, bring down 
the coin with ih rght hand, and place it between the *,huuib 
and the under finger of the left hand, and showing it to ihe 
company, tell them that you will give it to any one present 
wlio will not, let it slip away. You must then select one 
of your audience to whom you proffer the coin, and just as 
he is about to receive it, you must let it slip from between 
your fingei s, and the contraction of the elastic cord will draw 
the coin up your sleeve, and its su Iden disappearance will 
be likety to astonish the would-be rec ; pient. This feat can 
be vaiied by pretending to wrap the coin in a piece of paper 
or a handkerchief. Great care .should be taken not to let 
any part of the cord be seen, as that would be the means 
of discovering the triclc. 

The Aerial Coin. 
The following will furnish the key to many of the stock 
tricks of professional conjurers. Having turned up the cuffs 
ol your coat, begin by placing a cent on your elbow (your 
arm being bent by raising the hand towards the shoulder), 
and catching it in your hand — a feat of dexterity easily per- 
formed. Turn say th it you can catch even a smaller coin 
in a more difficult position. You must illustrate this by 
placing the coin half way between the elbow and the wrist, 
and by suddenly bringing the hand down, the coin wi.l fall 
securely into the cuff, unseen by any one, and it will seem 
to have disappeared altogether. Take a di inking glass or 
tumbler, and bidding the spectators to look upwards, in- 
form them that the last coin shall drop through the ceding. 
By placing the glass at the side of your arm and elevating 
the hand, the coin wi 1 fall from the cuff into the tumbler 

An Aviary in a Hat. 
Thh excellent but well-known trick requires the assist- 
anee of a confederate. A hat is borrowed from one of the 
audience, and turned round and round to show there is noth- 
ing in it. It is then laid on the operator's table, behind a 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 239 

vase or some other bulky article ; afVr wliic'i, as if a new 
idea bar} occurred to you, perf >rm some other trick, (luring 
which the confederate ivm <ves the borrowed hat, substitut- 
ing one previously prepared. This substituted hat is filled 
with smuill pigeons, placed in a bag with a whalebone or 
elastic mouth, which fits the inside of the hat. The bag 
containing the birds is covered with a piece of cloth, with 
a slit in the top. The operator taking up the hat, puts his 
hand through the slit, and takes out the birds one by one, 
till all are free. The hat is then placed on the table, for the 
ostensible purpose of cleaning it before handing it back, and 
the conl'e '-erate again changes the hats, having in the in- 
terim fitted the borrowed hat with a bag similar to the other 
and also filled with pigeons. This having been done, you 
call out to your confederate, and request him, so that all 
your audience may hear, to " Take the gentleman's hat away 
and cl an it." He takes it up, and peeps into it, saying: 
" You have not let all the birds away;" upon which, to the 
surprise and amusement of the spectators, you produce an- 
other lot of birds as before. In brushing the hat previous 
to rest iring it to the owner, the bag must be adroitly 
removed. 

A Dollar Bill Concealed In a Candle. 

Ask some one to lend you a dollar bill, and to notice the 
number, etc. You then walk up to the screen behind which 
your confederate is concealed, pass the bill to him an 1 take 
a wax or composite candle. Then, turning to the audience, 
you ask one ot them — a boy would be preferred — to step up 
on the platform. At y mr request, he must cut the candle 
into lour equal parts. You then take three of them, and 
say you wili perform the trick by means of them, passing 
the lourtli piece to the other eniof the table, where your 
confederate has already rolled up the note in a very small 
compass, and thrust it into a hollow bitol candle previously 
made ready, you take up this piece, and, concealing it in 
your hand, you walk up to the boy and appear accidentally 
to knock one of the bits of candle out of his hand, and while 



248 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

you are stooping to pick it up off the floor, you change it 
for the bit which contains the bill. You then place it on the 
table and say to tie audience: " Which piece shall I take 
■ — right or lefi ? " If they select the one which contains the 
nole, ask the boy to cut it carefully through the middle, 
and to mind that he does not cut the b 11. When he has 
made a slight incision, tell him to break it, when the note 
will be found in the middle. If the audienee select the piece 
which dues not contain the note, you throw it aside and say 
the note will be found in the remaining piece. When this 
is done with tact, the audience will naturally believe that 
they have really had the privilege of choosing. 

She Conjurer's Banquet. 

HE EATS A QUANTITY OP PAPER SHAVINGS ; AFTERWARDS DRAWS FROM 
HIS MOUTH A BARBER'S POLK, SIX FEET IN LENGTH ; THEN DRAWS 
OUT SEVERAL YARDS OF DIFFERENT COLORED RIBBONS ; THEN PUSHES 
OUT WITH HIS TONGUE AN OUNCE OF PINS ; AND, LASTLY, AFTER WELL 
SHREDDING THE PAPER SHAVINGS, TO SHOW THAT THERE IS NOTHING 
IN THEM, A FLIGHT OF BIRDS COME OUT FROM AMONG THEM, THEIR 

number ad libitum. 
This is i-eally a first rate experiment, and if got up care- 
fully, will excite much wonder. I shall commence by giv- 
ing instructions how to make the necessary properties, c<~m- 
moncing with the barber's pole. Gut some white pap r into 
lengths, three inches wide; p iste them together, making a 
long length of ten or twelve feet or more; paint 0113 side 
red, a strip about half an inch wide, ihe whole length of 
the paper, and at its edge; glue on a f one end of the paper 
a piece of round wood, wi'h a small knot on the end; then 
roll the paper up like a roll of ribbons. I will explain pres- 
ently what to do with it. The next is to prepare your pins 
and ribbons. In a piece of soft paper, in as small a com- 
pass as you can, roll up a number of pins, and upon this 
packet roll your ribbons of different colors, making alto- 
gether a round ball, which you can conveniently slip into 
your mouth ; then make a long paper bag similar to those 
of the confectioner; paint it in stripes, pink and wliitejinthia 



EXPERIMENTAL MABIG. 241 

place your birds — canaries, sparrows, or any small bi ds 
you can most conveniently procure. The process will not 
liurt them if yon make a lew pinholes in the bag to admit 
the air; you then procure some pink and white tissue pa^er, 
cut it into strips until you have a good heap, as many shred- 
ed out as would fill a small bread-basket, in whicli you place 
them; at the right hand, hid in the shavings, you have the 
barber's' pule, the ribbons and pins, and the bag containing 
the birds, and by your side a glass of water from which you 
pietend to drink occasionally. Thus prepared, you present 
yourself to the audience. Sip a little water, make two or 
three preliminary ahems, run your fingers through your hair, 
arrange your necktie, curl your moustache — if you have 
none, it will be the greater burlesque to pretend to curl it 
— and then, wtth mock dignity, address your audience : 
"Ladies and gentlemen, doubtless you have witnessed the 
performance of many conjurers, some of them clever; but 
of all the professors you ever saw, none of them ever- pos- 
sessed the extraordinary abilities as the illustrious individ- 
ual who now does you the honor of exerting himself for your 
amusement. My natural modesty and dffidence prevent 
my saying more. I shall at once commence my perform- 
ances by introducing the Conjurer's Banquet. I have some 
maccaronies (alluding to the paper shavings). Excuse the 
vulgarity, but I must refresh" (takes a quantity of shav- 
ings in each hand and commences munching them as a horse 
would eat hay, taking a little water occasionally, smacking 
his lips, and seeming to enjoy the feast very much). After 
having proceeded in this manner for a short time, take up 
among the shavings the barber's pole ; place it, shavings 
and all, against your mouth; take hold of the little knob at 
the end of the pole which is rolled up like a roll of ribbons, 
pull it gradually out, and it presents the appearance of a 
barber's pole several feet in length; put this carefully on 
•one side : commence feeding again upon your paper shav- 
ings in the same burlesque style, then take up your roll of 
ribbons and pins, and during the process of seeming to eat, 
you slip the roll of ribbons and pins into your mouth. You 



242 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

must chew the shavings y<>u place in Your mouth into a 
hard lump, and as y<.u supply one month ul from the heap 
you hold in your hand, push the hard limp of chewed shav- 
ings out of your mouth wiih your tongue. Well, you have 
the roll of ribbons in your mouth ; place your shavings 
again in the basket, put your finger and thumb in y. ur 
mouth, taking the end of the ribbon and pull it out of your 
mouth with both hands, one after the other; letting the rib- 
bon slip through your hands as you pull it out, it will ap- 
pear a larger quantity. After one length or color is pulled 
out of your mouth, sip a little water, smack your lips, and 
again secure the end of the ribbon, pulling it out in the 
game manner as the previous one ; continue this until you 
^iave pulled all the ribbon out of your mouth; you will now 
feel with your tongue the paper containing the pins ; take 
a little more water, saturate the paper, and the pins will 
remain in your mouih; these you push out with your tongue, 
keeping the lips almost closed; spit the pins out on a small 
tray, one that will sound when the pins fall on it; it is more 
effective. The trick is now finished, except the flight of 
birds. Your bag containing them is at your right hand ; 
you slip this in among the shavings, and commence shred- 
ding them, and during this process tear the bag open, and 
the birds, of course, escape. The paper being painted in 
pink and white stripes, can not be observed. 

How to Swallow a number of Needles and Yards of Thread. 

The trick is performed as follows : In the first place thread 
a dozen needh s, put them in as small a compass as possible, 
and place them between the gum and the upper lip ; you 
can speak without difficulty and without any effort they will 
remain there. Let the needles be short ones, and t ike the 
end of the thread a little distance from the needles, and 
deposit it between the gum and lips in such a position that 
you can always feel it and pull it out when required. Thus 
being prepared, of course unknown to your audience, you 
take your second dose of needles, placing them one by one 
on your tongue, seeming to swallow them, but depositing 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 243 

f,hem on the other side of your mouth, between your gums 
and lip, which will effectually conceal them, notwithstanding 
an examination of the mouth ; afterwards roll up between 
your fingers about a yard of thread ; place tin's in your 
mouth, and with your tongue conceal it between your gum 
and lip. Take a drink of water, make a few wry faces, then 
place your finger and thumb in your mouth, securing the end 
of the thread t^pon wich the needles are threaded, draw it 
out, and exhibit it, taking an early opp >rtunity of retiring 
to get rid of the needles concealed in your mouth. This is a 
most effective trick, and easily performed. Be careful not 
to swallow the needles. 

Magioal Appearance of a Globe of Water Full of Fish. 
Tusano was the first to introduce the globe full of water 
and gold fishes. He had a long gown and a large pocket in 
front, would squat down, not in a very elegant position, and 
produce from nothing, apparently, a globe brimful of water, 
and gold-fish swimming about. It would not suit most 
people to carry about a large dressing gown, or glass globe 
to carry the fish in, but you may perform the experiment 
without either. Purchase a few gaudily-colored fish at a toy- 
shop, such as you place in a glass of water, and they follow 
a magnet about. Then at an india-rubber shop procure a 
large india-rubber jar cover, such as they sell to cover pickle 
jars or other preserves. In any house you may procure a 
basin that will fit your cover, which will tightly stretch over 
it, and it may happen you can obtain a glass bowl. Place 
your artificial fish in the globe or basin, then fill it with, 
water and stretch on your india-rubber cover ; this will pre- 
vent the water from falling out, whatever position you place 
it in. Leave the room, or retire to a chair in the corner, 
upon which you have little preparations and arrangements, 
hang a cloth over the back of it, and let no person be allowed 
to go near or to examine it. Have your bowl all ready, and 
place it under your arm or inside your coat. Borrow a large 
handkerchief or lady's shawl, or provide yourself w.th a 
square of b'ack cloth ; hold it up to the audience in your 



244 EXPEMluENTAL MAGIC. 

two hands, showing both sides, then place one corner of the 
cloth in your mouth and your right hand underneath, with 
which you take the bowl from under your arm ; place it on 
the palm of your left hand, the handkerchief or cloth over it ; 
you must hold the cloth in your hand and in your mouth so 
as to conceal the doing's of the hand under the cioth. The 
bowl being now in the left hand and the cl »th over it, with 
the right hand remove the cloth from off the bowl, and in 
doing so also take off the india-rubber cover. This is very 
easily done, although it requires some strength to stretch 
it on in the first place. Exhibit your bowl of fish, make 
your bow, and proceed to the next experiment. 
The Fairy Canary Bird, Enchanted Egg*, and the Magic Sing 1 , 
"I wish," says the performer, " to borrow a lady's wedding- 
ring. There's a certain charm about the wedding-ring which 
none other possesses. Pray, some lady, lend me one. I 
always experienced a difficulty in borrowing so precious an 
article ; the married ladies are averse t > lend them, and the 
single ladies wish they had them to lend. Thank you, madam; 
now I shall perform a most wonderful experiment with this 
much-prized article. I require a little boy to assist me in 
this experiment. Now, sir, hold this ring edgeways between 
your teeth. That will do. I have here a pistol ; 'tis charged 
with powder- and ball. I am so accurate a marksman, that 
1 can lire at the ring and knock it down your throat. I have 
been exceedingly fortunate with this experiment ; have per- 
formed it during my professional care r at least a thousand 
times ; altogether, I have not killed more than ten boys, so 
you will agree with me I have been very lucky. Dear mo, 
you tremble ; and, I declare, you have spoilt the circular 
shape of the ring. Let me try if I can restore it to its orig- 
inal shape — (places the ring between h's teeth, bites it, 
and makes it worse) — Oh! dear me, this is a bad job! I 
have altogether spoilt the lady's ring. 'Ti.sof no use to any 
one now. Ah! here is a pistol. I will place the ring in the 
pistol, and fire it out of the window — (he does so.) — Dear 
me, what have I done ? I really scarcely knew what I w^s 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 245 

doing-. Ah! here is an egg. I will break it open — (he 
does so, and within the egg is a canary bird, the ring tied 
round its neck with a piece of ribbon. The conjurer expresses 
his satisfaction) — Dear me, I am so glad. There, madam, 
is your property uninjured — (gives the ring to the lady who 
owns it) — Thanks, my pretty bird — (addressing the canary) 
— for releasing me from this dilemma. Now, will you please 
exhibit some of your clever performances? — (the bird per- 
forms. How that is managed I will presently describe) — 
See, be lays ac if dead in my hand. Will you please to hold 
it, madam? — (gives it to a lady. Takes it from her) — Dear 
me, my poor pet is in reality dead. Poor little Dick! You 
must have pressed him too hard — lifts him by the leg and 
lets him fall on the table. Ah! poor little fellow, lie is dead. 
Never mind, I will throw him up and see if he can fly." He 
does so, and the bird flies away. 

As this is a very capital trick, I would advise the amateur 
to carefully study and practice it. 

EXPLANATION HOW TO PERFORM THE ABOVE. 

In the first place, provide yourself with a penny wedding- 
ring — this can easily be changed for the golden one you 
borrow of the lady. You place the bra«s ring on the table, 
and go behind a screen to fetch a pistol ; while there, you 
give (he real ring to a confederate. You return to the table 
immediately, and perform the business of putting the ring 
in your mouth, firing it out of pistol, etc., as explained above. 
Your confederate, during this time, is tying the ring with a 
piece of ribbon round the bird's neck, and thrusts the bird 
into an egg-shell. You go behind the screen for two eggs; 
you bring themforwaid to the table on a pla'e, and ask the 
buy who has been assisting you to choose one of them, He 
does so. In your left hand you have the egg with the bird 
in it. You take the egg the boy has chosen in your right 
hand, and seem to pass it into the left hand, retaining it in 
the right hand. 

You then produce the egg with the bird in it, holding it in 



246 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

such a position as to conceal the biro, and breaking the top 
of it, you quietly and gradually release the bird, and return 
the lady her ring ; you then proceed to make the bird per- 
form, as before explained. Beneath the bott >m of your 
vest, you have a stuffed bird — 'tis an easy matter to 
change one for the other. You may deposit the living bird 
under your vest without d iug it the slightest injury, and 
the instructions above given, I hope, will satisfactorily ex- 
plan how to perform the experiment. To make the bird 
perform is as follows : Before you commence showing your 
bird, he should be perfectly tame. 1 have found that gold- 
finches are the most tractable. The b st manner to tame 
y ur bird is to leave the cage door open, of course cosing 
the windows and doors. He will gradually become familiar, 
will leave his wiry prison, and share your meals, with you, 
fight for his perch on the side of your sugar basin, and some- 
times sit on the edge of your cup or saucer and help himself 
to ils contents ; all this, in course ot time, he will do of his 
own accord ; but, until he becomes perfectly familiar, do not 
interfere with him. It is an easy matter to train him in his 
performance. When you handle him, do so gently and with- 
out ruffling his feathers. With a very litile practice lie will 
remain in whatever position you place him in, whether on 
his back, sitting in a chair, or standing on his head. He 
will, also, if you strike a string or stick against his claws, 
naturally clutch at it. You may swing him backwards and 
forwards as a rope dancer, or turn him round while he clings 
to the stick in imitation of a fowl roasting. All inquisitive 
and impertinent cats, during tuition, must be excluded. 
After the bird's performance, proceed with your trick. 

A Very Extraordinary Experiment in Natural Magic. 

HOW TO MAKE AN EGG, APPARENTLY OP ITSELF, LEAVE THE CENTRE OF 
THE ROOM AND TRAVERSE TO A SAUCER OF WATER PLACED IN THE 
CORNER. 

This is not adapted for public exhibition, as the process 
is tedious, but it is no less wonderful. Blow the yolk out 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 247 

of an egg, and insert a leech within the shell, securing 1 the 
end by sticking- on a piece of tissue p iper, place the egg 
and leech in ihe center of the mom, and the saucer in the 
other. In the course of time — it may be hours — the natural 
instinct of the leech leads it to the water, and by its efforts 
causes the egg to move to the edge of the saucer contain- 
ing the water. 

To Bat Cotton Wool and Blow Tire and Sparks Ont of Your Mouth. 

Obtain some cotton wool, such as the jewelers use to pack 
their jewelry ; get a piece of old linen and bum it, damping 
it out wlten it is burnt bl.ick and reduced to tinder. If you 
don't understand, ask your grandparents how they used to 
make tinder to obtain a light previous to the invention of 
luciler matches. Put a light to tlie tinder ; it will not flame, 
but smoulder, and fold it lightly in a piece of the wool just 
as large as you can conceal in the palm of our hand, com- 
mencing eating just in the same manner as in the Barber's 
Pole Trick with the shavings. When you have satisfied 
your -elf, and while feeding yourself with the wool, slip in 
the sma I piece of wool containing the lighted tinder ; blow, 
and -smoke and sparks wid issue from your mouih, to the 
astonishment of the lookers <>n. A very good system to prac- 
tice many of these tricks, is to stand before a looking-glass. 

Ins antaneous Growth of Flowers. 
In the first pi ice, manufacture a fane. fill tree of flowers. 
If you cannot" do this yourself, some ot the poor people who 
Fitwk piper flowers will make one for you. It must be tall 
and nor, bulk\ — <ay 15 or 18 inches high — and at its base 
not more than 4 inches in diameter. This must be fastened 
to a round piece of wood, similar to the bottom of a bill -file, 
but much lighter ; make a paper cone to fit this neatly, but 
not to crush the flowers ; it must have no top to it, and the 
tree of flowers must have *.t small piece of wire sticking up 
at- the top, so that the tree, cone, and altogether, can be 
easily lifted by the small piece of wire — therefore its con- 
struction must be very light. 



Z&S EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

After the above is prepared, make another cone or cover 
in the shape of a cone. This second cover must neatly and 
exactly fit over the firs one. s> lhat both may be lifted to- 
g-ether. Having these t. gs arranged, place your cover 
containing the flowers on the floor behind your table, the 
tible-c:ot!i so arranged that it cannot be seen. You take 
your second cover from the floor, saying, " Here is an article 
in the shape of a cone, it is quile simple in its construction, 
made of slight cardboard. There is no mechanical contri- 
vance to assist the experiment. Observe, you can see 
through it." Here hold it so that the audience can see 
through it. You then place it on the ground, taking care 
in placing it down to cover the cone which conceals the 
flowers. Take a small tray, place it on the table, remarking, 
" I do this, ladies and gentlemen, to remove from your minds 
my having a t,ay on the table." At the same instant you 
lift your covers and flowers altogether by the piece of wire 
affixed on the top of the tree and place it on the tray. You 
then produce your magic stick, and pronounce, "Flora, the 
Goddess of Flowers, there are ladies here nearly as beautiful 
as yourself, who love the productions of nature, and nothing 
more so than beautiful flowers. Will vou kindly assist me 
in producing a magical bouquet, which they will ; dmire and 
thank you for?" The Goddess assents. Behold an instanta- 
neous growth of beautiful flowers ! Lift the two covers off 
at once, leaving the tree on the table. 

How to Let Twenty Gentlemen Draw Twenty Cards, and to Make 
One Card Every Man's Card. 

Take a pack of cards ; let any gentleman draw a card 
and put it in the pack again, but be sure you know where 
to find it again ; then shuffle the cards, and let another 
gentleman draw a card, but be sure you let him draw the 
same card as t;.e other gentleman drew, and continue till 
ten or twelve, or as many as you think fit, have drawn ; 
then let another gentleman draw another card, and put 
them into the p ick and shuffle them till you have brought 
the cards together ; then showing the last card to the com- 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 249 

pnny, the other will show the trick ; by this means many 
other feats may be done. 

How to Allow Six Persons to Draw pud Each, Shtifile Them and 
Immediately After the Perform^ at Once Produces Them, Puil- 
iag - Them Kapidly Out of the Pack One After the Other. 

Six persons draw cards ; but always have the first card 
drawn returned to the pack before you allow a second to 
bo drawn. Reverse the cards as each is returned to the 
pack ; after they are all placed in, and the cards shuffled, 
then pull them out rapidly, one afrer the oilier, throwing 
them on the table, face uppermost, previously requesting 
the drawers to acknowledge their cards as they are thrown 
upon the table. 

The Performer Leaves the Koom ; While He is Absent a Person 
Draws a Card ; When the Conjurer Returns, He Takes the Pack 
in His Hand, and Immediately Pulls the Card from the Pack 
Drawn in His Absence. 

To effect this experiment, the performer must have a con- 
federate who is acquainted with the secret of the cut cards. 
Of course, it will be understood that when the mag-ician 
enters the room, he knows how to find the cards by the 
u^ual means of feeling the broad end projecting over the 
narrow ones. 

How to Tell a Person Any Card He Thinks Of, and to convey it 

Into a 2Tut. 

Take a nut, in which burn a hole with a hot bodkin, and 
with a needle break and extract the kernel. Write the name 
of a card on a piece of thin paper, and roll it up hard, and 
put it in the nut ; st >p the hole with wax, which rub over 
with a little dust, that the puncture may not be perceived, 
then let some one draw a ca.d ; you must take care it be 
that which is written on the paper ; desire him to break the 
nut, in which he will find the name of the card he has drawn. 

To Make a Sard Jump Out of the Pack and Bun on the Table. 
Take a pack of cards, and let any one draw any card they 



250 EXPEKIMENTAIi MAGIC 

please ; put it into the pack, so that you may know where 
to find it at pleasure. Put a small piece of wax under your 
thumb-nail, to which fasten a hair, ami the other end of the 
hair to the card ; spread the cards open on the table, and 
desire the one chosen to jump out, which you may readily 
cause to do by means of the hair. 

To Make Liquid Steel. 

Heat a piece of steel hi the fire to redness ; take it, with 
one hand, out with a pair of pincers ; then with the other 
hand, present a piece of stick sulphur to the steel ; as soon 
as they touch, you will perceive the steel flow like a liquid. 

The Landlady and Her Guests. 
Secretly place one of four Jacks at the bottom of a pack 
of cards ; take three others, with a Queen, and place them 
on a table. Showing the three Jacks, say something' like 
the following: "Here are three rascals who have been 
indulging hi good cheer at a public house, and have no 
money to foot the bill. These fellows are plotting how to 
vamose the ranche without settling with the landlady" 
— here show the Queen — "and with this aim they persuade 
her to go info the cellar, while each customer tikes flight 
in different directions." Then place one of the Jacks at the 
bo: torn of the pack, another at the top, and a third in the 
middle, so that when the landlady returns nOne of her 
patrons are to be seen. " But," you continue, '' let's put 
the g> od lady at the bottom of the heap, and see whether 
she cannot catch up with the so >undr< Is" Turn the Queen 
face down on the table, and place the pack on her ; now 
ask any one of the campany to cut the cards, and you will 
find tie landlady in company with the fugitive Knaves. 

To Change the Color of a Bird or Plower. 

To accomplish this metamorphosis, it is necessary to have 

earthen vases which have little edges, or rims, near their 

mouths, and should be of a size sufficiently large to hold 

suspended the bird or flower which you intend placing in 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 251 

them. You should likewise be provided wiih stoppers of 
cork, of a diameter equal to that of their mouths. To make 
an experiment upon some bird, it is necessary to commence 
by making a hole in the stopper sufficiently large to contain 
t!ie neck of the bird without strangling it. This done, you 
divide the d a:neter of the stopper into two equal parts, so 
as to facilitate the placing of it around the neck without 
doing injury to the bird. The two parts being brought to- 
gether, j'ou place at the bottom of the vase an ounce of 
quicklime, and beneath that a quarter of an ounce of sal 
ammoniac. When you perceive the effervescence commence 
to take plac^, you promptly insert the stopper, to which the 
bird is attached, leaving the neck outside. The plumage of 
the body, exposed to this effervescent vapor, will become im- 
pregnated with the various colors produced by this chemi- 
cal combination. Remove the stopper and the bird, and 
you will perceive its feathers charged with divers shades. 
Two or three minutes serve to produce this effect, for you 
run the risk of stifling the bird, if exposed for any length of 
time to this vapor. In experimenting upon a flower, the 
hole in the stopper need only be large enough to hold the 
stem, which serves to suspen I it in the air during the opera- 
tion, which will be completed in one or two minutes. 

JVXaglc Pictures Alternately Representing 1 Summer and Winter. 

Paint a landscape upon drawing-paper, coloring the earth, 
trunks of trees, limbs, etc., with their appropriate hues. But 
brush over the foliage, leaves, grass, etc., with the liquid 
hereafter described, and you will have a pic ure, at an or- 
dinary temperature, utteriy devoid of anything green. Heat 
it sufficiently, but not too much, and you will perceive the 
trees, leaves, and other foliage, assume a summer green, or 
rather th it of early spring. 

The liquid used is a dissolution in aqua regia of zaffer — 
which can be had at any druggist's — that is to say, the 
metallic earth of cobalt, which odors the zaffer blue. You 
temper this dissolution, which is very caustic, with common 



252 EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC. 

water, and with it you color the foliage of the landscape. 
The design, when cold, is invisible ; but exposed to heat, 
wherever it has been touched by this liquid it becomes green. 

To Split a Piece from OiT a Coin. 
Insert into a table three pin>, upon which place a piece 
of money. Upon this place a heap of flour of sulphur, and 
set it on fire. When the fire burns out, you will find a film 
of metal detached from the coin. 

The Magic Flask. 
Take a glass bottle ; put in it some volatile alkaH, in 
which has been dissolved copper filings, which will produce 
a blue color. Give this fla*k to some one to cork up, while 
indulging in some pleasantry, and then c ill the attention 
of the company to the liquid, when, to their astonishment, 
they find the color has disappeared as soon as it was corked. 
You can cause it to reappear by simply taking out the 
stopper, and this change will appear equally astonishing. 

Scrap or Blowing* Book. 

Take a. book seven inches long, and about five inches 
broad, and let there be forty-nine leaves, that is seven times 
seven contained therein, so as you may cut upon the edges 
of each leaf six notches, each notch in depth of a quart r 
of an inch, with a gouge made for that purpose, and let 
them be one inch d. stunt; paint every thirteenth or four- 
teenth page, which is the end of every sixth leaf and be- 
ginning of every seventh, with like colors or pictures ; cut 
off with a pair of scissors every notch of the first leaf, leav- 
ing one inch of paper, whicli will remain half a quarter of 
an inch above that leaf; leave anuther like inch in the second 
part of the second leaf, clipping away an inch of paper in 
the highest place above it, and all notches below the same, 
and orderly to the third and fourth, and so there shall rest 
upon ea.di leaf only one nick of paper above tho rest, one 
high uncut, an inch of paper must answer to the first directly, 
so as when you have Gut the first seven leaves in such a 



JEZPEKIMENTAL MAGIC. 253 

manner as described, you are to begin the self same order 
at the eighth leaf, descending* in the same manner to the cur- 
ting other seven leaves to twenty-one, until you have passed 
through every leaf all the thickness of your book. 

To Keep a Stone in Perpetual Motion. 
Put very small filings of iron into aquafortis, and h j t them 
remain there until the water takes otf the iron requisite, 
which it will do in seven or eight hours. Then take the 
water and put it into a phial an inch wide, with a large 
mouth, and put in a stone of lapis calaminaris, and stop it 
up close ; the stone wdl then keep in perpetual motion. 

How to Cut a Man's Head Off, and Put it in a Flatter a Yard From 
His Body. 

This is a curious performance, if it be handled by a skillful 
hand. To show this feat of execution, you must cause a 
board, a cloth, and a platter to be* purposely made, and in 
each of them to be made holes fit for a person's neck ; the 
board must be made of two planks, the longer and broader 
the better ; there must be left within half a yard of the end 
of each plank half a hole, so as both planks being thrust 
together, there may remain two holes, like holes in a pair 
of stocks ; there must be made likewise a hole in the cloth; 
a platter also must be set directly over or upon one of them, 
having a hole in the middle thereof, of the like quantity, 
and also a piece cut off the same, as big as his neck, through 
which his head may be conveyed into the middle of the 
platter, and then sitting or kueeling under the board, let 
the head only remain upon the board, in the frame. Then, 
to make the sight more striking, put a little brimstone into 
a chafing dish of coals, setting it before the head of the boy, 
who must gasp two or three times, so as the smoke may 
enter his nostrils and mouth, which is not unwholesome, 
and the head presently will appear stark dead, if the boy 
act his countenance accordingly, ami if a little blood be 
sprinkled on his face the sight will ba stranger. This is 



254 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

commonly practiced with a boy instructed for that purpose, 
who being familiar and conversant wiih company, may be 
known as well by his face as by his apparel. In the other 
end of the table, where the like hole is made, another boy 
of the bigness of the known boy must be placed, having 1 on 
his usual apparel ; he must lean or lie upon the board, and 
must put his head under it through the side hole, so as the 
body shall seem to lie on the end of the board, and his head 
lie in a platter on the other end. There are other things 
which might be performed in this action, the more to aston- 
ish the beholders, which, because they require long descrip- 
tions, are here omitted ; as to put about his neck a little 
doi?gh kneaded with bullock's blood, which, being cold, will 
appear like dead nVsh, and being pricked with a sharp, 
round, hallow quill, will bleed and seem very strange ; and 
m my rules are 10 be observed herein as to leave the table- 
cloth so long and so wide as it may almost reach the ground. 

Ice Made in a Bed Hot Vessel. 

Take a platinum cup and heat it red hot ; in it pour a 
small quantity of water, then take the same quantity of sul- 
phuric acid; a sudden evaporation will ensue; then invert 
the cup and a small mass of ice will drop out. The prin- 
ciple is this : Sulphuric acid has the property of boiling 
water when it is at a temperature below the freezing point, 
and when poured in a heated vessel, the suddenness of the 
evaporation occasions a degree of cold sufficient to freeze 
water. 

Liquid carbonic acid takes a high position for its freezing 
qualities. In drawing this curious liquid from its powerful 
reservoirs, it evaporates so rapidly as to freeze, and it is then 
a light, porous mass 1 ke snow If a small qnantity of this 
is drenched wi'h ether, the degree of cold produced is even 
more intolerable to the touch than boiling water. A drop 
or two of this mixture produces blister, just as if the skin 
had been burned. It will freeze mercury iu five to ten 
minutes. 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 255 

Magical Colors. 

Put half atablespoonful of syrup of violets and three table- 
spoonfuls of water into a glass, stir them well together with 
a stick, and put half the mixture into another glass. If you 
add a few drops of acid of vitriol into one of the glasses, 
and stir it, it will be changed into a crimson. Put a few 
drops of fixed alkali dissolved into another g'ass, and when 
you stir it, it will change to grc en. If you drop slowly into 
the green liquor from the side of the glass a lew drops of 
acid of vitriol, you will perceive crimson at the bottom, pur- 
ple in ihe middle, and green at the top ; and by adding a 
little fixing alkali dissolved to the other glass, the same 
colors will appear in d fferent order. 

Freezing with. Liquid. 

Ether poured upon a glass tube, in a thin stream, will 
evaporate and cool it to such a degree that water contained 
in it may be frozen. 

The Self-Balanced Pail. 

You lay a stick across the ta'de, letting one-third of it 
project over ihe edge and you undertake to hang a pail of 
water on it, without either fastening the stick on the table 
or letting the pail rest on any support ; and this feat the 
laws of gravitation wi 1 enable you literally to accomplish. 

You take a pail of water, and hang it by the handle upon 
the projecting end of the stick, in such a manner that the 
handle may rest on it in an inclined position, with the 
middle of the pail within the edge of the table. That it may 
be fixed in thys situation, place another stick with one of 
its ends r 'sting against the side at the bottom of the pail, 
and its other end against the first stick, whei-e there should 
be a notch to retain it. By these means, the pail will re- 
main fixed in that situation, without being able to incline 
to either side, nor can the stick slide along the table, or 
move along its edge, without raising the centre of gravity 
of the pail and the water it contains. 



25G- EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC 

Bestruction of Two Fluid Bodies, and the Formation of One N«w 
Solid in Their Stead. 

Into a tumbler put about an ounce of the solution of car- 
bonate of potash— .( recollect that the solution must be sat- 
urated) — and pour upon it half an ounce of sulphuric acid; 
a violent com:i.oti'>n takes place, and the produce is a solid 
salt. This experiment is the more striking, as both sub- 
stances were in a fluid state. The salt formed will be found 
to have neither the sourness of the acid, nor the causticity, 
of the potash. The new body, or salt, is called sulphate of 
potash. 

The Two Invisible Substances. 

Take a feather and dip it in muriatic acid, and rub it on 
the inside; of a glass tumbler; then take another feather 
dippe I in liquid ammonia, and rub it on the inside of another 
tumbler; each of the glasses will have a very pungent smell, 
but upon ho'ding the one over the other for a few seconds, 
dense l'umes will arise which have no smell ; or by merely 
letting i hem stand near each other, dense fumes will form 
between them. This experiment also shows that two invis- 
ible substances produce one that is visible. The visible 
substance formed is sal-ammoniac. 

The Egyptian Fluids. 

TO MIX WINE AND WATER TOGETHER, AND THEN SEPARATE THEM BY 

MEANS OF A RED AND WHITE TAPE. 

To perform this trick, you must have three covers (tin) 
made of an obeliatic form, terminating at about, one inch 
and a half on top; upon the top of two of these covers is 
soldered a piece of thick brass, copper or lead — say, about 
a quarter of an inch in thickness; in the centre make a hole 
about the same in diameter; about two inches from the top 
and on the irfside will be a partition or floor, through the 
centre of which make a small hole (this partition must be 
water tight ) . Previous to performing the trick, till the two 
covers (the tops of them), one with water, the other wine; 
then cork them well, which excludes the air, consequently 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 257 

keeps the liquid from coming- out at Ihe small hole made in 
the cenire of the partition; then take two sound tumblers, 
and put about as much water in one as there is water in one 
of the covers place the cover over that— the tumbler that 
has the water; then put about the same quantity of wine 
in the other tumbler as there is in the other cover, and place 
that cover over it ; now have a tumbler with a liole through 
the centre of the bottom (made with a drill) ; have this hole 
closed with a long peg from the under side; then, through 
your trick table have a small augur-hole made to admit the 
peg; this tumbhr must also be covered with a similar cover 
iu external appearance; you then take the covers ( ff the 
tumblers containing water and wine, and in the presence of 
the audience, mix the two liquids: then pour both into the 
tumbler that has the hole in the bottom; place the tumblers 
back and cover ih< m over; now lift the tumbler up contain- 
ing the mixture that the audience may see it (keeping your 
hand in front of the peg); place it back with peg through 
the hole; cover it over; then take a red and white tape 
string that h is previously been fastened to a small stick, 
'and place it in the top of the cover that is over the false 
tumbler ; then take the end of the red tape, which has a 
small wire to it, and after removing the cork from the cover 
over the wine, drop the end of the wire into the hole; the 
air is then let into the wine, which lets it run down into the 
tumblers underneath; do likewise with the while tape; then 
reach your hand under the table and draw the peg out of 
the tumbler, and let the mixture run down into a tumbler 
or cup secreted there for that purpose; now remove the 
covers, and show the audience that the tumbler you poured 
the mixture into is empty, and the one you poured it out of 
contains it again, which will great'y astonish them. 
To Illuminate the Surface of the viTater. 
Wet a piece of fine loaf sugar with pho aphorized ether, 
and throw it into a basin of water; the surface of tho water 
will became luminous in the dark, and, by gently blowing 
upon it, phosphorescent undulations will be formed, which 



258 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

illuminate the air above the fluid to a considerable distance. 
In winter the water must be rendered blood-warm. If the 
pliosphorized ether be appled to the hand, or other warm 
objects (which may be dune with safety), it renders them 
luminous in the dark. 

The Well of Pire. 
Add gradually one ounce, by measure, of sulphuric acid 
to five or s : x ounces of water, in an earthenware basin; and 
add to it, also gradually, about three-quarters of an ounce 
of granulated zinc. A rapid production of hydrogen gas 
will instantly take place. Then add, from time to time, a 
few pieces of phosphorous of the size of a pea. A multitude 
of gas bubbles will be produced, which will fire on the sur- 
face of the effervescing liquid; the whole surface of the 
liquid will become luminous, and fire-balls, with jets of fire, 
will dart from the bottom, through the fluid, with great 
rapidity and a hissing noise. 

To Produce Pire toy the mixture of Two Cold Liquids. 

Take half a pound of pure, dry nitre in powder; put it into 
a le'ort that is quite dry; add an equal quantity of highly 
rcctifhd o.l of vitriol, and distilling the mixture in a mod- 
erate sand heat, it will produce a 1 quor like a yellowish 
fume ; this, when caught in a dry receiver, is Glauber's 
spirits of nitre ; probably ihe preparation, under that name, 
may be obtained at the chemist's, which will, of course, 
save much time anil trouble. 

You thea put a drachm of distilled oil of cloves, turpen- 
tine, or caraways, in a glass vessel ; and if you add an 
equal quantity, or rather more, of the above spirit, though 
both are in themselves perfectly cold, yet, on mixing them 
together, a great flame will arise and destroy them both, 
leaving only a little resinous matter at the bottom. 

The Exploding- Butotole. 
If yon take up a small quantity of melted glass, with a 
tube — the bowl of a common tobacco pipe will do — and let 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 259 

a drop fall into a vessel of water, it will chill and condense 
with a fine spiral tail, which being broken, 1 lie whole sub- 
stance w II burst with a loud explosion, without injury 
either to the party that holds it, or him that breaks it; but 
if the thick end be struck, even with a hammer, it will not 
break. 

To Give a Person a Supernatural Appearance. 

Put one part of phosphorous into s'x of olive oil, and di- 
gest them in a sand heat; rub this on the face — taking care 
to shut the eyes — and the appearance in the dark will be 
supernaturally frightful — all the parts which have been 
rubbed appearing to be covered by a luminous lambent 
flame of a bluish eontour, whilst the eyes and mouth appear 
like black spots. No danger whatever a'.ti'nds this 
experiment. 

The Magic Picture. 

Take two level pieces of glass — plate glass is the best — 
about three inches long and four wide, exactly of the same 
size; lay one on the other, and leave a space between them 
by pasting a piece of card, or two or three small pieces of 
thick paper, it each corner. 

Join these glasses together at the edges by a composition 
of lime slacked by exposure to the air, and white of an e«-g. 
Cover all the edges of these glasses with parchment or blad- 
der, except at one end, which is to be left open to admit the 
following composition: 

Dissolve by a slow fire six ounces of hog's lard, with half 
an ounce of white wax, to which you may add half an ounce 
of clear linseed oil. 

This must be poured, in its liquid state and before a fire, 
between the glasses by the space left in the sides, and which 
you are then to close up. Wipe the glass s clean and hold 
them before the fire, to see that the composition will not 
run at any part. 

Then fasten with gum a picture or print painted on very 



260 EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC. 

thin paper, with its face to one of the glasses, and, if you 
like, yon may fix the whole in a frame. 

While the mixture between the glasses is cold, the pic- 
ture will be quite concealed, but become transparent when 
held to the fire; and, as the composition cools, it will grad- 
ually disappear. 

Beautiful Phenomena. 

Dip a long slip of wood in melted sulphur, so that one- 
half, upwards, may be covered; light it, and whilst burn- 
ing with a weak, bluish flame, introduce it into a Bar of nit- 
rous oxide gas; the flame will be instantly exti 
Withdraw the match, inflame it again, and let it! 
two or three seconds until the flame be vivid, then! 
it once more. Instead of extinction, the flame will^ 
kept up with great splendor ; it will. be. of a deli( 
color. 

Artificial Lightning. 

Provide a tin lube that is larger at one end than 
the other, and in which there are several holes; (ill this tube 
with powdered resin, and when it is shook over the'flame 
of a torch, the reflection will produce the exact appearance 
of lightning. 

To Split a Piece of Money into Two Parts. 

Fix three pins in the table, and lay the piece of money 
np<n them; then place a heap of the fl >ur of sulphur below 
the piece of money and another above it, and set fire to 
them. When the flame is extinct, you will find on the upper 
part of the piece a thin plate of metal, which has been de- 
tached from it. 

Artificial Thunder. 

Mix two drachms of the filings of iron with one ounce of 
concentrated spirit of vitriol, in a strong bottle that holds 
about a quarter of a pint; stop it close, and in a few mo- 
mints shake the bottle; th< n, taking out the cork, put a 
lighted candle near its mouth, which should be a little in- 
clined, and you will soon observe an inflammation arise 
from the bottle, attended with a loud explosion. 




• EXPERIMENTAL MAGfC. ' 2(51 

To guard against the danger of the boitlo bursting, the 
best way would be to bury it in the ground, and apply the 
light to the mouth by means of a taper fastened to the end 
of a long stick. 

The Tumbling Egg. 

Fill a quill with quicksdvcr; seal it at both ends wi h 
goo 1, hard wax ; then have an e<xg boiled ; take a small 
piec c off the small end, and thrust in the quid with the 
quicksilver; lay it on the ground, and it will not cease 
tumbling about as long as any heat remains in it. Or, if 
you put quicksilver into a small bladder, and blow it up, 
then warm the bladder, it will skip about so long as heat 
remains in it. 

Money Augmented by an Optical Delusion. 

Tn a large drinking-glass of a conic d shape — small at the 
bottom and wide at the top — put a dime and lot the glass 
be half full of water; then place a plate on the top of it and 
turn it quickly over, that the water mav not escape. You 
will see <>n the plate a piece of coin the size of a silver quar- 
ter and a li t tie higher up another the size of a dime. 

It will add to the amusement this experiment affords, by 
giving the glass to one of the company (but who, of course, 
has not witnessed your operations), and desiring him to 
throw away the water, but save the pieces; he will not be 
a little surprised to find only one. 
To Set a combustible Body on Fire by the contact of Water. 

Fill a saucer with water and let fall into it a piece of 
potassium the size of a peppercorn, which is about two 
grains. The potassium will instantly burst into flame, 
with a slight explosion, and burn vividly on the surface of 
the w.iter, darting at the same time from one side of the ves- 
sel to tlie other, with great violence in the form of a bc.iu- 
tiful red-hot fire ball. 

To Construct the Camera 'Obscura. 

Make a circu'ar hule in the shutter of a window, f om 
whence there is a prospect of some distance ; in this hole 



aba EXPEntMENTAL MAGIC 

place a magnifying glas>, cither d >uble or single, whose 
focus is at the distance of five or six fe t; no light must 
enter the room but throng i this glass. At a distance from 
it, equal 10 its focus, place a very white pasteboard — What 
is called a Bristol board, if you can procure one large 
enough, will answer extremely well. This board must be 
two feet ami a half long, and eighteen or twenty inches 
high, with a black border round it ; bend the length of it 
inward to the form of part of a circle, whose diameter is 
equal to double the focal distance of the glass. Fix it on 
a frame of the same figure, and put it on a movable loot, 
that it ma}' be easily placed at that distance from the glass 
where the objects appear to the greatest perfection. When 
it is thus placed, all the objects in front of the window wdl 
be painted on the paper in an inverted position, with the 
greatest regularity and the most natural colors. If you 
place a swing lo dung-glass outside the window, by turn* 
ing it more or less, you will have on the paper all the objects 
on each side the window. 

If, instead of placing the looking-glass outside the win- 
dow, you place it in the room above the hole (which must 
then be made near the top of the shutter) you may have the 
representation on a paper placed horizontally on a table, 
and draw at your leisure all the objects reflected. 

Observe, the best situation is directly north, and the 
best time of day is noon. 

The Magnifying - Reflector. 
Let the rays of light that pass through the magnifying- 
glass in the shutter be thrown on a large concave mirror, 
properly fixed in a frame; then take a thin strip of glass 
and stick anysmdl object on it; hold it in the intervening 
rays at a little m tre than the focal distance from tho mir- 
ror, and you will see on the opposite Wall, amidst the re- 
flecting rays, the image of that object, very large, and 
beautifully clear and blight. 



EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC. *t>y 

Sympathetic Ink. 
The most curious of all kinds of sympathetic ink is that 
from cobalt It is a very singular phenomenon that tlie 
characters or figures traced out wilh this ink may bo made 
to disappear and reappear at pleasure. This property is 
peculiar to ink obtained from cobalt, for all the other kinds 
are at first invisible until some substance has been applied to 
make them appear; but when once they have appeared, they 
remain. To prepare this ink, take zaffre and dissolve it in 
nitro-muriatic acid until the acid extracts from it the metal- 
lic part of the cobalt which communicates to the zaffre its 
blue color; then dilute the solution, which is very acrid, 
with common water. If you write with this liquor on paper, 
the characters will be invisible ; but when exposed to a 
sufficient degree of heat, they will become green; when the 
paper has cooled, they will disappear. Observe, if the 
paper is too much heated, they will not disappear at all. 

The Magic Oracle, 
By the last mentioned kind of ink the following amusing 
trick may be performed: " Write on several leaves of paper 
with common ink a certain number of questions, and be- 
tween each question write the answer with the above kind 
of ink. The same question must be written on several 
pieces of paper, but with different answers, that the artifice 
may be better concealed ; then provide a box to which yon 
may give the name of the sybil's cave, containing in the lid 
a plate of iron made very hot, in order that the inside of it 
may be heated to a certain degree. Having selected some 
of the questions, take the bits of paper containing them, and 
tell the company you are going to send them to the sybil, or 
oracle, t > obtain an answer; introduce them into the heate I 
box, and when they have remained in it some minutes take 
them out and show the answers which have been written. 
Take care soon to lay aside the bits of pap r; for, if they 
remain long in the hands of those to whom the trick is ex- 
hibited, they would see the answers gradually disappear as 
the paper became cold." 



£64 EXPERIMENTAL MAGICr 

lEvisible Ink. 

Dissolve green vitriol arid a lilt le nitrous acid in common 
water. Write your characters with a new p< n 

Next infuse small Alleppo galls slightly bruised, in water. 
In two or three days pour the liquor of}'. 

By drawing a pencil dipped in this second solution over 
the characters written with the first, they will appear a beau- 
tiful black. 

She Magical Tea-spoon. 

Put into a crucible four ounces of bismuth, and when in 
a state of fusion throw in two ounces and a half of lead, and 
one ounce and a half of tin ; these metals will combine form- 
ing an alloy, fusible in boiling water; mould the al'oy into 
bars, and take them to a silversmith's to be made into tea- 
spoons; give one to a stranger io stir his tea, as soon as it 
is poured from the tea-pot; he will not be a little surprised 
to find it melt in his tea-cup. 

Invisible Correspondence. 

Mis up some hog's laid very intimately with a little Ven- 
ice turpentine, and rub a. small portion of it gently and in 
an equal manner over very thin paper, by means of a piece 
of fine sponge. When you are desirous io employ this prep- 
aration for writing secretly to a friend, lay the above paper 
on that you intend to disp itch aad trace out whatever you 
think proper with a blunted style, by which means the fat 
substance will adhere to the second paper in all those places 
where the style has passed. Tne person who receives the 
letter may easily render 'it legible by sprinkling over it a 
little colored dust, or some pounded charcoal well sifted. 

Beautiful Ornament for a Boom. 

Dissolve in seven different tumblers containing warm 
water, half ounces of sulphates of iron, copper, zinc, soda, 
alumine, magnesia,, and potass. Pour them all, when com- 
pletely dissolve'!, into a large evaporating dish of Wedg- 
wood's ware, and stir the whole with a glass rod; place the 
dish in a warm place where it can not be affected by du t, 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIO. 265 

or where it may not be agitated When due evaporation 
has taken place, the whole will begin to shoot out into crys- 
tals. These will be interspersed in small group* and single 
crystals amongst each other. Their color and 'peculiar 
form of crystalization will distinguish each crystal sepa- 
rately, and the whole together remaining in the respective 
places where they were deposited, will display a very 
curious and pleasing appearance. Preserve it carefully 
from dust. 

To Make Fire Bottles. 

The phosphoric fire bottles may be prepared in the follow- 
ing manner : Take a small phial of very thin glass, heat it 
gradually in a ladleful of sand, and introduce into it a few 
grains of phosphorous ; let the phial be then left undisturbed 
for a i'ew minutes, and proceed in this manner ti:l the phial 
is full. Another method of preparing this phosphoric bottle, 
consists in heating two parts of phosphorous and one of lime, 
placed in layers, in a loosely stopped phial for about halt' 
an hour ; or put a li i tie phosphorous into a small phial, 
heat the phial in a ladleful of sand, and when the phosphorous 
is melted, turn it round, so that the phosphorous may adhere 
to the sides of the phial, and then cork it closely. To use 
this bottle, take a common brimstone match, introduce its 
point into the bottle, so as to cause a minute quantity of 
its contents to adhere to it. If the match be rubbed on a 
common bottle cork, it will instantly take fire. Care should 
be taken not to use the same match a second time immedi- 
ately, or while it is hot, as it would infallibly set fire to the 
phosphorous in the bottle. 

Two Cold Liquids When Mixed Become Boiling- Sot. 
Put into a thin phial two parts (by measure) of sulphuric 
acid, and add to it one part of water ; on agitating or stir- 
ring them together, the mixture instantly becomes hot, and 
acquires a temperature above that of boiling water. 

The Silver Tree. 
Dissolve an ounce of fine silver in three ounces of strong 



266 EXPEltlMENTAL MAGIC. 

aquafortis, in a glass bottle. When the silver is dissolved, 
pour the aquafortis into another gla-s vessel (a decanter 
will be best), with seven cr eight ounces of mercury, to 
which add a quart of common water ; to the whole add your 
dissolved silver, and let it remain untouched. 

In a few days the mercury will appear covered with a 
number of little branches of a silver color. This appearance 
will increase for a month or two, and will remain after the 
mercury is entirely dissolved. 

A Person Having- an Even Number of Coins in One Hand, and an 
Odd number in the Other, to Tell in Which Hand the Odd or 
Even IT umber Is. 

You desire the person to multiply the number in his right 
hand by an odd figure, and the number in his left by an 
even one ; and tell you it the products added together, be 
odd or even. If even, the even number is in the right 
hand ; if odd, the even number is in the left. For instance: 
I. Number in the right In the left hand odd. . . 7 

hand is even 18 Multiply by 2 

Multiply by 3 

Product 14 

Product 54 

Add the product of 
the left hand 14 

Which produces a 
total of. 68 

II. Number in the right In the left hand even. . . 18 

hand is odd 7 Multiply by. 2 

Multiply by 3 

Product 36 

roduct 21 

Add the product of 
the left hand 36 

Which produces a 
total of. 57 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 267 

The Lead Tree. 

A more modern invention, and an easier method bv far 
tban the Silver Tree, is the following': 

To a piece of zinc fasten a wire, crooked in tlie form of 
the worm of a still ; let the other end of the worm be tlirus" 
througli a cork. You then pour spring- water into a phial 
or decanter, to which you add a small quantity of sugar of 
lead ; thrust the zinc into the bottle, and with the cork at 
the end of the wire fasten it up. In a few days the tree 
will begin to grow, and produce a most beautiful effect. 
To Produce Beautiful Fireworks in Miniature. 

Put half a drachm of solid phosphorous into a large pint 
Florence flask — holding it slanting, that the phosphorous 
may not break the glass. Pour upon it a gill and a half of 
■water, and place the whole over a tea-kettle lamp, or any 
common tin lamp, filled with spirit of wine. Light the wick, 
which should be almost half an inch from the flask ; and as 
soon as the water is heated, streams of fire will issue from 
the w.iter by starts, resemblng sky-iockets; some particles 
will adhere to the sides of the glass, representing stars, 
and will frequently display brilliant rays. These appear- 
ances will continue at times till the water begins t > simmer, 
when immediately a curious aurora borealis begins, and 
gradually ascends, till it collects to a pointed flame ; when 
it has continued half a minute, blow out the flime of the 
lamp, and the point that was formed will rush down, form- 
ing beautiful illuminated clouds of fire, rolling over each 
other for some time, which, disappearing, a splendid hemis- 
phere of stars presents itself; after waiting a minute or 
two, light the lamp again, and nearly the same phenomenon 
will be displayed as Irom the beginning. Let the repetition 
of lighting and blowing out the lamp be made for three or 
four times at least, that the stars may be increased. After 
the third or fourth time of blowing out the lamp, in a few 
minutes after the internal surface of the flask is dry, many 
of the stars will shoot with great splendor, from side to 
side, and some of them will fire off with brilliant rays ; these 



SibO EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC 

appearances will continue several minutes. What remains 
in the flask will serve for the same experiment several times, 
and without adding any more water. Care should be taken, 
after the operation is over, to lay the flask and water in a 
cool, secure p'ace. 

To Procure Nitrous Oxide, or Iiaug-uing" Gas. 
Take two or three ounces of nitrate of ammonia in crystals, 
and put it into a retort, then apply the heat of a lamp to 
the retort, taking 1 care that the heat does not exceed 500 
degrees. When the crystals begin to melt, the gas will 
be produced in considerable quantities. The gas may also 
be produced, though not so pure, by pouring nitric acid, 
diluted with fire, or six times it s weight of water, on copper 
filings or small pieces < f tin. The gas is given out till the 
acid begins to turn brown; the process must then be stopped. 

To Inhale the Laughing Oas. 

Procure an oiled or varnished s Ik bag, or a bladder, fur- 
nished with a stop cock ; fill it with nitrous oxide, and after 
emptying the lungs of common air, take the st >p-cock into 
the mouth, and at the same time hold the nostrils, and the 
sensation produced will be of a highly pleasing nature. A 
great propensity to laughter, a rapid flow of vivid ideas, 
and an unusual fitness for muscular exertion, are the ordi- 
nary feelings which it produces. The sensations produced 
by breathing this gas are not the same in all persons, but 
they are always of an agreeable nature, and not followed 
by any depression of spirits, like those occasioned by fer- 
mented liquors. 

Artificial Sain and Hail. 

Make a hollow cylinder of wood ; let it be very thin at 
the sides, about eight or ten inches wide, and two or three 
leet diameter. Divide its inside into five equal parts by 
boards of five or six inches wide, and let there be between 
them and the wooden circle a space of about one-sixth of 
an inch. You are to place these boards obliquely. In this 
cylinder put four or five pounds of shot that will easily pass 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC 269 

through the opening. When turned upside down, the noise 
of the shot going through the various partitions will re- 
semble rain ; and if you put larger shot, it will produce the 
sound of hail. 

Metallic Vegetations. 
Place a few filings of copper and iron on a glass plate, 
at a certain distance one from the other ; drop a little nitrate 
of silver on each parcel — the silver will soon begin to pre- 
cipitate, while the ir n and copper will oxidize a ;d become 
colored ; then by a small wooden point the ramifications 
maybe arranged at will, whilst the flame of a taper, being 
placed under the plate, will increase the evaporation, facili- 
tate the reaction of the substances, blacken the lower side 
of the plate, and thus form a design. 

Light Produced fcy Sugar. 
If two pieces of loaf sugar (about a pound each) are 
struck against each other in the dark, a light-blue flame, 
like lightning, will be elicited. The same effect takes place 
when a loaf of sugar is struck with an iron instrument. 
To Give a Ghastly Appearance to Persons in a Boom. 
DissoLve salt in an infusion of saffron and spirits of wine. 
Dip some tow in this solution, and having set fire to it, ex- 
tinguish all the other lights in the room. 

To Change Blue to White. 

Dissolve copper filings in a phial of volatile alkali ; when 
the phial is unstopped the liquor will be blue ; when stopped 
it will be white. 

To Break a Stick Placed on Two Glasses Without Breaking the 
Glasses. 

The stick intended to be broken, must neither be th'ck, 
nor rest with any great hold on the two glasses. Both its 
extremities must taper to a point, and should be of as uni- 
form a size as possible, in order that the center of gravity 
may be more easily known. Tlie stick must be placed rest- 
ing on the edges of the glasses, which ought to be perfectly 



270 

level, that the stick may remain horizontal, and not inclined 
to one side more than another. Care a'so must be taken 
that the points only shall rest lightly on the edge of each 
glass. If a speedy and smart blow, but proportioned, as 
far as can be judged, to the size of the stick and the dis- 
tance of the glasses, be then given to it in the middle, it will 
break in two, without either of the glasses being injured. 
Magical Transmutations. 

Infuse a few shavings of logwood in common water, and 
■when the liquor is sufficiently red pour it into a bottle. 
Then take three drinking* glasses, and rinse one of them 
with strong vinegar ; ihr<>w into the second a small quantity 
of pounded alum which will not be observed, if the glass has 
been washed, and leave the third without any preparation. 
If the red liquor in the bottle be poured into the first glass, 
it will appear of a straw color ; if the second it will pass 
gradually from a bluish grey to black, when stirred with a 
key or any piece of iron, which has been previously dipped 
in strong vinegar. In the third glass, the red liquor will 
assume a violet tint. 

Chemical Illuminations. 

Put into a middling siz'd bottle, with a short, wide neck, 
three ounces of oil, or spirit of vitriol, with twelve ounces 
of common water, and throw into it, at different times, an 
ounce or two of iron filings. A violent commo ion will then 
take place, and white vapors will arise from the mixture. 
If a taper be held to the mou.h of the bottle, these vapors 
will inflame, and produce a violent explosion, which may 
be repeated as long as the vapors continue. 

To Melt Lead in a Piece of Paper. 

Wrap up a very smo >th ball of lead in a piece of paper, 
taking care that there be no wrinkles in it, and that it be 
everywhere in contact with the ball ; if it be held in this 
state over the flame of a taper, the lead will be melted with- 
out the paper being burnt. The lead, indeed when once 
fused, will not fail in a short time to pi*rce the paper, aud 
run through. 



EXTEMMEHTAL MAGIC. 271 

Artificial Illuminations. 
A vert pleasing exhibition may be made, with very little 
trouble or expense, in the following manner : Provide a box, 
which you fit up with architectural designs cut on paste- 
board ; prick small holes in those parts of the building where 
you wish the illuminations to appear, observing, that in 
proportion to the perspective, the holes are to be made 
smaller, and on the near objects the holes are to be made 
larger. Behind these designs thus perforated you fix a 
lamp or candle, but in such a manner that the reflection of 
the light shall only shine through the hole ; then placing a 
light of just sufficient brilliance to show the desiyn of the 
buildings before it, and making a hole for the sight at the 
front end of the box, you will have a tolerable representa- 
tion of illuminated build ngs. 

The best way of throwing the light, in front, is to place 
an oiled paper before it, which will cast a mellow gleam 
over the scenery, and not diminish the effect of the illumina- 
tion. This can be very easily planned, both not to obstruct 
the sight, nor be seen to disadvantage. The lights behind 
the picture should be very s'rong ; and if a magnifying 
glass were placed in the sight-hole, it would tend greatly 
to increase the effect. The box must be covered in, leaving 
an aperture for the smoke of the lights to pass through. 

The above exhibition can only be shown at candle light; 
but there is another way, by fixing small pieces of gold on 
the building instead of diiliing the holes, which gives some- 
thing like the appearance of illumination, but by no means 
equal to the forgoing experiment. 

N. B. — It would be an improvement if paper of various 
colors, rendered transparent by oil, were placed between 
the lights behind the aperture in the buildings, as they 
would then resemble lamps of different colors. 

To Set Fire to Spirits of Wine by the Bays of the Snn. 
Put a small quantity of spirits of wine into a glass, and 
put a cent or dime in with it ; then direct the rays of the 



272 ■ EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

sun, by means of a burning-glass, upon the coin, and in a 
short time it will become so hot aa to inflame the spirits. 

Tho Philosoyhioal Caalia. 
Provide a bladder, into the orifice of which is inserted a 
metal tube, some inches in length, that can be adapted to 
the neck of a bottle, containing the same mixture as in the 
experiment p. 28. Having suffered the atmospheric air to 
be expelled from the bottle by the elastic vapor produced 
by the solution, apply the orifice of the bladder to the mouth 
of the bottle, after carefully squeezing the common air out 
of it (which you must not fail to do, or iho bladder will 
violently cxplude). The bladder will tens become filled 
with the inflammable air, which, when forced out against 
the flame of a candle, by pressing the sides of the bladder, 
will form a beautiful green fl&me. 

To BSa&o the Appearance of a Flash of Xag-htnias 1 when Any One 
Enters a Boom with a Lighted Candle. 

Dissolve camphor in spirit of wine, and deposit the vessel 
containing the solution in a very close room, where the 
spirit of wine must be made to evaporate by strong and 
speedy boiling. If any one then enters the room with a 
lighted candle, the air will inflame, while the combustion 
will be so sudden and of so short duration, as to occasion 
no danger. 

Two Liquids when Klxed Form almost a Solid BXaes. 
Put into a wineglass a fewteaspoonfuls of a concentrated 
solution of silicatcd potash, and add to it gradually, drop 
by drop, sulphuiic acid. If tfn-so two liquids be stirred to- 
gether with a glass rod, they become converted into an 
opaque white and almost sohd mass. 

To Kelt Iron in a ISoment and Kaio Zt Sun into Drops. 

Bring a bar of iron to a white heat, and then apply to it 
a r<.ll of sulphur. The iron will immediately meit and run 
into drops. 

The experiment should be performed over a basin of water, 



EXPEEIMENTAL MAGIC. 273 

in which the drops that fall down will be quenched. These 
drops will be found reduced into a sort of cast-iron. 

To Blake a Bird Seem as Dead. 

Take any bird out of a cage, and lay it on a table; tlien 
wave a small feather over its eyes, and it will appear as 
dead; but directly you take the feather away, it wiil revive 
again. Let it lay hold of the stem part of the feather wiih 
its feet, and it will twist and turn about just like a parrot; 
you may also roll it about on the table any way you like. 

To so Fill a Glass with Water that it can not he Removed without 
Spilling' the Whole. 

This is a mere trick, but may afford some amusement. 
You offer to bet any person that you will so fill a glass with 
water that he shall not move it off the table without spill- 
ing- the whole contents. You then fill the glass, and laying 
a piece of paper or thin card over the top, you dexterously 
turn the glass upside down on the table, and then drawing 
away the paper, you leave the water in the glass, with its 
foot upwards. It will therefore be impossible to remove the 
glass from the table without spilling every drop. 

To Make an Object which is too Hear the Bye to be Distinctly Per- 
ceived, to be Seen in a Distinct Manner, without the Interpo- 
sition of any Glass. 

Make a hole in a card with a needle, and, without chang- 
ing the place of the eye or of the object, look at the latter 
through the hole; the object will then be seen distinctly, 
and even considerably magnified. 

Hew Camera laiicida. 
Take a piece of louking-gl »ss; rest it on a table in any 
angle in front of the object to be copied; then, having a 
piece of paper placed behind the minor, by looking into it 
from the upper part of the glass with one eye, and with the 
other making the tixis of vision meet in the focus point of 
both, any object may be seen and sketched with singular 
beauty and accuracy. 



274 EXPERIMENTAL MAGtO 

Two Fiarures--One of which. Blows out and the Other Re-lights 
a Candle. 

Make two figures of any shape or materials you please; 
insert in the mouth of one a small tube, at "the end of which 
is a piece of phosphorous, and in the mouth of the other a 
tube containing at the ond a few grains of gunpowder ; tak- 
ing care fiateach be retained in the tube by apiece of paper. 
If the second figure be applied to the flame of a taper, it 
will extinguish it, and the first will light it again. 

An Optical Game. 
Present to any one a ring, or place at some distance and 
in such a manner that the plane of it shall be turned towards 
the person's face; then bid him shut one of his eyes, and try 
to push through it a crooked stick of sufficient length to 
reach it; he will very seldom succeed. A person with one 
eye would not experience the same difficulty; being accus- 
tomed to make use of only one eye, he acquires the habit 
of judging of distances with great correctness. 

A Vessel that will Let Water out at the Bottom, as soon as the 
Mouth is Uncorked. 

Provide a tin vessel, two or three inches in diameter, and 
five or six inches in height, having a mouth about three 
inches in width, and in the bottom several small holes just 
large enough to admit a small needle. Plunge it in water 
with its m uth open, and full; while it remains in the water, 
stop it very closely. You can play a trick with a person, 
by desiring him to uncork it; if he places it on his knee for 
that purpose, the moment it is uncorked, the water will run 
through the bottom, and make him completely wet. 

To produce Great Heat by Presenting' Two Solids to Each O .her. 

Take a crystal or two of the nitrate of copper, and bruise 
them; then moisten them with water, and roll them up 
quickly in a piece of tinfoil, and in half a minute, or little 
more, the tinfoil will begin to smoke, and soon after take 
fire and. explode with a slight noise. Except the crystals 
of the nitrate of copper arc moistened, no heat will be 
produced. - 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 275 

A Powder w'lich Catches Fire when Exposed to the Air. 

Put three ounces of rook alum, and oik; ounce of honey 
or sugar into a new earthen dish, glazed, and which is cap- 
able of standing a strong beat; keep the mixture over tlie 
fire, stirring ir, continually until it becomes very dry and 
hard; then remove it from the lire and pound it to a coarse 
powder. Put this powder into a long-necked bott e, leav- 
ing a part of the vessel empty; and having placed it in a 
crucible, fill up the crucible with fine sand, and surround it. 
with burning coals. When the bottle lias been kept ;it a red 
heat for about seven or eight minutes, and no more vapor 
issu s from it, remove it from the fiie, then stop it with a 
p ; ece of cork; and having suffered it to c ol, preserve the 
mixture in small bottles well closed. 

If you unclose one of these bottles, and let fall a few 
grains of this powder on a bit of paper, or any other very 
dry substance, it will first become blue, then brown, and 
will at last burn the paper or other substance on which it 
has fallen. 

To Construct and Innate a Small Balloon. 

It is an interesting and amusing experiment to inflate a 
small balloon made of gold beater's skin (using a little gum 
arabic to close any holes or fissures), filling it from a blad- 
der or jar, and tying a thread round the mou'h of it to pre- 
vent the escape of the gas. When fully blown, attach a 
fanciful car of colored paper or very thin pasteboard to it, 
and let it float in a large room; it will soon gain the ceil- 
ing, where it will remain for any length of time; if it be let 
off in the open air, it will ascend out of sight. This exper- 
iment may be varied, by putting small grains of shot into 
the car, in order to ascertain the difference between the 
weight of hydrogen gas and atmospheric air. 

To Melt a piece of Money in a Walnut Shell without Injuring the 
Shell. 
Bend any thin coin, and put it into half a walnut shell; 
place the shell on a little sand t» ke«p it steady; thea fill 



276 EXPEKIMENTAL MAGIC. 

the shell with a mixture made of three parts of very dry, 
pounded nitre, one part of flowers of sulphur, and a little 
sawdust well sifted. If you then set a light to the mixture, 
you will find, when it is melted, that the metal will also be 
melted at the bottom of the shell in the form of a button, 
which will become hard when the burning- matter round it 
is consumed; the shell will have sustained very little injury. 

The Hydraulic Dancer. 

Procure a little figure of cork which you may dress as your 
fancy dictates. In this figure, place a small hollow cone 
made of thin leaf brass. 

When the figure is placed on a jet d'ean, that plays in a 
perpendicular direction, it will be suspended on the top of 
the water, and perform a great variety of amusing motions. 

If a hollow ball of very thin copper, of an inch in diameter, 
be placed on a similar jet, it will remain suspended, turning 
round, and spreading the water all about it. 

The Fiery Fountain. 
If twenty grains of phosphorous, cut very small, and 
mixed with forty grains of powder of zinc, be put into bur 
drachms of water, and two drachms of concentrated sul- 
phuric acid be added thereto, bubbles of inflamed phosphor- 
ated hydrogen gas will quickly cover the whole surface of 
the fluid in succession, forming a real fountain of fir< . 

A Person having 1 Put a 'Ring on One of His Fin 
Person, the Hand, the Finger, and the Joi 
Placed. 

Let a third person double the numbe 
which he stands who has the ring, and f 
ber; then multiply that sum by 5, and to ui C product auu 
10. Let him next add 1 to the last number, and if * ] > a ring 1 
be on the right hand, and 2 on the h 
whole by 10; to the product of this, h< 
ber of the finger (counting the thumb 
and multiply tlie whole again by 10; I 
number of the joint, and, lastly,, to the 



EXPEKIMENTAL MAGIC. 277 

He is then to tell you the amount of the whole, from which 
you are to subtract 3535, and the remainder will consist of 
four figures, the first of which will express the rank in which 
the person stands, the second the hand (number 1 signifying 1 
the right and 2 the left), the third number the finger, and 
the fourth the joint. For example : 

Suppose the person who stands the third in order has put 
the ring upon the second joint of the thumb of his left hand, 
then 

The double of the rank of the third person is 6 
To which add 5 

11 
Multiply the sum by 5 

55 

To which add 10 

And the number of the left hand 2 

* 67 

Which, being multiplied by 10 

670 
To which add the number of the thumb .... 1 

671 
A \d multiply again by 10 

6710 

Then add the number of the joint 2 

And, lastly, the number 35 

j 6737 

From w^hich deducting 3535 

The reii£;/ler is 3212 

Of whieh, aslunyhave said, the 3 denotes the third person, 



278 EXPEK1MENTAX, MAGIC. 

the 2 the left hand, the 1 the thumb, and the last 2 the 
second joint. 

To Construct Paper Balloons. 

Take several sheets of silk paper; cut them in the shape 
of a spindle, or, to speak more familiarly, like the coverings 
of the sections of an orange; join ihese pieces together into 
one spherical or globular body, and border the aperture 
with a ribbon, leaving the ends that you may suspend from 
them the following lamp: 

Construct a small basket of very fine wire, if the balloon 
is small, and suspend it from the aperture, so that the 
smoke from the flame of a few leaves of paper, wrapped to- 
gether and dipped in oil, may heat the inside of it. Before 
yru light this paper, suspend the balloon in such a manner 
that it may, in a great measure, be exhausted of air, and as 
soon as it lias been dilated, let it go, together with the wire 
basket which will serve as ballast. 

The Magic Bottle. 

Take a small bottle the neck of which is not more than 
the sixth of an inch in diameter. With a funnel, fill the bot- 
tle quite full of red wine and place it in a glass vessel, sim- 
ilar to a show glass, whoso height exceeds that of the bottle 
about two inches; fill this vessel with water. The wine will 
shortly come out of the bottle and rise in the form of a small 
column to the surface of the water; while, at the same time, 
the water entering the bottle, will supply the place of the 
wine. The reason of this is, that as water is specifically 
heavier than wine, it must hold the lower place, while the 
other rises to the top. 

An effect equally pleasing will be produced if the bottle 
be filled with water and the vessel with wine. 

The Wine Trick. 

First, from the vessel which contains eight gallons, and 
is full of wine, let five gallons be poured into tho empty ves- 
sel of Gve, and from this vessel so filled lei three be poured 



EIPEEIMENTAL MAGIO. 279 

into the empty vessel of three, so there will remain two gal- 
lons within the vessel of five. Then let three gallons which 
are within the vessel of three be poured into the vessel of 
eight, which will now have six gallons within it; that done, 
let the two gallons which are in the vessel of five be put 
into the empty vessel of three ; then, of the six gallons of 
wine which are within the vessel of eight, fill again the five, 
and from those five pour one gallon into the vessel of three, 
which wanted only one gallon to fill it, so there will remain 
exactly four gallons within the vessel of five, and four gal- 
lons within the other two vessels. This question may be re- 
solved in another way, but I leave that as an exercise to 
the wit of ingenious readers. 

To Discover which Numbers have been Chosen. 

Suppose you have propounded unto Peter and John two 
numbers, the one even and the other odd, as ten and nine, 
and that each of those persons is to choose one of the said 
numbers unknown to you. Now, to discover which number 
each person shall have chosen, you must take two numbers, 
the one even and the other odd, as two and three; then bid 
Peter multiply that number which he shall have chosen by 
two, and cause John to multip'y that number which he shall 
have chosen by three; that done, bid them add the two pro- 
ducts together, and let them make known the sum to you, 
or else demand of them whether the said sum be even or 
odd, or by any other way more secret, endeavor to discover 
it, by bidding them to take the half of the said sum; for, by 
knowing whether the said sum be even or odd, you do ob- 
tain the principal end to be aimed at; because, if the said 
sum be an even number, then, infallibly, he that multiplied 
his number by your odd number (to wit, by three), did choose 
the even number (to wit, ten) ; but, if the said number hap- 
pen to be an odd number, then he whom you caused to mul- 
tiply his number by your odd number (to wit, by three), 
did infallibly choose the odd number (to wit, nine). 



The Globular Fountain. 
Make a hollow globe of copper or lead, and of a size 
adapted to the quantity of water that comes from a pipe 
(hereafter mentioned) to which it is to be fixed, and which 
may be fastened to any kind of pump, provided it be so 
constructed that the water shall have no other means of es- 
cape than through the pipe. Pierce a number of small holes 
through the globe, that all tend towards its center, and an- 
nex it to the pipe that communicates with the pump. The 
water that comes from tiie pump, rushing with violence 
into the globe, will be forced out at the holes, and form a 
very pleasing sphere of water. 

The Water Sun. 
Provide two portions of a hollow sphere that are very 
shallow; join them together in such a manner that the hol- 
low between them be very narrow; fix them vertically to 
a pipe from whence a jet proceeds; bore a number of small 
boles all round that part where the two pieces are joined 
together. The water rushing through the holes will form 
a vey pleasing water sun or star. 

To Cause a Brilliant Explosion under Water. 
Drop a piece of phosphorous, the size of a pea, into a tum- 
bler of hot water ; and, from a bladder furnished with a 
stop-cock, force a stream of oxygen directly upon it. This 
will afford a most brilliant combustion under water. 

The BXagipal Mirrors. 

Make two holes iu the wainscot of a room, each a foot 
high and ten inches wide, and about a foot distant from 
each other. Let these apertures be about the height of a 
man's head, and in each of them place a transparent glass 
in a frame, like a common mirror. 

Behind the partition and directly facing each aperture, 
place two mirrors inclosed in the wainscot, in an angle of 
forty -five degrees. These mirrors are each to be eighteen 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 281 

inches square, and all the space between must be inclosed 
with pasteboard painted black, and well closed that no li.^ht 
can enter ; let there be also two curtains to cover them, 
which you may draw aside at pleasure. 

When a person looks into one of these fictitious mirrors, 
instead of seeing his own face, he will see the object that 
is in front of the other ; thus, if two persons stand at the 
same time before these mirrors, instead of each seeing 1 him- 
self, they will reciprocally see each other. 

There should be a sconce with a. lighted candle placed on 
each side of the two glasses in the wainscot, to enlighten 
the faces of the persons who look in t iem, or the experiment 
wdl not have so remarkable an effect. 

Tree of Crystals. 
Pot a small quantity of bruised gum benzoin on a piece 
of thin metal or a saucer; invert over it a tumbler-glass, in 
which place a sprig of wood, or any small leaved plant, and 
apply the flame of a candle underneath, so as to melt the 
gum ; dense fumes will soon begin to arise, and deposit 
themselves in most beautiful crystals of a silky texture, on 
the sprig of wood, in delicate, soft flakes resembling foliage. 

The Magic Funnel. 

This is one of the short supplementaiy tricks which may 
be introduced to follow any other trick, or in offering a glass 
of wine to any young friend who has assisted you. 

I must here explain that this trick depends upon the 
pneumatic principle — namely, that a liquid will not flow out 
of a small hole at the bottom of any vessel as long as it is 
air-tight at top ; but, as soon as there is some opening to 
admit the weight of the atmosphere at top, it will then so 
press upon the liquor that it will run out at any small hole 
at b ttom. 
. This principle will be traced in the accompanying figure 
of the magic funnel. It is, in fact, a double funnel, or two 
funnels joined together only at the top. 

If you hold the funnel in your right band, with one finger 




282 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 

over the opening at B, you can, with your left hand, pour 
wine into the top of the funnel, which will not only fill the 
inner funnel from D to A, but will 
also rise up the shaded compart- 
ments between the two funnels. 

When you have so filled it, you 
put aside the bottle from your left 
hand, and taking hold of the handle, 
of the funnel, stop the hole at C with 
your thumb. Quickly pour out the 
wine from the inner funnel into a 
glass, and let your young friend 
drink it, or let two friends drink it. 
After pausing and talking a few min- 
utes, exclaim : "Ah, my young friends, I see by the move- 
ment of your eyes that the wine is too strong for you. 
Stay, I will take some of it back from your elbow." 

Put the funnel to his elbow, and unstopping C, let a por- 
tion of the wine in the inner compartments run out at B 
into a glass. 

While you again stop the hole at C for a moment or two, 
say to the other friend: "I will now bring same out at your 
ears." Apply the funnel to his ear, and let the remainder 
of the wine run out from the shaded compartment into 
another glass. You taste one glass and tell him to taste 
the other, and see if it is not still good wine. 
The Art of Making' Fireworks. 
Above all things, it is necessaiy to have good materials, 
and that these be prepared in a proper manner, ia order to 
execute any task combining so many ingenious contrivances 
as the making of fireworks undoubtedly require. The man- 
ufacture of your own gunpowder is not desirable, and we 
therefore postpone a description of that art — you wid, no 
d'-uht, buy the best ; hut, as the admixture of charcoal ia 
necessary, and much of your success depends upon having 
it good — observe that the less of sap there may be in the 
wood before it is made into charcoal the better will be the 



EXFEMMENTAL MAGIC 283 

gunpowder that is made with such charcoal. The wood 
is to be dried in an oven or iron boiler, with a slow fire, 
and the charcoal kept in close boxes from the influence of 
atmospheric air, until the moment of being brought to use. 

Bow to Ileal Gunpowder, Brimstone, and Charcoal. 

There have been many methods used to grind these in- 
gredients to a powder for fireworks, such as large mortara 
and pestles made of ebony and other hard woods; but none 
of these methods have proved so effectual and speedy as the 
new invention of the mealing-table. It is made of elm, with 
a rim round its edge four or five inches high ; and one end 
is a (slider, which runs in a groove and forms part of the 
rim, so that when you have taken out of the table as much 
powder as you wish, with a copper shovel, you may sweep 
all clean out at the slider. When you are going to meal a 
quantity of powder, do nut put too much on the table at 
once; but when you have p't in a good proportion, take a 
muller an drub it therewith till all the grains are broken ; 
then sift it in a lawn sieve, that has a leceiver and top to 
it ; and that which does not pass through the sieve, return 
again to the table, and grind it more, till you have brought 
it all fine enough to go through the sieve. Brimstone and 
charcoal are ground in the same manner as gunpowder, only 
the muller must be made of ebony, for these ingredients be- 
ing harder than powder, would stick in the grain of the elm 
and be very difficult to grind; and, as the brimstone is apt 
to stick and clog to the table, it would be best to keep one 
for that purpose only, by which means you will always have 
your brimstone clean and well ground. 

So Make Touch-Paper. 

Dissolve in some spirits of wine or vinegar, a little salt- 
petre; then take some purple or blue paper, wet it with the 
above liquor, and when dry it will be fit for use. When 
you paste this paper on any of your works, take care that 
the paste does not touch that part which is to burn. The 
method of using this paper is, by cutting it into slips, long: 



284 EXPEEIMENTAli MAGIC. 

enough to go once round the mouth of the serpent, cracker, 
etc. When you paste on these slips, leave a little above 
the mouth of the case not pasted, then prime the case with 
meal powder, and twist the paper to a point. 

Of the Vertical Scroll Wheel. 

This wheel may be made of any diameter, but must be 
constructed thus: Have a block of moderate size, into which 
fit four flat spokes, and on them fix a flat circular fell of 
wood. Round the front of this fell place port-fire ; then 
on the front of the spokes form a scroll either with a hoop 
or strong iron wire; on this scroll tie cases of brilliant fire, 
in proportion to the wheel, head to tail. When you fire 
this wheel, light the first case near the fell ; then as the 
cases fire successively, you will see the circle of fire grad- 
ually diminish; but whether the illuminations on the fell 
begin with the scroll or not is immaterial. 

A Slow Fire for Wheels. 

. Must be composed of saltpetre, four ounces; brimstone, 
two ounces; and meal powder, one ounce and a half. 

A Dead Tire for Wheels. 

Saltpetre, one ounce and a quarter; brimstone, a quarter 
of an ounce; lapis-calaminaris, a quarter of an ounce; and 
antimony, two drachms. 

For a Blue Flame. 

Meal powder, saltpetre, and sulphur vivum — the sulphur 
must be the chief part. Or meal powder, saltpetre, brim- 
stone, spirit of wine, and oil of spike, but let the powder be 
the principal part. 

Of Port or Wild Fires. 
Saltpetre, one pound two ounces; meal powder, one 
pound and a half; and brimstone, ten ounces. Ths com- 
position must be moistened with one gill of linseed oil. 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIO. 285 

A Brilliant Fire. 

Meal powder, six pounds; saltpetre, half a pound; brim- 
stone, two ounces; and steel-dust, twelve ounces. 

Of Such. Ingredients as Show Themselves in Sparks When Bam- 
med Into Choked Ca-.es. 

The set of colors of fire produced by sparks are divided 
into four sorts — namely, the black, white, gray, and red; 
the black charges are composed of two ingredients, which 
are meal powder and charcoal; the white of three — namely, 
saltpetre, sulphur, and charcoal; the gray of four — namely, 
meal powder, saltpetre, brimstone, and charcoal; and the 
red of three — meal powder, charcoal, and sawdust. 

There are, besides these four regular or set charges, two 
others, which are distinguished by the names of compound 
and brilliant charges; the compound charge being made of 
many ingredients, such as meal powder, saltpetre, brim- 
stone, charcoal, saw-dust, sea coal, antimony, glass-dust, 
brass-dust, steel-filings, cast iron, tanners' dust, etc., or 
anything that will yield sparks; all which must be managed 
witludjscretion. The brilliant fires are composed of meal 
powder, sail pel ro, brimstone, and steel-dust; or with meal 
powder and steel filings only. 

Of Saltpetre. 

Saltpetre being the principal ingredient in fireworks, and 
a volatile body, by reason of its inflammable parts, is easily 
rarified by fire; but not so soon when foul and gross, as 
when purified from its crude and earthy parts, which greatly 
retard its velocity; therefore, when any quantity of fire- 
works is intended to be made, it would be necessary first 
to examine the saltpetre, for if it be not well cleansed from 
all impurities, and of a good sort, your works will not have 
their proper effect. 

To Pulverize Saltpetre. 

Take a copper kettle, the bottom being spherical, and 
put into it fourteen pounds of refined saltpetre, with two 



286 EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC, 

quarts or five pnrs of clean water; then put the kettle on 
a sluw fire, and when the saltpetre is dissolved, if any im- 
purities arise, skirn them off, and keep constantly stirring 
it with two large sticks till all the water exhales. When 
done enough, it will appear like white sand, and as fine as 
flour; but if it should boil too fast, take the kettle off the 
fire, and sot it on some wet sand, which will prevent the 
salipetre from sticking to the kettle. When you have pul- 
verized a quantity, be careful to keep it in a dry place, not 
exposed to the air. 

To Make Squibs and Serpents. 

First make the cases of about six inches in length, by 
rolling slips of stout cartridge paper three times round a 
roller, and pasting the last fold, tying it near the bottom 
as tight as possible, and making it air-tight at the end with 
sealing-wax. Then take of gunpowder half a pound, char- 
coal one ounce, brimstone one ounce, and steel filings 
half an ounce, or in like proportion; grind them with a 
rauiler or pound them in a mortar. Your cases being very 
dry and ready, first put a thimbleful of your powder, and 
ram it hard down with a ruler; then fill the case to the top 
with the aforesaid mixture, ramming it hard down in the 
course of filling two or three times; when this is done, point 
it with touch paper, which should be pasted on that part 
which touches the case, otherwise it is l.able to drop (iff. 

To Make Crackers. 

Ctrr some stout cartridge paper into pieces three inches 
and a half broad, and one foot long; fold d wii one edge of 
each of these pieces lengthways, about three quarters of an 
inch broad; then fold the double edge dowu a quarter of 
an inch, and turn the single edge back half over the double 
fold. Open it and lay all along the channel which is formed 
by the folding of the paper some meal powder; then fold it 
over and over till the paper is doubled up, rubbing it down 
every turn; this being done, bend it backwards and for- 
wards two inches and a half, or thereabouts, at a time, as 



EXPERIMENTAL MAGIC. 287 

often as the paper will allow. Hold all these fukls flat and 
close, and with a sm;ill pinching cord give one turn round 
the middle of the cracker, :md pinch it close; hind it with 
pack-thread as tight as you can; then, in the place where 
it was pinched, prime one end, and cap it with touch paper. 
When these crackers are fired, they will give a report at 
every turn of the paper; if you would have a great numbor 
of bounces yon must cut the paper longer, or join them after 
they are made; but if they me in de very long before they 
:;re pinched, you inuat have a piece of wood with a groove 
in it deep enougb to let in h*lf the cracker; thia will bold 
tt etfoight while it is pinching. 



PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 



Tricks and Piyersions with Cards. 



How to Make the Pass. — In many of the tricks with cards, it is 
necessary to "make the pass," as it is termed, which is a very neat 
and simple movement. The operator shows a card, which he 
wishes his audience to believe ho can change simply by using the 
mysterious words, "Presto, begone !" While, however, he is say- 
ing these words, he gives a sharp blow on the pack he holds in his 
hand, and at the same time slips the card undei the pack and takes 
off the top one, or vice versa. Practice, in this as in other matters, 
will impart great dexterity to the operator ; and as the hand can 
be trained to move more quickly then the eye can see, he will be 
able to go through the movement without it being perceived by his 
audience. 
The following mode of "making the pass " must be well studied : 
Hold the pack of cards in your right hand, so that the palm of 
your hand may be under the cards ; place the thumb of that hand 
on on 3 sido of the pack ; the first, second, and third fingers on the 
other side, and your little finger between those cards that are to 
be brought to the top and the rest of the pack. Then place your 
left hand over the cards in such a manner that the thumb may be 
at C, the forefinger at A, and the other fingers at B, as in the follow- 
ing figure : 

B 



Bottom. 



Thumb. 



Little Finger. 



Fro. 1. 




290 



PROFESSOR HARTZ S 



The hands and the two parts of the pack being thus disposed, 
you draw off the lower cards, confined by the little finger and the 
other parts of the right hand, and place them, with an impercepti- 
ble motion, on the top of the pack. 

But before you attempt any of the tricks that depend on " mak- 
ing the pass " you must have great practice, and be able to perform 
it so dexterously and expeditiously that the eye can not detect the 
movement of the hand, or you may, instead of deceiving others, 
expose yourself. 

Forcing a Card. — In card tricks, also, it is frequently necessary to 
"force a card," by which you compel a person to take such a card 
as you think fit, while he imagines he is taking one at hap-hazard. 
The following is perhaps the best method of performing this trick : 
Ascertain quickly, or whilst you are amusing yourself with the 
cards, what the card is which you are to force ; but either keep it 
in sight, or place the little finger of your left hand, in which you 
hold the pack, upon it. Next desire a person to select a card from 
the pack, for which purpose you must open it quickly from left to 
right, spreading the cards backwards and forwards so as to per- 
plex his choice, and when you see him about to take one, open the 
pack until you come to that one which you intend him to have, and, 
just at the moment his fingers are touching the pack, let its corner 
project invitingly a little forwards in front of the others ; this will 
seem so fair that in nine cases out of ten he will take the one so 
offered, unless he is himself quite aware of the secret of forcing. 
Having by this method forced your card, you may request him to 
examine it, and then give him the pack to shuffle, which he may 
do as often as he likes, for you are of course always aware what 
card he has taken. A perfect knowledge of forcing is indispensa- 
bly necessary before you attempt the more difficult tricks with 
cards. 

The "Long Card." — Another stratagem connected with the per- 
formance of many of the following tricks is what is termed the 
"Long Card" — that is, a card either a trifle longer or wider than 
the rest of the pack, so as not to be perceptible to the eye of the 
spectator, but easily distinguished by the touch of the operator. 
Good operators sometimes have both cards in the pack. Any 
bookbinder will shave the edges of your pack so as to leave you a 
long and a wide card. 

Having laid down what we may be allowed to term the "leading 
principles" which rule the art of card conjuring, we now propose 
to explain the various tricks which may be performed with a pack 
of ordinary playing cards. They depend to some extent for suc- 
cess on manual dexterity, a .knowledge of the science- of-numbers, 
and some simple apparatus, easily procured, or made by an in- 
genious youth. 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 291 

The Divining Card. — Provide a pack in which there is a long card ; 
open it at that part where the long card is, and present the pack 
to a person in such a manner that he will naturally draw that card. 
You then tell him to put it into one part of the pack, and shuffle 
the cards. You take a pack, and offer the same cards in like man- 
ner to the second and third person, taking care that they do not 
stand near enough to see the card each other draws. 

You then draw sevei-al cards yourself, among which is the long 
card, and ask each of the parties if his card be among those cards ; 
he will naturally say yes, as they have all drawn the same card. 
You then shuffle all the cards together, cutting them at the long 
card ; you hold it before the first person so that others may not 
see it, and tell him that it is his card. You then put it in the pack, 
shuffle it, and cut it again at the same card, and hold it to the 
second person, and so to the rest. 

You can perform this recreation without the long card in the 
following manner : 

Let any person draw a card, and replace it in the pack. You 
then make the pass, and bring that card to the top of the pack, and 
shuffle them without losing sight of that card. You then offer that 
card to the second person, that he may draw it and put it in the 
middle of the pack. You make the pass, and shuffle the cards the 
second time in the same manner, and offer the card to the third 
person, so again to the fourth or fifth. 

Deceptive Shufflzs are of three kinds. The first is to mix all the 
cards excepting one, of which you never lose sight. To do that, 
you must in the first place put it upon the pack, then take it in the 
right hand, retaining the balance of the pack in the left; with the 
thumb of this last hand, slip into the right hand five or six other 
cards upon this reserved card, and upon these last five or six again, 
and so on until all the pack is found in your right hand. By this 
means the reserved card will be found at the bottom, and if at the 
moment you return the whole pack into the left hand excepting 
only the uppermost card, you can pass successively all the cards 
from the left to the right hand, through placing the cards alter- 
nately above and below the aforesaid uppermost reserved card, 
until you reach. the reserved card, which you put on the top, or the 
bottom, as circumstances require. 

The second deceptive shuffle consists in taking from the right hand, 
the uppermost half of a pack held in the left, in moving adroitly 
the annular finger of the right, to allow the cards to slip without 
deranging^their order; and notice: 1. That after having moved the 
cards of a pack with the annular finger of the right hand as we 
have said, it is necessary to place beneath the pack in the right 
hand a card, and one or two others immediately following it, to 
make pretense of leaving some wholly underneath. These, how- 



232 PROFESSOR HARTZS 

ever, must be brought back under the package in the left hand. 
2. That the package in the left hand, which was in the first in- 
stance beneath, and which is actually above, ought to bo taken 
into the right hand to be returned slowly to its first place. 

The third deceptive shuffle consists in making the pass to retain 
the cards ia the right hand, and to divide the inferior portion into 
three other little packages, of which the first falls upon the table, 
the second to the right, and the third to the left. The upper half 
is then placed in the middle ; should you transport upon this half 
the packages of the right and the left, while following the same 
order, and employing alternately the right hand and the left, for 
greater quickness, and to cause it to appear that you shuffle by 
chance and without premeditation, the cards, while appearing to 
commingle, will be found never to have changed places. All these 
deceptive shuffles can be mastered by a very little manual practice. 

To Smuggle a Ctrd. — To smuggle a card, it is necessary to hold it 
between the iudex and middle finger of the right nand, and to hold 
the rest of the pack in the left hand, between the finger and thumb 
of that hand. The upper cari, which you desire to substitute, 
ought to be a little advanced towards the right hand. 

In this position the middle, annular, and little fingers of the left 
hand are perfectly free, and it is with these fingers that- you must 
take the card which is in the right hand, and when that is brought 
near the left hand, in the twinkling of an eye take from it the up- 
permost card which you wish to substitute. 

To S^'p a Card. — To slip a card, it is necessary, first, to hold the 
pack in the right hand, and show the spectator the undermost 
card, which we will suppose to be the Ace of Diamonds ; second, 
turn the pack upside down, under pretense of taking this Ace of 
Diamonds ; third, take, instead of the Ace of Diamonds, the card 
immediately following it, in causing this Ace of Diamonds to slip 
behind with the annular and little fingers of the right hand, which 
you have dampened a moment before with some saliva. 

Note. — The finger of the left hand, with which is drawn the 
second card instead of the first below it, should be likewise mois- 
tened with saliva. 

To Carry Away a Card. — To carry away one or more cards, it is 
necessary : 1. To hold in the left hand the cards you design to 
carry away, poised diagonally over the others, and a little ad- 
vanced towards the right hand. 

2. Take these cards with the left hand, pressing them slightly 
between the little finger and thumb. 

3. Lean your right hand carelessly upon the edge of a table to 
conceal the fraud. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



293 



To Place a Card. — A card can be placed in two manners, as fol- 
lows : 

1. Upon other cards held in the left hand the instant you ask the 
spectator to place his hand upon the pack. 

The instant you have placed the card, remove slightly the right 
from the left hand, in such a manner that you almost touch the 
cards with the little finger, as if to indicate to the spectator the 
place where you invite him to put the hand. By this means he 
will not pay attention to the fact that the hands are brought to- 
wards one another to operate a slight change, and he honestly 
places his hand when too late to prevent one. 

2. The second manner of placing a card, is done at the instant 
you place the pack upoirthe table. 

In this case it is not necessary to pick up the cards by closing 
the hand as done ordinarily, but to make them slip towards you, as 
well for rapidity as to prevent the spectator from seeing the cards 
in your hand. It is necessary, however, to be content with a mod- 
erate rapidity, which suffices to conceal the means employed, 
while an extraordinary rapidity might disclose the trick. 

The Ten Duplicate Cards — To Reveal a Persons Thoughts. — Select 
any twenty cards. Let any person shuffle them ; lay them in 
pairs upon the table, without looking at them, as represented in 
Fig. 2. You next desire several persons (as many persons as 
there are pairs on the table), to look at different pairs, and remem- 
ber what cards compose them. Youthen take up all the cards in the 
order in which they have been laid, and replace them with their 
faces uppermost upon the table, in four rows, with five cards in 
each row. 





1 










2 








3 




t 




H 










¥ V 

y T ¥ 




llvl 




* 



.♦: 







V 




* 4- 

•Kb.* 



294 



PEOPESSOE HAETZS 




$ 
* 




V 




V 

* ♦ 








10 






* * 




♦ ♦ 




' Fig. 2. 

The order in which you place the cards in each row indicates 
with certainty the couple selected by each person. 

To enable you to do this, recourse must be made to a mental 
table of four words, each word consisting of five letters, making 
twenty in all, so that each letter represents a card, as shown in 
Fig. 3. 

The first card you put on M in Mtjtus, and the next on M in No- 
men — that is to say, on the first and eighth places of the intended 
square of twenty places. Having disposed of the first pair, you 
proceed to put the next card on U in the second place of the first 
line, and on its companion in the fourth place of the same line. 
The next card is placed on the spot occupied by T in the first line, 
and on T (or fifteenth place) in the third line. The first card of 
the fifth couple is placed on S in the first line, and on S in the 
fourth line. Having completed the first line, you proceed with the 
word Nomen in the second line, then with Dedit, and finally with 
Cocis, filling up the remaining vacancies by placing each couple of 
cards on corresponding pairs of letters, until the square is com- 
plete, as shown in Fig. 3. 

You now ask each person where the cards he selected in his 
mind are now situated. If he says that they are both in the first 
line, then he thought of the cards occupying the places of the two 
U's. 

If he says that one card is in the first, and the other in the sec- 
ond line, then he thought of the cards occupying the places of the 
two M's. 

If in the first and third lines, of the two T's. 

If in the first and fourth lines, of the two S's. 



TRICKS AND DIVER IONS WITH CARDS. 



295 



And so on, with each pair of letters corresponding with the 
couple of cards selected. 

A little practice is required to strengthen the memory, so as to 
pair the letters as they present themselves in the words which 
represent the places of twenty cards. You will notice that, al- 
though there are twenty places, there are only ten different letters, 
or ten pairs, (See Fig. 3.) 

M U T U S 

12 3 2 4 



♦ ♦ 






♦ 
♦ ♦ 





D 

8 




E 
7 


* 4- 

4* «?» 










V 
V 



c 









c 




I 


10 6 10 9 


* * 












* 


• % 




* 








f 


4 * 








ulft 




•%] 






,•: 



D 




I 




T 


8 




9 




3 


\MH 




V 




4* 


|»%ttj±ffl 




.„- , 







mt 



Fig. 3. 



296 



PROFESSOR HARTZ S 



The above figure shows the order of laying down the cards. This 
amusement, which is very simple, and requires very little prac- 
tice, will excite considerable astonishment in those unacquainted 
with the key. 

The Key. 



rotation : 



M 


u 


T 


u s 


N 





M 


E N 


D 


E 


D 


I T 


C 








I S 


ing 


table, the 


places of the letters ar 


1 


2 


3 


4 5 


M 


U 


T 


U S 


6 


7 


8 


9 10 


N 





M 


E N 


11 


12 


13 


14 15 


D 


E 


D 


I T 


16 


17 


18 


19 20 


C 








I S 



Three Cards Being Presented to Three Persons, to Guess which Each 
has Chosen. — As it is necessary that the cards presented to the 
three persons should be distinguished, we shall call the first A, the 
second B, and the third C ; but the three persons may be at liberty 
to choose any of them they please. This choice, which is suscep- 
tible of six different varieties, having been made, give to the first 
person twelve counters, to the second, twenty-four, and to the 
third, thirty-six ; then desire the first person to add together the 
half of the counters of the person who has chosen the card A, the 
third of those of the person who has chosen B, and the fourth part of 
those of the person who has chosen C, and ask the sum, which 
must be either 23 or 24 ; 25 or 27 ; 28 or 29, as in the following 
table : 

First. Second. Third. Sums. 

12 24 36 

A B C 23 

AC B 24 

B A C 25 

G A B 27 

B C A 28 

C B A 29 

This table shows that if the sum be 25, for example, the first per- 
son must have chosen the card B, the second the card A, and the 
third the card C ; and that if it be 28, the first person must have 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



297 



chosen the card B, the second the card C, and the third the card 
A ; and so of the rest. 

To Produce a Particular Card without Seeing the Pack.— Take a pack 
of cards with tho corners cut off. Place them all one way, and 
ask a person to draw a card ; when he has done so, while he is 
looking at it, reverse the pack, so that when he returns the card to 
the pack, tho corner of it will project from the rest ; let him shuf- 
fle them ; he will never observe the projecting card. Hold them 
behind your back. You can feel the projecting card — draw it out, 
and show it. Simple as this trick is, it will excite great astonish- 
ment. 

To Call for any Card inthe Pack. — This is a very simple trick, but 
will greatly astonish an audience to whom it is not known. Seat 
yourself at a table, so as to have the whole of the company as 
much as possible in front of you and at some distance. Take the 
pack of cards as it usually lies, and, in passing it under the table 
or behind you, glance at the card which happens to be exposed ; 
then, pretending to shuffle the cards, place the one you have seen 
back to back on the other side of the pack, and holding the cards 
firmly by the edges, raise your hand between you and the com- 
pany, and show the card you have seen, calling out, at the same 
time, what it is. 

Observe which card is facing you (for you have now the whole 
pack facing you, except the one card which is shown to the spec- 
tators), pass them under the table again, and transfer the card 
you have just seen to the other side of the pack, handling the 
cards as if shuffling them ; again exhibit, and cry out the name 
of the card turned to the company, taking care to notice the card 
that faces yourself, which change as before, and so on. By this 
means you may go over the whole pack, telling each card as it is 
exposed, without looking at the cards, except when they are held 
between you and the spectators, and when they are anxiously 
looking at them themselves to see whether you are right or not. 

The Changeable Ace. — Take the Ace of Diamonds, and place over 
it with paste or soap, so as to slip off easily, a club cut out of thin 
paper, so as to entirely conceal it. After showing a person the 
card, you let him hold one end of it, and you hold the other, and 
while you amuse him with discourse, you slide off the club. Then 
laying the card on the table, you bid him cover it with his hand ; 
you then knock under the table, and command the club to turn 
into the Ace of Diamonds. 

The Convertible Aces. — This trick is similar to the foregoing. On 
the Ace of Spades fix a Heart, and on the Ace of Heart, a Spade, 
in the manner already described. 



^ y8 PROFESSOR HARTZS 

Show these two Aces to the company ; then, taking the Ace of 
Spades, you desire a person to put his foot upon it, and as you 
place it on the ground draw away the Spade. In like manner you 
place the seeming Ace of Hearts under the foot of another person. 
You then command the two cards to change their places ; and that 
they obey your command, the two persons on taking up their 
cards, will have ocular demonstration. 

The Metamorphosed Cards. — In the middle of a pack place a card 
that is a little wider than the rest, which we will suppose to be the 
Knave of Spades, under which place the Seven of Diamonds, and 
under that the Ten of Clubs. On the top of the pack put cards 
similar to these, and others on which are painted different objects, 
viz : 

First Card A Bird. 

Second Card A Seven of Diamonds. 

Third Card A Flower. 

Fourth Card Another Seven of Diamonds. 

Fifth Card .A Bird. 

Sixth Card A Ten of Clubs. 

Seventh Card A Flower. 

Eighth Card Another Ten of Clubs. 

Then seven or eight indifferent cards, the Knave of Spades, which 
is the wide card, the Seven of Diamonds, the Ten of Clubs, and 
the rest any indifferent cards. 

Two persons are to draw the two cards that are under the wide 
card, which are the Seven of Diamonds and the Ten of Clubs. You 
take the pack in your left hand, and open it at the wide end, as 
you open a book, and tell the person who drew the Seven of Dia- 
monds to place it in that opening. You then blow on the cards, 
and, without closing them, instantly bring the card which is at 
the top, and on which a bird is painted, over that Seven of Dia- 
monds. To do this dexterously, you must wet the middle finger 
of your left hand, with which you are to bring the card to the 
middle of the pack. You then bid the person to look at his card, 
and when he has remarked the change, to place it where it was 
before. Then blow on the cards a second time, and bringing the 
Seven of Diamonds, which is at the top of the pack, to the open- 
ing, you bid him look at his card again, when he will see it is that 
which he drew. You may do the same with all the other painted, 
cards, either with the same person, or with him who drew the 
Ten of Clubs. 

The whole artifice consists in bringing the card at the top of the 
pack to the opening in the middle, by the wet finger, which re- 
quires no great practice. Observe, not to let the pack go out oi 
your hands. For this trick use the Great Wizard's pack of cards. 



THICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



299 



The Gathering of the Clans. — Have in readiness a pack of cards, 
all the cards of which are arranged in successive order — that is to 
say, if it consists of fifty-two cards, every thirteen must be regu- 
larly arranged, without a duplicate of any one of them. After they 
have been cut (do not suffer them to be shuffled) as many times as 
a person may choose, form them into thirteen heaps of four cards 
each, with the colored faces downwards, and put them carefully 
together again. When this is done, the four kings, the four 
knaves, the four queens, and so on, must necessarily be together. 

To Tell the Number of Cards by the Weight. — Take a parcel of cards 
— say forty — and privately insert among them two long cards ; let 
the first be, for example, the fifteenth, and the other the twenty- 
sixth, from the top. Seem to shuffle the cards, and cut them at 
the first long card ; poise those you have taken off in your hand, 
and say, "There must be fifteen cards here;" then cut them at 
the second long card, and say, "There are but eleven here;" and 
poising the remainder, exclaim, "And here are fourteen cards." 
On counting them, the spectators will find your calculations cor- 
rect. 

To Make a Card Pass from One Hand Into the Other. — Take two 
Aces, the one of Spades and the other of Hearts ; then put on that 
of Spades the mark of Hearts, and on that of Hearts the mark of 
Spades ; which you will do easily by splitting a card of each color, 
which you are to cut out with dexterity, in order that the mark be 
very neat ; then rub lightly on the back of the Spade and Heart 
that you have cut a little soap or very white pomatum ; put the 
mark of Hearts on the Ace of Spades, and the mark of Spades on 
the Ace of Hearts, taking care to let the one cover the other com- 
pletely, and make all your preparations before you begin your ex- 
periments. 

Then divide your pack of cards in two parcels, and under each 
parcel put one of your two Aces thus prepared ; afterwards take 
with your right hand the parcel under which is the Ace of Hearts, 
and with your left that where the Ace of Spades is. 

Then show to the company that the Ace of Hearts is on the right 
hand and the Ace of Spades on the left ; and when everybody is 
convinced of it, say, ' ' Ladies and gentlemen, I command the Ace 
of Hearts, which is in my right hand, to pass to my left, and the 
Ace of Spades to take its place." It may be proposed to have 
both the arms tied, to prevent their joining and communicating. 

All the secret consists in making a quick movement when you 
give your command. During this movement you must slip with 
dexterity your little finger over each of the marks, in order to rub 
it off, whereby the marks of Spades and Hearts that were sticking 
to the two cards, by the means explained before, will be dis- 



3W PKOFESSOE HAETZ S 

placed; you then show to the company that the cards have 
obeyed your command, by passing them from the right to the left, 
and from the left to the right, without your hands communicating. 
This trick, done with dexterity and subtlety, will appear very 
singular, although it is very simple. 

The Card Hit Upon by Guess. — Spread part of a pack before a per- 
son, in such a way that only one court card is visible, and arrange 
that it shall appear the most prominent and striking card. You 
desire him to think on one, and observe if he fixes his eye on the 
court card. When he tells you he has determined on one, shuffle 
the cards, and turn them up one by one ; when you come to the 
court card, tell him that is the one. If he does not seem to fix his 
eye on the court card, you should not hazard the experiment, but 
frame an excuse for performing some other amusement. This 
trick should not be attempted with those who are conversant with 
this sort of deception. 

Tips and Downs. — This is a very simple way of ascertaining what 
card a person chooses. When you are playing with the pack, drop 
out the Diamonds, from the Ace to the Ten, and contrive, without 
being perceived, to get all the other cards with their heads in the 
same direction ; then request a person to choose a card ; do not 
pokce one, but let him choose whichever he pleases ; while he has 
it in his hand and is looking at it, carelessly turn the pack in your 
hand, so that the position of the cards may be reversed ; then bid 
him put the card he has chosen into the center of tiie pack ; 
shuffle and cut them, and you may to a certainty know the card 
chosen by its head being upside down, or in a different direction 
from the rest of the pack. Use the Great Wizard's pack for this 
trick. 

To Tell the Card thai a Person Has Touched with His Finger. — This 
amusement has to be performed by confederacy. You previously 
agree with your confederate on certain signs, by which he is to 
denote the suite, and the particular card of each suite ; thus : If 
he touch the first button of his coat, it signifies an Ace ; if the 
second, a King, etc. These preliminaries being settled, you give 
the pack to a person who is near your confederate, and tell him to 
separate any one card from the rest while you are absent, and 
draw his finger once over it. He is then to return you the pack, 
and while you are shuffling the cards, you carefully note the sig- 
nals made by your confederate ; then turning the cards over one by 
one, you directly fix on the card he touched. 

To Discover Any Card in the Pack by its Weight or Smell. — Desire 
any person in the company to draw a card from the pack, and 
when he has looked at it, to return it with its face downwards ; 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 301 

then pretending to weigh or smell it nicely, take notice of any par- 
ticular mark on the back of the card ; which having done, put it 
among tho rest of the cards, and desire tho person to shufile'as he 
pleases ; then giving you the pack, you pretend to weigh each card 
as before, and proceed in this manner till you have discovered the 
card ho had If the long card is used, you can take the pack, 
shuffle the cards in a careless, easy manner, and without looking 
at the pack, hand it to the spectators. 

The Four Accomplices. — Let a person draw four cards from the 
pack, and tell him to think of one of them. When he returns you 
the four cards, dexterously place two of them under the pack, and 
two on the top. Under those at the bottom you place lour cards 
of any sort, and then, taking eight or ten from the bottom cards, 
you spread them on the table, and ask the person if the card he 
fixed on be among them. If he say no, you are sure it is one of 
the two cards on the top. You then pass those two cards to the 
bottom, and drawing off the lowest of them, you ask if that be not 
his card. If he again say no, you take that card up, and bid him 
draw his card from the bottom of the pack. If the person say his 
card is among those you first drew from the bottom, you must dex- 
terously take up the four cards that you put under them, and 
placing those on the top, let the other two be the bottom cards of 
the pack, which draw in the manner before described. 

The Turn-Over Feat. — Having found a card chosen which you 
have previously forced, or any card that has been drawn, which 
you have discovered by the means before described, in order to do 
the feat cleverly, convey the card privately to the top of the pack ; 
get the rest of the cards even with each other, making the edge 
of the top card project a little over the others ; then holding them 
between your finger and thumb, about two feet from the table, let 
them drop, and the top card, which, as has been said, must be the 
one drawn, will fall face uppermost, and all the others with their 
faces towards the table. 

The Nerve Feat. — Force a card, and request the person who has 
taken it to put it in the pack, and shuffle the cards ; then look at 
them again yourself, very closely, find the card, and place it at 
the bottom; cut them in two parts; give him the part containing 
his card at the bottom, and desire him to hold it between his finger 
and thumb just at the corner ; after telling him to held them tight, 
strike them sharply, and they will all fall to the f round, except the 
bottom one, which is the card he has chosen. It is an improve- 
ment in this feat to put the chosen card at the top of the pack, and 
turn the cards face upwards, so that when you strike, the chosen 
party's card will remain in his hand, staring him in the faoe. 



° 02 . PROFESSOR HARTZS 

The Card in a Mirror. — Get a round mirror ; frame size of a card. 
Make the glass in the middle move in the two grooves A B and C 
D ; the quicksilver must be scraped off equal to the size of a card. 




Fig. 4. 
The glass must also be wider than the distance between the frame 
by the width of a card. Then cement a piece of pasteboard, on 
which is a card that must exactly fit the space over the part where 
the quicksilver is rubbed off. This card must at first be placed 
behind the frame. 

Secure the mirror against a partition, through which are to go 
two strings, by pulling which an assistant can easily move the 
glass in the grooves, and consequently make the card appear or 
disappear at pleasure. 

The assistance of a confederate is not absolutely necessary to 
this performance. A table may be placed under the mirror, and 
the string be made to pass through a leg, communicating with a 
small trigger, to be pushed down by the foot, taking occasion to 
dust the glass with your handkerchief, as if it were intended to 
make the card appear the more conspicuous. 

The Card in the Opera-Glass. — Procure an opera-glass two inches 
and a half long ; the tube to be made of ivory so thin that it may 
not appear opaque. Place it in a magnifying glass of such a 
power, and at such a distance, that a card three-quarters of an 
inch long may appear like a common-sized card. 

At the bottom of the tube lay a circle of black pasteboard, to 
which fasten a small card, with the pips or figures on both sides, 
and in such a manner that, by turning the tube, either side of the 
glass may be visible. 

You then offer two cards to two persons similar to the double 
card in the glass. You put them in the pack again, or convey 
them into your pocket ; and after a few flourishing motions you 
tell the persons you have conveyed their cards into the glass ; 
then you show each person his card in the glass by turning it in 
the proper position. 

You may easily induce the parties to draw the two cards you 






TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



wish by placing them first on the top of the pack, and then, by 
making the pass, bringing them to the middle. When you can 
make the pass in a dexterous manner, it is preferable to the long 
card, which obliges the operator to change the pack frequently, 
as, if the same card is always drawn, it may excite suspicion. 

The Magic Tea- Caddies. — Two cards being drawn by different per- 
sons, are put into separate tea-caddies and locked up. The per- 
former changes the cards without touching them, or any confed- 
eracy. The caddies are made with a copper flap, which has a 
hinge at the bottom, opens against the front, where it catches 
under the bolt of the lock, so that, when the lid is shut and locked, 
the flap will fall down upon the bottom ; the performer places two 
cards that he intends to be chosen between the flap and the front, 
which, being lined with green cloth, may be handled without any 
suspicion ; he then desires the first person to put his card into one 
of the oaddies, taking care it be that which contains the contrary 
card to the one that he chose, and the second into the other ; he 
then desires they will lock them up, which unlocks the flaps, covers 
their cards, and, when opened, presents the contrary ones to the 
view of the company, 

Guessing a Card Thought Of. — To do this well you must attend to 
the following directions : Spread out the cards on the right hand 
in such a manner that, in showing them to the audience, not a 
single card is wholly exposed to view, with the exception of the 
King of Spades, the upper part of which should be clearly seen 
without any obstruction, either from the fingers or the other cards. 
When you have thus spread them out — designedly in fact, but ap- 
parently at random — show them to one of the spectators, request- 
ing him to think of a card, and at the same time take care to 
move the hand a little, so as to describe a segment of a circle, in 
order that the audience may catch sight of the King of Spades, 
without noticing that the other cards are all partially concealed. 
Then shuffle the cards, but in doing so you must not lose sight 
of the King of Spades, which you will then lay on the table face 
downward. You may then tell the person who has thought of a 
card that the one in his mind is on the table, and request him to 
name it. Should he name the King of Spades, which he would be 
most likely to do, you will of course turn it up and show it to the 
company, who, if they are not acquainted with the trick, will be 
very much astonished. If, however, he should name some other 
card — say the Queen of Clubs — you must tell him that his memory 
is defective, and that that card could not have been the card he at 
first thought of. Whilst telling him this — which you must do at 
as great length as you can, in order to gain time— shuffle the cards 
rapidly, and apparently without any particular purpose, until your 



304 



PROFESSOR HARTZS 



eye catches the card he has just named (the Queen of Clubs). Put 
it on the top of the pack, and, still appearing to be engrossed with 
other thoughts, go through the iirst false shuffle, to make believe 
that you have no particular card in view. When you have done 
shuffling, take care to leave the Queen of Clubs on the top of the 
pack ; then take the pack in your left hand, and the King of Spades 
in your right, and while dexterously exchanging the Queen of 
Clubs for the King of Spades, say, "What must I do, gentlemen, 
that my trick should not be a failure? What card should I have in 
my right hand?" They will not fail to call out the Queen of Clubs, 
upon which you will turn it up, and they will see that you have 
been successful. This trick, when well executed, always has a 
good effect, whether the spectator thinks of the card you extended 
him to think of, or, from a desire to complicate matters, of some 
other. It, however, requires considerable presence of mind, and 
the power of concealing from your audience what your real ob- 
ject is. ' 

Another method of making the spectator think of any particular 
card is the following : Pass several cards under the eye of the per- 
son selected, turning them over so rapidly that he sees the colors 
confusedly, without being able to distinguish their number or 
value. For this purpose take the pack in your left hand, and pass 
the upper part into your right, displaying the front of the cards to 
the audience, and consequently seeing only the backs yourself. 
Pass one over the other so rapidly that he will not be able to dis- 
tinguish any one of them, until you come to the card which you de- 
sire to force — presuming, of course, that you have made yourself 
acquainted with its position. The card you select ought to be a 
bright-looking and easily distinguishable one, such as the King of 
Hearts or the Queen of Clubs. Contrive to have this card a little 
longer before your audience than the rest, but avoid all appear- 
ance of effort, and let everything be done naturally. During the 
interval watch the countenance of the spectator, in order that you 
may be sure he notices the card you display before him. Having 
thus assured yourself that he has fixed on the card you selected, 
and that he is not acquainted with the trick, you then proceed as 
before. Should you come to the conclusion that he has fixed upon 
some other card, you will then have recourse to the " exchanged 
card" trick, as explained in the previous trick. 

To tell a Card by SmelHng it. — A very clever trick, and one which 
never fails to excite astonishment at an evening party, is to select 
all the court cards when blindfolded ; but before commencing it 
you must take one of the party into your confidence and get him 
to assist you. When all is arranged, you may talk of the strong 
of smell and touch which blind people are said to possess. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 305 

and state that you could, when blindfolded, distinguish the court 
cards from the rest, and profess your willingness to attempt it. 
The process is this : After you have satisfied the company that 
your eyes are tightly bound, take the pack in your hands, and 
holding up one of the cards in view of the whole company, feel the 
face of it with your lingers. II it is a court <*ird, your confeder- 
ate, who should be seated near to you, must tread on your toe. 
You then proclaim that it is a court card, and proceed to the next. 
Should you then turn up a common card your confederate takes no 
notice of it, and you inform the company accordingly ; and so on, 
until you have convinced the company that you really possess the 
power to which you laid claim. 

To Change a Card Locked Up in a Box. — You ask a person to give 
you any card he pleases out of the pack, and you let him put it in- 
to a box which is locked up before the company. You then take 
a few cards, and desire another to draw one and remember it, 
which he does, at:d the cards are laid aside. You now unlock the 
box, and the card which the second person drew is in the box in- 
stead of the one which is locked up. 

A box must be made on purpose with a double bottom ; on the 
false one is laid the card which the first person chose. In locking 
the box, by a secret spring, the false bottom is raised with the 
card, and firmly united to that part where the hinges are. On the 
real bottom lies another card, which had been previously and se- 
cretly deposited there. In making a person draw a card, a dupli- 
cate of this is forced upon him ; for if he attempts to draw another, 
under some pretense you shuffle the cards again, till at last he 
takes the very card you intend for him. This card you know by 
feeling it, it being purposely longer than any of the rest, and is in. 
fact a conjurer's secret card. You must never let one of those 
particular or brief cards remain in a pack when you give it to be 
examined. 

N. B. — This trick should be varied. A dollar note may be 
changed into a five dollar note, etc., but it ought to be something 
which will lie in a narrow compass, in order that the false bottom 
may fall closely into its place. Formerly bird seed was converted 
into a living bird by false lids, but these are more liablo to detec- 
tion than false bottoms ; on the false lid bird seed was glued, and 
the box when shown to the company appeared to be full thereof. 
By drawing up the false lid close to the real, a bird which had 
been previously placed there is then discovered. The false bot- 
toms are certainly preferable. 

The Knaves and the Constable. — Pick the four knaves out of a pack 
of cards, and one of the kings to perform the office of constable. 
Secretly place one of the knaves at the bottom of the pack, and lay 



PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 



the other three with the constable down upon the table. Amuse 
the spectators with a tale of three knaves going to rob a house ; 
one got In at the parlor window (putting a knave at the bottom of 
the pick, taking care not to lii't the pack so high that the one al- 
ready at the bottom can bo seen), one effected his entrance at the 
first-floor window (putting another knave in the middle of the 
pack), and the other by getting on the parapet from a neighboring 
house, contrived to scramble in at the garret window (placing the 
third knave at the top of the pack) ; the constable vowed he would 
capture them, and closely followed the last knave, (putting the 
king likewise upon the top of the pack). You then request as 
many of the company to cut the cards as please, and tell them 
that you have no doubt the constable has succeeded in his object, 
which will be apparent when you spread out the pack in your hands, 
as the king and three knaves will, if the trick is neatly performed, 
be found together. A very little practice only is required to ena- 
ble you to convey a knave or any other card secretly to the bottom 
of the pack. 

To Guess the Spots on Cards at the Bottom of Three Packets, which 
have bee;i made by the Drawer. — Tell a person to choose as he pleases, 
three cards from a euchre pack, informing him that the ace counts 
for eleven, the picture cards for ten, and the others according to 
the number of spots. When he has chosen these three, tell him to 
put them on the table, and to place on each as many cards as spots 
are required to make fifteen. That is to say, in the example, 
eight cards would have to be put on the Seven of Clubs, four cards 



8 


* 





Fig. 5. 



on the Ace, and five above the Ten. Let him return you the rest 
of the pack, and (while pretending to count something in them) 
count how many remain. Add sixteen to this number, and you 
will have the number of spots in the three bottom cards, as may 
bo seen in this example, where twelve cards remain, to which num- 
ber add sixteen, and the amount (twenty-eight) is the number on 
the three cards. 

The Royal Emigrants. — Take the twelve court cards (knaves, 
kings, queens,) from the pack, and place them in three rows, four 
in each, as in Fig. 6. Commencing with the fourth card in the 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



307 



bottom row in the right, take them up longways, one over the 
other, and offer them to any of the company to cut. It is of no 
consequence how often they are divided. Next deal them out in 
four divisions, and the king, queen, and knave of each suit will be 
found together. 




Fig. 6. 



The key to this mystery consists in observing the following ar- 
rangements in the disposition of the cards at first : 

Place one of each suit in the upper row ; begin the next row with 
a card of the same suit that you left off with in the first, and com- 
mence the third or last row with a court card of the same suit that 
you left off with in the second. 

On following the above directions in taking up the cards, the re- 
sult will be as described. 



308 



PROFESSOR HARTZS 



The Magic Opera Glass. — Before you begin to perform this extra- 
ordinary illusion, prepare a table of figures exactly like the follow- 
ing: 



1. 131 


10.132 


19.133 


2. 231 


11.232 


20.233 


3. 331 


12.332 


21.333 


4. 121 


13.122 


22.123 


5. 221 


14.222 


23.223 


6. 321 


15.322 


24.323 


7. Ill 


16.112 


25.113 


8. 211 


17.212 


26.213 


9. 311 


18.312 


27.313 



Fig. 7. 

This table is placed in an opera-glass, so as to be visible. The 
best plan is to cut them out of a book, and paste them on a circu- 
lar piece of card, soaked in oil so as to make it transparent, or 
they may be placed in the crown of your hat, as occasion may 
serve. Take a pack of cards, consisting of twenty-seven only, and 
give them to a person ; desire him to fix on any one, then shuffle 
them, and return the pack to you. 

Place the twenty-seven cards in three heaps, by laying down one 
alternately on each heap; but before you put each card down, show 
it to the person, without seeing it yourself. "When the three equal 
heaps are completed, ask him at what number from twenty-seven 
he will have his card appear, and in which heap ib is. Now look 
at your magic table, and if the first of three numbers which stand 
against that number it is to appear at, be one, put that" heap at 
top ; if the number be two, put it in the middle ; and if three, put it 
at the bottom. Then divide the cards into three heaps in the same 
manner a second and a third time, and his card will be at the num- 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. ouy 

ber he chose. For the sake of making the elucidation perfectly 
clear, we will give an example : Suppose he desire that his card 
shall be tho twentieth from the top, and the first time of making 
the heaps he says it is in the third heap. You then look through 
your opera-glass at the magic table, and see that the first figure 
against the number twenty is two. You therefore put that heap 
in tho middle of the pack. The second and third times you in 
like manner put the heap in which he says it is, at the bottom, the 
succeeding numbers both being three. Now, laying the cards 
down one by one, the twentieth card will be that he fixed on. You 
may, of course, in like manner, show the person his card without 
asking at what number it shall appear, by fixing on any number 
yourself. By the same table a variety of tricks equally surprising, 
can be performed, only requiring the exercise of a little ingenuity. 
To Separate the two colors of a Pack of Cards by One Cut. — To per- 
form this trick, all the cards of one color must be cut a little nar- 
rower at one end than the other. You show the cards, and give 
them to any one that he may shuffle them ; then holding them be- 
tween your hands, one hand being at each extremity, with one 
motion you separate the Hearts and Diamonds from the Spades 
and Clubs. Use the Great Wizard's pack for this trick. 

The Card Discovered Under the Handkerchief. — Let a person draw 
any card from the rest, and put it in the middle of the pack ; 
you make the pass at that place, and the card will consequently 
be at the top ; then placing the pack on the table, cover it with a 
handkerchief, and putting your hand under it, take off the top 
card, and after seeming to search among the cards for some time, 
draw it out. 

This amusement may be performed by putting the cards in an- 
other person's pocket, after the pass is made. 

Several cards may also be drawn and placed together in the 
middle of the pack, and the pass then made. 

The Card Under the Hat. — This wonderful trick is performed in 
the same manner as is directed for finding a card placed under a 
handkerchief. 

At the Game of Whist, What Probability that the Four Honors will be 
in the Hands of any Two Partners. — De Morie, in his "Doctrine of 
Chances, " shows that the chance is nearly 27 to 2 that the partners, 
one of whom deals, will not have the four honors ; that i J a is about 
23 to 1 that the other two partners will not have them ; that it is 
nearly 8 to 1 that they will not be found on any one side ; that one 
may bet about 13 to 7, without disadvantage ; that the partners 
who are first in hand will not count honors ; that about 20 to 7 
may be betted that the other two will not count them ; and, in the 
last place, that it is 25 to 16 that one of the two sides will count 
honors^ or that they will not be equally divided. ^—~ — - — 



310 



PROFESSOR HAETZS 



\y 



Sixteen Cards Being Disposed in Two Rows, to Tell the Card which a 
Person has Thought of. — The cards being arranged in two rows, as A 
and B, desire the person to think of one, and to observe well in 
which row it is. 

































* 









































* 



























































* 
















































































































Let us suppose that the card thought of is in the row A ; take up 
that whole row, in the order in which it stands, and dispose it in 
two rows C and D, on the right and left of the row B ; but in ar- 
ranging them, take care that the first of the row A may be the first 
of the row C ; the second of the row A, the first of the row D ; the 
third of the row A, the second of the row C, and so on ; then ask 
again in vertical rows in which row, C or D, the card thought of, 
is. Suppose it be in C ; take up that row, as well as the row D, 
putting the last at the end of the first, without deranging the order 
of the cards, and observing the rule already given, form into two 
other rows, as seen at E and F ; then ask, as before, in which row 
the card thought of is. Let us suppose it to be in E ; take up this 
row, and the row F, as above directed, and form them into two new 
rows on the right and left of B ; after these operations, the card 
thought of must be the first one of the perpendicular rows H and I ; 
if you therefore ask in which row it is, you may easily point it out, 
having desired them to be shuffled, the better to conceal the arti- 
fice. 

To tell how many Cards a Person takes out of a Pack, and to specify 
each Card. — To perform this, you must so dispose a piquet pack 
of cards, that you can easily remember the order in which they 
are placed. Suppose, for instance, they are placed according to 
the words in the following line : 

Seven Aces, Eight Kings, Nine Queens, and Ten Knaves ; 

and that every card be of a different suit, following each other in 
this order : Spades, Clubs, Hearts, and Diamonds. Then the eight 
first cards will be the Seven of Spades, Ace of Clubs, Eight of 
Hearts, King of Diamonds, Nine of Spades, Queen of Clubs, Ten 
of Hearts, and Knave of Diamonds, and so of the rest. 
You show that the cards are placed promiscuously, and you offer 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 311 

them with their backs upwards to any one, that he may draw what 
quantity he pleases ; you then dexterously look at the card that 
precede 3 and that which follows those he has taken. When he has 
counted the cards, which is not to be done in your presence (and 
in order to give you time for recollection, you tell him to do it 
twice over, that ho may be certain), you then take them from him, 
mix them with a pack, shuffle, and tell him to shuffle. 

During all this time you recollect, by the foregoing line, all the 
cards ho took out ; and as you lay them down, one by one, you 
name each card. 

Unless a person has a most excellent memory, he had better not 
attempt the performance of the above amusement, as the least for- 
getfulness will spoil the whole, and make the operator appear 
ridiculous. 

To Guess the Number of Spots on any Card which a Person has drawn 
from a Pack. — Take the pack of 52 cards, and desire some person to 
draw out one, without showing it. Call the Knave 11, the Queen 

12, the King 13. Then add the spots of the_ first card to those of 
the second ; the last sum to the spots of the" third, and so on, al- 
ways rejecting 12, and keeping the remainder to add to the follow- 
ing card. It is needless to reckon the Kings which are counted 13. 
If any spots remain at the last card, subtract them from 13, and 
the remainder will indictee the spots of the card which has 
been drawn : if the remainder be 11, it has been a Knave ; if 12 a 
Queen ; but if nothing remains it has been a King. The color of 
the King may be known by examining which one among the cards 
is wanting. The trick may thus be explained. In the pack of 
cards are 13 of each suite ; the sum of all the spots of each suite, 
calling the Knave 11, the Queen 12, and the King 13, is seven times 

13, or 91, which is a multiple of 13 ; consequently, the quadruple 
of this sum is a multiple of 13 also ; if the spots then of all the 
cards be added together, always rejecting 13, we must at last find 
the remainder equal to nothing. If a card, the spots of which are 
less than 13, has been drawn from the pack, the difference between 
these spots and 13 will be what is wanting to complete that num- 
ber ; if at the end, then, instead of reaching 12, we reach only 10, 
for example, it is evident that the card wanting is a three, and if 
we reach 13, it is also evident that the card wanting is equivalent 
to 13, or a King. 

To Change a Pack of Cards into Various Pictures. — Take a pack of 
cards, and paint the backs of one-half of the pack with what fig- 
ures you think fit — as men, birds, women, flowers, etc. Also, paint 
the faces of the other half of the cards in the same manner ; thus 
you will have a complete pack of odd pictures, and may, by show- 
ing the faces of that part of the pack whose backs only have been 



312 PEOFESSOE HAETZ'S 

painted, and then by a momentary shuffle, apparently transform 
them into a set of grotesque figures, produce much amusement. 

Another Method. — Take a dozen cards or more, and draw a line 
from the right hand upper corner to the left hand lower corner 
of the face of each of them ; they will thus Le all equally divided. 
Then paint part of some odd figure on the right division of each 
card, leaving the left untouched. By a little dexterity, you may 
now seem to transform a set of common cards into a painted pack, 
and by dexterous shuffling can bring into view a series of gro- 
tesque figures that will throw your audiences into convulsions of 
laughter. 

To Let Twenty Persons Draw Twenty Cards, and Make Each Draw 
the Same. — Let any person draw a card from a pack, and put it in 
the pack again, but where you know where to find it again ; shuffle 
the cards as before directed ; then let another person draw a card, 
and be sure he takes the same the other did ; proceed in the same 
manner with all the persons but the one who may be last, who is 
to draw another card, which also return to the pack, and shuffle 
till you have brought both the cards together. Then, showing the 
last card to the company, the other will show the trick. 

To Make a Card Jump Out of the Pack and Run on the Table. — This 
feat, if well managed, will appear marvelous. Having forced a 
card upon one of the company, after shuffling it up with the rest 
of the pack, you will know the card by feeling. You then take a 
piece of wax and put it under the thumb nail of your right hand, 
and by this wax you fasten an end of a hair to your thumb, and 
the other to the chosen card ; spread the cards upon the table, and 
make use of some magic words, when, by drawing about your 
right hand, the chosen card is conducted round the table. 

To Tell all the Cards Without Seeing Them. — Another good parlor 
trick is to tell the names of all the cards when their backs are 
turned towards you. Perhaps this is one of the best illusions that 
can be performed with cards, as it not only brings the whole pack 
into use, but can never fail in the hands of an ordinary intelligent 
operator. This trick, which is founded on the science of numbers, 
enables you to tell every card after they have been cut as often as 
your audience please, although you only see the backs of them. It 
is thus performed : A pack of cards are distributed face uppermost 
on a table, and you pick them up in the following order — G, 4, 1, 7, 
5, king, 8, 10, 3, knave, 9, 2, queen. Go through this series until 
you have picked up the whole of the pack. It is not necesscry 
that you should take up the whole of one suit before commencing 
another. In order that the above order may not be forgotten, the 
following words should be committed to memory : 



TEICB3 AND DIVEKSIONS WITH CAEDS. 313 

6 4 1 . 7 5 

The sixty-fourth regiment beats the seventy-fifth; up starts 

king 8 10 3 knave 9 2 

the king, with eight thousand and three men and ninety-two 
queen 
women. 

The cards being thus arranged, the cards must be handed to the 
company to cut ; they may cut the cards as often as they like, but 
it must bo understood that they do it whist fashion — that is, by 
taking off a portion of the cards, and placing the lower division on 
what was formerly the upper one. You then take the pack in your 
hand, and without letting your audience perceive, cast a glance at 
tho bottom card. Having done this — which you may do without 
any apparent effort — you have the key of tho whole trick. You 
then ^deal out the cards in the ordinary way in 13 different sets, 
putting four cards to each set — in other words, you deal out the 
first cards singly and separately, and then place tho fourteenth 
card above the first set, tho next upon the second set, and so on 
throughout, until you have exhausted the whole pack. You may 
be certain now that each one of these thirteen sets will contain 
four cards of the same denomination — thus, the four eights will be 
together, and so with the four queens, and every other denomina- 
tion. Tho thirteenth or last set will be of tho same denomination 
as tho card jit the bottom, which you contrived to see, and as they 
will bo placed exactly in the reverse order of that in which you 
first of all picked them up, you may without difficulty calculate of 
what denomination each of the sets consists. For example, sup- 
pose an eight was the bottom card, you would find after a little 
calculation that after being dealt out in the manner above de- 
scribed, they would be placed in the following order : King, 5, 7, 1, 
4, G, Queen, 2, 9, Knave, 3, 10, 8 ; and repeating in your own mind 
the words which you have committed to memory, and reckoning 
the cards backwards, you would say — ■ 

8 10 3 knave 9 2 queen 

Eight thousand and three men and ninety-two women; 

G 4 1 7 5 

sixty-fourth regiment beats the seventy-fifth; up starts the 
king 
king with, etc. _ 

You observe the same rule whatever the bottom card may be. 

To Tall a Card Thought of, and Name its Position in the Pack. — By 
a certain pro-arranged combination of cards, the conjurer is en- 
abled apparently to guess, but in reality to calculate, not only tho 
C-ird- that is thought of by any member of. tho company, but to tell 
ito position iathe patek . You take thepack aitd. ptfeseajt it to" one 



ZU PKOFESSOE HA»TZ's 

of the audience, desiring him to shuffle the cards well, and also, 
if he chooses, to give them to another person to shuffle the second 
time. You then cause the pack to be cut by several persons, after 
which you select one out of the company whom you request to take 
the pack, think of a card, and fix in his memory, not only the card 
he has thought of, but also its position in the pack, by counting 1, 
2, 3, 4, and so on from the bottom of the pack, as far as, and 
including, the card thought of. You may offer to go into another 
room while this is being done, or remain with your eyes bandaged, 
assuring the company that, if they desire it, you will announce 
beforehand the number at which the card thought of will be found. 
ITow, supposing the person selecting the card steps at No. 13 from 
the bottom, and that this 13th card is the Queen of Hearts, and 
supposing also that the number you have put down beforehand is 
24, you will return to the room or remove your handkerchief, as 
the case may be, and without putting any question to the person 
-who has thought of a card, you ask for the pack, and rest your 
nose upon it, as if you would find out the secret by smelling. 
Then, putting your hands behind your back or under the tatle, so 
that they cannot be seen, you take away from the bottom of the 
pack 23 cards — that is, one fewer than the number you marked 
down beforehand — and place them on the tcp, taking great care 
not to put one more or less, as inaccuracy in this respect would 
certainly cause the trick to fail. You then return the pack to the 
person who thought of a card, requesting him to count the cards 
from the top, beginning from the number of the card he thought of. 
Thus, if that card were the thirteenth, he will commence counting 
fourteen, and so on. When he has called twenty-three stop him, 
tell him that the number you marked clown was twenty-four ; and 
that the twenty-fourth card, which he is about to take up, is the 
Queen of Hearts, which he will find to be correct. 

Observe and be sure and have the number you name greater than 
that of the first position of the card in the pack ; for instance, 
twenty-four is greater than thirteen. 

To Cliange the Card by Word of Command. — It at first sight seems 
singular that any one should be able even to appear to change a 
card at word of command ; yet it can easily be done, and under 
different titles, and with slight variations ; the trick is constantly 
performed in public. It is clone as follows : 

You must have two cards of the same sort in the pack, for exam- 
ple a duplicate of the King of Spades. Place one next the bottom 
card, and one at the top. Shuffle the cards without displacing 
those three, and show a person that the bottom card is the Seven 
Of. Hearts. This card you dexterously slip aside with your finger, 
which you havo previously wetted, and taking the King of Spades 
fsom the bottom, which the person supposes to be the Seven of 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



315 



Hearts, lay it on the table, telling him to cover it with his* hand. 
Shuffle the cards without displacing the first and last card, and 
shifting the other King of Spades from the top to the bottom, show 
it to another person. You then draw that -privately away, and 
taking the bottom card, which will then be the Seven of Hearts, 
you lay that on the table, and tell the second person (who believes 
it to be the King of Spades) to cover it with his hand. You then 
command the cards to change places, and when the two parties 
take off their hands and turn up the cards, they will see, to their 
great astonishment, that your commands are obeyed. 

" Twin-Card" Trick. — Another trick performed by means of "twin" 
or duplicate cards, as in the previous case, is to show the same 
card apparently on the bottom and at the top of the pack. One of 
these duplicate cards may be easily obtained. In fact, the pat- 
tern card which accompanies every pack may be made available 
for that purpose. Let us suppose, then, for a moment that you 
have a duplicate of the Queen of Clubs. You place both of them 
at the bottom of the pack, and make believe to shuffle them, tak- 
ing care, however, that these two keep their places. Then lay the 
pack upon the table, draw out the bottom card, show it, and place 
it on the top. You then command the top card to pass to the bottom, 
and on the pack being turned up the company will see with sur- 
prise that the card which they had just seen placed upon the top is 
now at the bottom. 

Ten Cards being arranged in a Circle, to Tell that which any one 
Thought of. — Place the first ten cards of any suite in a circular 
form, as in Fig. 7, the Ace being counted as one. Eequest a per- 
son to think of a number or card, and to touch also any other 



V 


* 


* * 
*** 


V V 


.<: 



♦ ♦ 

♦ 







Fig. 7. 



3-6 . PEOFESSOR HARTZ's 

number or card ; desire him to add to the number of the card he 
touched the number of the cards laid out — that is, ten ; then bid 
him count that sum backwards, beginning at the card he touched, 
and reckoning that card at the number he thought of ; when he 
will thus end it as the card or number he first thought of, and 
thereby enable you to ascertain what that was. For example, sup- 
pose he thought of the number three, and touched the sixth card, 
if ten be added to six it will, of course, make sixteen ; and if he 
count that number from the sixth card, the one touched, in a ret- 
rograde order, reckoning three on the sixth, four on the fifth, five 
on the fourth, six on the third cards, and so on, it will be found to 
terminate on the third card, which will therefore show you the 
number the person thought of. When the person is counting the 
numbers, he should not, of course, call them out aloud. 

To Produce a Card from a Nut or Cherry Stone. — Burn a hole 
through the shell of a nut or cherry stone, and also through the 
kernel, with a hot bodkin, or bore it with an awl, and with a 
needle pick out the kernel, so that the hole in it may be as wide as 
the hole of the shell ; then write the name of a card on a piece of 
fine paper, roll it up hard, put it into the nut or cherry stone, stop 
the hole up with some beeswax, and rub it over with with a little 
dust, and it will not be perceived ; then, while some bystander 
draws a card, observe, "It is no matter what card you draw ;" and 
if you use the cards well, you will offer him and he will receive a 
similar card to that you have rolled up in the nut. Give him the 
nut and a pair of crackers, and he will find the name of the card 
he drew rolled up in its kernel. 

To Burn a Card, and afterwards find it in a Watch. — This is a trick 
out of which the professors of the art of legerdemain make much 
capital. In order to carry it out successfully, it is necessary to ob- 
serve the following directions : You, in the first place, borrow from 
the spectators three watches, which are placed in boxes resembling 
dice-boxes, and then laid upon a table and covered with a napkin. 
You then hand a pack of cards to one of the company, and he selects 
one at random, and it is thereupon entirely burnt, and the ashes 
put into a box. Shortly afterwards the box is opened, and the 
spectators are puzzled to -find that the ashes are not there. The 
three watches are then brought out and put on a plate, and one of 
the company, at your request, selects one and opens it ; and the 
spectators perceive, with even more astonishment than before, that 
a portion of the burnt card is below the glass of the watch, and 
that in the watch-case underneath the. watch is a miniature fac- 
simile of the card destroyed. It is time now that we instructed 
our readers as to the modus operandi by which this entertaining 
trick is performed. Having informed your confederate — for it is 
necessary that you should have one of the company in your confi- 
dence — of the suite and denomination of the card chosen, he 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



317 



stretches forward his arm and takes one of the watches from the 
table, and, unobserved by the rest of the company, deposits in it 
what is necessary. The napkin which covers the watches must be 
supported by bottles or articles of a similar shape, otherwise your 
confederate woul I not be ablj to take away the watch without be- 
ing detected. The ashes of the burnt card are made to disappear 
from the box by having a double lid, so arranged that when the 
box is closed the upper lid will fall upon the ashes ; and as it fits 
closely to the bottom, the deceived spectator will think that the 
ashes have really vanished, and that the remnants are in process 
of being formed afresh into the miniature card which is discover- 
ed in the watch. 

The Card in the Egg. — Before commencing this trick, you must 
provide yourself with a hollow stick about ten inches long and 
three-quarters of an inch in diameter. You must also have an- 
other round stick to fit this hollow, and slide in it easily, with a 
knob to prevent its going through the tube, which must be open at 
both ends. The stick which fits the tube must be of the full 
length of the tube, exclusive or the knob. 

Having steeped a card in water for twenty minutes, you peel off 
the face of it, and double it up twice, so that it becomes just one- 
quarter the size of an ordinary card. Then roll it up tightly, and 
thrust it up the tube till it becomes even with the bottom. You 
then thrust in the stick till it just touches the card. 

You now take a pack of cards, and request one of the company 
to draw one ; but be sure to let it be a similar one to that you have 
in the stick. You can do this by forcing. As soon as it is returned 
to the pack you shuffle the cards, and while you are shuffling you 
let the card fall into your lap. Then calling for a number of eggs, 
you request some person in the company to select one of them. 
In order that it may not be suspected that you have a confederate, 
you request any two persons in the company to volunteer to choose 
an egg each, and then to decide between themselves which shall con- 
tain the card. Having done this, and the company seeing that 
the shell of the egg has not been broken, you place the egg in a 
saucer, break it with your wand, and pressing the knob with the 
palm of your right hand, the card will be driven into the egg. You 
may then show it to the spectators. 

Another way to perform this trick is as follows ; 

Take a card, the same as your long card, and, rolling it up very 
close, put it in an eqg, by making a hole as small as possible, and 
which you are to fill up carefully with white wax. You then offer 
the long card to be drawn, and when it is replaced in the pack you 
shuffle the cards several times, giving the egg to the person who 
drew the card ; and while he is breaking it, you privately with- 
draw the long card, that it may appear on examing the cards to 
Jtiave gone from the pack into the egg. This may be rendered 



318 



PKOFESSOR HAETZ S 



more surprising by having several eggs, in each of which is placed 
a card of the same sort, and then giving the person the liberty to 
choose which egg he thinks fit. 

This diversion may be still further diversified by having, as 
most public performers have, a confederate, who is previously to 
know the egg in which the card is placed ; for you may then break 
the other eggs, and show that the only one that contains a card is 
that in which you directed it to be. 

The Card in the Pocket-Book. — A confederate is previously to know 
the card you have taken from the pack and put into your pocket- 
book. You then present the pack to him, and force one in the 
usual way (which we will suppose to be the King of Hearts), and 
place the pack on the table. You then ask him the name of the 
card, and when he says the King of Hearts, you ask him if he is 
not mistaken, and if he be sure that the card is in the pack ; when 
he replies in the affirmative, you say: "It might be there when 
you looked over the cards, but I believe it is now in my pocket" ; 
then desire a third person to put his hand in your pocket and take 
out your book ; when it is opened the card will appear. 

To Pick Out a Card Thowjht Of, Blindfold. — Take twenty-one 
cards and lay them down in three rows, with their faces upwards ; 
when you have laid out three, begin again at the left hand, and 
lay one card upon the first, and so on to the right hand ; then 
begin on the left hand again, and so go on until you have laid out 
the twenty-one carus in three heaps, at the same time requesting 
any one to think of a card. When you have laid them out, ask 
him which heap his card is in ; then lay that heap in the middle 
between the other two. This done, lay them out again in three 
heaps as before, and again request him to notice where his noted 
card goes, and put that heap in the middle, as before. Then 
taking up the cards with their backs toward you, take off th3 
uppermost card, and reckon it one ; take off another, which reckon 
two ; and thus proceed till you come to the eleventh, which will 
invariably prove to be the card thought of. You must never lay 
out your cards less than three times, but as often above that num- 
ber as you please. This trick may be done without your seeing 
the cards at all, if you handle and count them carefully. To diver- 
sify the trick, you may use a different number of cards, but the 
number chosen must be divisible by three, and the middle card, 
after they have been thrice dealt as directed, will always be the 
one thought of ; for instance, if done with fifteen cards, it must be 
the eighth, and so on ; when the number is even, it must be the 
exact half ; as, if it be twenty-four, the card thought of will be the 
twelfth, etc. 

The Card Found Out by the Point cf a Sword. — "When a card has 
been drawn, you place it under the long card, and by shuffling 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 319 

them dexterously you bring it to the top of the pack. Then lay or 
throw the pack on the ground, observing where the top card lies. 
A handkerchief is then bound round your eyes, which ought to bo 
done by a confederate, in such a way that you can see the ground. 
A sword is then put in your hand, with which you touch several of 
the cards, as if in doubt, but never losing sight of the top card, in 
which at last you fix the point of the sword, and present to the 
party who drew it. 

To Name the Card Upcn Which One or More Pet-sens Fix. — Thero 
must be as many different cards shown to each person as there are 
cards to choose; so that, if there are three persons, you must 
show three cards to each person, telling the first to retain one in 
his memory You then lay the three cards down, and show three 
others to the second person, and three others to tho third. Next, 
take up the first person's cards, and lay them down separately one 
by one, with their faces upwards ; place the second person's card 
over the first, and the third over the second's, so that there will be 
one card in each parcel belonging to each person. 

Then ask each of them in which parcel his card is, for the first 
person's will always be first, the second person's the second, and 
the third person's the third, in that parcel where each says his 
card is. This amusement may be performed with a single person, 
by letting him fix on three, four, or more cards. In this case you 
must show him as many parcels as he is to choose cards, and 
every parcel must consist of that number out of which he is to fix 
on one, and you then proceed as before, he telling you the parcel 
that contains each of his cards. 

The Vanishing Card. — Divido the pack, placing one-half in tho 
palm of tho leit hand, face downwards, and taking the remainder 
of the pack ia the right hand ; hold them between the thumb and 
threo first fingers, taking care to place the cards upright, so that, 
the edges of those in your right hand may rest upon the back oi' ' 
those in the left, thus forming a right angle with them. In this 
way the lour fingers cf the left hand touch the last of the upright 
cards in your right hand. It i.3 necessary that the cards should be 
placed in this position, and that once being attained the rest of tho 
trick is easy. These preliminaries having been gone through, or.o 
of tho company, at your request, examines the top card of the half 
pack that rests in tho palm of your left hand, and then replaces it. 
Having done tins, you request him to look at it again, and to his 
astonishment it will have vanished, and another card will appear 
in its place. In order to accomplish this, having assumed tho 
position already described, you must damp the tips of the four fin- 
gers that rest against the last card of the upright set in your right 
hand. When tho person who has chosen a card replaces it, you 
must raise the upright cards in your right hand very quickly, and 
the card will then adhere to the damped fingers of your left hand. 



3*° PEOFESSOE HAETZ S 

As you raise the upright cards, you must close your left hand skill- 
fully, and you will thereby place the last of the upright cards — 
which, as we have explained, adheres to the fingers of your left 
hand — upon the top of the cards in the palm of your left hand, and 
when you request the person who first examined it to look at it 
again, he will observe that it has been changed. Eapidity and 
manual dexterity are required for the performance of this capital 
sleight-of-hand trick. 

To Produce a Mouse from a Pack of Cards. — Have a pack of cards 
fastened together at the edges, but open in the middle like a box, 
a whole card being glued on as a cover, and many loose ones 
placed above it, which require to be dexterously shuffled, so that 
the entire may seem a real pack of cards. The bottom must like- 
wise be a whole card, glued to the box on one side only, yielding 
immediately to exterior pressure, and serving as a door by which 
you convey the mouse into the box. Being thus prepared, and 
holding the bottom tight with your hand, require one of the com- 
pany to place his open hands together, and tell him you mean to 
produce something very marvelous from this pack of cards ; place 
the cards then in his hands, and while ycu engage his attention in 
conversation, take the box in the middle, throw the pack aside, 
and the mouse will remain in the hands of the person who held the 
cards. 

To Send a Card Through a Table. — Bequest one of the company to 
draw a card from the pack, examine it, and then return it. Then 
make the pass — or if you cannot make the pass, make use of the 
long card — and bring the card chosen to the top of the pack, and 
shuffle by means of any of the false shuffles before described with- 
out losing sight of the card. After shuffling the pack several 
times, bring the card to the top again. Then place the pack on the 
table about two inches from the edge near which you are sitting, 
and having previously slightly dampened the back of your right 
hand, you strike the pack a sharp blow and the card will adhere to 
it. You then put your right hand very rapidly underneath the 
table, and taking off with your left hand the card which has stuck 
to your right hand, you show it to your audience, who will at once 
recognize in it the card that was drawn at the commencement of 
the trick. You must be careful while performing this trick not to 
allow any of the spectators to get behind or at the side of the table, 
but keep them directly in front, otherwise the illusion would be 
discovered. 

To Change Four Knaves or Kings Held in Your Hand into Blank 
Cards, or into Four Aces. — You must have cards made for the pur- 
pose of this feat — half cards, as they may be properly termed — 
that is, one half kings or knaves, and the other half aces. When 
you lay the aces one over the other, nothing but the kings or 



TKICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



321 



knaves will be seen.' Then turning the kings or knaves downwards, 
t\e four aces will be seen. You must have two perfect cards, one 
a king or knave, to cover one of the aces, or else it will be seen ; 
and the other an ace to lay over the kings or knaves. When you 
wish to make them all blank cards, lay the cards a little lower, 
and, by hiding the aces, they will all appear white on both sides. 
You may then ask the company which they choose ; exhibit kings, 
aces, or blanks as required. 

The Locomotive Card. — This will appear a marvelous trick if well 
performed. Take a pack of cards, and let any person draw one 
from it; tell him to look on the card, that he may know it again, 
and then put it into the pack. Hold the pack so that the person 
may place his card in it, making sure that you hold the card next 
to the bottom open for him to place his card in, manoeuvring the 
cards well, that he may imagine lie has placed his card in the middle 
of the pack ; by this means you know where the card is, and, when 
you are shuffling them, you can very easily place the' particular 
card on the top of the pack. Then take a piece of wax with a long 
hair attached to it, fasten it to the bottom of your vest, (it must 
be prepared before you commence the trick,) have the wax placed 
under the thumb-nail of your right hand, and stick it to the card 
that was drawn ; spread the cards on the table ; then asking the 
person to name the card he selected, command it to move from the 
pack to your hand. By shifting your position backwards, the card 
will move also. 

The Prestldigitorial Metamorphosis. — Having shuffled a pack, se- 
lect the eight of each suit, and also the Deuce of Diamonds. 
Hold the four Eights in the left hand, and the Deuce in the right ; 
then having shown them to the company, take in the Deuce among 
the four eights in the left hand, and throw out one of the Eights. 
Give them to be blown upon, when they will be turned into four 
Deuces. You will now exchange one of the Deuces for the Eight ; 
and giving them again to be blown upon, they will appear all black 
cards. Again take the Deuce and discard the Ace ; blow upon 
them again, and they all turn red. And now, for the last time, 
take in the Ace and throw away the Deuce, and they will be found 
to be four Eights and a Deuce, as they were at first. 

To perform this ingenious deception you procure five plain cards, 
the size of playing cards, which you paint to . resemble the five 
cards as in Fig. 



1 




2 




3 




4 




5 


♦ 




* * 




* 




f 




* 




*i* 


















*** 




♦ 




A 




* 


♦ 




•*• * 




♦ ♦ 






t\ 



Fig, 8. 



322 



PKOFESSOR HAETZ'S 




Fig. 9. 



Mixing th e m with a common pack, you next, under the pretense 
of selecting the Eight of each suit and the 
Deuce of Diamonds, take out your false cards, 
(Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4,) which you hold asunder, and 
taking No. 5 in your right hand, you show 
your company that there are four Eights and 
the Deuce of Diamonds ; you should also hold 
them up to the light to let them see that they 
are not double, which you may do without 
fear of detection, as the lower part of the 
cards will be so opaque that the deficiency 
of the pips or spots will not be perceptible. 
You may place the Deuce of Diamonds be- 
tween Nos. 3 and 4, the latter of which you 
may withdraw and throw on the table ; but 
take care not to do so until you have first 
taken in No. 5, (the Deuce of Diamonds,) 
else the deficiency of spots on No. 3 will cause the trick to be dis- 
covered ; you then close these four cards together, and taking 
them at the top with the fingers and thumb of the right hand, hav- 
ing the thumb on the face of the cards and the fingers on the back, 
hold them out, their faces turned towards the floor, and desire 
some person to blow upon them. When this has been done, give 
your wrist a turn, so that the top part of the cards will now be at 
the bottom — in fact, you turn the cards upside down ; hold them 
up to your mouth, pretending to breathe on them, which not only 
tends to deceive your company, but gives you time to arrange your 
cards, which you do by opening them out to the right hand, when 
they will appear to be four Deuces ; you may again hold them up to 
the light to show that they are single cards. 

The next change, although more difficult to accomplish, is de- 
cidedly the best of the whole, inasmuch as the cards are never 
shut up, nor removed for one moment from 
under the eyes. Having shown them to be 
four Deuces, you take in the Eight of Clubs, 
and place it between Nos. 3 and 5 ; withdraw 
No. 6, and holding it up to the light, you de- 
sire the company to observe that the cards are 
not double, and while eyes are turned to this 
card, turn your left hand containing the other 
four, with its back towards the ceiling and 
the faces of the cards towards the floor, 
keeping them in a horizontal position ; throw 
down the Deuce of Diamonds, and continue 
your remarks on the cards not being double, 
saying, " You perceive any of them will bear 
examination ;" at the same time take hold of 
the card next but one to your right hand with 




Fig. 10. 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CAEDS. 323 

tho fingers and thumb of that hand, taking care to have the thumb 
above and the fingers underneath tho card ; take it out, still keep- 
ing it in a horizontal position, and while making the above obser- 
vation, turn it round with tho forefinger of the right hand, until 
you have got hold of tho other end, when, beforo anybody has 
time to tako hold of it, return it to tho situation from which you 
took it, taking care that you put it exactly in tho same angle. 

You now hold those cards out, with tho backs upwards, to be 
blown upon; but you have no occasion to shut them up at this 
change, as, if you turn them over, it will bo perceived that they 
are nil black ; you now take in the Deuce of Diamonds as you did 
at the first change, and discard the Eight of Clubs ; close them up, 
and taking them by the top, hold them out to be blown upon ; 
give your wrist a turn as before, open them out to yourself while 
pretending to breathe upon them, when, on showing them to your 
company, they will all be red ; you now again take in the Eight of 
Clubs, throwing out tho Deuce of Diamonds on the table, with its 
face downwards, and taking hold of the card next but one to your 
right hand, throw it down in the same manner ; whilst performing 
this latter part you should say, " I take in the Eight and I throw 
out the Deuces — oh ! I beg pardon — only one of tho Deuces ;" at 
the same moment' tike up the last card you threw out by the oppo- 
site end to that which you formerly held it by, and return it to its 
own place again, taking particular care of the angle : let them be 
blown upon, when they will be found to be four Eights and a Deuce, 
as they were at first. 

Should any persons now desire to examine the cards, tell them 
you can only give them one at a time ; breathe upon the Deuce of 
Diamonds and present it to them ; when they have returned it to 
you, and beforo they have time to ask for another, hand them tho 
Eight of Clubs, saying that perhaps they would like to examine a 
black card ; they seeing you so confident will scarcely ask for any 
more. 

The Qneens' Dig for Diamonds. — Taking the pack in your hands 
you separate from it the four Kings, Queens, Knaves, and Aces, 
and also four common cards of each suit. Then laying the four 
Queens, face upwards, in a row on the table, you commence tell- 
ing your story somewhat after this fashion : 

These are four Queens, who set out to seek for diamonds, (place 
four common cards of the Diamond suit half over the Queens). 
As they intend to dig for the diamonds, they each take a spade, 
(place four common Spades half over the Diamonds). The kings, 
their husbands, knowing their intention, set a guard of honor to 
protect them from danger, (here lay the four Aces half over tho 
Spades). But lest they should neglect their duty they resolve to 
set out themselves, (.lay the four Kings half over the four Aces). 



324 PEOFESSOE HAETZ'S 

Now there were four robbers, who, being apprised of the queens' 
intentions, determined to waylay and rob them on their return 
(lay the four Knaves half over the four Kings). They were each 
armed with a club, (lay four Clubs over the four Knaves,) and not 
knowing how the four queens would be protected, it was necessary 
they should each possess a stout heart, (lay four Hearts over the 
four Clubs). 

You have now placed the whole of the cards on the table, in four 
columns ; you then pack the cards in the first column together, 
beginning at your left hand, keeping them in the order in which 
you laid them on, and place them on the table face downwards. 
Pack up the second column in the same way, lay them on the first, 
and so on with the other two. 

You now give the cards to be cut by as many persons as please, 
and as often as they choose ; and it would have a good effect if you 
were to give the cards what is termed a shuffle-cut — that is, to give 
them the appearance of being shuffled, but, in fact, only to cut 
them quickly several times. You then commence laying them out 
again in four columns, as you did at first, when it will be found 
that they all come in their proper order again. You next desire 
any one to try if he can do it ; when the chances are exactly seven 
to one that he does not succeed ; but if he should, you request him 
to try it again, when he is almost certain to fail, unless he knows 
the secret, which merely consists in having the cards cut until a 
common card of the Heart suit remains at the bottom of the pack. 

To Make a Card which a Person Has Drawn Dance on the Wall. — 
One of the company is desired to draw a card, which you shuffle 
again with the others ; and it not being found in the pack, you 
then order it to appear on the wall. The very card which was 
drawn instantly obeys ; then advancing by degrees, and according 
to orders, it ascends in a straight line from right to left, and dis- 
appears on the top of the wall. Soon after it appears again, and 
continues to dance upon a horizontal line. 

Explanation. — This trick, which is very simple, can only be 
exhibited on a stage. Having made one of the company draw a 
forced card (see explanation to the card locked up in a box,) you 
shuffle it with the others, but slip it away, and then submit the 
pack to the company to be examined. The instant you order it to 
appear on the wall, your confederate, who is behind, very expertly 
draws a thread, and at the end of which is fastened a similar card, 
which comes out from behind a glass (suppose it was the Ace of 
Hearts was drawn, being the forced card, another Ace of Hearts ap- 
pears on the wall). Another thread, drawn very tight, on which 
it slides by the means of some very small rings fastened, running 
thereon, prescribes its motion and progress. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 325 

To Make a Card Spring Up Into the Air from the Pack, Without 
Being Touched. — One of the company having drawn a card, the 
drawn card is shuffled up with the rest of the pack. The pack is 
then put into a kind of square spoon placed upright upon a bottle, 
which serves as a pedestal, and at the company's pleasure the card 
which was drawn instantly flies up in the air. 

Explanation. — Having forced a card upon one of the company, 
(see explanation to the exchange of card,) the pack must then be 
placed in the spoon, so that the chosen card may lean on a pin 
bent in the form of a hook. This pin is fastened to a thread, and 
ascending through the pack leans upon the upper end of the spoon ; 
then it descends under the stage through the table. In this dispo- 
sition the confederate cannot pull the thread without dragging 
along with it the hook and card, which causes it to be perceived as 
flying in the air. The thread slides upon the blunt edge of the 
spoon as easily as if it ran in a pulley. In order to place the cards 
in the spoon quick enough that the company may perceive no 
preparation, care must be taken that another pack is dexterously 
put on the table. The chosen card in the other, with the hook and 
thread, must be previously prepared as described. 

The Card in the Eing. — Get a ring made of any metal, in which is 
set a large, transparent stone or piece of glass, to the bottom of 
which is fastened a small piece of black silk ; under the silk is to 
be the figure of a small card ; and the silk must be so constructed 
that it may be either drawn aside or spread, by turning the stone 
round. 

You then cause a person to draw the same sort of card as that at 
the bottom of the ring ; and tell him to burn it in the candle. Now, 
the ring being so constructed that the %ilk conceals the card 
underneath it, you first show him the ring, that he may see it is 
not there, and tell him you will make it appear ; then rubbing the 
ashes of the card on the ring, you manage to turn the stone or 
glass dexterously round, and exhibit to him the small card at the 
bottom. 

To Name the Rank of a Card that a Person Has Drawn from a Piquet 
Pack. — The rank of a card means whether it be an Ace, King, 
Queen, etc. You therefore first fix a certain number to each card 
— thus, you calt~the King four, the Queen three, the Knave two, the 
Ace one, and the others according to the number of their pips. 

Shuffle the cards, and let a person draw any one of them ; then 
turning up the remaining cards, you add the number of the first to 
that of the second, the second to the third, and so on, till it 
amounts to ten, which you then reject, and begin again ; or if it 
bo more, reject the ten, and carry the remainder to the next card, 
and so on to the last ; to the last amount add four, and subtract 



326 PEOFESSOE HAETZS 

that sum from ten if it be less, or from twenty if it be more than 
ten, and the remainder will be the number of the card that was 
drawn ; as for example, if the remainder be two, the card drawn 
was a Knave ; if three a Queen, and so on. 

To Tell the Card that may be Noted. — Take several cards, sa^ ten 
or twelve ; remember how many there are, and hold them up with 
their backs towards you ; open four or live of the uppermost, and, 
while you hold them out, request some person to note a card, and 
tell you whether it is the first, second or third from the top ; when 
he has informed you, shut up the cards in your hand, place the 
remainder of the pack upon them, and tap their ends and sides 
upon the table, so as to make it seem impossible to find the card 
in question. It may, however, be easily found thus : Subtract the 
number of cards you had in your hand from fifty-two, which is the 
number of the pack, and to the remainder add the number of the 
noted card, and you will instantly have the number of the noted 
card from the top. 

To Tell the Amount of the Numbers of any Two Cards Drawn from a 
Common Pack. — Each court card in this case counts for ten, and the 
other cards according to the number of their pips. Let the person 
who draws the cards add as many more cards to each of those he 
has drawn as will make each of their numbers twenty-five. Then 
take the remaining cards in your hand, and, seeming to search for 
some card among them, tell them over to yourself, and their num- 
ber will be the amount of the two cards drawn. 

For example : Suppose a person has drawn a Ten and a Seven ; 
then he must add fifteen cards to the first, to make the number 
twenty-five, and' eighteen to the last, for the same reason. Now, 
fifteen and eighteen make thirty-three, and the two cards them- 
selves make thirty-five, which, deducted from fifty-two, leaves sev- 
enteen, which must be the number of the remaining cards, and 
also of the two cards drawn. 

You may perform this amusement without touching the cards, 
thus : 

Let the person who has drawn the two cards deduct the number 
of each of them from twenty-six, which is half the number of the 
pack ; and, after adding the remainders together, let him tell you 
the amount, which you privately deduct from fifty-two, the total 
number of all the cards, and the remainder will be the amount of 
the two cards. 

Example : Suppose the two cards to be as before, Ten and Seven ; 
then the person deducting ten from twenty-six, there remains six- 
teen ; and taking seven from twenty-six, there remains nineteen ; 
these two remainders added together make thirty-five, which you 
subtract from fifty-two, and there mast remain seventeen for the 
amount of the two cards, as before. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 327 

To Tell the Names of all the Cirdi by their Weight.— The pack having 
been cut and shuffled to the entire satisfaction of the audience, the 
operator commences by stating that he undertakes, by poising each 
card forji moment on his fingers, to tell not only the color, but the 
suit and number of spots, and, if a court card, whether it be King, 
Queen, or Knave. For the accomplishment of this most amusing 
trick, we recommend the following directions : You must have two 
packs of cards exactly alike. One of them we will suppose to have 
been in use during the evening for the performance of your tricks ; 
but in addition to this you must have a second pack in your pocket, 
which you must take care to arrange in the order hereinafter de- 
scribed. Previous to commencing the trick you must take the op- 
portunity of exchanging these two packs, and bringing into use the 
prepared pack. This must be done in such a manner that your au- 
dience will believe that the pack you introduce is the same as the 
one you have been using all the evening, which they know has been 
well shuffled. The order in which the pack must be arranged will 
be best ascertained by committing the following lines — the words 
in capitals forming the key : 

Eight kings threa-ten'd to save 
Eight, king, three, ten, two, seven, 

Nine fair ladies for one sick knave, 
Nine, five, queen, foub, ace, six, knave. 
These lines, thoroughly committed to memory, will be of material 
assistance. The alliterative resemblance will in every instance be 
a sufficient guide to the card indicated. The order in which the 
suits come should likewise be committed to memory — namely, 
Hearts, Spades, Diamonds, Clubs. Having sorted your cards in 
obedience to the above directions, each suit separately, and begin- 
ning with Hearts, your pack is "prepared," and ready for use ; and 
when you have successfully completed the exchange, you bring for- 
ward your prepared pack, and hand it round to be cut. The pack 
maybe cut as often as the audience pleases, but always whist-fash- 
ion — that is to say, the lower half of the pack must be placed upon 
the upper at each cut. You now only want to know the top card, 
and you will then have a clue to the rest. You therefore take off 
the top card, and holding it between yourself and the light, you 
see what it is, saying at the same time, by way of apology, that 
this is the old way of performing the trick, but that it is now su- 
perseded. Having once ascertained what the first is, which, for 
example, we will suppose to be the King of Diamonds, you then 
take the next card on your finger, and poise it for a moment, as if 
you were going through a process of mental calculation. This 
pause will give you time to repeat to yourself the two lines given, 
by which moans you will know what card comes next. Thus: 
"Eight kings threa-ten'd to," etc. ; it will be seen that the three 



S28 PROFESSOR HARTZ S 

comes next. The suite of Diamonds being exhausted, you must 
not forget that Clubs comes next ; and so on, until you have de- 
scribed every card in the pack. 

Mysterious Disappearance of the Knave of Spades. — Fixing your eye 
upon the stoutest looking man in the room, you ask him if he can 
hold a card tightly. Of course he will answer in the affirmative ; 
but if he should not, you will have no difficulty in finding some one 
who does. You then desire him to stand in the middle of the 
room, and holding up the pack of cards you show him the bottom 
one, and request him to state what card it is. He will tell you that 
it is the Knave of Spades. You then tell him to hold the card 
tightly and look up at the ceiling. While he is looking up, you 
ask him if he recollects his card ; and if he answers, as he will be 
sure to do, the Knave of Spades, you will reply that he must have 
made a mistake, for if he look at the card he will find it to be the 
Knave of Hearts, which 'will bo the case. Then handing him the 
pack you tell him that if he will look over it, he will find his Knave 
of Spades somewhere in the middle of the pack. 

This trick is extremely simple and easy of accomplishment. You 
procure an extra Knave of Spades, and cut in half, keeping the up- 
per part, and throwing away the lower. Before showing the bot- 
tom of the pack to the company, get the Knave of Hearts to the 
bottom, and lay over it, unperceived by the company, your half 
Knave of Spades and under pretence of holding the pack very tight, 
put your thumb across the middle, so that the joining may not be 
seen, the legs of the two knaves being so similar that detection is 
impossible. You then give him the lower part of the Knave of 
Hearts to hold, and when he has drawn the card away, hold your 
hands so that the faces of the cards will be turned towards the 
floor. As early as possible you take an opportunity of removing 
the half knave. 

To Make the Court Cards Always Come Together. — Take the pack, 
and separate all the Kings, Queens, and Knaves. Put these all to- 
gether into any part of the pack you fancy, and inform one of the 
company that he can not in twelve cuts disturb their order. The 
chances are 500 to 1 in your favor ; but with a novice the feat be- 
comes impossible. This is a very amusing and easy trick. 

This trick may also be rendered more wonderfui by placing one 
half of the above number of cards at the bottom and the other at 
the top of the pack. 

To Turn a Card into a Bird. — Having a live bird in your sleeve, 
take a card in your hand, exhibit it, and then draw it into your 
sleeve with your thumb and little finger, giving the arm a shake 
sufficient to bring the bird into your "hand, which you may then 
produce and let fly. 



TBICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 329 

The Card of one Color Found in a Pack of the Other. — Separate the 
pack into two parts, placing all the red cards in one pile, and all 
the black cards in the other. One of these packs you conceal in 
your pocket. You let any person draw a car 1 from the other pack, 
and while ho is examining tho card, substitute the pack in your 
pocket for tho one you hold in your hand. Let him place his card 
in the pack you have taken from your pocket, and shuffle as much 
as he pleases. On receiving back tho pack, you will at once recog- 
nize the card he has drawn by the difference of color. 

To Name Several Card, which have been Drawn out of a Pack lohich 
has been Divided into Two Heaps. — For this trick, you take a com- 
plete pack which has been divided into two such heaps that all the 
Aces, Nines, Sevens, Fives, and Threes are in one heap, and all the 
Kings, Queens, Knaves, Tens, Eights, Sixes, Fours, and Twos are 
in the other heap. 

You now let several of the company draw cards out of either of 
the heaps ; change the heaps unperceived, and let the person place 
the odd cards — as Ace, Nine, etc.— into the heap of even cards, and 
vice versa. On running over the cards, you easily discover the 
drawn cards, tho even cards being in the heap of odd cards, and 
the odd cards in the heap of even cards. 

To Find a Certain Card after it has been Shuffled in the Pack. — As you 
shuffle the cards, note tho bottom one, being careful not to shuffle 
it from its place. Then let any one draw a card from the middle 
of the pack, look at it, and place it on the top. Let him then cut 
the pack. The card in question will be found in front of the one 
which was at first the bottom card. 

Of Twenty-five Girds Laid in Five Rows upon a Table, io Name the One 
Touched. — To perform this trfck you need a confederate. The latter 
sits near the table, has both his hands closed, and points out the 
card touched by the finger which he leaves extended. The fingers 
of the right hand indicate the cross rows counted from above down- 
wards ; the fingers of the left hand, on the contrary, point out the 
number of the card in the cross row, counting from left to right. 

If, for example, the third card from the left in the second cross 
row is the one touched, your accomplice leaves the second finger 
of the right hand, and the third finger of the left hand unbent, clos- 
ing all the others. 

This must be done naturally, and not in too open a manner, as it 
might easily be detected. 

The Four Inseparable Kings. — Take the four Kings, and behind the 
last of them place two other cards, so that they may not bo seen. 
Then spread open the four Kings to the company, and put the six 
cards to the bottom of the pack. Draw one of the Kings, and put 
it at the top of the pack. Draw one of the two cards at the bot- 



330 



PEOFESSOR HAETZ S 



torn, and put it towards the middle. Draw the other, and put it at 
some distance from the last, and then show that there remains a 
King at bottom. Then let any one cut the cards, and as there 
remained three Kings at bottom, they will then be altogether in 
the middle of the pack. 

To Name Several Cards which Two Persons Have Drawn from a 
Pack. — Divide a piquet pack into two parts by a long card ; let the 
first part contain a quint to a King in Clubs and Spades, the Four 
Eights, the Ten of Diamonds, and Ten of Hearts, and let the other 
part contain the two quart majors in Hearts and Diamonds, the 
Four Sevens, and the Four Nines. The cards may be divided in 
any other way that is easy to be remembered. 

Then shuffle the cards, but be careful not to displace any of 
those cards of the last part which are under the long card ; you 
then cut at that card, and leave the pack in two parts ; next, pre- 
sent the first of these parts to a person, and tell him to draw two 
or three cards, and place the remainder on the table ; you pi-esent 
the second parcel in like manner to another; then having dexter- 
ously placed the cards drawn by the first person in the second par- 
cel, and those drawn by the second person in the first parcel, you 
shuffle the cards, observing not to displace any but the upper 
cards ; then spreading the cards on the table, you name those that 
each person drew, which you may very easily do, by observing the 
cards that are changed in each parcel. 

Of Two Botes cf Cards, to Tell the One Which Has Been Touched. — 
You lay two rows of cards upon the table, six or eight in each row. 
You have arranged with an accomplice that the upper cards, 
counted from the left, signify days, the upper cards hours. 

You now leave the room, requesting one of the company to touch 
a card. On returning, you step to the table and begin' to look for 
the card, when, after a while, your accomplice cries out, as if In 
mockery, "Yes, you might look for it three days, and never find 
it," if the touched card is the third card frcm the left in the upper 
row. You pay no attention, however, to his remark, but continue 
to search. At last you apparently lose your temper, and mix the 
cords together, exclaiming, "The cards are false to-day !" Then 
ycu reflect again, shuffle the cards, place them in two rows, and, 
after some hesitation, point out the touched card. 

To Hod Four K'ngs or Four Fnavcs in your Hand, and to Charge 
them Suddenly into Hank Cards, thai into Four Aces. — You must have 
cards made fcr the purpose of this feat; half cards, as they may 
bo properly termed — that is, one half Kings or Knaves, and the 
other half Aces. Yv'hcn ycu lay the Aces one over the other, 
nothing but the King or the Knaves will be seen. Then turning 
the Kings or Knaves downwards, the four Aces will be seen. You 



THICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 331 

must have two perfect cards, one a King or Knave, to cover one of 
the Aces, or else it will be seen ; and the other an Ace to lay over 
the Kings or Knaves. When you wish to make them all appear 
blank cards, lay the eai'ds a little lower, and by hiding the Aces 
they will appear white on both sides. You may then ask the com- 
pany which they choose, and exhibit the Kings, Aces, or Blanks, 
as required. 

To Shuffle the Cards in Such a Manner as Always to Keep One Certain 
Card at the Bottom. — In shuffling, let the bottom card be always a 
little before, or, which is best, a little behind all the rest of the 
cards ; put it a little beyond the rest before, right over your fore- 
finger, or else, which is the best, a little behind the rest, placed in 
such a manner that the little linger of the left hand may slip up 
and meet with it ; at the first, shuffle as thick as you can ; and, at 
last, throw upon the board the bottom card, with as many more as 
you would preserve for any purpose, a little before or a little 
behind the rest ; and be sure to let your forefinger, if the pack bo 
laid before, or your little finger, if the pack be laid behind, always 
creep up to meet with the bottom card ; and when you feel it, you 
may there hold it till you have shuffled over again ; which being 
done, the card which was first at the bottom will come there again. 
Having perfected yourself in this manner of shuffling, you may 
accomplish anything you please with a pack of ten, twelve or 
twenty cards, always leaving at the bottom, however frequently 
you may shuffle them. 

The Transmuted Cards. — In a common pack of cards let the Ace 
of Hearts and Nine of Spades be something larger than the rest. 
With the juice of lemon draw over the Ace of Hearts a Spade, 
large enough to cover it entirely, and on each side draw four other 
Spades. 

Present the pack to two persons, so adroitly that one of them 
shall draw the Ace of Hearts, and the other the Nine of Spades, 
and tell him who draws the latter to burn it on a chafing dish. 
Youthen take the ashes of that card, put them in a small metal 
box, and give it to him that has the Ace of Hearts, that he may 
himself put that card into the box and fasten it. Then put the box 
for a short time on the chafing dish, and let the person who put the 
card in it take it off, and take out the card, which ne will see is 
changed into the Nine of Spades. 

The Circle of Fourteen Cards. — To turn down fourteen cards which 
lie in a circle upon the table, observing to turn down only those 
cards at which you count the number seven. 

To do this you must bear in mind the card which you first turn 
down. Begin counting from any card from one to seven, and turn 
the seventh card down. Starting with this card, you again count 



332 PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 

from one to seven, and turn the seventh card down, etc., etc. 
When you come to the card which you first turned down, you skip 
it, passing on to the next, and so on until all the cards are turned. 
This is a very entertaining trick. 

The Shifting Card. — Put at the top of your pack any card you 
please, say the Queen of Clubs. Make the pass, by which you put 
it in the middle of tho pack, and make some one draw it ; cut 
again, and get the same card in the middle ; make the pass again, 
to get it to the top of the pack, and then present it and get it drawn 
by a second person, who ought not to bo so near tho first as to be 
able to perceive that he has drawn tho same. Repeat this process 
until you have made five people draw the same card. Shuffle, with- 
out losing sight of tho Queen of Clubs, and spreading on the table 
any four cards whatever with this Queen, ask if every one sees his 
own card. They will reply in the affirmative, since each sees the 
Queen of Clubs. Turning over these cards, withdrawing the 
Queen, and approaching the first person, ask if that bo his card, 
taking care while showing it to him that the others may not be able 
to see it. He will tell you it is. Blow on it, or strike it, and show 
it to a second person, and so on. 

Tlie Magic Slide, or to Make a Card Disappear in an Instant. — Divide 
the pack, placing one half in the palm of the left hand, with the 
face of the cards downwards ; then take tho balance of the pack in 
the right hand, holding them between the thumb and three first 
fingers, and place the cards upright, so that the edges of the cards 
in your right hand will rest upon the back of those lying in the 
palm of the left hand perpendicularly and forming a right angle, 
by which you will perceive that the four fingers of the left hand 
touch the last card of the upright cards in your right hand. Be 
sure you get this position correctly, for the rest of the trick is very 
simple. You now request any one of your audience to examine 
the top card of the half pack that rests in the palm of your left 
hand, and to replace it again. Having done this, request him to 
look at it again, and to his amazement it will have disappeared, 
and another card will appear in its place. 

To perform this trick, after you have assumed the position 
already described, you must damp the tips of the four fingers that 
rest against the last card of the upright cards in your right hand. 
You must now raise the upright cards in your right hand very 
quickly, and the last card will adhere to the damped fingers of 
your left hand; 

As you raise the upright cards you must close your left hand 
skillfully, and you will thereby place the last card of the upright 
cards— which adheres to the fingers of your left hand— upon the 
top of the cards in the palm of your left hand, and when you re- 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 

quest the person who examined the top card in your hand to look 
at it once more, he will seo the card you have just placed there, 
instead of the one he first examined. 

This is a capital sleight-of-hand trick, and with very little prac- 
tice can be performed with great dexterity. The principal thing 
you must observe is, to be very rapid and dexterous in slipping tho 
card at the back of tho upright card from its position there to the 
top of the cards in the palm of your left hand. 

The Four' Transformed Kings. — You have the four Kings of a pack, 
and have placed them in your hand in such a manner that one 
slightly overtops the other, yet so that each can easily be distin- 
guished when held closely in the hand. 

After showing them to the company, you slide them together, 
and place them, thus joined, upon the top of the pack, which you 
hold in your right hand. You then draw off the four top cards, 
and lay each in a person's lap, face downwards, directing them to 
place the flat of the hand upon them. You now draw four other 
cards from the pack, and piace them each upon tho lap of a neigh- 
bor of each of the four above persons, and direct them also to cover 
them with the flat of the hand. You now step with the rest of the 
cards in front of each of these eight persons, flirt the cards to- 
wards the lap of each, and when each lifts his card from his lap, 
and looks at it, it appears that the four persons upon whose lap you 
have placed the four Kings have altogether different cards, and 
their neighbors have now the four Kings. 

This is done in the following manner : While you are drawing 
the four Kings from the pack, and placing them as described, one 
upon the other in your hand, you at the same time, unperceived, 
carry off four other cards, and place them behind the four Kings, 
so that they lie in the hollow of your hand, and can not be seen. 
When, after having shown the four Kings, you push them together 
in a heap, the four Kings, of course, come in front of the four 
other cards, which latter now lie on the top of the pack. These 
you distribute to the first four persons, and then deal out the four 
Kings to their neighbors. 

To Guess the Cards which Four Persons have Fixed Their Thoughts 
Upon. — You take four cards, show them to the first person, request 
him to select one of them in thought, and lay them aside. Then 
take four other cards, let a second person choose one of them, 
place these four cards upon the table beside the first four, but a 
little apart. Proceed in the same way with the third and fourth 
person. 

You now take the first person's four cards, and lay them, sepa- 
rately, side by side. Upon these four cards you place tho four 
cards of the second person in the same order, and so with the four 
cards of the third and fourth person.- 



334 



PEOFESSOE HAETZ's 



You now show each pile to the four persons, one after the other, 
asking each in which pile he finds the card he has thought of. 

As soon as you know this you discover the cards thought of in 
the following order : The card thought of by the first person is, of 
course, the first in the pile in which he says it is contained ; the 
second person's card is the second of the pile, so also the third and 
fourth person's card is the third and fourth of the pile. 

The Chosen Card Revealed by a Pinch of Snuff. — Force a card — sup- 
pose, for instance, the Five of Clubs — having previously written 
the words, or drawn the spots, on a clean sheet of paper, with a 
tallow candle ; then hand the pack to the person on whom the card 
is forced ; bid him place it where, and shuffle the pack how, he 
pleases ; ask for a pinch of snuff, strew it over the sheet of paper, 
blow the loose grains off, and the remainder will stick to the places 
the tallow has touched, thus telling the person what card he has 
chosen. The paper, if done lightly with the candle, will not ap- 
pear to have any marks on it. 

7/oio to Arrange the Twelve Picture Cards and the Four Aces of a Pack 
in Four Bows, so that there will be in Neither Row two Cards of the same 
Value nor Two 9f the same Suit, ichether Counted Horizontally or Perpen- 
dicularly. — The simplest way of performing this trick is to form a 
diagonal line from the left to the right with the four Aces, as fol- 
lows. (See Fig. 11.) 



v 

— fW 



Fig. 11. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. °^° 

Then form another diagonal line, from the right to the left, with 
the four Knaves, crossing the preceding diagonal line, and you will 
have a position similar to that in Fig. 12, 








Fig. 12. 



This done, place a King and a Queen in each of the four spaces 
which remain to he filled, in order to complete the square of four 
rows, being careful to choose the suits, and to arrange the cards 
in such a manner as to fulfill the conditions required. The cards 
will then be arranged in the following order. (See Fig. 13.) 

By pursuing any other method than the one indicated on the fol- 
lowing page (Fig. 13), it will be found quite difficult to fulfill the 



PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 



required conditions, and, at all events, it will taKe you a long time 
to do so. 

Fig. 13. 









^M 




♦ 




*ii 




jajfl 


BES 












f / ft a»\ 




The Art of Fortune- Telling by Cards. — Take a pack of cards, and 
making yourself which Queen you please, lay them out on a table, 
nine in a row, and wherever you find yourself placed count nine 
cards every way, making yourself one, and then you will see what 
card you tell to, and whatever that is will happen to you. If the 
two red Tens are by you, it is a sign of marriage ; the Ace of Dia- 
monds is a ring ; the Ace of Hearts is your house ; the Ace of Clubs 
is a letter ; the Ace of Spades is death, spite, or quarreling, (for 
that is reckoned the worst card in the pack) ; the Ten of Diamonds 
is a journey ; the Three of Hearts is a kiss ; the Three of Spades is 
tears ; the Ten of the same suit is sickness ; the Nine of the same 
i? disappointment; the Nine of Hearts is feasting; the Ten cf 
Clubs going by water; the Ten of Hearts places of amusement; 
tho Five of Hearts a present ; tho-Fivo of Clubs, a bundle ; tho Six 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CAEDS. *>' 

of Spades a child ; the Seven of Spades is a removal ; tho Three of 
Clubs, lighting ; tho Eight of Clubs, confusion ; the Eight of Spades, 
a roadway ; the Four of Clubs, a strange bed ; the Nino of Diamonds, 
business ; the Five of Diamonds, a settlement ; the Five of Spades, 
a surprise ; the two red Eights, new clothes ; the Three of Diamonds, 
speaking with a friend ; the Four of Spades, a sick bed ; the Seven 
of Clubs, a prison ; the Two of Spades, a false friend ; the Four of 
Hearts, a marriage bed. When several Diamonds come together it 
is a sign of money ; several Hearts, love ; several Clubs, drink ; and 
several Spades, vexation. If a married woman lays the cards, she 
must make her husband King of the same suit she is Queen of ; 
if a single woman tries it, she may make her sweetheart what King 
she likes ; the Knave of the same suit is the men's thoughts ; so 
that you may know what they are thinking by telling nine cards 
from where they arc placed, making them one ; and if any one 
chooses to try if she shall have her wish, let her shuffle the cards 
well (as she must likewise do when she tells her fortune), wishing 
all the time for some ono thing ; she must then cut them once, and 
minding what card she cut, shuffle them again, and then deal them 
out into threo parcels ; which done, look over every parcel, and if 
tho card you cut comes next yourself, or next the Ace of Hearts, 
you will have your wish ; but if the Nine of Spades is next, you 
will not, for this is a disappointment ; however, you may try it 
threo times. This method of telling fortunes is innocent; and 
much better Shan for a young person to tell their secrets to an old 
hag of a gypsy fortuno teller who can inform her no better, if she 
pays a shilling for the intelligence. 

The Majic Twelve. — Let anyone take the pack of cards, shuffle, 
take off the upper card, and, having noticed it, lay it on the table, 
with its face downward, and put so many cards upon it as will 
make up twelve with the number uf spots on the noted card. For 
instance, if tho card which the person drew was a King, Queen, 
Knave, or Ten, bid him lay that card with its face downward, call- 
ing it ten; upon that card let him lay another, calling it eleven, 
and upon that another, calling it twelve ; then bid him take off the 
next uppermost card ; suppose it to be a Nine ; let him lay it down 
upon another part of the table, calling it nine ; upon it let him lay 
another, calling it ten ; upon the latter another, calling it eleven; 
and upon that another, calling it twelve ; then let him go to the 
next uppermost card, and so proceed to lay out in heaps, as before, 
till he has gone through the whole pack. If there be any cards at 
the last — that is, if there be not enough to make up the last noted 
cara the number twelve, bid him give them to you ; then, in order to 
tell him tho number of all tho spots contained in all the bottom cards 
of the heaps, do thus : From the number of heaps subtract four, 
multiply the remainder by fifteen, and to, the product add the num- 
ber of remaing cards which he gave you ; but if there were biat four 



338 



PROFESSOR HARTZS 



heaps, then those remaining cards alone will show the number of 
spots on the four bottom cards. You need not see the cards laid 
out, nor know the number of cards in each heap, it being sufficient 
to know the number of heaps, and the number of remaining cards, 
if there be any, and therefore you may perform this feat as well 
standing in another room, as if present. 

The Drawn Card Nailed to the Wall. — Drive a flat-headed and sharp- 
pointed nail through a card — force a similar one on any person 
present— receive it into the pack— dexterously drop it, and pick up, 
unseen, the nailed card ; place the latter at the bottom of the pack, 
which take in your right hand, and throw it, with the bottom for- 
ward, against a wainscot or door ; the nailed card will be fixed, 
and the rest, of course, fall to the ground. Take care to place 
your nail so that the front of the card, when fixed to the door, 
may be exposed ; to effect this, you must also remember to put the 
back of the card outward, placing it face to face with the others, 
when you put it at the bottom of the pack. 

On Entering a Room, to Know cf Three Cards Placed Side by Side, 
which have been Reversed — That is to Say, Turned Upside Down. — This 
trick is a very easy one, as the two ends of the cards are cut so as 
to leave a margin of an unequal width. All that is requisite is to 
place all the broad ends of t-ie cards either towards or from you, 
when, upon entering the room, you will at once perceive which card 
has been turned. Use the Great Wizard's Pack for this trick. 

To Bring a Card which has been Thrown Out of the Window into the 
Pack Again. — After you have shuffled the pack and placed it upon 
the tabic, you let any person draw forth the lowest card, of which 
there are two alike, at the bottom of the pack ; tear it in small 
pieces, and throw them out of the window. 

You then assure the company that the pieces just thrown out will 
join themselves together again, and return as a whole card to tho 
pack. You raise the window, and call, "Come, come, come!" 
Then approach the table, assuring the spectators that the mutila- 
ted card has returned complete to its old place in the pack ; and 
let them satisfy themselves that such is the fact. Use the Wonder- 
ful Conjurer's Pack of Cards for this trick. 

A New Method to Tell a Card by its Weight. — You declare to the 
company that you can tell a card by weighing it. You take the 
pack in your hand, let one of the company draw a card, look at it, 
and place it face downwards in your hand. You then look at it 
attentively, apparently trying its weight, while in fact you are ex- 
amining it very closely, to sec if you cannot discern upon its back 
some mark by which you may know it again, and if there is none 
you mark it secretly with your nail. ■ ""..'.." 

You let the person put tho card in the pack, shuffle it, and hand 
it buck to you. You now look through the pack, take one Card 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



339 



after another, and appear as if you -were weighing thern, while you 
search for the mark by which you may discover the drawn card. 

The Wmclow Trick. — Place yourself in the recess of a window, 
and let any one stand close to you, as near to the window as pos- 
sible. You now draw a card, hand it to him, and request him to 
note it. This you must contrive to do in such a manner, that you can 
catch a glimpse of the imago of the card reflected in the window. 
You now know what the card is as well as he does, and can point 
it out to him after the cards have been thoroughly shuffled. 

The Numerical Card. — Let the long card be the sixteenth in the 
pack of piquet cards. Take ten or twelve cards from the top of 
the pack, and spreading them on the table, desire a person to think 
of any one of them, ami to observe the number it is from the first 
card. Make the pass at the long card, which will bo at the bot- 
tom. Then ask the party the number his card was at, and, count- 
ing to yourself from that number to sixteen, turn the cards up, one 
by one, from tho bottom. Then stop at tho seventeenth card, and 
ask the person if ho has seen his card, when ho will say no. You 
then ask him how many more cards you shall draw before his card 
appears, and when he has named the number, you draw the card 
aside with your finger, turn up the number of cards he proposed, 
and throw down the card he fixed upon. Use the Great Wizard's 
Pack for this trick. 

The Three Magical Parties.— Offer the long card to a person that 
he may draw it and replace it in any part of the pack he pleases. 
Make the pass, and bring that card to the top. Next divide tho 
pack into three parcels, putting the long card in the middle heap. 
You then ask the person which of tho three heaps his card shall bo 
in. Ho will probably say tho middle, in which case you immedi- 
ately show it to him ; but if ho say cither of tho others, you take 
all tho cards in your hand, placing the parcel he has named over 
the other two, and observing to put your little linger between that 
and the middle heap, at the top of which is tho card he drew. You 
then ask at what number in that heap he will have his card appear. 
If, for example, he says tho sixth, you tell down Ave cards from 
tho top of the pack, and then dexterously making the pass, you 
bring the long card to the top, and tell it down as the sixth. Uso 
tho Great Wizard's Pack for this trick. 

Several Different Cards being Fixed On by Different Persons, to Name 
that 0:1 which Each Person Fixed. — There must be as many different 
cards shown to each person as there arc cards to choose ; so that if 
there are three persons, you must show three cards to each pcr- 
con, telling tho first to retain one in his memory. You then lay 
those three cards down, and show three others to tho second per- 
son, and three others to the third. Next take up the first person's 
cards, and lay them down separately, one by one, with their faces 



340 PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 

upwards ; place tho second person's cards over the first, and the 
third over the second's, so that there will be one card in each par- 
csl belonging to each person. You then ask each of them in which 
parcel his card is, and by the answer you immediately know which 
card it is ; for the first person's will always be the first, the second 
person's the second, and tho third person's the third in that parcel 
where each says his card is. 

This amusement may be performed with a single person, by let- 
ting him fix on three, four, or more cards. In this case you must 
show him as many parcels as he is to choose cards, and every par- 
cel must consist of that number, out of which he is to fix on one, 
and you then proceed as before, he telling you the parcel that con- 
tains each of his cards. 

To Discover the Card which is Drawn, by the Throw of a Die. — Pre- 
pare a pack of cards in which there arc only six sorts of cards. 
Dispose these cards in such a manner that each of the six different 
cards shall follow each other, and let the last of each suit be a 
long card. The cards being thus disposed, it follows that if you 
divide them into six parcels, by cutting at each of the long cards, 
these parcels will all consist of similar cards. 

Let a person draw a card from the pack, and let him place it in 
the parcel from whence it was drawn, by dexterously offering that 
part. Cut tho cards several times, so that a long card bo always 
at the bottom. Divide tho cards in this manner into six heaps, 
and giving a die to the person who drew the card, tell him that the 
point he throws shall indicate the parcel in which is the card he 
drew ; then take up that parcel and show him the card. Use the 
Great Wizard's Pack for this trick. 

The Card Changing in the Hands. — Efface one of the spots of the 
Three of Hearts, as in Fig. 14, and keep this card in your pocket 
in such a manner that you can recognize the side A. 
Have a pack of cards, at the bottom of which havo the 
Ace and the Three of Hearts, make the pass to bring 
them to tho middle of tho pack, and force them to bo 
drawn by a lady and gentleman, to whom you will then 
give tho pock to replace tho cards and shuffle them. 
During this time adroitly take tho card from your pock- 
' ct, conceal it beneath your hand, and again taking tho 
11 *S- !4- p ac k place it at the top. Make tho pass, and draw this 
card from tho miclalo of the pack, present it to him who has drawn 
the Three of Hearts (covering with the right forefinger tho spot B, 
so that ho will imagine that ho sees tho Three of Hearts), and ask, 
' ' Is this your card? " Ho will reply : ' ' Yes." Betake it with two 
fingers of the left hand, and concealing the point A, show it to tho 
one drawing the Ace of Hearts, and ask: "Is this your card, 
.madam?" She, will respond. affirmatively. You will then say: 




THICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 341 

"That is impossible, for the gentleman says it is his," and then 
you will show it to the person who has drawn the first, who will 
say : "It is not the same." Then show the Three of Hearts to the 
lady, remarking: "I knew very well it was the lady's card, to 
which she will answer: "But it\is not mine." To this rejoin: 
"Would you deceive me — I who deceive others?" and striking 
with your finger upon the card, you will show to them successively 
the two cards they have drawn, saying: "Behold your card, and 
yours." 

Observe.— You ought, at every change of the card, to take it in 
the fingers of the right hand. 

To Make Several Persons Draw Cards which they will Themselves Re- 
place in the Pack, and to Find them Again.— You must have a pack of 
cards prepared like the pattern— (Fig. 15)— that is, the end of A B 
must be a very little narrower than the opposite one, C D. You will 
make one of the company draw a card from the pack, and will ob- 
c £ serve particularly if ho turns it in his hand. If he re- 

places it as he drew it, you will turn the pack, so that it 
may be in a contrary position to the others. If he turns 
it in his hand, it will save you the trouble. The card 
being replaced, you give the pack to some one to shuffle, 
and then have a second, or even a third drawn, observ- 
ing the same precautions. After this, taking the pack 
_ by the widest end, in the left hand, you will draw suc- 
B cessively with the right hand the cards that were chosen. 
15. Use the Great Wizard's Pack for this trick. 

The Buried Heart. — A curious deception may be practiced by cut- 
ting out neatly and thinly shaving the back of a Club, which is then 
to be pasted slightly over an Ace of Hearts. After showing a per- 
son the card, let him hold one end of it, and you hold the other; 
and, while you amuse him with discourse, slide off the Club ; then 
laying th« card on the table, bid him cover it with his hands ; 
knock under the table, and command the Club to turn to the Ace 
of Hearts. 

Another Way. — To change the Three of Clubs into the Deuce, the 
Five of Spades into the Four, etc. : 

You ask a person which is the uppermost card in the pack ; he 
answers, the Three of Clubs or Diamonds. You tell him to keep 
the card ; and then ask another what is the next card which you 
hold up ; he says the Five of Spades, or Hearts. You bid him hold 
the card ; you then tell the first that it is the Deuce he has, and the 
other that it is a Four, which turns out to be the fact. 

To perform this feat, you must have neatly cut out of other 
cards, and split till it is very thin, a Spade, Diamond, Club, or 
Heart— or all, if you mean to sport the feat with four cards. This, 
slightly fastened in the middle of a Deuce, Four, or any card 




s 4 2 PEOFESSOU HABTZ'S 

which admits of a spot in tho middle ; and when you give the card 
to a person to hold, by having a bit of virgin wax on your finger, 
you may slip away the fastened spot, and put it out of sight ; for 
if dropped, the feat will be discovered. In this manner you may 
make a blank card any kind of an Ace. You may also cover the 
Ace of Diamonds with the figure of a Club, etc. 

The Erratic Card. — Take a pack of cards from your pocket, shuf- 
fle them, and let any one draw a card ; note it and replace it in the 
pack. You then ask the person where he would like to have it ap- 
pear, whether under the table-cloth, under a flower-pot, or in the 
pocket of any one of the company. As soon as his choice is made, 
you wave your magician's wand in the direction of the place where 
the drawn card is to be found. 

This trick is rendered more interesting if you employ an alarm 
clock, which you set so that it shall strike at the reappearance of 
the right card. This is done by forcing a card upon the person 
who draws. A similar card is put beforehand in the places which 
you mention for him to choose as the spot where his card shall 
reappear. 

The Magical Trio. — As already shown, you force one of the com- 
pany to draw a certain card, and let him replace it in the pack, and 
shuffle the cards well together. You now take the pack, find the 
drawn card, and, without showing it, plaoe it next to the bottom 
card. Then hold up the pack in the right hand, and show the bot- 
tom card to the company, with the question : "Is that the drawn 
card ?". To which the answer is, of course, in the negative. You 
then drop suddenly the right hand, in which you hold the cards, 
and with the fingers of the left hand slip the bottom card back, and 
draw out instead of it that card selected by the company, and 
throw it upon the table face downwards, the company, of course, 
supposing it to be the card last seen upon the bottom. 

You then shuffle the cards thoroughly, show once more the un- 
dermost card, requesting the company to see if it is the card drawn, 
and upon receiving a reply in the negative, you place it also, face 
downwards, on the table upon the first card. You now shuffle the 
pack well, show the company the undermost card, repeating the 
question as before. On receiving .again a reply in the negative, 
you appear surprised ; however, place the card just shown upon 
the two that were before drawn from the pack, approach the com- 
pany with these three cards, and request them to examine them 
carefully, and see whether there lias not, perhaps, been some error 
on their part, as the drawn card must certainly be one of the three. 
To their great astonishment they will find this to be the case. This 
trick can also be done by making the pass, and slipping the card 
by wetting the fingers, as before explained. 

To Find in the Pack, and Through a Handkerchief, Whatever Card a 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 



343 



Person has Drawn. — Give the pack for a card to be drawn from it ; 
and, dividing the pack in two, desire that the chosen card be placed 
in the middle. Make the pass at this place, and the card will now 
be at the top of the pack. Put it on the table, cover it with a 
rather thin handkerchief, and take the first card under it, pretend- 
ing, however, to feel about for it. Turn over the handkerchief, 
and show that this card was the one drawn. 

To Conjure a Certain Card into your Pocket. — You take beforehand 
any card from a complete pack, say a Queen of Hearts, and put it 
in your pocket, after having named the card to your accomplice. 
You then hand the pack to the latter, and request him to look at 
a card in the pack, to note it, and then place the pack upon the 
table again. Your confederate does as he is directed. You then 
ask him what was the card that he selected, and ho will, of course, 
answer the Queen of Hearts. " I should be much obliged to you," 
you reply, ' if you would show me that card again." Your con- 
federate examines the cards, but can not find it, and at last says 
that it is not now in the pack. 

You now draw the Queen of Hearts from your pocket, and show 
it to the astonished company. 

To Tell Through a Wine-Glass what Cards Have Been Turned. — The 
picture cards have commonly a narrow stripe for the border. This 
border is usually narrower at one end of the card than it is at the 
other. You place the picture cards in such a manner that either 
all the broader or all the narrower borders are placed uppermost. 
You now request a spectator to turn one of the cards while you are 
absent from the room. On your return you examine all the cards 
through a wine-glass, and easily discover the one which has been 
turned, as its narrow border now lies on a level with the broader 
borders of the other cards. If they try to mystify you by turning 
none of the cards, you will easily see that this is the case. 

To Change Five Kings into Five Queens. — You take four Kings, and 
draw a sharp knife gently across the middle of them, where the 
two busts meet. Peel the picture carefully from one-half of the 
cards, and paste upon the blank part the four half pictures of four 
Queens, which have been peeled off in the same manner. In this 
way you have four cards, each representing both a King and a 
Queen. 

To these prepared cards you jcin an ordinary King and Queen. 
These six cards you spread out in a fan-like shape, from the left 
to the right, and in such a manner that only the Kings are visible. 
This is easily done, if you keep the ordinary King at the end of 
the fan to the right, and the Queen concealed behind it. You show 
the five Kings, say that you will change them into five Queens, 
blow upon the cards, reverse them, placing the King behind the 
Queen, and display them as five Queens. 



344 



PROFESSOR HARTZS 



The Magic Sevens.— Take a number of cards, from which you will 
make two piles, taking care that one will contain two or three 
Sevens, and the other will be composed of seven cards, all face 
cards— that is, Kings, Queens, Knaves, or Aces. Then ask for pen 
and ink, and write on a piece of paper the names of the seven ; 
this paper you turn over so that he caunotsee what you have writ- 
ten. Now you can request a person to make his choice in such a 
manner that if he chooses your number it will be good, as inas- 
much if he select the larger package, you will show him the paper 
on which is inscribed the names' of the face cards ; then command 
him to count the number of cards contained in the package he has 
selected, and he will find seven, agreeable to the names on your 
list. This revelation will doubtless astonish him ; but if he selects 
the smaller package, you have likewise the advantage, for you 
know it to contain two or three Sevens, and nothing else. 

The Numerical Trick of Cards. — Request a person to select at will 
three cards from a pack of cards such as are used for the game of 
Euchre, which has no caids below seven points in either suit, 
warning him that the Ace counts eleven, the face or figure cards 
ten, and the others according to the points on their face. These 
three chosen, tell him to place them on the tabic separately, and 
then to put on each card a pile of other cards, as many in number 
as, with the points on the card, will sum up at fifteen points on 
each heap ; that is to say, if the first card be a Nine, it will require 
six cards to be placed over it ; if the second be a Ten, five cards ; 
if the third be a Knave, likewise five cards. Hero you have nine- 
teen cards employed, consequently there remains thirteen for ycu 
to reclaim. Making believe to examine them, count them over to 
assure yourself of being right as to the number remaining. Men- 
tally add sixteen to this number, and you will have twenty-nine, 
the number of the points on the three cards chosen, and which will 
be found beneath the three heaps. 

The Novel Game of Toniine. — This game is played with fifty-two 
cards. After each one in the company has taken a number of 
counters, say twenty, upon which a value has been placed, each 
player puts three in the pool. After cutting, deal one card to each 
player, with the face down. Now to create a purse for the game. 
Upon turning up the card dealt, he who holds the King draws 
three counters ; the Queen two ; the Knave one ; the Ten neither 
draws nor loses ; the Ace pays one to his neighbor ; the Two gives 
two to the second player below him ; the Three gives three to the 
third beyond him ; and with respect to the others, they pay one cr 
two, as they happen to lie odd or even ; the Four, Six, and Eight, 
two counters ; and the Five, Seven, and Nine, one each. It will be 
seen that twenty-four counters are drawn by the players ; that 
twenty-four circulate, and that thirty-six arc put up for the prize 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS 345 

of the game. Thus, on each deal, twelve counters pass from the 
hands of the players. When one runs out of counters, he returns 
his cards, and is considered dead ; nevertheless, he revives rapidly, 
inasmuch as his neighbor, should an Ace come to him, is com- 
pelled to give him one ; the player two places above him, if a Two 
is dealt to him, gives him two ; the Three, chancing to the third 
above him, supplies him with three, and this rule works a revolu- 
tion in his favor. Finally tho pool remains to the player holding 
the last of tho counters ; but during the continuance of the game 
many wonderful accidents occur, and it frequently chances that 
he who has been dead two or three times, or who has been placed 
in the most desperate straits, carries off the pool. It is these varia- 
tions which render the game exciting and amusing. 

To Guess in which Hand, Holding Counters, Can be Found the Odd or 
Even Number. — Multiply the number in the right hand by an even 
number, according to pleasure, 2 for example, and the number in 
the left hand by an odd number, 3 for instance ; then add together 
the sum of both ; if the total is odd the even number of pieces will 
be in the right hand, and the odd in the left ; if the sum be even 
the contrary will be the case. 

Proof. — Suppose in the right hand 8 pieces, and 7 in the left ; 
multiply 8 by 2 and you have 16, while the product of 7 by 3 will be 
21 ; the sum total is 37, an odd number. If, on tho other hand, 9 
was in the right hand and 8 in the left, multiply 9 by 2, you have 
18, and multiply 8 by 3, you have 24, which added to 18 give 42, an 
even number. 

To Produce Numberless Changes with a Given Number cf Cards. — 
Take the cards, each inscribed with the ciphers 123456789 0. 
Take these cards in the left hand as if to shuffle them. Take 
with the right hand the first two cards, 1 and 2, without deranging 
them ; place them beneath the two following, 3 and 4, and under 
these four cards the three following, 5, 6, and 7 ; below these put 
8 and 9, and below all the 0. They can be rearranged several 
times according to the same formula. At each new arrangement 
there will be a fresh order, which, nevertheless, after a certain 
number of times, will come out as they were before being shuffled, 
as will be seen by the following table, wherein the order repeats 
itself after the seventh arrangement : 

1st order 1 234567890 

1st shuffle 8 9 3 4 1 2 5 6 7 

2d " 67348 9 1250 

3d " 253467 8910 

4th " 9 13 4 2 5 6 7 8 

5th " 7 8 3 4 9 12 5 6 

6th " 5 6 3 4 7 8 9 12 

7th -" 12 3 i.5 6 1 8J.0 . .. 



346 PEOFESSOE HAETZ'S 

An Exposure of the Card Tricks made use of by professional 
Card Players, Blacklegs, and Gamblers. 

"And hence our master passions in the breast, 
Like Aaron's serpent, swallows up the rest." 

There is too much reason to believe that there is not a game 
played, either in public or private, at which cheating cannot be, 
and has not been practiced. At the hazard-tables of inferior gam- 
ing-houses persons of this character abound — those who can not 
only secure a die, but can make it secure itself by well-known 
means. In fact, the peculiar agility of the Latins is at present in 
as full play in our gaming transactions as it was when Persius and 
Juvenal wrote their Satires, Xenophon his History, and Alciphron 
his Letters. There are plenty of Mr. and Mrs. Smigsmags at the 
whist-table : plenty of telegraphing, if not with words, with signs ! 
and marking and packing of cards, as practiced in the days of 
Ceesar. In addition to these, there are the " reflectors," the "long 
and shorts," "convex," "concave," and "pricked" cards; the 
"bridge," the "old gentleman," "slipping," "weaving," "skin- 
ning," and "shuffling;" together with unequal dice, dispatchers, 
doctors, and doctor dice-boxes, inventions of later times. 

Wo commence with whist, because it is the game with cards gen- 
erally most popular in private society, and one in which it has gen- 
erally been considered that superior skill in the adversary is the 
principal obstacle to success. It appears, however, that this game 
opens a wide field for the exercise of the ingenuity of the 
sharper, and the following are some of the artifices resorted to : 

Whist. — The following course is known to have been extensively 
carried on at the whist table with great success. It is telegraph- 
ing by conversation. Suppose you Avish your partner to play in 
any particular suit which would enable you to get a run ; now, if 
you can do this unobserved, you will at once see the advantage 
gained over your adversary. The method is this : To ask a ques- 
tion upon any subject you may think of, only minding the first let- 
ter is the same as the first letter in the suit you wish played — 
namely: "Should you like atrip to Washington?" S being the 
first letter, Spades would be the suit required ; if he can oblige, he 
might answer : "Very much ;" but if he could not, and wishes to 
lead himself, then for his partner's information he would not send 
back an answer of the same description, "Very much," the letter 
V not being of any service ; but " How can you ask such a ques- 
tion?" would imply, by H, that Hearts were wanted. No one 
would notice this sort of conversation unless previously acquainted. 

Reflectors. — The cards so named are, by a certain mechanical 
process, equally distinguishable to the initiated by their backs as 
by their faces ; but from the expense of manufacturing them, they 
are not often had recourse to. They nearly resemble those ingen- 



TEICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. 347 

ious landscapes which, at first sight, present to our view some 
beautiful scene in nature, but, by a more minute inspection, Rive 
us portraits of human faces with great exactness and fidelity. 
Some years back this trick was played off on the continent, to the 
enriching of a German Jew and two or three of his confederates. 
He attended the fairs at Frankfort and Leipzie with a large basket 
of these cards, which he sold at a price which bade defiance to 
competition. Visiting the country again by the time he thought 
they would be in circulation at the various spas and watering 
places, where high play is always going on, himself and his friends, 
by being alone able to decipher the apparently invisible hieroglyph- 
ics, made a good thing of it. 

The Longs and Shorts — Consist in having all short cards above 
the number eight, a trifle longer than those below it. This is ac- 
complished with great nicety, by a machine invented for that pur- 
pose. By this means nothing under an eight can be cut : and the 
chances against an honor being turned up reduced two to one. 

Sauter La Coupe. — An adept at this trick can cheat and swindle 
at pleasure. Wherever it is practiced the fair-player has no earth- 
ly chance of rising from the table other than a loser. The trick, 
too, is much practice:!. Some time ago public attention was pow- 
erfully directed to it, by a trial in one of our courts, a celebrated 
lord figuring in it in a most unenviable manner. The excitement 
then raised is now allayed, and Sauter la Coupe is again in exten- 
sive vogue. By its means the wealth of the unwary and inexpe- 
rienced player is transferred to the pocket of the cheat. 

The following simple exposition of the manner in which this 
trick is performed will be of essential service to the player. It 
will enable him to detect the sharper and blackleg, and thus pro- 
tect himself from their nefarious scheme. 

Sauter la Coupe is the French term for " Slipping the Cards." It 
is practiced at whist, when the cards are cut, and placed in the 
hands of the dealer. By a dexterity easily acquired by practice, 
he changes the cut card, by slipping from its position in the pack, 
either from the top or the middle, the Ace, and thus secures its 
"turning up!" The practicer of Sauter la Coupe, to cover the 
trick he is resorting to, invariably ruffles the cards, making with 
them a loudish noise. While the apparently simple action he thus 
performs, with the consequent noise, distracts attention, he slips 
the card, the Ace, which he has hitherto concealed for the purpose, 
and dexterously placed on the top of the pack when passing it 
from one hand to another to deal ; or ascertained its position in 
the pack by one of the many means resorted to for that purpose. 
Whenever the player begins to ruffle the cards, instead of dealing 
quietly, suspect foul play. It is a sympton of cheating. 

The fair-player has no chance with the cheater, by means of 
. Sauter la Coup9. Suppose that during an evening 20 games have 



S4S PKOFESSOK HAKTZ'S 

been played. The cheat and his partner would thus have to deal 
the cards at least ten times. During these ten deals the cards 
might be slipped six times, giving the cheat an advantage over the 
fair-player of at least twenty to one. 

Convex and Concave Cards — Are also of the same genus with the 
foregoing one. All from the Eight to the King are cut convex, and 
all from the Deuce to the Seven, concave. Thus, by cutting the 
pack in the center, a convex card is cut ; and by taking hold oi the 
cards, in cutting them, at either end of the pack, a concave card is 
secured. 

Sometimes these cards are cut the reverse way to the foregoing 
one, so that if suspicion arises a pack of this description is substi- 
tuted for the others. But here the sharper has not so great a pull 
in his favor, because the intended victim may cut in the usual way, 
and so cut a low card to the dealer. But the possibility, or rather 
certainty, of his being able, by any means, to cut or deal a high or 
low card at pleasure, is an advantage against which no skill in the 
game can avail. 

Handling the Cards. — So called from the cards being secured in the 
palm of the hand. The person who practices this art at cribbage, 
generally takes care to get two Fives, with any other two cards, 
placing one of the two ordinary cards at the top, next to it one 
Five, then the other ordinary card, and under it the other Five. 
These four cards, so placed, he secures in the palm of his hand, 
while he desires his adversary to shuffle the cards, and, being very 
generous, also tells his opponent to cut them ; when this is done, 
he puts his hand which contains the four cards upon that part of the 
pack which is to be uppermost, and then leaves the cards on the 
same ; consequently, when he deals, the two Fives will fall to his 
own hand of cards. By these means, when a person who can hand 
deals, he is pretty sure of two or more Fives. 

Garretlng. — Is so called from the practice of securing the cards 
either under your hat or behind your head. 

The method of doing this is to select out three or four extraor- 
dinary good cards, while your adversary is marking his hand of 
crib. This being done, and the cards properly dealt, you take up 
your own cards, which you take care to examine pretty quickly, 
and after laying out any two you think proper for crib, you im- 
mediately, with one hand, put your other remaining cards on the 
pack, and with your other hand take down the cards which have 
been secured ; then in lieu of very bad cards, which you might 
possibly have had, you have the best that can be got. 

Slipping the Cards is performed in various ways, all of which 
tend to put the same cards at the top again, which have been cut 
off and ought to be put underneath. Whenever this is done, you 
may depend the cards are previously placed in such a manner as 
will answer the. purpose of the person who performs the operation. 



TRICKS AND DIVERSIONS WITH CARDS. S49 

Walking the Pegs means either putting your own pegs forward, 
or those of your adversary back, as may best suit your purpose ; 
and it is always executed while you are laying out the cards for crib. 

The method generally adopted for this business is to take the 
two cards which you intend to put out for the crib, and iix them 
with your third finger on the back of the cards and your others on 
the front ; then, holding them fast in your hand, you cover the 
pegs on the board from the sight of your adversary, while, with 
your first linger and thumb on the same hand, you takeout, unper- 
ceived, any peg you like, and place the same wherever you think 
proper. 

Pricked Cards. — This is a method of marking playing cards, 
which, if cleverly done, is very difficult of detection, from the cir- 
cumstances of the effect being made known through the organ of 
touch, and not through that of sight. The cards to be thus dis- 
tinguished are laid upon a stone, faces uppermost ; and upon the 
left-hand side at the top, and upon the right-hand side at the bot- 
tom, they are punctured with a very finely-pointed instrument, 
care being taken not to drive it quite through the cards, but still 
to press sufficiently hard as to cause a slight elevation or pimple 
upon the opposite sides or backs. By this means it is in the power 
of the sharper, when the cards are with their back towards him, 
to distinguish their characters by the aid of the ball of his thumb. 
There are instances on record of individuals, in the habit of play- 
ing this foul game, using a chemical preparation to this particular 
part, and by constantly wearing a glove, keeping it in a highly 
sensitive state. 

The Bridge is a card slightly curved. By introducing it care- 
lessly into the pack and shuffling them, it can be cut at pleasure. 
The trick of the "Old Gentleman" consists in merely introducing 
into the pack a card of thicker substance than the rest, which can 
likewise be cut at pleasure by being properly placed by the shuffler. 

Skinning. — It is by this operation that unfair cards are intro- 
duced, and too often without creating suspicion, by the ingenuity 
with which it is performed. Certain fair cards are taken out of 
the original stamped cover without injury to it, and in their stead 
either concave, convex, or pricked ones, or reflectors, are placed. 
The stamp being stuck on the cover by means of gum, which the 
application of warm water dissolves, or deprives of its tenacity, a 
kettle of hot water and a sponge are the only things requisite. 
The exchange being completed, the regular pack finds its way into 
societies of a certain description, where it is contrived to be placed 
on the card-tables unobserved. Plunder is the inevitable result. 

Shuffling or Weaving. — Much fraud is practiced by the help of 
dexterously shuffling, by which the power to place cards in certain 
parts of the pack is under the control of the sharp, when become 
an adept in the art. * The preparatory step is a strict observance 



S -° PROFESSOR HARTZ'S 

of the tricks taken up on both sides, and their contents, when 
those rich in trumps or court cards are selected to be operated 
upon by the shuffler, when it is his turn to deal. 

The Gradus, or Step, consists in one particular card being so 
placed by the shuffler, on handing them to his adversary to be cut, 
as to project a little beyond the rest, and thus to insure its being 
the turn-up card, either at whist or ecarte. The representation 
speaks for itself. 

Slipping the Fives. — Slipping the Fives at cribbage is an amazing 
strong advantage. The mode of doing this is to mark them in any 
manner so as to know them ; and whenever it happens that you 
observe one coming to your adversary, you give him the next card 
under in lieu thereof, which many, who are in the habit of playing 
much, perform with extraordinary dexterity. 

Saddling the Cards is frequently practiced at cribbage. This is 
bending the Sixes, Sevens, Eights, and Nines, in the middle, long 
ways, with the sides downwards ; by which it is extremely easy 
for you to have one of those cards for a start, by cutting where 
you perceive a card bent in that manner, taking due care to have 
the card so bent uppermost. 

Dealing Fives from the Bottom is a very common practice ; it is, 
therefore, very necessary for you to be watchful over your adver- 
sary while he deals. This is a device of old date, but is easier to 
be performed with the small cards used at ecarte than those gen- 
erally played with at whist. It consists in secreting a certain card 
until an opportunity presents itself of its being available, when it 
is produced, as implied, from the palm of the hand that secretes 
it. The story of the hand that was pierced through with a fork 
(although not by Blucher, as stated in the Court Magazine), and 
the proffered apology for the act if no card was found therein, is 
too well known to be repeated ; but it is not a solitary instance in 
the play world. Some five-and-forty years since a member of 
Brookes' Club was playing at quinze with Mr. Fox. At this game 
a Five is a principal card. -Mr. Fox, having supposed them all to 
have been played, 

"Whose nature was so far from doing harm, 
That he suspected none." 
complained, with evident chagrin, of the increasing inaccuracy of 
his memory. Others, however, were less charitably disposed. 
The unfair gamster was watched, and detected in introducing a 
fifth Five ! He subsequently quitted the country, and died mis- 
erably poor in the East Indies. It may be reckoned a»harsh pro- 
ceeding to rake up an old story such as this, reflecting on the aris- 
tocracy of Great Britain ; but the history of gaming, like other 
histories, must be given in its integrity, or not given at all. 



$51 



THE 



AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: 



VENTRILOQUISM MADE EASY. 



WHAT IS VENTRILOQUISM ? 

Before we take the reader into the precise and minute instruc- 
tions which he will have to study and practice ere he can become 
the possessor of the coveted art, it will be necessary to inform him 
what Ventriloquism* is, and in what it consists. In doing so, we 
shall endeavor to be as plain and clear as possible. Ventriloquism 
may be divided into two sections, or general heads, the first oi 
which may be appropriately designated as Polyphonism, and con^ 
sists of the simple imitation of the voices of human creatures, of 
animals, of musical instruments, and sounds and noises of every 
description in which no illusion is intended, but where, on the con- 
trary, the imitation is avowedly executed by the mimic, amongst 
which we may classify sawing, planing, door-creaking, sounds of 
musical instruments, and other similar imitations. 

Secondly, we have ventriloquism proper, which consists in the 
imitation of such voices, sounds, and noises, not as originating in 
him, but in some other appropriate source at a given or varying 
distance, in any or even in several directions, either singly or to- 
gether — a process exciting both wonder and amusement, and 
which may be accomplished by thousands who have hitherto 
viewed the ventriloquist as invested with a power wholly denied 
by nature to themselves. It is needless to observe, that when the 
imitations are effected without a movement of mouth, features, 
or body, the astonishment of the audience is considerably en- 
hanced. 

The tGIiiis polyphony, mimicry, or imitation, are employed to 
designate results obtained in reference to the first division of the 
subject, where no illusion is intended ; while the term ventrilo- 
quism distinguishes those under the second division, where an il- 

*Li terally signifying belly-speaking, from tenter, tbe belly , and loquor, I speak. 



352 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

lusion is palpably produced. The first is much more common 
than the latter ; indeed, there is scarcely a public school which 
does not possess at least one boy capable of imitating the mewing 
of a cat, the barking of a dog, or the squeaking voice of an eld wo- 
man. On the other hand, from a want of the knowledge of how 
to proceed, it is very seldom that even a blundering attempt at 
ventriloquism is heard, except from a public platform. 

There have been many statements put forward defining ventrilo- 
quism, but we are decidedly of opinion that the theory of two of 
the most celebrated of foreign ventriloquists, Baron de Mengen 
and M. St. Gille, who were sufficiently unselfish to avow the se- 
cret of their art, is not only the most correct, but it is at once the 
most reasonable and the most natural. 

From Baron de Mengen's account of himself, and the observa- 
tions made by M. de la Chapelle, in his frequent examinations of 
St. Gille, whom we shall afterwards refer to, it seems that the 
factitious ventriloquist voice does not (as the etymology of the 
word imports) proceed from the belly, but is formed in the inner 
parts of the mouth and throat. 

The art does not depend on a particular structure or organiza- 
tion of these parts, but may be acquired by almost any one ar- 
dently desirous of attaining it, and determined to persevere in re- 
peated trials. 

The j udgments we form concerning the situation and distance 
of bodies, by means of the senses mutually assisting and correct- 
ing each other, seem to be entirely founded on experience ; and 
we pass from the sign to the thing signified by it immediately, or 
at least without any intermediate steps perceptible to ourselves. 

Hence it follows that if a man, though in the same room with 
another, can by any peculiar modifications of the organs of speech, 
produce a sound which, in faintness, tone, body, and every other 
sensible quality, perfectly resembles a sound delivered from the 
roof of an opposite house, the ear will naturally, without examina- 
tion, refer it to that situation and distance ; the sound which he 
hears being only a sign, which from infancy he has become accus- 
tomed, by experience, to associate with the idea of a person speak- 
ing from a house-top. A deception of this kind is practised with 
success on the organ and other musical instruments. 

Eolandus, in his " Aglossostomographia," mentions, that if the 
mediastinum, which is naturally a single membrane, be divided 
into two parts, the speech will seem to come out of the breast, so 
that the bystanders will fancy the person possessed. 

Mr. Gough, in the " Manchester Memoirs," vol. v. part ii. p. 622, 
London, 1802, investigates the method whereby men judge by the 
ear of the position of sonorous bodies relative to their own per- 
sons. 

This author observes, in general, that a sudden change in direo 



VENTJRIL Q UI8M MADE EASY. 353 

tion of sound, our knowledge of which, he conceives, does not de- 
pend on the impulse in the ear, but on other facts, will be per- 
ceived when the original communication is interrupted, provided 
there be a sensible echo. This circumstance will be acknowl- 
edged by any person who has had occasion to walk along a valley, 
intercepted with buildings, at the time that a peal of bells is ring- 
ing in it. The sound of the bells, instead of arriving constantly at 
the ears of the person so situated, is frequently reflected in a short 
time from two or three different places. These deceptions are, in 
many cases, so much diversified by the successive interpositions 
of fresh objects, that the steeple appears, in the hearer's judgment, 
to perform the part of an expert ventriloquist on a theatre — the 
extent of which is adapted to its own powers, and not to those of 
the human A r oice. 

The similarity of effect which connects this phenomenon with 
ventriloquism, convinced the author, whenever he heard it, that 
what we know to be the cause in one instance, is also the cause in 
che other, viz., that the echo reaches the ear, while the orignal 
sound is intercepted by accident in the case of the bells, but by art, 
in the case of the ventriloquist. 

It is the business of the ventriloquist to amuse his admirers 
with tricks resembling the foregoing delusion ; and it will be 
readily granted that he has a subtle sense, highly corrected by ex- 
perience to manage, on which account the judgment must be 
cheated as well as the ear. 

This can only be accomplished by making the pulses, constitu- 
ting his words strike the heads of his hearers, not in the right 
lines that join their persons and his. He must, therefore, know 
how to disguise the true direction of his voice ; because the arti- 
fice will give him an opportunity to substitute almost any echo he 
choses in the place of it. But the superior part of the human body 
has been already proved to form an extensive seat of sound, from 
every point of which the pulses are repelled as if they diverge from 
a common centre. This is the reason why people, who speak in 
the usual way, cannot conceal the direction of their voices, which 
in reality ,/fy off towards all points at the same instant. The ventrilo- 
quist, therefore, by some means or other, acquires the difficult 
habit of contracting the field of sound within the compass of his lips, 
which enables him to confine the real path of his voice to narrow 
limits. For he who is master of his art has nothing to do but to 
place his mouth obliquely to the company, and to dart his words 
out of his mouth — if the expression may be used — whenco they 
will then strike the cars of the audience as that from an unex- 
pected quarter. Nature seems to fix no bounds to this kind O: de- 
ception, only care must be taken not to let the path of the direct 
pulses pass too near the head of the person who is played upon, 
but by the divergency of the pulses make him perceive the voice it- 



354 THE AMERICAS VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

self. Our readers will, therefore, not be surprised that the French 
Academy adopted this view of the subject, and laid down that the 
art consists in an accurate imitation of any given sound as it reaches 
the ear. In conformity with a theory so incontrovertible, physiolo- 
gists have suggested a variety of movements of the vocal organs 
to explain still further the originating cause ; and some have gone 
so far as to contend for a peculiarity of structure in these organs 
as an essential requirement ; but they have wisely omitted to 
specify what. Nothing, however, can be more accurate than the 
description of " the essence " of ventriloquy in the "English Cyclo- 
paedia" — namely, that it " consists in creating illusions as to the dis- 
tance and direction whence a sound has traveled.." How those sounds 
are produced, we shall show in another chapter. 



VENTEILOQUISM AMONGST THE ANCIENTS. 

Charles Lamb gave utterance to the thought that it was ' ' pleas- 
ant to contemplate the head of the Ganges," but the student of 
ventriloquism iinds it difficult to obtain a view of the source of his 
art. In the dim and misty ages of antiquity, he may trace under 
various guises the practice of it. Many of the old superstitions 
were fostered by its means ; from the cradle of mankind to the 
birthplace of idolatry, we incidentally learn of the belief in a fa- 
miliar spirit — a second voice, which afterwards took the form of 
divination. 

The various kinds of divination amongst the nations of antiqui- 
ty which were stated by the priesthood to be by a spirit, a famil- 
iar spirit, or a spirit of divination, are now supposed to have been 
effected by means of ventriloquism. Divination by a familiar 
spirit can be tracked through a long period of time. By reference 
to Leviticus xx. 27, it will be seen that the Mosaic law forbade the 
Hebrews to consult those having familiar spirits, and to put to 
death the possessor. The Mosaic law was given about fifteen hundred 
years before Christ. Divining by a familiar spirit was, however, 
so familiar to the Jews, that the prophet Isaiah draws a powerful 
illustration from the kind of voice heard in such divination, see 
Isaiah xxix. 4. 

There can be little doubt but the Jews became acquainted with 
this voice during their compulsory captivity in Egypt. In many 
of the mysteries which accompanied the worship of Osiris, the un- 
earthly voice speaking from hidden depths of unknown heights 
was common. Some philosophers have imagined that a scries of 
tubes and acoustical appliances were used to accomplish these 
mysterious sounds. The statute of Memnon will instantly sug- 
gest itself as a familiar instance. The gigantic stone-head was 



VENTRIL q UISM MADE EASY. 355 

heard to speak when the first rays of the -worshiped sun glanced 
on its impassive features. The magic words were undoubtedly 
pronounced by the attendant priest, for we find a similar trick 
prevalent throughout the whole history of ventriloquism, and 
even now the public professors of the art know how much depends 
on fixing the attention of their audience on the object cr place 
from whence the sound is supposed to proceed. The Jews carried 
the art with them into Palestine, for we trace the agency through- 
out their history. 

The Greeks practised a mode of divination termed gastromancy, 
where the diviner replied without moving his lips, so that the con- 
suiter believed he heard the actual voice of a spirit speaking from 
its residence within the priest's belly. 

In the Acts of the Apostles (xvi. 16), mention is made of a young 
woman with a familiar spirit meeting the Apostles in the city of 
Philippi, in Macedonia. St. Chrysostom and other early Fathers 
of the Christian Church mention divination by a familiar spirit as 
practised in their day. The practice of similar divination is still 
common in the East ; it lingers on the banks of the Nile, and is 
even practised among the Esquimaux. This divination by a 
familiar spirit has been practised upwards of three thousand years. 



MODEEN PEOFESSOES OF THE AET. 

The earliest notice of ventriloquial illusion, as carried out in 
modern times, has reference to Louis Brabant, valet-de-chambre of 
Francis I., who is said to have fallen in love with a beautiful and 
rich heiress, but was rejected by the parents as a low, unsuitable 
match. However, the father dying, he visits the widow ; and on 
his first appearance in the house she hears herself accosted in a 
voice resembling that of her dead husband, and which seemed to pro- 
ceed from above. ' ' Give my daughter in marriage to Louis Bra- 
bant, who is a man of great fortune and excellent character. I 
now endure the inexpressible torments of purgatory, for having 
refused her to him ; obey this admonition and I shall soon be de- 
livered ; you will provide a worthy husband for your daughter, and 
procure everlasting repose to the soul of your poor husband." 

The dread summons, which had no appearance of proceeding 
from Louis, whose countenance exhibited no change, and whose 
lips were close and motionless, was instantly complied with ; but 
the deceiver, in order to mend his finances for the accomplishment 
of the marriage contract, applies to one Cornu, an old and rich 
banker at Lyons, who had accumulated immense wealth by usury, 



356 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

and extortion, and was haunted by remorse of conscience. After 
some conversation on demons and spectres, the pains of purgatory, 
etc., during an interval of silence, a voice is heard, like thac of the 
banker's deceased lather, complaining of his dreadful situation in 
purgatory, and calling upon him to rescue him from thence, by 
putting into the hands of Louis Brabant, then with him, a large 
bum for the redemption of Christians in slavery with the Turks ; 
threatening him at the same time with eternal damnation if he did 
not thus expiate his own sins. Upon a second interview, in which 
his ears were saluted with the complaints and groans of his father, 
and of all his deceased relations, imploring him, for the love of 
God, and in the name of every saint in the calendar, to have mercy 
on his own soul and others, Cornu obeyed the heavenly voice, and 
gave Louis 10,000 crowns, with which he returned to Paris, and 
married his mistress. 

The works of M. L'Abbe La Chapelle, issued 1772, and before 
alluded to, contain descriptions of the ventriloquial achievements 
of Baron Mengen at Vienna ; and those of M. St. Gille, near Paris, 
are equally interesting and astonishing. The former ingeniously 
constructed a doll with moveable lips, which ho could readily con- 
trol by a movement of the fingers under the dress ; and with this 
automaton he was accustomed to hold humorous and satirical dia- 
logues. He ascribed proficiency in his art to the frequent gratifi- 
cation of a propensity for counterfeiting the cries of the lower ani- 
mals, and tne voices of persons with whom he was brought in con- 
tact. So expert, indeed, had practice rendered him in this way, 
that the sounds uttered by him did not seem to issue from his own 
mouth. La Chapelle, having heard many surprising circumstances 
related concerning one M. St. Gille, a grocer at St. Germainen- 
.Layc, near Paris, whose powers as a ventriloquist had given oc- 
casion to many singular and diverting scenes, formed the resolu- 
tion of seeing him. Being seated with him on the opposite side 
of a fire, in a parlor on the ground floor, and very attentively ob- 
serving him, the Abbe, after half an hour's conversation with M. 
St. Gille, heard himself called, on a sudden, by his name and title, 
in a voice that seemed to come from the roof of a house at a dis- 
tance; and whilst he was pointing to the house from which the 
voice had appeared to him to proceed, he was yet more surprised 
at hearing the words, "it was not from- that quarter," apparently 
in the same kind of voice as before, but which now seemed to issue 
from under the earth at one of the corners of the room. In short, 
this factitious voice played, as it were, everywhere about him, and 
seemed to proceed from any quarter or distance from which the 
operator chose to transmit it to him. To the Abbe, though con- 
scious that the voice proceeded from the mouth of M. St. Gille, he 
appeared absolutely mute while he was exercising his talent ; nor 
could any change in his countenance be discovered. But he ob- 



VENTBIL Q UISM MADE EASY. C57 

served that M. St. Gille presented only the profile of his face to 
him whilo lie was speaking as a ventriloquist. 

On another occasion, M. St. Gille sought for shelter from a 
storm in a neighboring convent; and finding tho community in 
mourning, and inquiring the cause, ho was told that ono cf their 
body, much esteemed by them, had lately died. Some of their re- 
ligious attended him to the church, and showing him tho tomb cf 
their deceased brother, spoke very feelingly of the scanty hon- 
ors that had been bestowed on his memory, when suddenly, a 
voice was heard, apparently proceeding from the roof of tho 
choir, lamenting the situation of the defunct in purgatory, and 
reproaching the brotherhood with their want of zeal on his ac- 
count. The wholo community being afterwards convened in tho 
church, tho voice from the roof renewed its lamentations and re- 
proaches, and the wholo convent fell on their faces, and vowed a 
solemn reparation. Accordingly, they first chanted a De profun- 
di! in full choir; during tho intervals of which, tho ghost occas- 
ionally expressed the comfort he received from their pious 
exercises and ejaculations in his behalf. Tho prior, when this 
religious service was concluded, entered into a serious conversa- 
tion with M. St. Gille, and inveighed against the incredulity of 
our modern sceptics and pretended philosophers on tho article of 
ghosts and apparitions ; and St. Gille found it difficult to convince 
the fathers that tho wholo was a deception. 

M. St. Gille, in 1771, submitted his attainments in this direction 
to several experiments before MM. .Leroy and Pouchy, Commis- 
sioners of tho Royal Academy of Sciences, and other persons cf 
exalted rank, in order to demonstrate that his mimicry was so 
perfect as to reach the point of complete illusion. For this purpose 
a report was circulated that a spirit's voico had been heard at 
time j in the environs of St. Germain, and that the commission was 
appointed to verify the fact. Tho company, with the exception 
of one lady, were apprised of tho real nature of tho case, the in- 
tention being to test the strength of the illusion upon her. Tho 
arrangement was that they should dine together in the country, in 
tho open air; and while they were at table, tho lady was ad- 
dressed in a supernatural voice, now coming from tho top of 
adjoining trees, then descending until it approached her, next re- 
ceding and plunging into the ground, where it ceased. For up- 
wards of two hours was this startling manifestation continued 
with such adroitness that she was convinced the voice belonged 
to a person from another world, and subsequent explanation 
failed t ■> convince her to the contrary. 

M. Alexandre, the famous ventriloquist, had an extraordinary 
Eac lity in counterfeiting all the expressions of countenance and 
bo Lily conditions common to. humanity. When in London, 
Ms mimetic powers, which he was fond of -exercising both in pub- 



358 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

lie and private, made his company in high request among the up- 
per circles. The Lcrd Mayer of the City, in particular," received 
the ventriloquist with great distinction, and invited him several 
times to dine at tho Mansion House. But it unluckily' happened 
that on every occasion when M. Alexandro dined there, he could 
not stay to spend the evening, having contracted engagements 
elsewhere. The Lord Mayor expressed much regret at this, and 
the ventriloquist himself was annoyed on the same account, being 
willing to do his best to entertain the guests whom the Lord 
Mayor had asked each time to meet him. 

At last, on meeting M. Alexandre one day, the Lord Mayor en- 
gaged him to dine at the Mansion House on a remote day. " I fix 
it purposely," said his lordship, "at so distant a period, because 
I wish to make sure this time of your remaining with us through 
the evening." Through fear of seeming purposely to slight his 
lordship, M. Alexandre did not dare to tell the Mayor that on 
that very morning he had accepted an invitation from a noble- 
man of high rank to spend at his house the evening of the 
identical day so unfortunately pitched on by the civic dignitary. 
All the ventriloquist said in reply was, "I promise, my lord to 
remain at the Mansion House, till you, yourself, think it time for 
me to take my leave." "Ah, well," said the Lord Mayor, and 
he went off perfectly satisfied. 

At the appointed day Alexandre sat himself down at the mag- 
istrate's board. Never had the ventriloquist comported himself 
with so much spirit and gaiety. He insisted on devoting bumpers 
to each and every lady present. 

The toasts went round, the old port flowed like water, and the 
artiste in particular, seemed in danger of losing his reason under 
its potent influence. When others stopped, he stopped not, but 
continued filling and emptying incessantly. By-and-by, his eyes 
began to stare, his visage became purple, his tongue grew con- 
fused, his whole body seemed to steam of wine, and finally he 
sank from his chair in a state of maudlin, helpless insensibility. 

Begretting the condition of his guest, the Lord Mayor got him 
quietly lifted, and conveyed to his own carriage, giving orders for 
him to be taken home to his lodgings. As soon as M. Alexandre 
was deposited there, ho became a very different being. It was 
now ten o'clock, and but half an hour was left to him to prepare 
for his appointed visit to the Duke of 's soiree. The ventrilo- 
quist disrobed himself, taking first from his breast a quantity of 
sponge which he had placed beneath his waistcoat, and into the 
pores of which he had, with a quick and dexterous hand, poured 
the greater portion of the wine which he had apparently swal- 
lowed. 

Having washed from his person all tokens of his simulated 
intoxication, and dressed himself anew, M. Alexandre then betook 



VENTRILOQUISM MADE EASY. SC9 

himself to the mansion of the nobleman to whom he had engaged 
himself. 

On the following day the fashionablo newspapers gave a de- 
tailed account of the grand party at his Grace the Duke of 's, 

and eulogized to the skies the entertaining performances of M. 
Alexandre, who, they said, had surpassed himself on this occa- 
sion. Some days afterwards, the Lord Mayor encountered M. 
Alexandre. " Ah, how are you ? " said his lordship. " Very well, 
my lord," was the reply. "Our newspapers are pretty pieces of 
veracity," said his lordship. "Have you seen the Courier of the 
other day ? Why, it makes you out to have exhibited in great 

style last Thursday night at his Grace of 's!" "It has but 

told the truth," said the mimic. "What! impossible!" cried 
the Mayor. "You do not remember, then, the state into which 
you unfortunately got at the Mansion House?" And thereupon 
the worthy magistrate detailed to the ventriloquist the circum- 
stances of his intoxication, and the care that had been taken 
with him, with other points of the case. M. Alexandre heard his 
lordship to an end, and then confessed the stratagem which he 
had played off, and the cause of it. 

"I had promised," said Alexandre, "to be with his Grace at 
half-past ten. I had also promised not to leave you till you your- 
self considered it fit time. I kept my word in both cases — you 
know the way." The civic functionary laughed heartily, and on 
the following evening Alexandre made up for his trick by making 
the Mansion House ring with laughter till daylight. 

Many anecdotes are told respecting M. Alexandre's power of 
assuming the faces of other people. At Abbotsford, during a 
visit there, he actually sat to a sculptor five times in the char- 
actor of a noted clergyman, with whose real features the sculp- 
tor was well acquainted. When the sittings were closed and 
the bust modeled, the mimic cast off his wig and assumed dress, 
and appeared with his own natural countenance, to the terror al- 
most of the sculptor, and to the great amusement of Sir Walter 
and others who had been in the secret. 

Of this most celebrated ventriloquist it is related that on one 
occasion he was passing along the Strand, when a friend de- 
sired a specimen of his abilities. At this instant a load of hay 
was passing along near Temple Bar, when Alexandre called atten- 
tion to the suffocating cries of a man in the centre of the hay. 
A crowd gathered round and stopped the astonished carter, and 
demanded why he was carrying a fellow-creature in his hay. 
The complaints and cries of the smothered man now became 
painful, and there was every reason to believe that he was dying. 
The crowd, regardless of the stoppage to the traffic, instantly 
proceeded to unload the hay into the street. The smothered 
voice \irged them to make haste, but the feelings of the people 



S60 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

may be imagined when, the cart was empty and .nobody was found, 
while Alexandre and his friend walked off laughing at the unex- 
pected results of their trick. 

It would be obviously invidious to compare the merits of liv- 
ing professors. Mr. Maccabe, Mr. Gallagher, Mr. Thurton and 
Mr. Macmillan have long been favorites with the public. 



THE THEORY OF VENTRILOQUISM. 

Many physiologists aver that ventriloquism is obtained by 
speaking during the inspiration of air. It is quite possible to ar- 
ticulate under these circumstances, and the plan may with advan- 
tage be occasionally adopted ; but our own practical experience 
and close observation of many public performei'S, and of not 
a few private friends who have attained distinctness and no 
small amount of facility in the art, convince us that the general 
current of utterance is, as in ordinary speech, during expiration 
of the breath. Some imagine that the means of procuring the 
required imitation are comprised in a thorough management of 
the echoes of sound. Unfortunately, however, for this theory, 
an echo only repeats what has been already brought into exist- 
ence. Several eminent ventriloquists, including the late Mr. 
Matthews, have displayed the vocal illusion while walking in 
the streets. Baron Mengen describes as follows his mode of 
speaking, when he desired the illusion to take the direction 
of a voice emanating from the doll : " I press my tongue against 
the leeih, and then circumscribe a cavity between my left cheek and 
ieeih, in which the voice is produced by the air held' in reserve m the 
ptharynx. The sounds thus receive a hollow and muffled tone, 
which causes them to appear to come from a distance." The 
Baron furthermore mentions that it is essential to have the breath 
well under control, and not to l'espire more than can be avoided. 
M. St. Gille was seen to look somewhat exhausted when the vo- 
cal illusion grew less perfect. We, ourselves, and all ventrilo- 
quists with whom we have conferred, have acknowledged that 
they have experienced fatigue in the chest, and have attributed 
it to the slow expiration of the breath. M. St. Gille, with the 
majority of ventriloquists, was often compelled to cough during 
the progress of his exercitation. 

To attain an exact and positive knowledge of the modifications 
of voice specified as ventriloquism, it is important to be familiar 
with the distinctions of the sounds uttered by the mouth ; and to 
ascertain how the organs act in producing those vocal modifioa- 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EAST. 361 

tions, it is necessary to know how the breath is vocalized in all 
distinctions of pitch, loudness and quality, by the ordinary ac- 
tions 01" the vocal organs. In ordinary language, we speak of 
noise, of common sound, and of musical sound — terms employed 
by Dr. Thomas Young in illustrating the mechanical agencies of 
articulation : — " A quill striking against a piece of wood causes a 
noise, but striking successively against the teeth of a wheel, or of 
a comb, a continued sound, and, if the teeth of the wheel are at 
equal distances, and the velocity of the rotation is constant, a 
musical sound. The general terms — pitch, loudness, quality, and 
duration, embrace all the distinctions with which the musician 
has to deal, and which he uses in his art." 

The distinguishing feature of musical sound is its uniform 
pitch throughout its duration, and acoustically musical sound is 
composed of an equal number of impulses or noises produced in 
equal tones. 

The general terms — pitch, loudness, quality, and duration, also 
embrace all the distinctions heard in ordinary sounds. These 
sounds differ from the musical in the pitch constantly varying 
throughout their duration, as the human voice in speaking, and 
the voice of quadrupeds. Acoustically such sounds are composed 
of an equal number of impulses or noises produced in equal tones. 
And from this circumstance pitch, in the strictly musical sense, 
is not a property of ordinary sound. 

The general terms — loudness and quality, embrace all the dis- 
tinctions heard in a noise, as in the collision of two unelastic 
sticks. Pitch and duration can scarcely be considered as belong- 
ing to common noise. Thus we have — (1) noise whose audible 
distinctions are comprehended under the general terms loudness 
and quality ; (2) common sound, whose audible distinctions are 
comprehended under the general terms — loudness, quality, 
duration, and every varying pitch; (3) musical sound, whose 
audible distinctions are comprehended under the general terms — 
loudness, quality, duration, and uniform pitch. 

Phonation, or the production of voice, is a result of actions 
taking place under two distinct classes of laws — namely, the or- 
dinary mechanical laws of acoustics, and the physiological laws 
of muscular movement. The adjustment of the vocal mechanism 
to be brought into operation by the current of air, is made by 
actions under the latter laws ; and phonation is the result of the 
reaction of the mechanism on the current of air, by mechanical 
movements under the former laws. Now, the pitch of the voice 
essentially depends on the tension of the vocal ligaments ; the 
loudness or the extent of the excursion of these ligaments in their 
vibration; the duration on the continuance of the vocalizing 
causes; the quality on the organization of the larynx, and also 
on the form and size of the vocal tube. The form and size of 



362 TEE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

this tube can be altered in various ways — for instance, by dilating 
or contracting the pharynx; by dilating or contracting the 
mouth ; by contracting the communication between the pharynx 
and mouth, so as to constitute them distinct chambers, or by dila- 
ting the opening so as to throw them into one, which is chiefly 
attained by movements of the soft palate; and by altering the 
form of the mouth's cavity, which is effected by varying the position 
of the tongue. Each of these modifications of the vocal tube con- 
veys a peculiarity of quality to the voice, — all, however, being 
local or laryngeal sounds. Moreover, sounds can be produced in 
the vocal tube, apart from the larynx. These, strictly speaking, 
are not vocal sounds, though some of them may be of a definite and 
uniform pitch, while others are mere noises — as rustling, whisper- 
ing, gurgling, whistling, snoring, and the like. Now, as every- 
thing audible comes under the classes of noise, sound, or musical 
sound, and as each variety originates in the vocal apparatus of man, 
it is obvious that an ordinary vocal apparatus is all that is required for 
the achievement of the feats of ventriloquism. 

A person having an ear acutely perceptive to the nice distinc- 
tions of sounds, may, by a little practice, imitate many sounds 
with accuracy. Those persons, however, who are highly endowed 
with the mental requisites, which consist of an intense desire to 
mimic, coupled with the ability to originate mimetic ideas, are 
able to imitate sounds at first hearing. 

We next proceed to treat of those illusions, where the voice so 
perfectly counterfeits the reality intended, that it appears not. to 
issue from the mimic, but from an appropriate source, in what- 
ever direction, and at whatever distance the source may be. We 
do not hear the distance which a sound has traveled from its 
source, but we judge the distance from our former experience, by 
comparing the loudness which we hear with the known distance 
and known loudness of similar sounds heard on former occasions. 
Common experience will prove that we oftener err in estimating 
the distance of uncommon than of familiar sounds. In apology 
for such an error, the ordinary language is, ' ' It seemed too loud 
to come so far," or, " It seemed too near to be so faint a sound," 
as the case may be, — both of which are apologies for an erroneous 
judgment, and not for faulty hearing. Near sounds are louder 
than distant ones. Now, by preserving the same pitch, quality, and 
duration, but with an accurately graduated reduction of loudness, a series 
forming a perspective of sounds may be created, which, falling in 
succession on the ear, will suggest to the mind a constantly in- 
creasing distance of the sound's source. The estimate, then, 
which is formed of the distance which a sound has traveled be- 
fore reaching the ear is a judgment of the mind formed by com- 
paring a present perception (by hearing) with the remembrance of 
a former loudness in connection with its known distance. With 



VENTRIL Q UI8M MADE EASY. 363 

regard to direction, it is observed, " The direction whence a sound 
conies seems to be judged of by the right or left ear receiving the 
stronger impression, which, however, can only take place when 
the sound's source is in a plane, or nearly so, with a line passing 
through both ears. It is familiarly known that a person in a 
house cannot by the noise of an approaching carriage judge with 
certainty whether it is coming from the right or left. He accu- 
rately judges it to be approachihg, passing, or receding, as tho 
case may be, by the gradations of loudness, but is unable to de- 
cide with certainty whether its approach or recession is from up 
or down the street. Enough has been stated to show that we do 
not hear, but that we judge the direction a sound has traveled from Us 
source on reaching the ear." The ventriloquist indicates, either di- 
rectly or indirectly, the direction from which he wishes his 
audience to believe the sound is coming. Thus he directly indi- 
cates it by words, such as — " Are you up there?" " He is up the 
chimney," "He is in the cellar," "Are you down there?" etc., 
as illustrated in the various examples. He indirectly indicates it 
by some suggestive circumstance, as an action or gesture, which 
is so skilfully unobtrusive and natural as to effect its object with- 
out being discovered. Thus, when the ventriloquist looks or 
listens in any direction, or even simply turns toward any point, 
as if he expected sound to come thence, the attention of an audience 
is by that means instantly directed also to the same place. Thus, before a 
sound is produced, the audience expect it to come in the suggested 
direction ; and the ventriloquist has merely, by his adjustment of 
vocal loudness, to indicate the necessary distance, when a misjudg- 
ment of the audience icill comp'ete the illusion which he has begun." 

The effect which is produced on sound by its traveling from a 
distance, is observed to be : — 

(1) That its loudness is reduced in proportion to its distance. 

(2) That its pilch remains unaltered. 

(3) That its quality or tone is somewhat altered. 

(4) That its duration remains unaltered. 

(5) That the human speech is somewhat obscured, chiefly in tho 
consonant sounds. 

It must be remembered that the ventriloquist makes the sound, 
not as it is heard at its source, but as it is heard after traveling from a 
distance. 



THE MEANS BY WHICH IT IS EFFECTED. 

Befoue entering upon the first and easy lessons, it will be as well 
to consider the means by which the effect is produced. The Stu- 



364 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

dent is supposed to have made himself thoroughly acquainted 
with the previous chapter, as to the effect to be produced, not on 
himself, but on the spectators and audience. And we may assure him, 
that if he has a fair range of voice, a diligent observance of the 
rules which we are about to lay down, coupled with attention to 
the nature of sound as it falls upon the ear, will lead him to such 
triumphs as, in all probability, he never imagined he could have 
attained — an assurance which we are emboldened to offer from 
our own pursuit and practical realization of the art. 

The student must bear in mind that the means are simply natural 
ones, used in accordance with natural laws. We have given him 
the acoustical theory of the effect on the auric nerve, and the 
means are the organs of respiration and sound, with the adjoining 
muscles. They are the diaphragm, the lungs, the trachea, the 
larynx, the pharynx, and the mouth. The diaphragm is a very 
large convex muscle, situated below the lungs, and having full 
power over respiration. The lungs are the organs of respiration, 
and are seated at each side of the chest ; they consist of air-tubes 
minutely ramified in a loose tissue, and terminating in very small 
sacs, termed air-cells. The trachea is a tube, the continuation of 
the larynx, commonly called the windpipe : through this the air 
passes to and from the lungs. It is formed of cartilagineous rings, 
by means of which it may be elongated or shortened. The larynx 
is that portion of the air-tube immediately above the trachea : its 
position is indicated by a large projection in the throat. In the 
interior of this part of the throat are situated the vocal chords. 
They are four bands of elastic substance somewhat similar to 
India-rubber. The cavity, or opening between these vocal 
chords is called the glottis : it possesses the power of expanding 
or contracting under the influence of the muscles of the larynx. 
The pharynx is a cavity above the larynx, communicating with 
the nasal passages : it is partially visible when the mouth is 
opened and the tongue lowered. Near this part of the root of the 
tongue is situated the epiglottis, which acts as a lid or cover in 
closing over the air-tube during the act of swallowing. The mouth 
forms a cavity to reflect and strengthen the resonance of the vi- 
brations produced in the air-tube; it also possesses numberless 
minute powers of contraction and modification. 

We now proceed to give the instructions to which we have re- 
ferred — instructions guaranteed by a proficiency which we are 
ever ready to submit to the ordeal of a critical examination, either 
in private or in public. 

If the student will pay strict attention to the parts printed in 
italics, and will practice the voices here specified, he will find that 
they are the key to all imitative sounds and voices ; and, according to 
the range of his voice and the capabilities of his mimetic power, 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 365 

he will be enabled to imitate the voices of little children, of old 
poople, and, in fact, almost every sound which he hears. 

Too much attention cannot be bestowed on the study of sound as 
it falls on the ear, and an endeavor to imitate it as it is heard — 
for the "secret" of the art is, that as perspective is to the eye so is ven- 
triloquism to the ear. "When we look at a painting of a landscape, 
some of the objects appear at a distance; but we know that it 
is only the skill of the artist which has made it appear as the 
eye has seen it in reality. In exactly the same manner a ventrilo- 
quist acts upon and deceives the ear, by producing sounds as they 
are heard from any known distances. 



PRACTICAL ILLUSTRATIONS. 
No. I. 

THE VOICE IN THE CTjOSET. 

This is the voice in which Mr. Frederic Maccabe, the celebra- 
ted mimic and ventriloquist, excels, and the clever manner in 
which he can adapt it off-hand, as it were, will be best illustrated 
by the fact mentioned to us by the gentleman in question, whom 
we call Mr. B., in Mr. Maccabe's presence. Mr. B., who was an 
invalid, suffering from some nervous disorder, originating by over- 
work and anxiety, was traveling in Ireland in search of health, 
and when on his way from Dublin to Cork, he lay exhausted in a 
corner of a railway-carriage, muffled up in cloaks and wrap- 
pers in a paroxysm of pain. At Mallow, two gentlemen entered 
the carriage, one of whom was in exuberant spirits, and commenc- 
ed telling some amusing anecdotes. At length the porter came 
to collect the tickets. They were all handed in but one, when the 
following colloquy ensued : — 

Porter. — A gentleman hasn't given me his ticket. 

Gentleman. — Bill, in the next compartment, has the ticket, (tap- 
ping at the partition). . Haven't you, Bill? 

The imaginary Bill, who appeared to be suffering from a se- 
vere cold, replied that he had, and the porter would not take 
it. The official went off to find the ticket, but Bill, in the 
mean time had vanished. Back came the porter and indig- 
nantly demanded the ticket. He was interrupted by a shrill 
voice in the opposite compartment, crying, — ' Porter! porter! 
why don't you come and take the ticket! There's some one 
insulting me!" Away went the chivalrio porter, to come back 
puzzled and chafed to receive the ticket, which was handed to 



366 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: iau, 

him. His hand had not reached the coveted piece of pasteboard, 
ere the yell of a terrier under the wheels caused the porter to 
draw back, amid bursts of laughter, during which the ticket 
was thrown out, and the train moved on. And Mr. Frederic 
Maccabe stood confessed, but not penitent. 

Voice No. 1. — To acquire this voice, which we so name for dis- 
tinction's sake, speak any word or sentence in your own natural 
tones ; then open the mouth and fix the jaws fast, as though you 
were trying to hinder any one from opening them farther or shut- 
ting them ; draw the tongue back in a ball ; speak the same 
words, and the sound, instead of being formed in the mouth will 
be formed in the pharynx. Great attention must be paid to 
holding the jaws rigid. The sound will then be found to imi- 
tate a voice heard from the other side of a door when it is 
closed, or under a floor, or through a wall. To ventriloquize 
with this voice, let the operator stand with his back to the au- 
dience against a door. Give a gentle tap at the door, and call 
aloud in a natural voice, inquiring "Who is there?" This will 
have the effect of drawing the attention of the audience to a 
person supposed to be outside. Then fix the jaw as described, 
and utter in voice No. 1, any words you please, such as "I 
want to come in." Ask questions in the natural voice and 
answer in the other. When you have done this, open the door 
a little, and hold a conversation with the imaginary person. As 
the door is now open, it is obvious that the voice must be altered, 
for a voice will not sound to the ear, when a door is open, the 
same as when closed. Therefore, the voice must be made to ap- 
pear face to face, or close to the ventriloquist. To do this the 
voice must not be altered from the original note or pitch, but be 
made in another part of the mouth. This is done by closing the 
lips tight and drawing one corner of the mouth downwards, or 
towards the ear. Then let the lips open at that corner onty, the 
other part to remain closed. Next breathe, as it were, the words 
out of the orifice formed. Do not speak distinctly, but expel the 
breath in short puffs at each word, and as loud as possible. By 
so doing you will cause the illusion in the minds of the listeners, 
that they hear the same voice which they heard when the door 
was closed, but which is now heard more distinctly and nearer 
on account of the door being open. This voice must always be 
used when the ventriloquist wishes it to appear that the sound 
comes from some one close at hand, but through an obstacle. 
The description of voice and dialogue may be varied as in the fol- 
lowing examples : — 

Ex. 1. The Suffocated Victim. — This was a. favorite illus- 
tration of Mr. Love, the polyphonist. A large box or close cup- 
board is used indiscriminately, as it may be handy. The student 
will rap or kick the box apparently by accident. The voice will 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 367 

then utter a hoarse and subdued groan, apparently from the box 
or closet. 

Student (pointing to the box with an air of astonishment) : What is 
that? 

Voice : I won't do so any more. I am nearly dead. 

Student : Who are you? How came you there? 

Voice : I only wanted to see what was going on. Let me out, 
do. 

Student : But I don't know who you are. 

Voice : Oh yes, you do. 

Student : Who are you? 

Voice : Your old schoolfellow, Tom . You know me. 

Student : Why, he's in Canada. 

Voice (sharply) : No he ain't, he's here ; but be quick. 

Student (opening the lid) ; Perhaps he's come by the under- 
ground railroad ? Hallo! 

Voice (not so muffled as described in direction) : Now, then, give us 
a hand. 

Student ( closing the lid or door sharply) : No, I won't. 

Voice (as before) : Have pity ( Tom, or Jack, or Mr. , as the 

case may be), or I shall be choked. 

Student : I don't believe you are what you say. 

Voice : Why don't you let me out and see before I am dead? 

Student (opening and shutting the lid or door, and varying the 
voice accordingly) : Dead ! not you. When did you leave Canada? 

Voice : Last week. Oh ! I am choking. 

Student: Shall I let him out? (opening the door). There's no 
one here. 

2. The Milkman at the Doob. — This affords a capital op- 
portunity of introducing a beggar, watercress or milkman, and 
may be varied accordingly. We will take Skyblue, the milkman ; 
and we would_ impress on the student, that, although we give 
these simple dialogues, they are merely intended as illustrations for the 
modest tyro, not to be implicitly followed when greater confidence 
and proficiency are attained. 

Voice : Milk below ! 

Student : Is it not provoking that a milkman always comes 
when he is not wanted, and is absent when we are waiting for the 
cream? 

Voice : (whistling a bar of " Shoo Fly"). 

Student: Oh, yes, always the broken-hearted milkman, as if 
he was not as happy as a king. 

Voice (nearer) : Milk below ! Why, Sally, where's the can? 

Student : Sally will be long in answering, I think. 

Voice : Sally's gadding with the police. Milk below ! 

Student (slightly opening the door) : We don't want any milk, my 
good man. ___n- - - - 



368 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

Voice : No skim milk for the cat, or cream for tea? 

Another Voice : Watercresses ! 

Student : Really, this is too bad. Go away. 

Voice : You owe me ten cents for last week's milk ; I was to 
wait. 

Student : This is intolerable. I'll send, for the police. 

Voice (ironically) : Send for Sally and p'iice, I'll toiler. 

Student : Impudent rascal. 

Voice : Keep your compliments at home, Master Idlebones. 

Student (opening the door) : I'll report you to your master. 

Voice (louder, as the door is opened) : Will you, young "Whipper- 
snapper, pay us the dime, and let us go? 

Student offers to pay, while the voice gets weaker in the dis- 
tance with " Milk below !" until it becomes inaudible. 

A conversation may be held in a similar strain with the cellarman: 
and, as a rule, the lower notes of the voice will be best for Alices 
in the basement, and formed as low in the chest as possible. 

Student : Thomas, are you coming? 

Voice Below (gruffly) : I should think I was. 

Student : We are waiting for the beer. 

Voice (partly aside) : The longer you wait, the greater our honor. 
Mary have another drop? 

Student: Why, the scamp is drinking the beer! Thomas! 
Who's there with you? 

Voice: Myself. (Aside) Make haste with the pot, Mary; he's 
in such a hurry. 

Student : You drinking rascal, how dare you ! 

Voice : Coming, sir. The barrel's nearly empty. 

Student : I should think so, tippling as you are at it. 

Voice : Now don't be saucy. 

Student : The fellow is getting intoxicated. Thomas ! 

Voice : Wait till I come. I have waited for you many times. 

Student : I suppose it is of no use hurrying you? 

Voice: No, it isn't, my young tippler. I'm coming! coming!! 
coming ! ! ! 

From this illustration the student may proceed to try the second 
voice. 

No. II. 

Voice No. 2.— This is the more easy to be acquired. It is the 
voice by which all ventriloquists make a supposed person speak 
from a long distance, or from, or through the ceiling. In the 
first place, with your back to the audience, direct their attention to 
the ceiling by pointing to it or by looking intently at it. Call loudly, 
and ask some question, as though you believed some person to 
be concealed there. Make your own voice very distinct, and as 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 3G9 

near the lips as possible, inasmuch as that will help the illusion. 
Then in exactly the same tone and pitch answer ; but, in order that the 
same voice may seem to proceed from the point indicated, the words must 
be formed at tile back part of the roof of the mouth. To do this the lower 
jaw must be drawn back and held there, the mouth open, which 
will cause the palate to be elevated and drawn nearer to the pharynx, 
and the sound will be reflected in that cavity, and appear to come 
from the roof. Too much attention cannot be paid to the man- 
ner in which the breath is used in this voice. When speaking to 
the supposed person, expel the words with a deep, quick breath. 
When answering in the imitative manner, the breath must be 
held back and expelled very slowly, and the voice will come in a 
subdued and muffled manner, little above a whisper, but so as to be 
well distinguished. To cause the supposed voice to come nearer 
by degrees, call loudly and say, "I want you down here," or 
words to that effect. At the same time make a motion downwards with 
your hand. Hold some conversation with the yoice and cause it 
to say, " I am coming," or, "Here I am," each time indicating the 
descent with the hand (see examples). When the voice is supposed to 
approach nearer, the sound must alter, to denote the progress of 
the movement. Therefore, let the voice at every supposed step, 
roll, as it were, by degrees, from the pharynx more into the cavity of the 
mouth, and at each supposed step, contracting the opening of the mouth, 
until the lips are drawn up as if you were whistling. By so doing 
the cavity of the mouth will be very much enlarged. This will 
cause the voice to be obscured, and so appear to come nearer by de- 
grees. At the same time, care must be taken not to articulate the 
consonant sounds plainly, as that would cause the disarrangement 
of the lips and cavity of the mouth ; and in all imitation voices the 
consonants must scarcely be articulated at all, especially if the ven- 
triloquist faces the audience. For example : suppose the imitative 
voice is made to say, " Mind what you are doing, you bad boy," 
it must be spoken as if it were written, ' ' 'ind 'ot you're doing, 
you 'ad whoy."* This kind of articulation may be practised 
by forming the words in the pharynx, and then sending them 
out of the mouth by sudden expulsions of the breath clean 
from the lungs at every word. This is most useful in ventrilo- 
quism, and to illustrate it we will take the man on the roof as an 
illustration. This is an example almost invariably successful, 
and is constantly used by skilled professors of the art. As we 
have before repeatedly intimated, the eyes and atenttion of the 
audience must be directed to the supposed spot from whence the 
illusive voice is supposed to proceed. 

*It is very rarely that a ventriloquist shows a full face to his audience : it is only 
done when he is at a great distance from them, and is pronouncing the labial sounds, 
in the manner given,, for any movement of the jaws would help to destroy the illusion. 



370 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

Student : Are you up there, Jem ? 
Voice : Hallo ! who's that? 
Student : It's I ! Are you nearly finished? 
Voice : Only three more slates to put on, master. 
Student : I want you here, Jem. 
Voice : I am coming directly. 
Student: "Which way, Jem? 

Voice : Over the roof and down the trap. (Voice is supposed 
to be moving as the student turns and points with his finger.) 
Student : Which way? 

Voice (nearer) : Through the trap and down the stairs. 
Student : How long shall you be? 
Voice : Only a few minutes. I am coming as fast as I can. 

The voice now approaches the door, and is taken up by the 
same tone, but produced as in the first voice. As another illus- 
tration, we will introduce the reader to 

The Invisible Sweep. — This is a striking example of the 
second voice. Let the student pretend to look up the chimney, 
and rehearse the following or some similar colloquy : — 

Student : Are you up there? 

Voice : Yes. Chimley want sweep? 

Student : Eeally, it is extraordinary. What are you doing? 

Voice : Looking for birds' nests. 

Student : Birds' nests ! There are none there. 

Voice : Dick says there be. 

Student : Come down ! 
. Voice : I shan't. 

Student (stirring (he fire) : I'll make you show yourself. 

Voice : I say, don't ; it's so hot. 

Student : Come down, then. 

Voice : Don't be so stupid. Let I alone. 

Student : Will you come down? 

Voice : Yes, I will. 

Student : What's your name? 

Voice (much nearer) : Sam Lillyvite. I say, what do you want 
me for, among company? 

Student : To show yourself. 

Voice (nearer) : What for? 

Student : To let these ladies and gentlemen see that there are 
many strange things between heaven and earth, but not Sam 
Lillyvite, the sweep. 

Another good illustration is to hold a conversation with a 
friend who lives on the first floor, and with whom you can con- 
verse on any subject — as the retired and mysterious student — but the 
moment the student can master the elementary sounds, he will 
not need our assistance in providing him with dialogues, which, 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 371 

however simple they may be to read, have an extraordinary effect 
when properly spoken. 



POLYPHONIC IMITATIONS. 

The Tormenting- Bee.— It is related that Mr. Love, when 
young, took great delight in imitating the buzzing of insects and 
the cries of animals ; indeed, it is difficult to decide whether he 
or Mr. Thurton most excelled in this particular species of mimetic 
illusion. In all imitations of insect noises, the bee should be 
heard to hum gently at first, so as in a private party, not likely to 
attract attention till the right pitch is obtained, and be it remem- 
bered that the sound, without being particularly loud, can bo 
made to penetrate every corner of a large room. The illusion is 
greatly increased by pretending to catch the offending and intru- 
sive insect. The bumble bee, the wasp, and the bluebottle fly are 
best to imitate, and afford an agreeable relief to the other exer- 
cises of ventriloquial power. To imitate the tormenting bee, the 
student must use considerable pressure on his chest, as if he was 
about to groan suddenly, but instead of which, the sound must be 
confined and prolonged in the throat; the greater the pressure, 
the higher will be the faint note produced, and which will per- 
fectly resemble the buzzing of the bee or wasp. 

Now, to imitate the buzzing of a bluebottle fly, it will be neces- 
sary for the sound to be made with the lips instead of the throat ; 
this is done by closing the lips very tight, except at one corner, 
where a small aperture is left, fill that cheek full of wind, but not 
the other, then slowly blow or force the wind contained in the 
cheek out of the aperture ; if this is done properly, it will cause a 
sound exactly like the buzzing of a bluebottle fly. These two in- 
stances will show how necessary it is for the ventriloquist to 
study minutely the different effects of sound upon his hearers in 
all his exploits. And to make the above properly effective, he 
should turn his face to a wall ; with a handkerchief strike at the 
pretended bee or fly, at the same time pretend to follow his victim 
first this way and then that, and finally to "dab" his pocket- 
handkerchief on the wall as though he had killed it ; the sounds 
should be at times suddenly louder and then softer, which will 
make it appear as it is heard in different parts of the room. 

The Spectre Carpenter. — The noise caused by planing and 
sawing wood can also be imitated without much difficulty, and it 
causes a great deal of amusement. The student must, however, 
bear in mind that every action must be imitated as well as the 
noise, for the eye assists to delude the ear. We have even seen j 



372 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

ventriloquists carry this eye-deception so far as to have a few 
shavings to scatter as they proceed, and a piece of wood to fall 
when the sawing is ended. To imitate planing, the student must 
stand at a table a little distance from the audience, and appear to 
take hold of a plane and push it forward ; the sound as of a 
plane is made as though you were dwelling on the last part of the 
word husft — dwell upon the sh a little, as tsh, and then clip it 
short by causing the tongue to close with the palate, then over 
again. Letters will not convey the peculiar sound of sawing — it 
must be studied from nature. 



A MOUNTAIN ECHO. 

Some persons imagine ventriloquism to be an echo ; but, as we 
have said, an echo only repeats what has been said before — it 
could not answer a question. 

An echo is reflected sound, and the reflecting body must be at 
such a distance that the interval between the perception of the 
original and reflected sounds may be sufficient to prevent them 
from being blended together. No reflecting surface will produce 
a distant echo, unless its distance from the spot where the sound 
proceeds is at least 56 1 feet, because the shortest interval sufficient 
to render sounds distinctly appx*eciable by the ear is about one- 
tenth of a second ; therefore, if sounds follow at a shorter inter- 
val, they will form a resonance instead of an echo ; and the time 
a sound would take to go and return from a reflecting surface, 56J 
feet distance, would be one-tenth of a second. 

It would, therefore, be impossible for a ventriloquist to produce 
an echo in a room of ordinary size, as the walls, being so near, 
would cause the sounds to be blended, and would only produce 
one impression on the ear ; and yet the skilled ventriloquist can 
with ease imitate, in a room, a mountain echo. We will give the 
instructions, as it is very amusing. 

Turn your back to the listeners; whistle loud several short, 
quick notes, just as if you were whistling for a dog ; then, as 
quick as possible, after the last note, and as softly and subdued as 
possible to be heard, whistle about a third the number of notes, 
but it must be in the same note ■ or pitch; this will cause the last 
whistle to appear just like an echo at a great distance. This im- 
itation, if well done, never fails to take the listeners by surprise, 
and causes astonishment. The same thing can be done by shout- 
ing. Call aloud any sentence, such as— -" Holloa, you there!" 
Let your voice be formed close to the lips; then quickly, an4 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 373 

mind in the same pitch or note, speak the same words very subdued 
and formed at the back of the mouth. This is not difficult, and is 
very effective. 



POINTS TO BE REMEMBEKED. 

In giving the succeeding instructions, it must be borne in mind 
that the power and acuteness of hearing is possessed in a greater 
or less degree by different individuals, and depends upon the sen- 
sibility of the auric nerves. It will not be out of place nor unin- 
teresting to show the effect of sound and the manner in which it 
is heard by the organs of the ear. It is said that the human ear is 
capable of appreciating as many as twenty-four thousand vibra- 
tions in a second, and that the whole range of human hearing, 
from the lowest note of the organ to the highest known cry of in- 
sects, as of the cricket, includes nine octaves. 

Sound first strikes the drum or tympanum, a thin membrane 
which closes the aperture of the ear ; when this drum vibrates by 
the sonorous undulations of the external air ; the vibrations are 
communicated by minute bones, muscles and fluid in the cavity 
of the ear, and are then conveyed to the brain ; and to show how 
absolutely necessary it is that all the organs of the would-be ven- 
triloquist should be entire and without fault to succeed well, we 
will show how the ventriloquist makes that nice distinction of the 
gradation of sound and by which he is enabled to judge whether he 
is causing his voice, to appear at the proper distance from his aud- 
ience or not. 

Let any one firmly close both ears by stopping them, then speak 
a few words ; now, as the ears are stopped, the sound cannot 
enter immediately to the drum of the ear, but it takes cognizance 
of the sound by a passage called the eustachian tube, which ex- 
tends from the back part of the mouth to the cavity immediately 
behind the drum of the ear. 

The sound vibrations made in the mouth are transmitted along 
this tube to the interior part of the organs of hearing. Now it is 
by a nice judgment of sound by this tube that the profession- 
al ventriloquist judges the majority of his voices, especially those 
greatly obscured or muffled. Not only must the auric nerves 
of the would-be ventriloquist be perfect, but he will become mon 
proficient as he is able to study and understand the human voice. 
There is the language of emotion, or natural language. When 
we say natural, we mean the language by which the feelings mani- 
fest themselves without previous teaching, and which is recogniz- 
ed and felt without teaching. Some of them are the scream of 



374 THE AMERICAN VENTRILOQUIST: OR, 

terror, the shout of joy, the laugh of satisfaction, laugh 01 sarcasm, 
ridicule, etc., which are made by man, and understood by fellow- 
men, whatever may be the speech or country of the other. 

There are also distinct qualities of voice, peculiar to each per- 
son, both in tone and quality, and the best practice is to try and 
imitate three or four peoples' voices, and let them be of a different 
tone and pitch. 

The ordinary compass of the voice is about twelve notes, and a 
very good practice to the attainment of the art is to call aloud in 
a certain note, and then in the octave to that note ; do this several times 
a day, changing the note, also speak a sentence all in the same 
note or pitch, properly called intonation, loud at first, and then by 
degrees lower ; this kind of practice will enable the ear to judge of 
the modulation required to make a voice appear to recede or come 
near by degrees. 



CONCLUDING REMARKS. 

When the student is acquainted with the voices before describ- 
ed, he may imitate many others by contraction and expansion of the 
glottis, and by modification of the cavity of the pharynx and moidh. The 
best way to practice is in a room by himself, to talk loud, and, 
while so doing, to make all sorts of contortions with the muscles of the 
mouth and )aws— first fixing the jaws in the manner already described, 
then drawing the lips inward, next putting them forward, at the same time 
putting the tongue in different shapes and positions in the moulh ; also by 
speaking in the natural voice, and answering in the falsetto pitch, 
which is the imitating voice for women and children. 

We are confident that enough has been said to enable any one 
with a good range of voice to attain proficiency in the art ; the 
student always remembering (and it cannot be too often repeated) 
that to render a voice perspective, the most essential thing is to attend to 
the study of sound as it falls upon the ear ; then imitate that sound by 
the different contractions and expansions of the muscles of the throat, 
mouth, face and jaws. During these various contractions and ex- 
pansions, draw in a long breath and talk, first rapidly, then slowly, 
but always with a slow expiration of breath. Do this a dozen 
times consecutively for several days, at the same time taking par- 
ticular care to elevate ana depress the roof of the mouth, especially the 
back part, as this movement will cause the voice to appear near, 
or at a distance. Ample directions have been given how all this is 
done, but let it be understood that it is most essential. The stu- 
dent may then practice before a friend, and he will be astonished 
to find that he can deceive any listener, as to the point from which 



VENTRIL Q UISM MADE EASY. 375 

the sound comes ; and will be gratified that he has become the 
source of great amusement to himself as well as in the circle in 
which he moves. 

Thus we have acquired a working power in the art which, we 
trust, we have now explained to the satisfaction of the reader. 
The progress of the student will, of course, be facilitated by an 
inherent propensity of mimicry, which often approaches some of 
the minor attainments of ventriloquism. In every company some 
person may be found who, without any professional instruction, 
can give admirable imitations, of the voice, gait and peculiarities 
of a friend or acquaintance ; thus proving that Nature, to some 
extent, supplies the basis upon which, if we may use the phrase, 
the complete superstructure of vocal illusion may be raised. The 
possession of this quality would amount, comparatively, to little 
without instruction and perseverance. Here, as in other respects, 
practice makes perfect; and more than that, a diligent appliance 
of our rules will invest the originally defective amateur with an 
attainment which the ignorant will attribute to the possession of a 
supernatural gift. 



THE MAGIC WHISTLE. 

It will be pleasant when the wind is howling without, among 
the snow-laden limbs of the trees, to be reminded of the gay sum- 
mer by the counterfeit notes of the woodland songsters ; or, wan- 
dering among the woods and fields in spring or summer time, 
how glorious to challenge the feathered musicians to a contest of 
skill with you in their own sweet language. We propose to in- 
struct the reader in the manufacture of a little instrument by 
which the notes of birds, voices of animals and various peculiar 
sounds may be imitated. 

First, look at the annexed diagram, and then procure a leek and 
cut off from the green leaf thereof a piece about the size of the 
diagram ; then lay it on a smooth table, and with the thumb-nail 
delicately scrape away a small semi-circular patch of the green 
pulpy substance of the leaf [as represented in the diagram], being 
careful to leave the fine membrane or outer skin of the leaf un- ) 
injured — and there is the instrument complete. It may require 
several experiments to make the first one, but once having discov- 
ered the right way, they are very easily manufactured. The 
reader may not be aware of the fact that the leaf of the leek has a 
fine, transparent outer skin, which is quite tough, but by breaking 
and carefully examining one or two leaves, he will soon find out 
what we allude to. 



376 THE AMERICAN VENTRIL Q UIST. 

The way of using this instrument is to place it in the roof of the 
mouth with the side on which is the membrane downwards ; then 
place it gently in its place with the tongue, and blow between the 
tongue and the upper teeth. After the first two or three attempts, 
you will be able to produce a slight sound like a mild grunt ; then 
as you practice it you will find you can prolong and vary the 
sound somewhat, so that in the course of a couple of days you can 



"■ 



f: 



imitate the barking of a dog and the neighing of a horse. With 
two or three weeks' practice, you will be able to imitate some of 
the song birds ; but to produce exact counterfeits of the best sing- 
ing birds will probably require months of study ; the result, how- 
ever, will reward you for all your pains, for certainly to be able to 
carry a mocking bird, canary, thrush, cat-bird and sucking-pig in 
your vest pocket, is no small accomplishment. 

When not using the instrument, it should be kept in a glass of 
water to prevent its drying. 



3^77-3 



